bumgardner project 1845 issue for permit review 9/8/15 ... olympia commons... · bumgardner project...

Olympia Commons Bumgardner Project 1845

Issue for Permit Review 9/8/15

Project Manual A. Materials, Finishes, Colors B. Spec Sections 00 thru 33 C. Appendix

Bumgardner Architects Olympia Commons – 318 State Project 1845.00 Permit Review – September 8, 2015

Olympia Commons – 318 State

Project Manual Permit Review Issue – September 8, 2015 Purpose of Documents The purpose of this issue is provide adequate documentation for permit review. 1. Project Manual – Volume 1

Section A: Materials, Finishes and Colors (MFC) Schedules Section B: Specifications

Divisions 00 thru 33 Section C: Appendix

Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard AIA Document A101-2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and

Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum. AIA Document A201-2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. AIA Document A312-2010 Performance Bond. AIA Document G702 and G703 Pay Application Forms. AIA Document G704 – 2000 Certificate of Substantial Completion. AIA Document G705 List of Subcontractors.

2. Drawings (Bound Separately)

See Specification section 00 0115 List of Drawing Sheets.

Olympia Commons – 318 State Materials, Finishes and Colors A. EXTERIOR 9-8-15

Spec Section Location/ Description

Material Manufacturer Suggested Distributor

Finish/Color

A - Exterior MFC 09-18-15 1 of 3

03 3000 Cast-in-Place Concrete

All exposed exterior concrete areas (except slabs, stairs and curbs) and returns, where noted or specified.

ArchitecturalConcrete

Tnemec Tnemec Scott McConnell (206) 660-8257

Conformal stainColor: Seattle Gray 9 part clear: 1 part stain

05 1200 Structural Steel

Steel canopy elements at street front.

Structural Steelshop welded with field bolted connections.

- - Powder-coated: SW 7069 Color: Iron Ore

05 5700 Decorative Metal

Screen/Gate at Stair 2

Steel - - Powder coated:Color as selected by Architect.

05 5700 Decorative Metal

Sunshades at residential windows.

Aluminum - - Powder coated:Color as selected by Architect.

07 4113 Metal Roof Panels

Exposed metal decking at Metal Cover above unit patio and utility doors.

Metal roofing - - Prefinished. SW 7069 Color: Iron Ore

07 4643 Composition Panel Siding

Exterior elevations Wood composite siding

Parklex or as approved by Architect

See Parklex.com Gold

07 4646 Fiber Cement Panel Siding

Exterior elevations Hardie Panel with reveals and trims. Panels: 5/16” thick, pre-primed

James Hardie - Field painted:Color A ICI 686 Ashton Grey Color B Fuller 1C22-4 Soft White Color C ICI 531 Caesar’s Gold

07 4646 Fiber Cement Panel Siding

Exterior elevations with fiber cement panel siding.

Aluminum,Pre-primed

Xtreme Trim - Field paint to match adjacent siding.

07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Parapet coping Galvanized steel sheet metal

- - Prefinished paint to match adjacent siding.




Finish/Color


07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

Fiber Cement Panel Siding: Window head/continuous cross wall flashing downspouts, and other misc flashings

Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

- - Field paint to match adjacent surface painted surface.

07 9200 Joint Sealants

At Aluminum storefronts and windows

Joint Sealants Dow Corning 790 - Color selected by Architect.


At Composition Panels



At Fiber Cement Panels


08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

Exterior Utility Room Doors & Frames

Hollow Metal - - Painted: Semi-gloss finish Color C ICI 531 Caesar’s Gold

08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames

All Other Stair Doors & Frames

Hollow Metal - - Painted: Semi-gloss finish Color as selected by Architect.

08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors

Trash/Recycle Aluminum - - Powder coated: color to match storefront system

08 3613 Sectional Doors

Amenity Sectional Overhead Doors

- - Powder coated: Match storefront, Clear Glass

08 4313 Storefront

Aluminum storefronts, windows and entrances

Aluminum and glass

Kawneer 451T - Black

08 4313 Storefront

Metal panels within storefront system

Aluminum Kawneer - Match storefront system

08 5313 Fiberglass Doors

Units Swing doors: fiberglass rail style w/ glass panels

Cascadia 302 Series

- Color: Match vinyl window frame.

08 5313 Vinyl Windows

Units Vinyl frame VPI Endurance Series

- Color: white




Finish/Color


08 9100 Louvers

Louvers in Storefront

Aluminum Louvers and vents

- Match storefront system

END OF SCHEDULE

Bumgardner Architects Olympia Commons – 318 State Project 1845.00

Permit Review – September 8, 2015

SPECIFICATIONS – TABLE OF CONTENTS Division / Section Title Comments

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 1

Division 00 Procurement and Contracting Requirements00 0101 Project Title Page 00 0110 Table of Contents 00 0115 List of Drawing Sheets00 2113 Instructions to Bidders00 3124.26 Letter from Department of Ecology00 3132.13 Geotechnical Data 00 4000 Procurement Forms and Supplements00 7200 General Conditions 00 7300 Owner Guidance on Funding Requirements00 7305 State Housing Trust Fund Requirements 201.5 State Prevailing Wage 201.6 Use of the Apprenticeship Program 201.8 Evergreen Sustainable Design Standard (ESDS) 403.3 Construction Review & Inspection 403.3.1 Pre-Construction Review 403.3.2 Construction Review00 7305.1 Statement of Apprentice/Journeyman Participation00 7346 State Prevailing Wage Rates – Thurston County00 7346.1 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage00 7346.2 Affidavit of Wages Paid00 7400 Special Conditions 00 8000 Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime

Bidder/Subcontractor Division 01 General Requirements01 1000 Summary of the Work01 2500 Substitution Procedures01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures01 2900 Payment Procedures01 3100 Project Management and Coordination01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation01 3233 Photographic Documentation01 3300 Submittal Procedures01 4000 Quality Requirements01 4010 Air Barrier System 01 4100 Codes, Definitions and Standards01 4200 References 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls01 6000 Product Requirements01 7123 Field Engineering 01 7300 Execution 01 7329 Cutting and Patching01 7400 Cleaning 01 7419 Construction Waste Management and Disposal01 7500 Starting and Adjusting01 7700 Closeout Procedures





01 7800 Closeout Submittals 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data01 7839 Project Record Documents01 8100 Jobsite Indoor Air Quality Management01 8113 Sustainable Design Requirements01 9113 General Commissioning RequirementsDivision 02 Existing Conditions 02 4116 Structure DemolitionDivision 03 Concrete 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete03 5413 Gypsum Cement UnderlaymentDivision 04 Masonry No work in this division. Division 05 Metals 05 1200 Structural Steel 05 5000 Metal Fabrications 05 5100 Metal Stairs 05 5700 Decorative Metal Division 06 Wood, Plastics, and Composites06 1000 Rough Carpentry 06 1653 Moisture-Resistant Sheathing BoardDivision 07 Thermal and Moisture Protection07 1700 Bentonite Waterproofing07 2100 Thermal Insulation 07 2505 Building Wrap Weather Barriers07 4643 Composition Panel Siding07 4646 Fiber Cement Panel Siding and Trim07 5216 SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim07 7200 Roof Accessories 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping07 9200 Joint Sealants Division 08 Openings 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames08 1416 Flush Wood Doors 08 3110 Access Doors and Frames08 3323 Overhead Coiling Doors08 3613 Sectional Doors 08 4313 Aluminum-Framed Storefronts08 5313 Vinyl and Fiberglass Windows and Doors08 7100 Door Hardware 08 8000 Glazing Division 09 Finishes 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing09 2900 Gypsum Board 09 8000 Acoustical Treatment





Division 10 Specialties 10 1400 Signage 10 4400 Fire Protection SpecialtiesDivision 11 Equipment No work in this division.Division 12 Furnishings 12 9300 Site Furnishings Division 14 Conveying Equipment14 2100 Electric Traction ElevatorsDivision 21 Fire Suppression 21 0000 Fire Sprinkler NarrativeDivision 22 Plumbing 22 0000 Plumbing Narrative 22 0000 Plumbing Fixtures Division 23 HVAC 23 0000 HVAC Narrative 23 0548 Vibration Control of HVAC Piping and EquipmentDivision 26 Electrical 26 0000 Electrical Narrative Division 27` Communications No work in this division.Division 28 Electronic Safety and Security No work in this division.Division 31 Earthwork 31 1000 Site Clearing 31 2000 Earthwork Division 32 Exterior Improvements32 1200 Hot-Mix Asphalt Paving32 1600 Concrete Pavement, Curbs and Sidewalks32 8400 Irrigation 32 9300 Plants Division 33 Utilities 33 1000 Water Utilities 33 3000 Sanitary Sewerage Utilities33 4000 Storm Drainage Utilities





END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

Bumgardner Architects Olympia Commons Project 1845.00

Permit Review – September 8, 2015Section 00 0115 - LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS

Discipline Sheet DescriptionArchitectural: GeneralCover Sheet A0-1.0 Index, Project Info. 10/6/15Cover Sheet A0-1.1 General Notes 10/6/15Code Summary A0-2.1 Land Use 10/6/15Code Summary A0-3.1 Building Code 10/6/15Code Summary A0-3.2 Building Code - Exiting Diagrams 10/6/15Code Summary A0-3.3 Accessibility Requirements 10/6/15Code Summary A0-4.1 Energy Calculations 10/6/15Code Summary A0-4.2 Energy Calculations 10/6/15

Assemblies A0-5.1Interior Thermal and Non-Thermal Wall Types

10/6/15

Assemblies A0-5.2Exterior Wall, Roof, Floor & Ceiling Types

10/6/15

Doors A0-6.1 Door Types & Typical Details 10/6/15Doors A0-6.2 Overhead Door Details 10/6/15

Architectural: 1/8" Bldg Plans

1/8" Building Plans A2-1 L1 & Site Plan 10/6/151/8" Building Plans A2-2 L2 Plan 10/6/151/8" Building Plans A2-3 L3 Plan 10/6/151/8" Building Plans A2-4 L4 Plan 10/6/151/8" Building Plans A2-5 Roof Plan/High Roof 10/6/15Architectural: Exterior Elevations and Sections1/8" Elevations A3-1 Exterior Elevations - South & East 10/6/151/8" Elevations A3-2 Exterior Elevations - North & West 10/6/15Architectural: Vertical Circulation & Shafts1/8" Sections A3-3 Building Sections 10/6/15Architectural: Bldg DetailsBuilding Details A4-1.1 Exterior Details 10/6/15Building Details A4-1.2 Exterior Details 10/6/15Building Details A4-1.3 Exterior Details 10/6/15Building Details A4-3.1 Metal, Glass Canopy 10/6/15Building Details A4-3.2 Storefront Schedule 10/6/15Building Details A4-3.3 Storefront Details 10/6/15Building Details A4-4 Interior Details 10/6/15Building Details A4-6 Window Details 10/6/15Building Details A4-7 Window Schedule 10/6/15

Permit Review

Date

LIST OF DRAWING SHEETS00 0115 - 1



Discipline Sheet Description

Permit Review

Date

Architectural: 1/4" Unit Plans

1/4" Unit Plans A5-1.1 L1 N 10/6/151/4" Unit Plans A5-2.1 L2 N 10/6/151/4" Unit Plans A5-2.2 L2 S 10/6/15Architectural: Vertical Circulation & Shafts

10/6/15

Vertical Circulation & Shafts A7-0 Notes & Typical Details 10/6/15 Vertical Circulation & Shafts A7-1 St-#1 & Elevator 10/6/15Vertical Circulation & Shafts A7-2 ST-#2 10/6/15Architectural: RCPArch. Elec. / RCP Plans AE-1 L1 Amenity & Unity Plan 10/6/15Arch. Elec. / RCP Plans AE-2 L2 Unit Plan 10/6/15

Architectural: Equipment Plans

1/4" Equipment Plans AEQ-1 L1 Bike Layouts, Waste Recycle 10/6/15





Permit Review

DateStructural

S1.1 General Structural Notes 10/6/15S1.2 General Structural Notes, Cont. 10/6/15S2.1 First Floor Foundation Plan 10/6/15S2.2 Second Floor Framing Plan 10/6/15S2.2a Second Floor Framing Plan 10/6/15S2.3 Third Floor Framing Plan 10/6/15S2.4 Fourth Floor Framing Plan 10/6/15S2.5 Roof Framing Plan 10/6/15 S3.1 Concrete Section and Details 10/6/15 S3.2 Concrete Section and Details 10/6/15 S4.1 Wood Framing Section and Details 10/6/15 S4.2 Wood Framing Section and Details 10/6/15S4.3 Wood Framing Section and Details 10/6/15 S4.4 Wood Framing Section and Details 10/6/15 S4.5 Wood Framing Section and Details 10/6/15 S6.1 Steel Framing Section and Details 10/6/15

MechanicalM0-0 HVAC Title Sheet 10/6/15M0-01 WSEC Compliance Forms 10/6/15M0-02 WSEC Compliance Forms 10/6/15M0-03 HVAC Site Plan 10/6/15M0-1 HVAC Schedules 10/6/15M0-2 HVAC Calculations 10/6/15M2-1 L1 HVAC Plan 10/6/15M2-2 L2-L4 HVAC Plan 10/6/15M2-5 Roof HVAC Plan 10/6/15M3-1 HVAC Elevations - South & East 10/6/15M3-2 HVAC Elevations - North & West 10/6/15M5-1 HVAC Details 10/6/15





Permit Review

DatePlumbing

P0.0 Legend and Notes 9/8/15P2.1 Foundation Plan 9/8/15P3.1 L1 Floor Plan 9/8/15P3.2 L2 Floor Plan 9/8/15P3.3 L3 Floor Plan 9/8/15P3.4 L4 Floor Plan 9/8/15P3.5 Details 9/8/15

P4.1Enlarged Partial Plans - Units A1-a & A1-b

9/8/15

P4.2 Enlarged Partial Plans - Units A2 & A3 9/8/15

P4.3Enlarged Partial Plans - Units B1-a & B1-b

9/8/15

P4.4Enlarged Partial Plans - Units C1-a & C1-b

9/8/15

Survey1 of 1 Survey No date

CivilC1.0 Civil Coversheet June 2015C2.0 Demolition & Erosion Control Plan June 2015C2.1 TESC Notes & Details June 2015C3.0 Grading & Drainage Plan June 2015C3.1 Site Details June 2015C3.2 Drainage Details June 2015C4.0 Site Utilities Plan June 2015C4.1 Water Details June 2015C4.2 Sewer Details June 2015

LandscapeL-1 Planting Plan 9/10/15 L-2 Plant Schedule & Notes 9/10/15 L2.1 Irrigation Plan 9/8/15 L2.2 Irrigation Details 9/8/15 L-3 Landscape Details 10/6/15



INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 00 2113 - 1

SECTION 00 2113 – INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. To be entitled to consideration proposals shall be made in accordance with these instruc-

tions. 1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Bidding Documents include the Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders and any supple-

mental instructions, Form of Proposal, and the Contract Documents including any Ad-denda issued prior to receipt of Bids.

B. The Contract Documents proposed for the Work consist of the Owner-Contract Agree-

ment, the Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary, and other Conditions), the Drawings, the Specifications, and all Addenda issued prior to and all Modifications issued after execution of the Contract.

C. Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of

the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by addition, deletions, clari-fications, or corrections.

D. A Bid is a complete and properly signed proposal to do the Work or designated portion

thereof for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Docu-ments.

E. The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work

described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which work may be added or from which work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids.

F. An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted

from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted.

G. A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid. H. A Sub-Bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to the Bidder for materials or labor for

a portion of the work. I. A Unit Price is an amount per unit of measurement for materials, service, equipment, or a

unit of work as described in the bidding documents.



1.3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS AND ADDENDA

A. Bidder shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner

nor the Architect assumes any responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents.

B. The Owner or the Architect in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above

terms do so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and do not confer a license or grant for any other use.

C. Addenda will be made available to the general contractors. Addenda will be issued no

later than four days before the bid date unless issued for postponement or cancellation of bidding. Bidders shall acknowledge receipt of addenda on bid form.

1.4 EXECUTION OF CONTRACT

A. The successful bidder will be required to execute the Contract using AIA Document A101–

2007, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a stipulated sum.

1.5 PROPOSAL SUMS

A. The sum of money shown on the proposal covering all work included in Base Bid Contract

Documents, together with any Addenda thereto and/or for any unit prices called for, or any alternates called for, shall include all items of labor, material, equipment, overhead and compensation to complete all of the Work under each particular heading. The bid price shall NOT include Washington State Sales Tax.

1.6 TAXES A. The contract sum and any agreed variations thereof shall include all taxes imposed by law,

except only Washington State Sales Tax. Sales tax will be collected from the Owner and paid to the State by the Contractor in conformance with the law. Contractor shall furnish proof of payment of all taxes required by law.

1.7 PERMITS

A. Master Use Permit, Building Permit, and permanent street use permits will be procured and paid for by the Owner.

Mechanical, electrical, and street use permits necessary only during construction shall be

procured and paid for by the Contractor as part of the associated prime contract.



1.8 PERFORMANCE BOND AND LABOR AND MATERIAL PAYMENT BONDS A. Prior to execution of the Contract, the Owner shall retain the right to require the Bidder to

furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and the Payment of all ob-ligations arising thereunder in such forenamed amount as the Owner may prescribe. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder's usual sources.

The cost of such bonds shall NOT be included in the Bid. If bonds are required, the cost

of the bonds will be added to the Contract amount. The bonds shall be written on AIA Document A-311, Performance Bond.

1.9 BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS A. Each Bidder by making a Bid represents that:

1. They have read and understand the Bidding Documents and their Bid is made in ac-cordance therewith. They have carefully examined all the drawings and specifica-tions and their Bid has been coordinated between the General Contractor and all Subcontractors for responsibilities of work as required to include all materials and construction for a complete project at no additional cost to the Owner regardless of where the work is shown on the documents.

2. They have visited the site, have familiarized themselves with the local conditions un-der which the Work is to be performed and have correlated their observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents.

3. Their Bid is based upon the materials, systems, and equipment required by the Bid-ding Documents without exception.

4. Their Bid includes all necessary permits as required by the local building authorities unless specifically omitted in the contract documents.

5. Their Bid is based on design/build Electrical and Mechanical and sprinkler work and includes all costs and coordination as required for a complete and operable system without additional cost to the Owner.

1.10 SUBSTITUTIONS A. The materials, products, and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a

standard of required function, dimensions, appearance, color and quality to be met by any proposed substitution.

B. No substitution will be considered unless written request for approval and complete infor-

mation for the substitution has been received and approved by the Architect in a written Addendum.



C. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitute is upon a proposer. The Archi-tect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final.

1.11 INTERPRETATION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Bidders and Sub-Bidders shall study and compare all of the documents and promptly notify the Architect of any ambiguity, inconsistency, or error which they may discover upon exami-nation of the Bidding Documents or of the site and local conditions. Clarifications or inter-pretations shall be requested in writing at least seven days prior to the bid.

B. Any interpretation, or change, or correction of the Bidding Documents will be made only by

written Addendum prior to the Bid date.

1.12 COMPLETION AND SUBMISSION OF PROPOSAL FORMS

A. Bids shall be submitted on forms identical to the form included with the Bidding Documents and all blanks on the Bid shall be filled in by typewriter or manually in ink.

B. Where so indicated by the makeup of the Bid form, sums shall be expressed in both words

and figures, and in case of discrepancy between the two, the amount written in words shall govern.

C. Alterations and erasures are discouraged but if used they must be initialed by the signer of

the bid. D. All alternatives shall be bid or noted as "No Change".

1.13 PROHIBITION OF ALTERATIONS

A. Except as otherwise provided herein, proposals which are incomplete, or which are condi-tioned in any way, or which contain erasure, alterations, or items not called for in the pro-posal, or which are not in conformity to the law, may be rejected as informal.

1.14 MODIFICATIONS OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID

A. Any Bid may be modified, canceled or withdrawn at any time prior to the receipt of bids or authorized postponement. Notification must be in writing or by telegram to the Owner at the same designated location for receipt of bids. Bids may be resubmitted prior to the des-ignated date and time.



1.15 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

A. The opening of bids shall be public. B. The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids and to reject a bid not accompa-

nied by data required by the Bidding Documents, or to reject a Bid which is in any way in-complete or irregular.

C. The Owner shall have the right to waive any informality or irregularity in any Bid or Bids

received and to accept the Bid or Bids, which, in the Owner's judgment, is in the Owner's own best interests.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 00 2113

STATE OF WASHINGTON

DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY PO Box 47775 Olympia, Washington 98504-7775 (360) 407-6300

711 for Washington Relay Service Persons with a speech disability can call 877-833-6341

August 14, 2015 Catherine McCoy, Associate Planner City of Olympia Community Planning and Development PO Box 1967 Olympia, WA 98501-1967 Dear Ms. McCoy: Thank you for the opportunity to comment on the prethreshold consultation for the Olympia Commons Project (File No. 15-0100) located at 318 State Avenue Northeast as proposed by Whitney Rearick, Low Income Housing Institute (LIHI). The Department of Ecology (Ecology) reviewed the environmental checklist and has the following comment(s):

TOXICS CLEANUP: Thomas Middleton (360) 407-7263 The facility addressed in this proposal is a suspected contaminated site that is listed on Ecology’s Confirmed and Suspected Contaminated Sites List. Hazardous substances may be present at the site in amounts and/or concentrations likely to affect human health or the environment. Site cleanup may be required in the future by Ecology under the Model Toxics Control Act. If contamination is currently known or discovered during construction, testing of the potentially contaminated media must be conducted. If contamination of soil or groundwater is readily visible, or is revealed by testing, Ecology must be notified. Contact the Environmental Report Tracking System Coordinator in the Southwest Regional Office (SWRO) at (360) 407-6300. For assistance and information about subsequent cleanup and to identify the type of testing that will be required, contact Eugene Radcliff with the SWRO, Toxic Cleanup Program at (360) 407-7404. REVIEWER: Sonia Mendoza WATER QUALITY: Deborah Cornett (360) 407-7269 The following construction activities require coverage under the Construction Stormwater General Permit:

1. Clearing, grading and/or excavation that results in the disturbance of one or more acres and discharges stormwater to surface waters of the State; and

GuyP

Text Box

LETTER FROM DEPARTMENT OF ECOLOGY 00 3124.26

August 14, 2015 Page 2

2. Clearing, grading and/or excavation on sites smaller than one acre that are part of a larger common plan of development or sale, if the common plan of development or sale will ultimately disturb one acre or more and discharge stormwater to surface waters of the State. a) This includes forest practices (including, but not limited to, class IV conversions)

that are part of a construction activity that will result in the disturbance of one or more acres, and discharge to surface waters of the State; and

3. Any size construction activity discharging stormwater to waters of the State that Ecology: a) Determines to be a significant contributor of pollutants to waters of the State of

Washington. b) Reasonably expects to cause a violation of any water quality standard.

If there are known soil/ground water contaminants present on-site, additional information (including, but not limited to: temporary erosion and sediment control plans; stormwater pollution prevention plan; list of known contaminants with concentrations and depths found; a site map depicting the sample location(s); and additional studies/reports regarding contaminant(s)) will be required to be submitted. You may apply online or obtain an application from Ecology's website at: http://www.ecy.wa.gov/programs/wq/stormwater/construction/ - Application. Construction site operators must apply for a permit at least 60 days prior to discharging stormwater from construction activities and must submit it on or before the date of the first public notice.

Ecology’s comments are based upon information provided by the lead agency. As such, they may not constitute an exhaustive list of the various authorizations that must be obtained or legal requirements that must be fulfilled in order to carry out the proposed action. If you have any questions or would like to respond to these comments, please contact the appropriate reviewing staff listed above. Department of Ecology Southwest Regional Office (SM:15-3742) cc: Deborah Cornett, WQ

Josh Klimek, HQ/WQ Thomas Middleton, TCP Eugene Radcliff, TCP Whitney Rearick, LIHI (Applicant)

http://www.ecy.wa.gov/programs/wq/stormwater/construction/%23Application


GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 3132.13 - 1

SECTION 00 3132.13 – GEOTECHNICAL DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, general provisions of the Contract, and Division 01 Specification sections, apply

to this section.

1.2 WORK IN THIS SECTION

A. Geotechnical: Exploration of subsurface conditions of the site of this project has been

made by: 1. PanGEO Inc.

3213 Eastlake Avenue East, Suite B Seattle, WA 98102 Phone: (206) 262-0370 Contact: Siew Tab

Report Date: July 8, 2015. This report has been included following this section.

B. Asbestos: Testing, abatement or removal work has been performed (or will be performed)

by the Owner. Copies of this information shall be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor prior to start of Work.

C. Hazardous Materials: Testing, abatement and removal work has been performed (or will

be performed) by the Owner. Copies of this information shall be furnished by the Owner to the Contractor prior to the start of Work.

1.3 WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Site Clearing – Section 31 1000

B. Earthwork – Section 31 2000

C. Erosion and Sedimentation Controls – Section 31 2500

D. Storm Drainage – Section 33 4000


GEOTECHNICAL DATA 00 3132.13 - 2

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Codes, Definitions, and Standards: Section 01 4100. 1.5 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Site Information: Data on indicated subsurface conditions are not intended as

representations or warranties of accuracy or continuity between soil borings. It is expressly understood that Owner, or Architect, or their consultants will not be responsible for interpretations or conclusions drawn therefrom by Contractor. Data are made available for convenience of Contractor.

Additional test borings and other exploratory operations may be made by Contractor at no

cost to Owner. Any work must be authorized in advance by the Owner.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Applicable)

END OF SECTION 00 3132.13

Geotechnical & Earthquake Engineering Consultants

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PROPOSED OLYMPIA COMMONS

318 State Avenue Northeast Olympia, Washington

PROJECT NO. 15-135

July 2015

Prepared for:

LIHI Olympia

Geotechnical & Earthquake

Engineering Consultants July 8, 2015 PanGEO Project No. 15-135 Ms. Whitney Rearick LIHI Olympia 2407 First Avenue, Suite 200 Seattle, Washington 98121

Subject: Geotechnical Report Olympia Commons: 318 State Avenue Northeast, Olympia, Washington

Dear Ms. Rearick:

As requested, PanGEO, Inc. is pleased to present this geotechnical report to assist the project team with the design and construction of the proposed Olympia Commons low-income residential development located in Olympia, Washington.

In preparing this report, we observed and logged the excavation of seven test pits at the site and conducted our engineering analyses. In summary, the site is immediately underlain by fill and beach deposits. In our opinion, the site can be developed generally as planned. Building support may be provided using conventional spread and continuous footings bearing on competent existing fill or on structural fill after the overexcavation and replacement of the existing fill. Please refer to Section 4.1 of this report regarding selection of appropriate foundation system, and the potential risks associated with conventional footings.

We appreciate the opportunity to be of service. Should you have any questions, please do not hesitate to call.

Sincerely,

Siew L. Tan, P.E. Principal Geotechnical Engineer

________________________________________________ 3213 Eastlake Avenue East, Suite B

Seattle, WA 98102 T. (206) 262-0370 F. (206) 262-0374

TABLE OF CONTENTS Section Page

1.0 GENERAL .................................................................................................................1 2.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION .....................................................................1 3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION .............................................................................2

3.1 SITE GEOLOGY AND SOILS ..............................................................................2 3.2 PREVIOUS GRADING ........................................................................................2 3.3 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION ...........................................................................3 3.4 SOIL CONDITIONS............................................................................................3 3.4 GROUNDWATER ..............................................................................................4

4.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS ...........................................................5 4.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................5 4.2 SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS ........................................................................5 4.3 BUILDING FOUNDATIONS ................................................................................6

4.3.1 Lateral Resistance ...........................................................................7 4.3.2 Footing Subgrade Preparation .......................................................7

4.4 FLOORS SLABS ................................................................................................8 4.5 PERMANENT CUT AND FILL SLOPES ................................................................9

5.0 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS .......................................................................9 5.1 TEMPORARY EXCAVATIONS ............................................................................9 5.2 STRUCTURAL FILL AND COMPACTION .............................................................9 5.3 WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION .....................................................................10 5.4 EROSION CONSIDERATIONS .............................................................................10

6.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES .......................................................................................11 7.0 CLOSURE .................................................................................................................11 8.0 REFERENCES ...........................................................................................................13

ATTACHMENTS: Figure 1 Vicinity Map Figure 2 Site and Exploration Plan Appendix A Test Pit Logs Figure A-1 Terms and Symbols for Boring and Test Pit Logs Logs of Test Pits TP-1 through TP-7

15-135 LIHI Olympia Page 1 PanGEO, Inc.

GEOTECHNICAL REPORT PROPOSED OLYMPIA COMMONS 318 STATE AVENUE NORTHEAST

OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON

1.0 GENERAL

As requested, PanGEO, Inc. is pleased to present this report to assist the project team with the design and construction of the proposed Olympia Commons low-income multi-family residential development located at 318 South State Avenue in Olympia, Washington. This study was performed in general accordance with our mutually agreed scope of services outlined in our proposal dated May 21, 2015. Our scope of services included reviewing readily available geologic and geotechnical data, conducting a site reconnaissance, observing the excavation of seven test pits, and evaluating the feasibility of developing the site as planned.

2.0 SITE AND PROJECT DESCRIPTION

The subject site is located at 318 State Avenue South in Olympia, Washington, approximately as shown on Figure 1, Vicinity Map. The rectangular-shaped site is bordered to the north by a one story warehouse building, to the east by Adams Street, to the south by State Avenue, and to the west by an at grade asphalt paved parking lot. The proposed development area comprises 22,810 square feet. The layout of the site is shown on Figure 2, Site and Exploration Plan.

The site is currently undeveloped and is mostly surfaced with gravel with a sparse covering of grass. The site topography is relatively level, with less than two feet of elevation change across the length of the site. An overview of the general site conditions is shown on Plate 1, following page.

It is planned to develop the site with an at-grade, four story, 43-unit low-income housing development. The proposed building will be of relatively lightly loaded wood frame construction. The proposed building will be located in the south portion of the site, approximately as shown on Figure 2, attached. The north portion of the site will be improved with shared outdoor space.

We anticipate the proposed building will be constructed at or near existing site grades, with cuts and fills planned to achieve construction subgrade elevation of less than five feet.

15-135 LIHI Olympia Page 1 PanGEO, Inc.

Geotechnical Report Proposed Olympia Commons: 318 State Avenue Northeast, Olympia, Washington July 8, 2015

The conclusions and recommendations in this report are based on our understanding of the proposed development, which is in turn based on the project information provided. If the above project description is incorrect, or the project information changes, we should be consulted to review the recommendations contained in this study and make modifications, if needed. In any case PanGEO should be retained to provide a review of the final design to confirm that our geotechnical recommendations have been correctly interpreted and adequately implemented in the construction documents.

3.0 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION

3.1 SITE GEOLOGY AND SOILS

General geologic information for the project area was obtained based on review of the Geologic Maps of the Tumwater 7.5 Minute Quadrangle, Thurston County, Washington (Walsh 2003). Based on our review of the map, near-surface deposits in the vicinity of the site consist of Vashon recessional sand and minor silt (Geologic Map Unit Qgos) and fill (Qf). Vashon recessional sand and minor silt typically consists of a fine to medium sand with minor amounts of silt.

The fill geologic unit is described as consisting of clay, silt, sand and gravel contains shells, organic matter, and rip rap. The fill was placed to raise grades.

3.2 PREVIOUS GRADING

We understand that portions of the site were previously graded as part of an environmental remediation. The remediation included the excavation and removal of contaminated soil. The excavation was backfilled with quarry spalls and structural fill.

Plate 1: View from south to north providing overview the site conditions.

15-135 LIHI Olympia 2 PanGEO, Inc.


3.3 SUBSURFACE EXPLORATION

We observed and logged the excavation of seven test pits at the site on June 5, 2015. The test pits were excavated using a Kubota BX-161 mini-excavator owned and operated by Bill’s Backhoe Service and subcontracted to PanGEO. The field exploration program was overseen by an engineering geologist with our firm who logged and sampled the test pits. The test pits were excavated to a maximum depth of 10 feet below existing grade. The approximate test pit locations were located in the field by measuring from the site boundaries and are shown on Figure 2, Site and Exploration Plan.

Summary test pit logs included in Appendix A provide detailed descriptions of the materials encountered, depths to soil contacts, and depths of seepage or caving, if present. The relative in-situ density of cohesionless soils, or the relative consistency of fine-grained soils, was estimated from the excavating action of the excavator, and the stability of the test pit sidewalls. Where soil contacts were gradual or undulating, the average depth of the contact was recorded on the log.

The soils were logged in general accordance with ASTM D-2487 Standard Practice for Classification of Soils for Engineering Purposes and the system summarized on Figure A-1, Terms and Symbols for Boring and Test Pit Logs.

3.4 SOIL CONDITIONS

For a detailed description of the subsurface conditions encountered at each exploration location, please refer to our test pit logs provided in Appendix A. The stratigraphic contacts indicated on the test pit logs represent the approximate depth to boundaries between soil units. Actual transitions between soil units may be more gradual or occur at different elevations. The descriptions of groundwater conditions and depths are likewise approximate. The following is a generalized description of the soils encountered in the test pits.

Fill – Structural: At the locations of Test Pits TP-1, TP-2, TP-3 and TP-4, we encountered fill consisting of poorly graded medium to coarse sand with gravel and a trace amount of silt. Test Pit TP-1 was terminated in this soil unit at about 10 feet below existing grade. In Test Pits TP-2 through TP-4, the bottom of this soil unit ranged from 7 to 8½ feet deep. It appears this material is consistent with gravel borrow or pit run that was placed to backfill the environmental remediation excavation. Based on the resistance of our excavation equipment, the fill was dense to very dense and appears to have been placed and compacted



as a structural fill. The approximate lateral extend of the existing structural fill area is shown on Figure 2, Site and Exploration Plan.

Fill – Common: At the locations of Test Pits TP-5, TP-6, and TP-7 we encountered common or uncontrolled fill consisting of loose silty fine to medium sand with gravel. This unit extended from the ground surface to one to two feet below ground surface. The common fill was characterized by its loose consistency and the presence of organic debris, milled lumber, metal, and plastic. At the location of Test Pit TP-6, we encountered a buried concrete slab at about 1½ feet below grade. The approximate extent of the common fill, as indicated on Figure 2, was delineated based on our test pits, probing with a one-half inch diameter T-handle probe, and vegetation patterns. This unit is considered poor in quality and not suitable for supporting load-bearing elements.

Fill – Quarry Spalls: Underlying the existing structural fill in TP-2 through TP-4, we encountered fill consisting of two to four inch quarry spalls. This material was encountered in close contact with the groundwater level at the time of our exploration and is likely backfill from the environmental remediation that was placed below the groundwater table. This was the deepest unit encountered in TP-2 through TP-4.

Beach Deposits: Underlying the common fill at the locations of Test Pits TP-5, TP-6, and TP-7 we encountered a horizontally bedded, poorly graded medium sand with trace amounts of silt, and sea fragments. We classified this material as beach deposits based on the horizontal bedding and presence of shell fragments. This soil unit extended to at least the bottom of the TP-5 through TP-7 at 6 to 8 feet deep.

Our subsurface descriptions are based on the conditions encountered at the time of our exploration. Soil conditions between our exploration locations may vary from those encountered. The nature and extent of variations between our exploratory locations may not become evident until construction. If variations do appear, PanGEO should be requested to reevaluate the recommendations in this report and to modify or verify them in writing prior to proceeding with earthwork and construction.

3.4 GROUNDWATER

Heavy groundwater seepage was encountered in the quarry spall fill at the locations of Test Pits TP-2, TP-3 and TP-4 at about 7 feet below grade. The seepage rapidly filled our test pits up to



within about 6 feet below grade. No evidence of groundwater was observed in the other four test pits.

With the planned construction at or near existing grades, groundwater at 6 to 7 feet below grade will likely not result in significant construction related issues. However, there is a potential for encountering groundwater seepage in deep excavations, such as for underground utilities and connections to existing utility mains.

The contractor should be made aware that groundwater levels are not static. There will be fluctuations in the groundwater level depending on the season, tidal fluctuations, amount of precipitation, surface water runoff, and other factors. Groundwater levels are highest during the wet season, typically October through May.

4.0 GEOTECHNICAL RECOMMENDATIONS

4.1 GENERAL

Based on our subsurface exploration, most of the proposed building area is primarily underlain by 7 to more than 10 feet of existing structural fill overlying quarry spall fill. Based on our experience with these materials, the finer grained sand (i.e., existing structural fill) can migrate into voids in the very coarse quarry spall fill, resulting in settlement at the ground surface. This situation can be accelerated by the inflow of large volumes of water such as through a water line or water main break, or the improper discharge of surface/roof runoff near the footings.

In our opinion, the risk of settlement induced by the migration of fines into the quarry spalls is low, but cannot be ruled out. If it is desired mitigate the risk for foundation settlement, alternative foundation systems may be considered, such as a structural slab, continuous grade beam foundation, or a pile foundation system. We can provide recommendations for these alternative foundation systems, if desired.

4.2 SEISMIC DESIGN PARAMETERS

The 2012 International Building Code (IBC) seismic design section provides a basis for seismic design of structures. Table 1 below provides seismic design parameters for the site that are in conformance with the 2012 IBC, which specifies a design earthquake having a 2% probability of occurrence in 50 years (return interval of 2,475 years), and the 2008 USGS seismic hazard maps.



Table 1 – Seismic Design Parameters

The spectral response accelerations were obtained from the USGS Earthquake Hazards Program Interpolated Probabilistic Ground Motion website (2008 data) for the project latitude and longitude.

Liquefaction Potential: Liquefaction is a process that can occur when soils lose shear strength for short periods of time during a seismic event. Ground shaking of sufficient strength and duration results in the loss of grain-to-grain contact and an increase in pore water pressure, causing the soil to behave as a fluid. Soils with a potential for liquefaction are typically cohesionless, predominately silt and sand sized, must be loose, and be below the groundwater table. The site is predominantly underlain by fill comprised of medium dense to very dense poorly graded sand with gravel. Based on these conditions, in our opinion the liquefaction potential of the site is negligible and design considerations related to soil liquefaction are not necessary for this project.

4.3 BUILDING FOUNDATIONS

Based on the subsurface conditions encountered at the site and our understanding of the planned development, it is our opinion the proposed building may be supported on a conventional spread and continuous footing foundation system. The footings should bear on the medium dense to dense existing structural fill underlying the site. In areas where common fill is encountered, the fill should be removed and replaced with new structural fill. In areas where beach deposits are encountered, the beach deposits should be overexcavated to a depth of two feet below the foundation subgrade elevation and the overexcavation backfilled with structural fill. The overexcavation width should extend at least one foot beyond the width of the foundation elements.

Site Class

Spectral Acceleration at 0.2 sec. [g]

SS

Spectral Acceleration at 1.0 sec. [g]

S1

Site

Coefficients

Design Spectral Response Parameters

Control

Periods [sec.]

Fa Fv SDS SD1 TO TS

D 1.33 0.546 1.000 1.500 0.887 0.546 0.123 0.616



For frost protection considerations, exterior foundation elements should be placed at a minimum depth of 24 inches below final exterior grade. Interior spread foundations should be placed at a minimum depth of 12 inches below the top of concrete slabs.

We recommend a maximum allowable soil bearing pressure of 3,000 pounds per square foot (psf) be used for sizing foundation elements. The recommended allowable bearing pressure is for dead plus live loads. For allowable stress design, the recommended bearing pressure may be increased by one-third for transient loading, such as wind or seismic forces. Continuous and individual spread footings should have minimum widths of 18 and 24 inches, respectively.

Footings designed and constructed in accordance with the above recommendations should experience total settlement of less than one inch and differential settlement of less than ½ inch. Most of the anticipated settlement should occur during construction as dead loads are applied.

4.3.1 Lateral Resistance

Lateral loads on the structure may be resisted by passive earth pressure developed against the embedded portion of the foundation system and by frictional resistance between the bottom of the foundation and the supporting subgrade soils. For footings bearing on the medium dense sand and gravel soils or on compacted structural fill, a frictional coefficient of 0.30 may be used to evaluate sliding resistance developed between the concrete and the compacted subgrade soil. Passive soil resistance may be calculated using an equivalent fluid weight of 300 pcf, assuming foundations are backfilled with structural fill. The above values include a factor of safety of 1.5. Unless covered by pavements or slabs, the passive resistance in the upper 12 inches of soil should be neglected.

4.3.2 Footing Subgrade Preparation

All footing excavations should be in a dense and unyielding condition prior to setting forms and placing rebar. Loose soil encountered at foundation subgrade elevations should be compacted in-place to the requirements of structural fill. Any loose or soft soils that cannot be compacted should be overexcavated and replaced with structural fill.

We encountered common fill at the locations of Test Pits TP-5, TP-6, and TP-7. The fill contained debris, including wood, concrete, glass, brick and asphalt rubble. The fill is not suitable for support of structural loads and is not suitable for use as structural fill. Due to the loose condition of the fill and the presence of organic and inorganic debris, the fill should be



overexcavated from structural areas and exported from the site or wasted in non-structural areas. The overexcavations should be backfilled with structural fill.

It should also be noted that the backfill of our test pits, although tamped into place with the bucket of an excavator, were not compacted as a structural fill. We recommend locating our test pits during construction and recompacting the backfill to the requirements of structural fill.

The adequacy of the footing subgrade soils should be verified by a representative of PanGEO prior to placing forms or rebar. In the event that the exposed soils are significantly different than those described in this report, additional subsurface exploration may be needed.

4.4 FLOORS SLABS

The floor slabs for the proposed buildings may be constructed using conventional concrete slab-on-grade floor construction. The floor slabs should be supported on competent native soil or structural fill. Any over-excavations, if needed, should be backfilled with structural fill. Construction joints should be incorporated into the floor slab to control cracking.

Interior concrete slab-on-grade floors should be underlain by a capillary break consisting of at least of 4 inches of pea gravel or compacted ¾-inch, clean crushed rock (less than 3 percent fines). The capillary break material should meet the gradational requirements provided in Table 2, below.

Table 2 – Capillary Break Gradation

The capillary break should be placed on the subgrade that has been compacted to a dense and unyielding condition. Design of waterproofing and damp proofing measures are the responsibility of others.

Sieve Size Percent Passing

¾-inch 100 No. 4 0 – 10

No. 100 0 – 5 No. 200 0 – 3



4.5 PERMANENT CUT AND FILL SLOPES

Based on the anticipated soil that will be exposed in the planned excavation, we recommend permanent cut and fill slopes be constructed no steeper than 2H:1V (Horizontal:Vertical).

5.0 EARTHWORK CONSIDERATIONS

5.1 TEMPORARY EXCAVATIONS

Temporary excavations should be constructed in accordance with Part N of the WAC (Washington Administrative Code) 296-155. The contractor is responsible for maintaining safe excavation slopes and/or shoring.

Based on the soil conditions encountered in the test pits, it is our opinion that temporary excavations less than about 8 feet deep may be cut at a maximum 1H:1V inclination. If deeper excavations will be needed, PanGEO will be available to provide additional recommendations.

Temporary excavations should be evaluated in the field during construction based on actual observed soil conditions. If seepage is encountered, excavation slope inclinations may need to be reduced. During wet weather, the cut slopes may need to be flattened to reduce potential erosion or should be covered with plastic sheeting.

5.2 STRUCTURAL FILL AND COMPACTION

Structural fill, should be free of organic and inorganic debris, be near the optimum moisture content and be capable of being compacted to the recommendations provided below. If the site soils cannot be compacted, then an imported structural fill may be needed. Fill for use during wet weather should consist of a well graded soil free of organic material with less than 5 percent fines (silt and clay sized particles passing the U.S. 200 sieve).

Structural fill should be moisture conditioned to within about 3 percent of optimum moisture content, placed in loose, horizontal lifts less than 8 inches in thickness, and compacted to at least 95 percent maximum density, determined using ASTM D-1557 (Modified Proctor). The contractor should include costs for moisture conditioning the native soils by adding water as needed to achieve moisture conditions that will facilitate proper compact as a bearing subgrade or utility trench backfill.

The procedure to achieve proper density of a compacted fill depends on the size and type of compaction equipment, the number of passes, thickness of the lifts being compacted, and certain



soil properties. If the excavation to be backfilled is constricted and limits the use of heavy equipment, smaller equipment can be used, but the lift thickness will need to be reduced to achieve the required relative compaction.

Generally, loosely compacted soils are a result of poor construction technique or improper moisture content. Soils with high fines contents are particularly susceptible to becoming too wet and coarse-grained materials easily become too dry, for proper compaction. Silty or clayey soils with a moisture content too high for adequate compaction should be dried as necessary, or moisture conditioned by mixing with drier materials, or other methods.

5.3 WET WEATHER CONSTRUCTION

General recommendations relative to earthwork performed in wet weather or in wet conditions are presented below. The following procedures are best management practices recommended for use in wet weather construction:

• Earthwork should be performed in small areas to minimize subgrade exposure to wet weather. Excavation or the removal of unsuitable soil should be followed promptly by the placement and compaction of clean structural fill. The size and type of construction equipment used may have to be limited to prevent soil disturbance.

• During wet weather, the allowable fines content of the structural fill should be reduced to no more than 5 percent by weight based on the portion passing the 0.75-inch sieve. The fines should be non-plastic.

• The ground surface within the construction area should be graded to promote run-off of surface water and to prevent the ponding of water.

• Geotextile silt fences should be installed at strategic locations around the site to control erosion and the movement of soil.

• Excavation slopes and soils stockpiled on site should be covered with plastic sheeting.

5.4 EROSION CONSIDERATIONS

Surface runoff can be controlled during construction by careful grading practices. Typically, this includes the construction of shallow, upgrade perimeter ditches or low earthen berms in conjunction with silt fences to collect runoff and prevent water from entering excavations or to



prevent runoff from the construction area leaving the immediate work site. Temporary erosion control may require the use of hay bales on the downhill side of the project to prevent water from leaving the site and potential storm water detention to trap sand and silt before the water is discharged to a suitable outlet. All collected water should be directed under control to a positive and permanent discharge system.

Permanent control of surface water should be incorporated in the final grading design. Adequate surface gradients and drainage systems should be incorporated into the design such that surface runoff is collected and directed away from the structures and to a suitable outlet. Potential issues associated with erosion may also be reduced by establishing vegetation within disturbed areas immediately following grading operations.

6.0 ADDITIONAL SERVICES

To confirm that our recommendations are properly incorporated into the design and construction of the proposed development, PanGEO should be retained to conduct a review of the final project plans and specifications, and to monitor the construction of geotechnical elements. PanGEO can provide you a cost estimate for construction monitoring services at a later date.

7.0 CLOSURE

We have prepared this report for the LIHI Olympia and the project design team. Recommendations contained in this report are based on a site reconnaissance, a subsurface exploration program, review of pertinent subsurface information, and our understanding of the project. The study was performed using a mutually agreed-upon scope of services.

Variations in soil conditions may exist between the locations of the explorations and the actual conditions underlying the site. The nature and extent of soil variations may not be evident until construction occurs. If any soil conditions are encountered at the site that are different from those described in this report, we should be notified immediately to review the applicability of our recommendations. Additionally, we should also be notified to review the applicability of our recommendations if there are any changes in the project scope.

The scope of our work does not include services related to construction safety precautions. Our recommendations are not intended to direct the contractors’ methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, except as specifically described in our report for consideration in design. Additionally, the scope of our services specifically excludes the assessment of environmental characteristics, particularly those involving hazardous substances. We are not mold consultants 15-135 LIHI Olympia 11 PanGEO, Inc.


nor are our recommendations to be interpreted as being preventative of mold development. A mold specialist should be consulted for all mold-related issues.

This report has been prepared for planning and design purposes for specific application to the proposed project in accordance with the generally accepted standards of local practice at the time this report was written. No warranty, express or implied, is made.

This report may be used only by the client and for the purposes stated, within a reasonable time from its issuance. Land use, site conditions (both off and on-site), or other factors including advances in our understanding of applied science, may change over time and could materially affect our findings. Therefore, this report should not be relied upon after 24 months from its issuance. PanGEO should be notified if the project is delayed by more than 24 months from the date of this report so that we may review the applicability of our conclusions considering the time lapse.

It is the client’s responsibility to see that all parties to this project, including the designer, contractor, subcontractors, etc., are made aware of this report in its entirety. The use of information contained in this report for bidding purposes should be done at the contractor’s option and risk. Any party other than the client who wishes to use this report shall notify PanGEO of such intended use and for permission to copy this report. Based on the intended use of the report, PanGEO may require that additional work be performed and that an updated report be reissued. Noncompliance with any of these requirements will release PanGEO from any liability resulting from the use this report.

Sincerely,

PanGEO, Inc.

Scott D. Dinkelman, LEG, LHG Siew L Tan, P.E. Senior Engineering Geologist Principal Geotechnical Engineer 15-135 LIHI Olympia 12 PanGEO, Inc.


8.0 REFERENCES

International Code Council, 2012, International Building Code (IBC), 2012.

Walsh, T. J., Logan, R.L., Shasse, H. W., Polenz, M, 2003, Geologic Map of the Tumwater 7.5-minute Quadrangle, Thurston County, Washington, Washington Department of Natural Resources, Open File Report, 2003-25.

WSDOT, 2014, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge and Municipal Construction, M 41-10, Washington Department of Transportation.


Figure No.Project No. 15-135

Olympia Commons318 State Ave NE

Olympia, WA1

file.

grf

w/ f

ile.d

at

6/30

/15

(13

:57

) S

DD

Base Map: Bing Maps

VICINITY MAP

Approx. Scale:Not to Scale

NORTH

SITE

Project No. Figure No.

SITE AND EXPLORATION PLAN

15-135 213-

011_

Fig

2 S

ite &

Exp

lora

tion

Pla

n.g

rf

7/1/

15 J

CR

Note: Site plan modified from ALTA/ACSM Land Title Survey by Hatton Godat Pantier, undated.

Olympia Commons318 State Ave NE

Seattle, WA

NE

AD

AM

S S

T

STATE AVE NE

TP-1

TP-2

TP-3

TP-4

TP-5

TP-6

TP-7

LEGEND:

Subject Site

Existing Structures

Proposed Building

Approximate Test Pit Location, PanGEO, Inc., May 2015

Approximate Extent of Common Fill Based on Test Pits, Probing, and Vegetation Patterns. (teeth are on Common Fill side of line)

NORTH

0 15 30

Approximate Scale

APPENDIX A

TEST PIT LOGS

Test Pit No. TP-1 Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: June 5, 2015 Surface Conditions: Gravel, sparse vegetation

Depth (ft) USCS Material Description 0 – ¼ GP FILL – Crushed Rock: Loose, poorly graded angular gravel, dry.

¼ – 2 SM FILL – Structural: Medium dense, brown silty fine to medium SAND with gravel and cobbles, medium dense.

• Silt content decreases with depth. 2-10 SP FILL – Structural: Dense poorly grade coarse SAND with gravel, trace

silt, moist. • Probes 1 to 2 inches at 3 feet with ½ inch diameter T-handle

probe. • Moisture content increases below 6 feet.

Test pit terminated at 10 feet below grade. No groundwater seepage encountered during excavation.

Test Pit TP-1: Spoils pile after completion of test pit excavation.


Test Pit No. TP-2

Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: June 5, 2015 Surface Conditions: Gravel, sparse vegetation Depth (ft) USCS Soil Description

0 – ¼ GP FILL – Crushed Rock: Loose, poorly graded angular gravel, dry. ¼ – 7 SP FILL – Structural: Medium dense poorly graded medium to coarse SAND

with gravel, trace silt, moist. • Becomes dense at 3 feet.• Contains cobbles.• Probes 0 to 1 inches at 4 feet with ½ inch diameter T-handle

probe.7 – 9 GP FILL – Quarry Spalls: Dense, gray poorly graded angular gravel with

sand, some cobbles. • Heavy groundwater seepage at 7 feet. Filled the test pit to 6 feet.

Test pit terminated at 9 feet below grade.

Test Pit TP-2: Test pit during excavation.

Test Pit TP-2: Ater excavation. Groundwater seepage filled the excavation to 6 feet below grade.


Test Pit No. TP-3

Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: June 5, 2015 Surface Conditions: Gravel, sparse vegetation

Depth (ft) USCS Soil Description 0 – ¼ GP FILL – Crushed Rock: Loose, poorly graded angular gravel, dry. ¼ – 7 SP FILL – Structural: Medium dense poorly graded medium to coarse

SAND with gravel, trace silt, moist. • Becomes dense at 3 feet.• Contains cobbles.• Probes 0 to 1 inches at 3 feet with ½ inch diameter T-handle

probe.7 – 10 GP FILL – Quarry Spalls: Dense, gray poorly graded angular gravel

with sand, some cobbles. • Heavy groundwater seepage at 7 feet. Filled the test pit to

about 6 feet below grade.Test pit terminated at 10 feet below grade.

Test Pit TP-3: Groundwater in bottom of test pit after excavation.

Test Pit TP-3: Spoils pile after completion of test pit.


Test Pit No. TP-4

Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: June 5, 2015 Surface Conditions: Gravel, sparse vegetation

Depth USCS Soil Description 0 – ¼ GP FILL – Crushed Rock: Loose, poorly graded angular gravel, dry.

¼ – 8½ SP

FILL – Structural: Medium dense poorly graded medium to coarse SAND with gravel, trace silt, moist.

• Becomes dense at 3 feet.• Contains cobbles.

8½ – 10 GP FILL – Quarry Spalls: Dense, gray poorly graded angular gravel with sand, some cobbles.

• Heavy groundwater seepage at 7 feet. Filled the test pit to 6 feet.

Test pit terminated at 10 feet below grade.

Test Pit TP-4: Spoils pile after completion of test pit. Test Pit TP-4: Soils in excavator bucket from bottom of test pit. Mixture of quarry spalls and gravel borrow fill.


Test Pit No. TP-5

Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: June 5, 2015 Surface Conditions: Bare soil, sparse vegetation.

Depth USCS Soil Description

0 – 1 SM FILL – Common: Loose, brown silty medium SAND with some gravel, moist.

• Contains wood, metal debris, and glass.

1 – 8½ SP-SM

BEACH DEPOSITS: Loose, poorly graded sand with silt, moist.

• Horizontally bedded.• Contains shells along bedding planes.• Heavy caving below 3 feet.

Test pit terminated at 8½ feet below grade. No groundwater seepage encountered during excavation.

Test Pit TP-5: Shells encountered in Beach Deposits. Test Pit TP-5: View of spoils pile after completion of test pit.


Test Pit No. TP-6

Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: June 5, 2015 Surface Conditions: Bare soil, sparse vegetation.

Depth USCS Soil Description 0 – 2 SM FILL – Common: Loose, brown silty medium SAND with some

gravel, moist. • Contains wood and metal debris, concrete and brick rubble,

glass, and pipe.• Encountered intact concrete slab at 1½ feet, moved test pit

10 feet northwest.2 – 8 SP-SM Beach Deposits: Loose, poorly graded sand with silt, moist.

• Horizontally bedded.• Contains shells along bedding planes.• Heavy caving below 3 feet.

Test pit terminated at 11 feet below grade. No groundwater seepage encountered during excavation.

Test Pit TP-6: Top of intact concrete slab encountered at 1½ feet below grade. Test pit was moved 10 feet to the northwest.

Test Pit TP-6: View of Beach Deposit soils from test pit excavation.


Test Pit No. TP-7

Approximate Ground Surface Elevation: 11 feet Date: May 5, 2015 Surface Conditions Bare soil, sparse vegetation.

Depth USCS Soil Description

0 – 2 SM

FILL – Common: Loose, brown silty medium SAND with some gravel, moist.

• Contains wood debris, concrete and brick rubble, glass, andplastic.

2 – 6 SP-SM Beach Deposits: Loose, poorly graded sand with silt, moist. • Horizontally bedded with shells along bedding planes.• Heavy caving below 3 feet.

Test pit terminated at 6 feet below grade due to excessive caving. No groundwater seepage encountered during excavation.

Test Pit TP-7: View of sidewall of completed test pit. Upper portion of photo is fill. Lower portion is beach deposits.



PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS 00 4000 - 1

SECTION 00 4000 – PROCUREMENT FORMS AND SUPPLEMENTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings, general provisions of the Contract, and Division-1 Specification sections, apply

to this section.

1.2 WORK IN THIS SECTION

A. The following forms and documents are attached for the bidder’s information. See Section

C – Appendix:

1. AIA Document A101-2007 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor where the basis of payment is a Stipulated Sum.

2. AIA Document A201-2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction. 3. AIA Document A312-2010 Performance Bond. 4. AIA Document G702 and G703 Pay Application Forms. 5. AIA Document G704 – 2000 Certificate of Substantial Completion. 6. AIA Document G705 List of Subcontractors.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used) END OF SECTION 00 4000


GENERAL CONDITIONS 00 7200 - 1

SECTION 00 7200 – GENERAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. The General Conditions for this project shall be AIA Document A201-2007 “General Con-

ditions of the Contract for Construction”, as modified by Supplemental General Conditions and Special Conditions.

See Section C – Appendix for a copy of this document.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)


Owner Guidance on Funding Requirements

Financing for Olympia Commons is a mix of public and private resources. All contractors and

subcontractors are advised to refer to the Washington State Department of Commerce website to find the

requirements that apply to this project. Whether or not expressly mentioned in this section, all contractor

requirements of the State of Washington apply.

Wage Rates:

Contractors, subcontractors and sub-tier subcontractors are required to pay no less than the highest of the

wage rates required by each of the public funders. For Olympia Commons, the following are the funding

sources and their required wage rates:

• State of Washington Department of Commerce: No less than the state residential prevailing wage

must be paid.

For Olympia Commons, State of Washington Residential wage rates apply (look in the “Rs” in the wage rate

schedule from State Department of Labor and Industries-Thurston County; and if job classifications are not

featured in the “R” section, (i.e., Residential Carpenter, Residential Painter, etc), then the prevailing journey

wage rate for that trade prevails. Or the statistician for L& I can be contacted to determine if they will issue

a residential wage for that trade

General Contractor and Subcontractors are required to file their “Intent to Pay Residential Prevailing

Wages” with the State Department of Labor and Industries if they are the selected to work at Olympia

Commons. At the conclusion of their scope of work, General Contractor and all Subcontractors and all

Subtier contractors are required to file the Affidavit of Wages paid.

For more information, see http://www.lni.wa.gov/TRADESLICENSING/PREVWAGE/DEFAULT.ASP

Apprenticeship requirements: The State of Washington sets a goal that 15% of the labor on a project be

performed through an approved apprenticeship program. As part of the monthly progress draw request,

the general contractor is required to submit a monthly apprenticeship report that summarizes

apprenticeship employment on site.

Bid Submittal: Please make sure to include with your bid to the General Contractor the signed and

notarized Non-Collusion Affidavit. If your bid is selected, you will also be requested to submit an

Apprenticeship Plan, if you have one.

Questions on Owner Requirements can be addressed to Whitney Rearick, LIHI, [email protected]

GuyP

Text Box

OWNER GUIDANCE ON FUNDING REQUIREMENTS 00 7300

State Housing Trust Fund Requirements

Olympia Commons has funding from the State Department of Commerce, State Housing Trust Fund

whose requirements are featured below and are conditions of the project:

201.5 State Prevailing Wage

Applicants awarded HTF funds may be subject to the state prevailing wage law, Chapter 39.12 RCW.

Applicants seeking grants should assume that Prevailing Wage will apply, and build the requisite costs

into all project development budgets. The HTF recommends that applicants consult with the

Washington State Department of Labor and Industries and/or private legal counsel prior to applying for

HTF funding to determine whether prevailing wages must be paid and, if so, whether commercial or

residential rates apply. Failure to secure a determination from L&I prior to commencement of work on

the project can result in significant additional cost to a project.

The HTF is not responsible for determining whether prevailing wage law applies to any specific project.

Furthermore, HTF cannot guarantee that additional funds can be provided to a project to cover

additional costs if a higher prevailing wage rate (i.e., commercial versus residential) is determined to be

required by L&I. The successful applicant is responsible for including applicable prevailing wage

requirements in construction bid specifications.

The Washington State Department of Labor and Industries has the following website providing

information on prevailing wages: http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevailingWage/. The

telephone number is (360) 902-5335.

201.6 Use of the Apprenticeship Program

For HTF contracts where the total project construction costs are one million dollars ($1,000,000.00) or more,

CONTRACTOR shall place apprentice training program requirements in their construction contractor bid package.

They must also make best efforts to select a prime contractor that will hire apprentices enrolled in an approved

apprenticeship program and who will procure sub-contractors who will also hire apprentices who are enrolled in

an approved apprenticeship program as described in RCW 39.04.300 through 39.04.320. All specifications shall

require that no less than fifteen percent of the labor hours be performed by apprentices enrolled through the

Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (WSATC). "State-approved apprenticeship training

program" means an apprenticeship training program approved by the Washington state apprenticeship council.

It is the CONTRACTOR’S responsibility to acquire a completed “Statement of Apprenticeship/Journeyman

Participation” form from the general contractor that includes subcontractor data. This form will be submitted to

Washington Community Reinvestment Association (WCRA) and the HTF contract manager with each voucher

request. This reporting form will be provided to the applicant by the WCRA. It is submitted each month with

monthly draw request, whether or not funding is being solicited for that month from the State.

More information on the Apprenticeship Program is available at the Washington State Department of Labor and

Industries website, at http://www.lni.wa.gov. Information about apprenticeship opportunities is available at the

Washington State Employment Security website, at http://www.wa.gov/esd/employment.html. A list of L&I

statewide offices can be found at http://www.lni.wa.gov/Main/ContactInfo/OfficeLocations/default.asp.

GuyP

Text Box

STATE HOUSING TRUST FUND REQUIREMENTS 00 7305

201.8 Evergreen Sustainable Design Standard (ESDS)

All affordable housing projects or programs receiving state capital funds from the Housing Trust Fund

are subject to RCW 39.35D.080 and must be built or implemented according to the Evergreen

Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS). Please refer to Section 207 for detailed information

pertaining to the ESDS. Please note: the Standard is reevaluated and updated periodically to reflect

changes in the green building industry and other laws, such as the State Building Code. Please ensure

you are working with the correct version of the ESDS. See the ESDS Project Plan in the Project Manual

whose requirements are part of the project specifications in each division where relevant.

403.3 Construction Review & Inspection

Commerce contracts with a third party to provide pre-construction review, construction draw review, and site

inspections during construction. The third party construction reviewer is currently Washington Community

Reinvestment Association (WCRA). A third-party review will occur prior to the approval of each construction draw,

which may include an on-site inspection of the work performed. See Exhibit 4-2 for a flowchart of the WCRA

review process. (See also Section 403.4)

The Contractor is responsible for determining applicability and undertaking all necessary actions related to

prevailing wage and apprenticeship requirements. (See Section 201.5 Prevailing Wage and 201.6 Use of the

Apprenticeship Program)

The Contractor is responsible for ensuring compliance with Washington State Executive Order 05-05.

Documentation of compliance will be required before HTF funds may be drawn. (See Section 201.7 Archaelogical

and Cultural Resources)

403.3.1 Pre-Construction Review

The third party construction reviewer reviews project plans and specifications to ensure the budget is adequate

for the proposed project, the proposed plans are appropriate for the project, and the plans and specifications

incorporate the Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS) mandatory and optional features. The PM

determines the timeframe for the WCRA review, depending on the readiness of the plans and specs and other

negotiated conditions. The following steps are involved in the WCRA pre-construction review process:

1. The PM initiates the review by providing the name of the Contractor, the name of the project, and the

contract number to WCRA and requesting a pre-construction review.

2. The WCRA representative contacts the Contractor with a list of the items needed to complete the review.

3. WCRA oversees the review by an approved third party inspector and sends a report of its review to the PM.

The PM may send the review to the Contractor to address any concerns raised by the review.

4. If Commerce is a permanent take-out lender, Commerce staff or a sub-contractor may do a site inspection

prior to closing on the permanent loan. Commerce may contract with a professional inspection or

commissioning service to verify the completion of the project up to the housing standards and other agreed

upon features.

403.3.2 Construction Review

For each construction draw request, or as requested by the PM, the third party reviewer will engage a third-party

inspector to perform an inspection of the property. Inspections may be done less frequently as agreed to by the

PM.

The inspector will inspect the project to ensure costs included in the draw request are in conformance with the

construction contract and other construction project documentation such as permits, plans and specifications.

The inspector will provide third party verification of the Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS)

requirements, including review of the Evergreen Binder on site, for completion of items as construction

progresses. (See Section 207 Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard)

The inspection report will provide detail regarding the progress of the project, any deviations from the plans and

specs or change orders, and compliance with ESDS and applicable accessibility standards. Final verification of

compliance with ESDS will be provided at project completion. The review is to determine the source of costs,

compliance and quality of construction, and recommendation for funding the draw.

Draws will be reviewed by the third party reviewer against the budget to determine that there are adequate funds

in the reserve/escrow to complete the project and whether costs are appropriate, including use of contingency.

The third party reviewer will request a disbursement control budget (Budget spreadsheet) from the Contractor to

track the project costs.

The Draw review memo will be forwarded to the PM with a report on the project’s progress, including findings or

other items of concern, apprenticeship participation if applicable, and a recommendation for funding.

Firm Name, Address, City, State & ZIP+4

contractor firm name

street address Notice to Proceed Date

city,state, and zip

Reporting Period from: beginning date to end date Required Apprenticeship Percentage: 15%

APPRENTICE SUMMARY

ApprenticeRegistration Total Hours

Apprentice Name Craft or Trade Number Number Worked

JOURNEYMEN SUMMARY

Total Hours

Craft or Trade Number Worked

Apprentice total hours worked this period:

Journeyman total hours worked this period:

Previous Total

Cumulative Apprentice hour Total brought forward from last reporting period: previous total

Cumulative Journeymen hourTotal brought forward from last reporting period: previous total

Printed Name: Signature: Date: Title:DES Labor Form 100412

I, the undersigned, do hereby certify under penalty of perjury that the items listed herein represent the proper hourly totals for

Apprenticeship/Journeyman participation during this reporting period.

Contract Award Amount:

$ date

or

Sub-Contractor

Name of Contractor

or

Sub-Contractor

Name of Contractor

Apprentice

Journeymen

STATEMENT OF APPRENTICE/JOURNEYMAN PARTICIPATION

Department of Enterprise Services

Project Name (Title)

name of project

#VALUE!

New Total

#VALUE!

Percentage

#VALUE!

0

0

number

Contract No.

GuyP

Text Box

STATEMENT OF APPRENTICE/JOURNEYMAN PARTICIPATION 00 7305.1

County Trade Job Classification Wage Holiday Overtime Notes

Thurston Asbestos Abatement Workers Journey Level $43.95 5D 1H

Thurston Boilermakers Journey Level $50.03 1

Thurston Brick Mason Journey Level $52.82 5A 1M

Thurston Brick Mason Pointer-Caulker-Cleaner $52.82 5A 1M

Thurston Building Service Employees Janitor $9.47 1

Thurston Building Service Employees Shampooer $10.32 1

Thurston Building Service Employees Waxer $9.47 1

Thurston Building Service Employees Window Cleaner $10.84 1

Thurston Cabinet Makers (In Shop) Journey Level $13.48 1

Thurston Carpenters Acoustical Worker $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Bridge, Dock And Wharf Carpenters $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Carpenter $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Carpenters on Stationary Tools $54.15 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Creosoted Material $54.12 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Floor Finisher $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Floor Layer $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Carpenters Scaffold Erector $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Cement Masons Journey Level $53.95 7A 1M

Thurston Divers & Tenders Diver $107.22 5D 4C 8A

Thurston Divers & Tenders Diver On Standby $64.42 5D 4C

Thurston Divers & Tenders Diver Tender $58.33 5D 4C

Thurston Divers & Tenders Surface Rcv & Rov Operator $58.33 5D 4C

Thurston Divers & Tenders Surface Rcv & Rov Operator Tender $54.27 5A 4C

Thurston Dredge Workers Assistant Engineer $56.44 5D 3F

Thurston Dredge Workers Assistant Mate (Deckhand) $56.00 5D 3F

Thurston Dredge Workers Boatmen $56.44 5D 3F

Thurston Dredge Workers Engineer Welder $57.51 5D 3F

Thurston Dredge Workers Leverman, Hydraulic $58.67 5D 3F

Thurston Dredge Workers Mates $56.44 5D 3F

Thurston Dredge Workers Oiler $56.00 5D 3F

Thurston Drywall Applicator Journey Level $54.02 5D 1H

Thurston Drywall Tapers Journey Level $54.07 5P 1E

GuyP

Text Box

STATE PREVAILING WAGE RATES - THURSTON COUNTY 00 7346

Thurston Electrical Fixture Maintenance Workers Journey Level $29.54 1

Thurston Electricians - Inside Cable Splicer $61.96 5C 1G

Thurston Electricians - Inside Journey Level $58.35 5C 1G

Thurston Electricians - Inside Lead Covered Cable Splicer $65.55 5C 1G

Thurston Electricians - Inside Welder $61.96 5C 1G

Thurston Electricians - Motor Shop Craftsman $15.37 1

Thurston Electricians - Motor Shop Journey Level $14.69 1

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Cable Splicer $69.95 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Certified Line Welder $63.97 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Groundperson $43.62 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Heavy Line Equipment Operator $63.97 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Journey Level Lineperson $63.97 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Line Equipment Operator $53.81 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Pole Sprayer $63.97 5A 4D

Thurston Electricians - Powerline Construction Powderperson $47.55 5A 4D

Thurston Electronic Technicians Journey Level $22.99 1

Thurston Elevator Constructors Mechanic $82.67 7D 4A

Thurston Elevator Constructors Mechanic In Charge $89.40 7D 4A

Thurston Fabricated Precast Concrete Products Journey Level - In-Factory Work Only $13.50 1

Thurston Fence Erectors Fence Erector $37.26 7A 3I

Thurston Flaggers Journey Level $37.26 7A 3I

Thurston Glaziers Journey Level $56.16 7L 1Y

Thurston Heat & Frost Insulators And Asbestos Workers Journeyman $63.18 5J 1S

Thurston Heating Equipment Mechanics Journey Level $72.83 7F 1E

Thurston Hod Carriers & Mason Tenders Journey Level $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Industrial Power Vacuum Cleaner Journey Level $9.47 1

Thurston Inland Boatmen Boat Operator $56.78 5B 1K

Thurston Inland Boatmen Cook $53.30 5B 1K

Thurston Inland Boatmen Deckhand $53.30 5B 1K

Thurston Inland Boatmen Deckhand Engineer $54.32 5B 1K

Thurston Inland Boatmen Launch Operator $55.57 5B 1K

Thurston Inland Boatmen Mate $55.57 5B 1K

Thurston Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Sewer & Water Systems By Remote ControlCleaner Operator, Foamer Operator $9.73 1

Thurston Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Sewer & Water Systems By Remote ControlGrout Truck Operator $11.48 1

Thurston Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Sewer & Water Systems By Remote ControlHead Operator $12.78 1

Thurston Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Sewer & Water Systems By Remote ControlTechnician $25.00 1

Thurston Inspection/Cleaning/Sealing Of Sewer & Water Systems By Remote ControlTv Truck Operator $10.53 1

Thurston Insulation Applicators Journey Level $54.02 5D 4C

Thurston Ironworkers Journeyman $63.53 7N 1O

Thurston Laborers Air, Gas Or Electric Vibrating Screed $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Airtrac Drill Operator $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Ballast Regular Machine $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Batch Weighman $37.26 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Brick Pavers $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Brush Cutter $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Brush Hog Feeder $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Burner $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Caisson Worker $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Carpenter Tender $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Caulker $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Cement Dumper-paving $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Cement Finisher Tender $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Change House Or Dry Shack $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Chipping Gun (under 30 Lbs.) $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Chipping Gun(30 Lbs. And Over) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Choker Setter $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Chuck Tender $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Clary Power Spreader $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Clean-up Laborer $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Concrete Dumper/chute Operator $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Concrete Form Stripper $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Concrete Placement Crew $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Concrete Saw Operator/core Driller $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Crusher Feeder $37.26 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Curing Laborer $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Demolition: Wrecking & Moving (incl. Charred Material)$43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Ditch Digger $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Diver $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Drill Operator (hydraulic,diamond) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Dry Stack Walls $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Dump Person $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Epoxy Technician $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Erosion Control Worker $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Faller & Bucker Chain Saw $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Fine Graders $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Firewatch $37.26 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Form Setter $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Gabian Basket Builders $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers General Laborer $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Grade Checker & Transit Person $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Grinders $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Grout Machine Tender $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Groutmen (pressure)including Post Tension Beams $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Guardrail Erector $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (level A) $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (level B) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Hazardous Waste Worker (level C) $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers High Scaler $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Jackhammer $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Laserbeam Operator $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Maintenance Person $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Manhole Builder-mudman $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Material Yard Person $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Motorman-dinky Locomotive $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Nozzleman (concrete Pump, Green Cutter When Using Combination Of High Pressure Air & Water On Concrete & Rock, Sandblast, Gunite, Shotcrete, Water Bla$44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pavement Breaker $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pilot Car $37.26 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pipe Layer Lead $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pipe Layer/tailor $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pipe Pot Tender $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pipe Reliner $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pipe Wrapper $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Pot Tender $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Powderman $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Powderman's Helper $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Power Jacks $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Railroad Spike Puller - Power $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Raker - Asphalt $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Re-timberman $45.32 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Remote Equipment Operator $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Rigger/signal Person $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Rip Rap Person $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Rivet Buster $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Rodder $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Scaffold Erector $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Scale Person $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Sloper (over 20)" $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Sloper Sprayer $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Spreader (concrete) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Stake Hopper $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Stock Piler $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Tamper & Similar Electric, Air & Gas Operated Tools$44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Tamper (multiple & Self-propelled) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Timber Person - Sewer (lagger, Shorer & Cribber) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Toolroom Person (at Jobsite) $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Topper $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Track Laborer $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Track Liner (power) $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Traffic Control Laborer $39.84 7A 3I 8R

Thurston Laborers Traffic Control Supervisor $39.84 7A 3I 8R

Thurston Laborers Truck Spotter $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Tugger Operator $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 0-30 psi $74.29 7A 3I 8Q

Thurston Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 30.01-44.00 psi$79.32 7A 3I 8Q




Thurston Laborers Tunnel Work-Compressed Air Worker 64.01-68.00 psi $95.92 7A 3I 8Q




Thurston Laborers Tunnel Work-Guage and Lock Tender $45.42 7A 3I 8Q

Thurston Laborers Tunnel Work-Miner $45.42 7A 3I 8Q

Thurston Laborers Vibrator $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Vinyl Seamer $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Watchman $33.86 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Welder $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Well Point Laborer $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers Window Washer/cleaner $33.86 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers - Underground Sewer & Water General Laborer & Topman $43.95 7A 3I

Thurston Laborers - Underground Sewer & Water Pipe Layer $44.76 7A 3I

Thurston Landscape Construction Irrigation Or Lawn Sprinkler Installers $14.41 1

Thurston Landscape Construction Landscape Equipment Operators Or Truck Drivers $14.41 1

Thurston Landscape Construction Landscaping Or Planting Laborers $14.41 1

Thurston Lathers Journey Level $54.02 5D 1H

Thurston Marble Setters Journey Level $52.82 5A 1M

Thurston Metal Fabrication (In Shop) Fitter $27.10 6T 2U

Thurston Metal Fabrication (In Shop) Laborer $16.91 6T 2U

Thurston Metal Fabrication (In Shop) Layerout $30.63 6T 2U

Thurston Metal Fabrication (In Shop) Machine Operator $20.86 6T 2U

Thurston Metal Fabrication (In Shop) Welder $24.74 6T 2U

Thurston Millwright Journey Level $55.52 5D 4C

Thurston Modular Buildings Cabinet Assembly $9.98 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Electrician $9.98 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Equipment Maintenance $9.98 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Plumber $9.98 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Production Worker $9.75 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Tool Maintenance $9.98 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Utility Person $9.98 1

Thurston Modular Buildings Welder $9.98 1

Thurston Painters Journey Level $37.80 6Z 2B

Thurston Pile Driver Journey Level $54.27 5D 4C

Thurston Plasterers Journey Level $51.68 7Q 1R

Thurston Playground & Park Equipment Installers Journey Level $9.47 1

Thurston Plumbers & Pipefitters Journey Level $63.57 5A 1G

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Asphalt Plant Operator $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Assistant Engineers $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Barrier Machine (zipper) $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Batch Plant Operator: Concrete $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Bobcat $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Brokk - Remote Demolition Equipment $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Brooms $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Bump Cutter $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cableways $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Chipper $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Compressor $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Over 42m$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Concrete Finish Machine -laser Screed $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump - Mounted Or Trailer High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Concrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Up To 42m$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Conveyors $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes, 100 Tons - 199 Tons, Or 150 Ft Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments)$57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes, 200 Tons To 300 Tons, Or 250 Ft Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments)$58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons With Attachments$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, Under 150' Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments)$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: A-frame - 10 Tons And Under $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Friction 100 Tons Through 199 Tons $58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Friction Over 200 Tons $58.67 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Over 300 Tons, Or 300' Of Boom (Including Jib With Attachments)$58.67 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Cranes: Through 19 Tons With Attachments A-frame Over 10 Tons$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Crusher $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Deck Engineer/deck Winches (power) $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Derricks, On Building Work $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Dozers D-9 & Under $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Drill Oilers: Auger Type, Truck Or Crane Mount $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Drilling Machine $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Elevator And Man-lift: Permanent And Shaft Type $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Finishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco & Similar Equipment$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Forklift: 3000 Lbs And Over With Attachments $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Forklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With Attachments $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Grade Engineer: Using Blueprints, Cut Sheets,etc. $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Gradechecker/stakeman $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Guardrail Punch $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. & Over$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Hard Tail End Dump Articulating Off-road Equipment Under 45 Yards$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Horizontal/directional Drill Locator $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Horizontal/directional Drill Operator $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts/Boom Trucks Over 10 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Hydralifts/boom Trucks, 10 Tons And Under $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Loader, Overhead 8 Yards. & Over $57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Loader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But Not Including 8 Yards$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Loaders, Plant Feed $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Loaders: Elevating Type Belt $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Locomotives, All $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Material Transfer Device $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Mechanics, All (Leadmen - $0.50 Per Hour Over Mechanic)$57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Motor Patrol Grader - Non-finishing $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Motor Patrol Graders, Finishing $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Mucking Machine, Mole, Tunnel Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shield$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Oil Distributors, Blower Distribution & Mulch Seeding Operator$53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Outside Hoists (elevators And Manlifts), Air Tuggers,strato$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons And Over $57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Overhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Pavement Breaker $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Pile Driver (other Than Crane Mount) $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Plant Oiler - Asphalt, Crusher $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Posthole Digger, Mechanical $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Power Plant $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Pumps - Water $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Quad 9, HD 41, D10 And Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Quick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 Feet In Height Based To Boom$53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Remote Control Operator On Rubber Tired Earth Moving Equipment$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Rigger And Bellman $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Rollagon $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Roller, Other Than Plant Mix $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Roller, Plant Mix Or Multi-lift Materials $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Roto-mill, Roto-grinder $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Saws - Concrete $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Scraper, Self Propelled Under 45 Yards $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Scrapers - Concrete & Carry All $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Scrapers, Self-propelled: 45 Yards And Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Service Engineers - Equipment $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Shotcrete/gunite Equipment $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Shovel , Excavator, Backhoe, Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons.$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoe: Over 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes, Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons$57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Shovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 90 Metric Tons $58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Slipform Pavers $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Spreader, Topsider & Screedman $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Subgrader Trimmer $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Tower Bucket Elevators $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Tower Crane Over 175'in Height, Base To Boom $58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Tower Crane Up: To 175' In Height, Base To Boom $57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Transporters, All Track Or Truck Type $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Trenching Machines $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Truck Crane Oiler/driver - 100 Tons And Over $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Truck Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Truck Mount Portable Conveyor $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Welder $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Wheel Tractors, Farmall Type $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators Yo Yo Pay Dozer $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterAsphalt Plant Operator $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterAssistant Engineers $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterBarrier Machine (zipper) $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterBatch Plant Operator: Concrete $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterBobcat $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterBrokk - Remote Demolition Equipment $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterBrooms $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterBump Cutter $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCableways $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterChipper $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCompressor $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterConcrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Over 42m$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterConcrete Finish Machine -laser Screed $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterConcrete Pump - Mounted Or Trailer High Pressure Line Pump, Pump High Pressure$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterConcrete Pump: Truck Mount With Boom Attachment Up To 42m$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterConveyors $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes, 100 Tons - 199 Tons, Or 150 Ft Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments)$57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes, 200 Tons To 300 Tons, Or 250 Ft Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments)$58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons With Attachments$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons, Under 150' Of Boom (including Jib With Attachments)$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: A-frame - 10 Tons And Under $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: Friction 100 Tons Through 199 Tons $58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: Friction Over 200 Tons $58.67 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: Over 300 Tons, Or 300' Of Boom (Including Jib With Attachments)$58.67 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCranes: Through 19 Tons With Attachments A-frame Over 10 Tons$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterCrusher $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterDeck Engineer/deck Winches (power) $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterDerricks, On Building Work $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterDozers D-9 & Under $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterDrill Oilers: Auger Type, Truck Or Crane Mount $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterDrilling Machine $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterElevator And Man-lift: Permanent And Shaft Type $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterFinishing Machine, Bidwell And Gamaco & Similar Equipment$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterForklift: 3000 Lbs And Over With Attachments $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterForklifts: Under 3000 Lbs. With Attachments $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterGrade Engineer: Using Blueprints, Cut Sheets,etc. $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterGradechecker/stakeman $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterGuardrail Punch $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterHard Tail End Dump Articulating Off- Road Equipment 45 Yards. & Over$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterHard Tail End Dump Articulating Off-road Equipment Under 45 Yards$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterHorizontal/directional Drill Locator $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterHorizontal/directional Drill Operator $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterHydralifts/Boom Trucks Over 10 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterHydralifts/boom Trucks, 10 Tons And Under $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterLoader, Overhead 8 Yards. & Over $57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterLoader, Overhead, 6 Yards. But Not Including 8 Yards$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterLoaders, Overhead Under 6 Yards $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterLoaders, Plant Feed $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterLoaders: Elevating Type Belt $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterLocomotives, All $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterMaterial Transfer Device $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterMechanics, All (Leadmen - $0.50 Per Hour Over Mechanic)$57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterMotor Patrol Grader - Non-finishing $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterMotor Patrol Graders, Finishing $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterMucking Machine, Mole, Tunnel Drill, Boring, Road Header And/or Shield$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterOil Distributors, Blower Distribution & Mulch Seeding Operator$53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterOutside Hoists (elevators And Manlifts), Air Tuggers,strato$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterOverhead, Bridge Type Crane: 20 Tons Through 44 Tons$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterOverhead, Bridge Type: 100 Tons And Over $57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterOverhead, Bridge Type: 45 Tons Through 99 Tons $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterPavement Breaker $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterPile Driver (other Than Crane Mount) $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterPlant Oiler - Asphalt, Crusher $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterPosthole Digger, Mechanical $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterPower Plant $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterPumps - Water $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterQuad 9, HD 41, D10 And Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterQuick Tower - No Cab, Under 100 Feet In Height Based To Boom$53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterRemote Control Operator On Rubber Tired Earth Moving Equipment$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterRigger And Bellman $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterRollagon $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterRoller, Other Than Plant Mix $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterRoller, Plant Mix Or Multi-lift Materials $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterRoto-mill, Roto-grinder $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterSaws - Concrete $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterScraper, Self Propelled Under 45 Yards $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterScrapers - Concrete & Carry All $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterScrapers, Self-propelled: 45 Yards And Over $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterService Engineers - Equipment $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterShotcrete/gunite Equipment $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterShovel , Excavator, Backhoe, Tractors Under 15 Metric Tons.$56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterShovel, Excavator, Backhoe: Over 30 Metric Tons To 50 Metric Tons$56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterShovel, Excavator, Backhoes, Tractors: 15 To 30 Metric Tons$56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterShovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 50 Metric Tons To 90 Metric Tons$57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterShovel, Excavator, Backhoes: Over 90 Metric Tons $58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterSlipform Pavers $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterSpreader, Topsider & Screedman $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterSubgrader Trimmer $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTower Bucket Elevators $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTower Crane Over 175'in Height, Base To Boom $58.10 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTower Crane: Up To 175' In Height, Base To Boom $57.51 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTransporters, All Track Or Truck Type $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTrenching Machines $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTruck Crane Oiler/driver - 100 Tons And Over $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTruck Crane Oiler/driver Under 100 Tons $56.00 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterTruck Mount Portable Conveyor $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterWelder $56.94 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterWheel Tractors, Farmall Type $53.57 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Equipment Operators- Underground Sewer & WaterYo Yo Pay Dozer $56.44 7A 3C 8P

Thurston Power Line Clearance Tree Trimmers Journey Level In Charge $45.75 5A 4A

Thurston Power Line Clearance Tree Trimmers Spray Person $43.38 5A 4A

Thurston Power Line Clearance Tree Trimmers Tree Equipment Operator $45.75 5A 4A

Thurston Power Line Clearance Tree Trimmers Tree Trimmer $40.84 5A 4A

Thurston Power Line Clearance Tree Trimmers Tree Trimmer Groundperson $30.74 5A 4A

Thurston Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Mechanics Journey Level $26.64 1

Thurston Residential Brick Mason Journey Level $27.50 1

Thurston Residential Carpenters Journey Level $29.46 1

Thurston Residential Cement Masons Journey Level $14.00 1

Thurston Residential Drywall Applicators Journey Level $40.64 5D 4C

Thurston Residential Drywall Tapers Journey Level $18.00 1

Thurston Residential Electricians Journey Level $28.83 5A 1B

Thurston Residential Glaziers Journey Level $37.30 7L 1H

Thurston Residential Insulation Applicators Journey Level $18.70 1

Thurston Residential Laborers Journey Level $20.00 1

Thurston Residential Marble Setters Journey Level $27.50 1

Thurston Residential Painters Journey Level $18.27 1

Thurston Residential Plumbers & Pipefitters Journey Level $20.40 1

Thurston Residential Refrigeration & Air Conditioning MechanicsJourney Level $26.64 1

Thurston Residential Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level (Field or Shop) $43.46 7F 1R

Thurston Residential Soft Floor Layers Journey Level $16.00 1

Thurston Residential Sprinkler Fitters (Fire Protection) Journey Level $21.67 1

Thurston Residential Stone Masons Journey Level $27.50 1

Thurston Residential Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $9.47 1

Thurston Residential Terrazzo/Tile Finishers Journey Level $17.00 1

Thurston Residential Tile Setters Journey Level $9.47 1

Thurston Roofers Journey Level $45.12 5A 2O

Thurston Roofers Using Irritable Bituminous Materials $48.12 5A 2O

Thurston Sheet Metal Workers Journey Level (Field or Shop) $72.83 7F 1E

Thurston Shipbuilding & Ship Repair Boilermaker $39.82 7M 1H

Thurston Sign Makers & Installers (Electrical) Journey Level $18.04 1

Thurston Sign Makers & Installers (Non-Electrical) Journey Level $15.50 1

Thurston Soft Floor Layers Journey Level $42.88 5A 3D

Thurston Solar Controls For Windows Journey Level $10.31 1

Thurston Sprinkler Fitters (Fire Protection) Journey Level $69.74 5C 1X

Thurston Stage Rigging Mechanics (Non Structural) Journey Level $13.23 1

Thurston Stone Masons Journey Level $52.82 5A 1M

Thurston Street And Parking Lot Sweeper Workers Journey Level $16.00 1

Thurston Surveyors All Classifications $32.43 Null 1

Thurston Telecommunication Technicians Journey Level $22.00 1

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Cable Splicer $37.60 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Hole Digger/Ground Person $20.79 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Installer (Repairer) $36.02 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Special Aparatus Installer I $37.60 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Special Apparatus Installer II $36.82 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Telephone Equipment Operator (Heavy) $37.60 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Telephone Equipment Operator (Light) $34.94 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Telephone Lineperson $34.93 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Television Groundperson $19.73 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Television Lineperson/Installer $26.31 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Television System Technician $31.50 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Television Technician $28.23 5A 2B

Thurston Telephone Line Construction - Outside Tree Trimmer $34.93 5A 2B

Thurston Terrazzo Workers Journey Level $47.46 5A 1M

Thurston Tile Setters Journey Level $47.46 5A 1M

Thurston Tile, Marble & Terrazzo Finishers Finisher $38.29 5A 1B

Thurston Traffic Control Stripers Journey Level $43.73 7A 1K

Thurston Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix Over 16 Yards (W. WA-Joint Council 28)$49.85 5D 3A 8L

Thurston Truck Drivers Asphalt Mix To 16 Yards (W. WA-Joint Council 28) $49.01 5D 3A 8L

Thurston Truck Drivers Dump Truck $17.23 1

Thurston Truck Drivers Dump Truck And Trailer $17.23 1

Thurston Truck Drivers Other Trucks (W. WA-Joint Council 28) $49.85 5D 3A 8L

Thurston Truck Drivers Transit Mixer $29.41 6I 2H

Thurston Well Drillers & Irrigation Pump Installers Irrigation Pump Installer $17.53 1

Thurston Well Drillers & Irrigation Pump Installers Oiler $12.44 1

Thurston Well Drillers & Irrigation Pump Installers Well Driller $18.00 1

NOTICE: If the prime contract is at a cost of over one million dollars ($1,000,000.00), RCW 39.04.370 requires you to complete the EHB 2805 (RCW 39.04.370) Addendum and attach it to

your Affidavit of Wages of Paid when your work on the project concludes. This is only a notice. The EHB 2805 Addendum is not submitted with this Intent.

F700-029-000 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 03-2011

Your Company Information Awarding Agency Information

Your Company Name

Project Name

OLYMPIA COMMONS

Contract Number

Your Address

Awarding Agency

Low Income Housing Institute

City

State

Zip+4

Awarding Agency Address

2407 First Avenue

Your Contractor Registration Number

Your UBI Number

City

Seattle

State

WA

Zip+4

98121

Your Industrial Insurance Account Number

Awarding Agency Contact Name Whitney Rearick

Phone Number

206-443-9935

Your Email Address (required for notification of approval)

Your Phone Number

County Where Work Will Be Performed

Thurston

City Where Work Will Be Performed

Olympia

Additional Details Contract Details

Your Expected Job Start Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

Bid Due Date (Prime Contractor’s)

Award Date (Prime Contractor’s)

Job Site Address/Directions

318 State Avenue, Olympia, WA.

Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract (including sales tax) or indicate time and materials, if applicable.

$

T&M

ARRA Funds Weatherization or Energy Efficient Funds

Does this project utilize American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) funds? Yes No

Does this project utilize any weatherization or energy efficiency upgrade funds (ARRA or otherwise)? Yes No

Prime Contractor’s Company Information

Hiring Contractor’s Company Information

Prime Contractor’s Company Name

Prime Contractor’s Intent Number

Hiring Contractor’s Company Name

Prime Contractor’s Registration Number

Prime Contractor’s UBI Number

Hiring Company’s Contractor Registration Number

Hiring Contractors UBI Number

Employment Information

Do you intend to use ANY subcontractors? Yes No Will employees perform work on this project? Yes No

Will ALL work be subcontracted? Yes No Do you intend to use apprentice employees? Yes No

Number of Owner/Operators who own at least 30% of the company who will perform work on this project: None (0) One (1) Two (2) Three (3)

Crafts/Trades/Occupations – (Do not list apprentices. They are listed on the Affidavit of Wages Paid only.) If an employee works in more than one trade, ensure that all hours worked in each trade are reported below. For additional crafts/trades/occupations please use Addendum A.

Number of

Workers Rate of Hourly

Pay

Rate of Hourly

Usual (“Fringe”)

Benefits

Signature Block

I hereby certify that I have read and understand the instructions to complete this form and that the information, including any addenda, are correct and that all workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries.

Print Name: Print Title: Signature: Date:

For L&I Use Only

Approved by signature of the Department of Labor and Industries Industrial Statistician

• This form must be typed or printed in ink.

• Fill in all blanks or the form will be returned for correction (see instructions).

• Please allow a minimum of 10 working days for processing.

• Once approved, your form will be posted online at https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/pwiapub/SearchFor.asp

Department of Labor and Industries Prevailing Wage (360) 902-5335 www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage

STATEMENT OF INTENT TO

PAY PREVAILING WAGES Public Works Contract

$40.00 Filing Fee Required

Intent ID # (Assigned by L&I)_______________

GuyP

Text Box

00 7346.1

NOTICE: If the prime contract is at a cost of over one million dollars ($1,000,000.00), RCW 39.04.370 requires you to complete the EHB 2805 (RCW 39.04.370) Addendum and attach it to

your Affidavit of Wages of Paid when your work on the project concludes. This is only a notice. The EHB 2805 Addendum is not submitted with this Intent.

NUMBERED - F700-029-000 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 03-2011


Your Company Name

Project Name

Contract Number

Your Address

Awarding Agency

City

State

Zip+4



Your UBI Number

City

State

Zip+4


Awarding Agency Contact Name

Phone Number


Your Phone Number








Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract (including

sales tax) or indicate time and materials, if applicable.

$

T&M


Does this project utilize American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) funds?

Yes No

Does this project utilize any weatherization or energy efficiency upgrade funds

(ARRA or otherwise)? Yes No

Prime Contractor’s Company Information Hiring Contractor’s Company Information






Hiring Contractor’s Contractor Registration Number

Hiring Contractor’s UBI Number




Number of Owner/Operators who own at least 30% of the company who will perform work on this project: None (0) One (1) Two (2) Three (3)

Crafts/Trades/Occupations – (Do not list apprentices. They are listed on the Affidavit of Wages Paid

only.) If an employee works in more than one trade, ensure that all hours worked in each trade are reported

below. For additional crafts/trades/occupations please use Addendum A.

Number of

Workers

Rate of Hourly

Pay

Rate of Hourly


Benefits

Signature Block

I hereby certify that I have read and understand the instructions to complete this form. That the information, including any addendum(s), are correct and that all workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries.


For L&I Use Only

Approved by the Department of Labor and Industries Industrial Statistician






2 1

3 4

6 7

8

9 10 11 12

5





Instructions - F700-029-000 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 03-2011

Department of Labor & Industries

Prevailing Wage Program

P.O. Box 44540

Olympia, Washington 98504-4540

Phone (360) 902-5335 / Fax (360) 902-5300

INSTRUCTIONS

STATEMENT OF INTENT TO PAY

PREVAILING WAGES

FOR PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS

COMPLETE ALL FIELDS ON THE FORM

The numbered blocks in the following instructions correspond to the numbered Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wage

above. In addition a completed sample form (without numbers) is included at the end of these instructions.

1 Your Company Information - Enter the following information:

a) Your Company Name and Address.

b) Your Contractor Registration Number – You can verify this number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Search.aspx.

c) Your UBI Number (Unified Business Identifier) – This 9-digit number registers you with several state agencies and allows you to do business in Washington. You can verify this number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/dol/dolprod/bpdLicenseQuery/.

d) Your Industrial Insurance Account Number – You can verify this number at:

https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/crpsi/MainMenu.aspx?MessageId=2001.

e) Please provide your Email Address so that L&I can notify you of form approval and/or any required corrections. If you do not provide this information, L&I will use standard mail to send you correction notices. You can access approved forms at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/pwiapub/SearchFor.asp. No notice of approval will be mailed.

f) Your company Phone Number.

Awarding Agency Information – Enter the following information regarding the agency that awarded the contract. This information is available from the Prime Contractor:

a) Project Name – This is the name the Awarding Agency assigned to the project.

b) Contract Number – This is the number the Awarding Agency assigned to the project.

c) Awarding Agency – This is the name of the agency that awarded the contract.

d) Please enter the Street Address, City, State and Zip+4 for the Awarding Agency.

e) Awarding Agency Contact Name and Phone Number – Enter the name and phone number of the person the Prime Contractor communicates with at the Awarding Agency.

f) County Where Work Will Be Performed – Enter the name of the county where the work will be performed. If the work will be performed in multiple counties, include the names of all counties where work will be performed.

g) City Where Work Will Be Performed – Enter the name of the city where the work will be performed. If the work will be performed outside the limits of any city, or in multiple cities, include the name of the nearest city.

Additional Details

a) Your Expected Job Start Date – This is the date that you expect to begin work on the project.

b) Job Site Address/Directions – Enter the specific address of the project or provide brief details regarding the location of the site, if no specific address exists.

1

2

3


Contract Details

a) Bid Due Date – Enter the date the Prime Contractor had to submit the bid to the Awarding Agency for this project (mm/dd/yyyy).

• What if my contract was not bid? – If the contract you will be working under was not required to be bid, you will enter the date the contract was awarded.

b) Award Date – This is the date the awarding agency awarded the contract to the Prime Contractor (mm/dd/yyyy).

c) Indicate the Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract – Enter the dollar amount of your contract, including the applicable sales tax. If this is a “time and materials” contract, please indicate this by checking the box next to “T&M.”

ARRA & Weatherization Funding Questions – Enter the information regarding the source of funds. This information should be obtained from the Awarding Agency or the Prime Contractor.

a) Does this project utilize American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) funds?

b) Does this project utilize any weatherization or energy efficiency upgrade funds (ARRA or otherwise)?

Prime Contractor’s Company Information – Enter the information about the contractor who has the direct contract with the Awarding Agency:

a) Prime Contractor’s Company Name – Enter the Prime Contractor’s company name.

b) Prime Contractor’s Intent ID Number – Enter the Prime Contractor’s Approved Intent ID Number.

c) Prime Contractor’s Registration Number – Enter the Contractor Registration Number for the Prime Contractor. You can verify the number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Search.aspx.

d) Prime Contractor’s UBI Number – Enter the UBI number for the Prime Contractor. You can verify this number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/dol/dolprod/bpdLicenseQuery/.

Hiring Contractor’s Company Information – Enter the information about the Hiring Contractor. This is the contractor who hired or contracted your firm to perform work on this project:

a) Hiring Contractor’s Company Name – Enter the company name of the contractor who hired or contracted with your firm to perform work on this project.

b) Hiring Contractor’s Registration Number – Enter the Contractor Registration Number for the contractor who hired you. You can verify the number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Search.aspx.

c) Hiring Contractor’s UBI Number – Enter the UBI Number for the contractor who hired you. You can verify this number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/dol/dolprod/bpdLicenseQuery/.

Employment Information – Enter information about the individuals who will perform work on this project:

a) Do you intend to use subcontractors? – If PART of the work will be performed by subcontractors you will hire, check the “Yes” box.

b) Will employees perform work on this project? - If employees, including apprentices, will perform any work on the project, check the “Yes” box and list each employee’s applicable craft/trade/occupation. Do not list the actual apprentice, just the craft/trade/occupation the apprentice will be working in. Also, please note the information regarding apprentices in “d” below. If you

choose “No” and this changes later, you certify that you will submit a new Intent form listing

workers.

c) Will All work be subcontracted? – If ALL work will be performed by subcontractors, check the “Yes” box.

d) Do you intend to use apprentice employees? – If you plan to employ apprentices on this project please be aware:

o Any workers NOT registered with the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (WSATC) must be paid the correct journey-level prevailing rate of wage.

o Any apprentice NOT registered with the WSATC within 60 days of hiring must be paid at the correct journey-level prevailing rate of wage for the time preceding the date of registration.

4

6

7

8

5


o You must be a registered training agent with the WSATC in order to pay a registered apprentice less than journey-level prevailing rate of wage.

o To verify apprenticeship and/or registered training agent status call (360) 902-5324.

e) Number of Owners/Operators who own at least 30% of the company who will perform work on

this project – Indicate the number of Owners/Operator(s) who will perform work on this project. If no 30%+ Owners/Operators will perform work on the project, check the box “None”.

Crafts/Trades/Occupations – List each craft/trade/occupation of all workers you plan to employ on this project.

� Crafts/Trades/Occupations

If you indicated above that Owners/Operators will work on this project, and you also indicated above that no employees will perform work on the project, or ALL work will be subcontracted, then you do not need to fill in this section. (Individuals who own less than 30% of the company are not considered to be Owners/Operators, and must be listed as employees and paid the correct prevailing rate of wage.)

Use Addendum A for additional Crafts/Trades/Occupations that will not fit on this form.

Residential Construction – If you are using any residential classifications (e.g. Residential Carpenter, Residential Laborer, etc.) you must provide information regarding the following questions, on Addendum C, in order for L&I to determine if residential rates are being utilized appropriately:

1. Did the Awarding Agency, in compliance with RCW 39.12.030, determine that the project/work contracted for meets the definition of residential construction?

2. Please indicate the type of structure (e.g. single-family dwelling, duplex, apartment, condominium or other residential structure).

3. Including any basement or garage, how many stories or levels does the structure have?

4. What is the facility used for? - Answer “yes” or “no” to each of the following options:

a. Permanent residence only?

b. Rehabilitation house?

c. Transitional housing?

d. Communal dining facility?

e. Treatment services?

f. Counseling?

g. Other?

5. Does each dwelling unit have its own full, self-contained kitchen?

6. Does each dwelling unit have its own full bathroom?

7. Is there a community facility or manager’s office on site?

8. Is any part of the facility used by members of the public?

Landscape Construction – If you are using “Landscape Construction” or any of the sub-classifications within Landscape Construction (e.g., Landscape or Planting Laborer, Irrigation or Lawn Sprinkler Installers, or Landscape Equipment Operators or Truck Drivers) you must provide information on Addendum C regarding the following aspects of the work in order for L&I to determine if you are appropriately applying Landscape Construction rates:

1. The beautification of a plot of land through addition of or modification to lawns, trees and bushes under the Landscape Construction Scope of Work (WAC 296-127-01346) is a limited universe and has exclusions that may affect its application. Please provide L&I with the following information so we can verify whether the landscape construction wage rates apply to this project.

a. Please describe the whole project – not just your part.

b. Please describe your part(s) of the project – the tasks you performed, equipment used, and tools used. Please provide as much detail as you can.

9


c. If the project involves installing an irrigation system, trenching, installing French drains or other subsurface water collection systems, or spreading top soil or mulch, please tell us the relevant depths.

2. If Operating Engineers and/or Truck Drivers will be used in addition to Landscape Construction, describe the type of equipment used, and list the size or rated capacity of the equipment.

Number of Workers – Enter the number of journey-level workers you plan to employ on this project for that craft/trade/occupation.

Rate of Hourly Pay – Enter the rate of hourly pay as defined by RCW 39.12.010, that you will actually pay the worker(s) for that craft/trade/occupation. The amount listed for “Rate of Hourly Pay” plus the amount listed for the “Rate of Hourly Fringe Benefits,” if any, must equal or exceed the applicable prevailing rate of wage.

Rate of Hourly Usual (“Fringe”) Benefits – Enter the rate of hourly Usual (“fringe”) Benefits for that craft/trade/occupation. This is the cost of usual benefits, as defined by RCW 39.12.010, that you will actually pay the worker(s). The amount listed for “Rate of Hourly Pay” plus the amount listed for “Rate of Hourly Usual (“Fringe”) Benefits,” if any, must equal or exceed the applicable prevailing rate of wage.

If there is not enough space to list all required information on one form, use the appropriate Addendum as needed. No

additional fee is required for using Addendums to the form. No other attachments will be accepted.

L&I’s approval of your Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages is based on the information you provide. Approval of the

form does not signify that the classifications of labor you listed on the form are the correct classifications of work for the tasks

performed on the public works project. It is your responsibility to pay workers the prevailing rate of wage for the

classification of work that correctly applies to the actual work they perform.

Be sure to include your email address on the form. If you do not provide this information, L&I will use standard mail to

send you correction notices. You will be able to access approved forms at:

https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/pwiapub/SearchFor.asp (No notice of approval will be mailed).

Prevailing wage rates are available on the Internet at:

http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates/default.asp

FURTHER INFORMATION

Make checks payable to:

Department of Labor and Industries

If you have questions or would like assistance

in completing the form, please call us at

(360) 902-5335 or email the Prevailing

Wage office at [email protected].

MAILING INSTRUCTIONS

You must mail the completed and signed

form with original signature (a photocopy

of a signature will not be accepted) with the

$40 filing fee to:

Management Services



PO Box 44835

Olympia, WA 98504-4835

10

11

12

NOTICE: If the prime contract is at a cost of over one million dollars ($1,000,000.00), RCW 39.04.370 requires you to complete the EHB 2805 (RCW 39.04.370) Addendum and attach it

to your Affidavit of Wages of Paid when your work on the project concludes. This is only a notice. The EHB 2805 Addendum is not submitted with this Intent.

SAMPLE - F700-029-000 Statement of Intent to Pay Prevailing Wages 03-2011


Your Company Name

ABC Company, Inc.

Project Name

Road Repair

Contract Number

2011-01B

Your Address

1234 Main Street

Awarding Agency

WA State Department of Transportation

City

Olympia

State

WA

Zip+4

98501-1234


PO Box 47354


ABCCI*0123AA

Your UBI Number

123456789

City

Olympia

State

WA

Zip+4

98501


111,111-11


John Doe

Phone Number

(555) 555-5555


[email protected]

Your Phone Number

(555) 555-5555


Thurston


Olympia



01/01/2011


08/01/2010


08/10/2010


State Street @ Plum Street

Indicate Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract (including

sales tax) or time and materials, if applicable.

$1000.00


Does this project utilize American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) funds?

Yes No

Does this project utilize any weatherization or energy efficiency upgrade funds

(ARRA or otherwise)? Yes No



XYZ Company, Inc.


123456


Super Pavers, Inc.


XYZIN*0123AA


987654321

Hiring Contractor’s Contractor Registration Number

SUPERPA123AA


321456987




Number of Owner/Operators who own at least 30% of the company who will perform work on the project: None (0) One (1) Two (2) Three (3)

Crafts/Trades/Occupations – (Do not list apprentices. They are listed on the Affidavit of Wages Paid only.)

If an employee works in more than one trade, ensure that all hours worked in each trade are reported below.

For additional crafts/trades/occupations please use Addendum A.

Number of

Workers

Rate of Hourly

Pay

Rate of Hourly


Benefits

Laborer - Asphalt Raker 2 39.28 5.00

Power Equipment Operator - Asphalt Plant Operator 1 48.04 2.35

Truck Driver - Asphalt Mix (over 16 Yds) 1 46.47 0.00

Signature Block

I hereby certify that I have read and understand the instructions to complete this form and that the information, including any addenda, are correct and that all workers I employ on this Public Works Project will be paid no less than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries.


For L&I Use Only

Approved by signature of the Department of Labor and Industries Industrial Statistician










F700-007-000 Affidavit of Wages Paid 06-2014

Department of Labor and Industries Prevailing Wage Program (360) 902-5335 www.Lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/default.asp

This form must be typed or printed in ink. Fill in ALL blanks or the form will be returned for correction (see instructions). Please allow a minimum of 10 business days for processing. Once approved, your form will be posted online at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/wagelookup/searchforms.aspx

Affidavit of Wages Paid

Public Works Contract $40.00 Filing Fee Required*

*Exemption may apply. See instruction 9.

Affidavit ID # (Assigned by L&I):

#


Your Company Name

Project Name

OLYMPIA COMMONS

Contract Number

Your Company Address

Awarding Agency

LOW INCOME HOUSING INSTITUTE

City

State

Zip+4

-


2407 FIRST AVENUE


Your UBI Number

City

SEATTLE

State

WA

Zip+4

98121 -



WHITNEY REARICK

Phone Number

206-443-9935


Your Phone Number

County Where Work Was

Performed THURSTON

City Where Work Was Performed OLYMPIA


Your Job Start Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

/ /

Your Date Work Completed (mm/dd/yyyy)

/ /




318 State Avenue Olympia, WA.

Your Approved Intent ID #

Indicate Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract (including sales tax). $

EHB 2805 (RCW 39.04.370) – Is the Prime Contractor’s contract at a cost of over one million dollars ($1,000,000)?

No

Yes

If “Yes” to the EHB 2805 question and the Award Date is 9/1/2010 or later you must complete and submit the EHB 2805 (RCW 39.04.370) Addendum.









Hiring Contractor’s Registration Number



Did you use ANY subcontractors? Yes (Addendum B Required) No Did employees perform work on this project?

Yes No

Was ALL work subcontracted? Yes (Addendum B Required) No Did you use apprentice employees? Yes No

Number of Owner/Operators who own at least 30% of the company who performed work on this project: You must list the First and Last Name(s) of any Owner/Operator performing work below

None (0) One (1) Two (2) Three (3)

List your Crafts/Trades/Occupations Below - For Journey Level Workers you must provide all of the information below. Owner/Operators - must provide their First and Last name no other information required. **Apprentices are not recorded below. You must use Addendum D to list Apprentices.

Number of Workers

Total # of Hours

Worked

Rate of Hourly Pay

Rate of Hourly Usual

(“Fringe”) Benefits

Signature Block I hereby certify that I have read and understand the instructions to complete this form and that the information on the form and any addenda is correct and that all workers I employed on this Public Works Project were paid no less than the Prevailing Wage Rate(s) as determined by the Industrial Statistician of the Department of Labor and Industries.


For L&I Use Only


APPROVED BY: Industrial Statistician

GuyP

Text Box

00 7346.2

F700-007-000 Affidavit of Wages Paid







#

Your Company Information 1 Awarding Agency Information 2

Your Company Name

Project Name

Contract Number


Awarding Agency

City

State

Zip+4



Your UBI Number

City

State

Zip+4



Phone Number

Your Email Address (required for notification of approval) Your Phone Number County Where Work Was

Performed

City Where Work Was Performed

Additional Details 3 Contract Details 4

Your Job Start Date (mm/dd/yyyy) Your Date Work Completed (mm/dd/yyyy) Bid Due Date (Prime Contractor’s)




Indicate Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract (including sales tax). $


No

Yes


5

ARRA Funds 6 Weatherization or Energy Efficient Funds 6



Prime Contractor’s Company Information 7 Hiring Contractor’s Company Information 8





Hiring Contractor’s Registration Number Hiring Contractor’s UBI Number

Employment Information 9


Yes No





Number of Workers

Total # of Hours

Worked

Rate of Hourly Pay



10 11 12 13 14



For L&I Use Only






P.O. Box 44540

Olympia, Washington 98504-4540

Phone (360) 902-5335 / Fax (360) 902-5300

COMPLETE ALL FIELDS ON THE FORM

The numbered blocks in the following instructions correspond to the numbered blocks on the numbered Affidavit of Wages Paid above. In addition, a completed sample form (without numbers) is included

at the end of these instructions.

1 Your Company Information – Enter the following information:

a) Your Company Name and Address.

b) Your Contractor Registration Number – You can verify this number at: http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/Contractors/HireCon/

c) Your UBI Number (Unified Business Identifier) – This 9-digit number registers you with several state agencies and allows you to do business in Washington. You can verify this number at: http://www.bls.dor.wa.gov/LicenseSearch/

d) Your Industrial Insurance Account Number – You can verify this number at:

https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/crpsi/MainMenu.aspx?MessageId=2001

e) Please provide your Email Address so that L&I can notify you of form approval and/or any required corrections. If you do not provide this information, L&I will use standard mail to send you correction notices. You can access approved forms at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/wagelookup/searchforms.aspx

f) No notice of approval will be mailed.

g) Your company Phone Number.

2 Awarding Agency Information – Enter the following information regarding the agency that awarded the contract. This information is available from the Prime Contractor:

a) Project Name – This is the name the Awarding Agency assigned to the project.

b) Contract Number – This is the number the Awarding Agency assigned to the project.

c) Awarding Agency – This is the name of the agency that awarded the contract.

d) Please enter the Street Address, City, State and Zip+4 of the Awarding Agency.

e) Awarding Agency Contact Name and Phone Number – Enter the name and phone number of the person the Prime Contractor communicates with at the Awarding Agency.

f) County Where Work Was Performed – Enter the name of the county where the work was performed. If the work was performed in multiple counties, include the names of all counties where work was performed.

g) City Where Work Was Performed – Enter the name of the city where the work was performed. If the work was performed outside the limits of any city, or in multiple cities, include the name of the nearest city.

3 Additional Details

a) Your Job Start Date – This is the date that you began work on the project.

b) Your Date Work Completed – This is the date you completed work on the project. You cannot have a date in the future.

c) Job Site Address/Directions – Enter the specific address of the project or provide brief details regarding the location of the site, if no specific address exists.

d) Your Approved Intent ID # – Enter the 6-digit number, assigned by L&I, from the approved Intent form filed for this project.

INSTRUCTIONS AFFIDAVIT OF

WAGES PAID FOR PUBLIC

WORKS CONTRACTS


INSTRUCTIONS (Cont.)

4 Contract Details

a) Bid Due Date – Enter the date the Prime Contractor had to submit a bid to the Awarding Agency for this project (mm/dd/yyyy).

• What if my contract was not bid? – If the contract you are working under was not required to be bid, you will enter the date the contract was awarded.

b) Award Date – This is the date the Awarding Agency awarded the contract to the Prime Contractor (mm/dd/yyyy).

c) Indicate the Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract – Enter the total amount of your contract, including the applicable sales tax. You must enter the final amount of your contract. You cannot enter Time and Materials on an Affidavit of Wages Paid.

5 EHB 2805 (RCW 39.04.370) - F700-164-000 is an addendum to your Affidavit of Wages Paid Form. RCW 39.04.370 requires you to complete form F700-164-000 for contracts entered into between September 1, 2010 and December 31, 2013 if the Prime’s contract is at a cost of over one million dollars ($1,000,000). If you fail to properly provide the requested information more than one time between September 1, 2010 and December 31, 2013, pursuant to RCW 39.04.350(1)(f) you will not be considered a responsible bidder qualified to be awarded a public works project. Use as many of these forms as you need in order to provide the requested information for all relevant project items. This is an addendum to form F700-007-000.

6 ARRA & Weatherization Funding Questions – Enter the information regarding the source of funds. This information should be obtained from the Awarding Agency or the Prime Contractor.

a) Does this project utilize American Recovery and Reinvestment Act (ARRA) funds?

b) Does this project utilize any weatherization or energy efficiency upgrade funds (ARRA or otherwise)?

7 Prime Contractor’s Company Information – Enter information about the contractor who has the direct contract with the Awarding Agency:

a) Prime Contractor’s Company Name – Enter the Prime Contractor’s company name.

b) Prime Contractor’s Registration Number – Enter the Contractor Registration Number for the Prime Contractor. You can verify the number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Search.aspx.

c) Prime Contractor’s UBI Number – Enter the UBI number for the Prime Contractor. You can verify this number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/dol/dolprod/bpdLicenseQuery/.

8 Hiring Contractor’s Company Information – Enter the information about the Hiring Contractor. This is the contractor who hired or contracted your firm to perform work on this project:

a) Hiring Contractor’s Company Name – Enter the name of the contractor who hired or contracted your firm to perform work on this project.

b) Hiring Contractor’s Registration Number – Enter the Contractor Registration Number for the contractor who hired you. You can verify the number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/bbip/Search.aspx.

c) Hiring Contractor’s UBI Number – Enter the UBI Number for the contractor who hired you. You can verify this number at: https://fortress.wa.gov/dol/dolprod/bpdLicenseQuery/.


9 Employment Information – Enter information about the individuals who performed work on this project:

a) Did you use any subcontractors? - If PART of the work was performed by subcontractors you hired, check the “Yes” box and complete Addendum B.

b) Did employees perform work on this project? - If employees, including apprentices, performed any work on the project, check the “Yes” box and list each employee’s applicable craft/trade/occupation. If you utilized apprentices on this project you must complete Addendum D.

c) Was ALL work subcontracted? - If ALL work was performed by subcontractors, check the “Yes” box and complete Addendum B.

d) Did you use apprentice employees? – If you used apprentices on this project please be aware:

1. Any workers NOT registered with the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (WSATC) must be paid the correct journey-level prevailing rate of wage.

2. Any apprentice NOT registered with the WSATC within 60 days of hiring must be paid at the correct journey-level prevailing rate of wage for the time preceding the date of registration.

3. You MUST be a registered training agent with the WSATC in order to pay a registered apprentice less than journey-level prevailing rate of wage.

4. To verify apprenticeship and/or registered training agent status call (360) 902-5324.

e) Number of Owners/Operators who own at least 30% of the company who performed work on the project – Indicate the number of Owners/Operators who performed work on the project. If no 30%+ Owners/Operators performed work on the project, check the box “None”.

NOTICE: If no employees performed work subject to Washington’s prevailing wage

requirements, check no on this question, and your form may be submitted without

payment. For more information, see our website at

http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/IntentAffidavits/File/default.asp

F700-007-000 Affidavit of Wages Paid 06-2014

10 Crafts/Trades/Occupations and Apprentices – List the craft/trade/occupation of each worker, journey-level and apprentice, employed on this project.

� Crafts/Trades/Occupations

If you indicated above that Owners/Operators worked on this project, and you also indicated above that no employees performed work on the project, and that ALL work was subcontracted, then you do not need to fill in this section. Individuals who own less than 30% of the company are not considered Owner/Operators under RCW 39.12 and must be listed as employees and paid at least the prevailing rate of wage for the work performed

Use Addendum A for additional Crafts/Trades/Occupations that will not fit on this form.

Residential Construction - If you are using any residential classifications (e.g. Residential Carpenter, Residential Laborer, etc.) you must provide information regarding the following questions, on Addendum C, in order for L&I to determine if residential rates are being utilized appropriately:

1. Did the Awarding Agency, in compliance with RCW 39.12.030, determine that the project meets the definition of residential construction?

2. Please indicate the type of structure (e.g. single-family dwelling, duplex, apartment, condominium or other residential structure).

3. Including any basement or garage, how many stories or levels does the structure have?

4. What is the facility used for (answer “yes” or “no” to each of the following options)?:

a. Permanent residence only?

b. Rehabilitation house?

c. Transitional housing?

d. Communal dining facility?

e. Treatment services?

f. Counseling?

g. Other?

5. Does each dwelling unit have its own full, self-contained kitchen?

6. Does each dwelling unit have its own full bathroom?

7. Is there a community facility or manager’s office on site?

8. Is any part of the facility used by members of the public?

Landscape Construction - If you are using “Landscape Construction” or any of the sub-classifications within Landscape Construction (e.g. Landscape or Planting Laborer, Irrigation or Lawn Sprinkler Installers, Landscape Equipment Operators or Truck Drivers) you must provide information regarding the following questions, on Addendum C, in order for L&I to determine if Landscape Construction rates are being utilized appropriately:

1. The beautification of a plot of land through addition of or modification to lawns, trees and bushes under the Landscape Construction Scope of work (WAC 296-127-01346) is a limited universe and has exclusions that may affect its application. Please provide L&I with more information so we can verify whether the landscape construction wage rates apply to this project.

a. Please describe the whole project – not just your part.

b. Please describe your part(s) of the project –the tasks you performed, equipment used, and tools used. Please provide as much detail as you can.

c. If the project involves installing an irrigation system, trenching, installing French drains or other subsurface water collection systems, or spreading top soil or mulch, please tell us the relevant depths.

2. If Equipment Operators and/or Truck Drivers were used, describe the type, and list the size or rated capacity of the equipment.


Crafts/Trades/Occupations and Apprentices (Cont.)

Apprentices – If you employed apprentices on this project, list each apprentice by Name, Registration Number, Trade, the number of hours the individual had completed in the program when they started work (Beginning Hours) and ended work (Ending Hours) on the project, Beginning and Ending dates of work performed on this project, and Rate of Hourly Pay and Usual (“Fringe”) Benefits.

1. Any workers NOT registered with the Washington State Apprenticeship and Training Council (WSATC) must be paid the correct journey-level prevailing rate of wage.

2. Any apprentice NOT registered with the WSATC within 60 days of hiring must be paid at the correct journey-level prevailing rate of wage for the time preceding the date of registration.

3. You MUST be a registered training agent with the WSATC in order to pay a registered apprentice less than journey-level prevailing rate of wage.

4. To verify apprenticeship and/or registered training agent status call (360) 902-5366.

11 Number of Workers – Enter the number of journey-level workers employed on this project for that

craft/trade/occupation.

12 Total Number of Hours Worked – Enter the number of hours worked for that Craft/Trade/Occupation.

13 Rate of Hourly Pay – Enter the rate of hourly pay, as defined by RCW 39.12.010, that you actually paid the workers for

that Craft/Trade/Occupation. The amount listed for “Rate of Hourly Pay” plus the amount listed for the “Rate of Hourly

Fringe Benefits,” if any, must equal or exceed the applicable prevailing rate of wage.

14 Rate of Hourly Usual (“Fringe”) Benefits – Enter the rate of hourly fringe benefits for that Craft/Trade/Occupation. This is the cost of fringe benefits, as defined by RCW 39.12.010, that you actually paid to the workers. The amount listed for “Rate of Hourly Pay” plus the amount listed for “Rate of Hourly Usual (“Fringe”) Benefits,” if any, must equal or exceed the applicable prevailing rate of wage.

If there is not enough space to list all required information on one form, use the appropriate Addendum as needed. No additional fee is required for using Addendums to the form. No other attachments will be accepted.

Be sure to include your email address on the form. If you do not provide this information, L&I will use standard mail to

send you correction notices. You will be able to access approved forms at: https://fortress.wa.gov/lni/wagelookup/searchforms.aspx

Prevailing wage rates are available on the Internet at:

http://www.lni.wa.gov/TradesLicensing/PrevWage/WageRates/default.asp

(No notice of approval will be mailed).

L&I approval of your Affidavit of Wages Paid is based on the information you provide. Approval of the form does

not signify that the classifications of labor you listed on the form are the correct classifications of work for the

tasks performed on the public works project. It is your responsibility to pay workers the prevailing rate of wage for

the classification of work that correctly applies to the actual work they perform.

MAILING INSTRUCTIONS

You must mail the completed and signed form

with original signature (a photocopy of a

signature will not be accepted) with the $40

filing fee, if applicable*, to:

Management Services



PO Box 44835

Olympia, WA 98504-4835

FURTHER INFORMATION

Make checks payable to:


If you have questions or would like assistance in

completing the form, please call us at (360) 902-

5335 or email the Prevailing Wage office at

[email protected].








# WA67554-9090


Your Company Name

ABC Company

Project Name

Road Repair

Contract Number

123-456


1234 Main Street

Awarding Agency

WA St Department of Transportation

City

Olympia

State

WA

Zip+4

98501-1234


PO Box 123


ABCCI*0123AA

Your UBI Number

123456789

City

Olympia

State

WA

Zip+4

98501


111,111-11


John Doe

Phone Number

(555) 555-5555


[email protected]

Your Phone Number

(555) 555-5555

County Where Work Was

Performed Thurston

City Where Work Was Performed Olympia


Your Job Start Date (mm/dd/yyyy)

2/1/2011

Your Date Work Completed (mm/dd/yyyy)

3/1/2011

Bid Due Date (Prime Contractor’s) 1/1/2011

Award Date (Prime Contractor’s) 1/5/2011


Plum and State Street


123456

Indicate Total Dollar Amount of Your Contract (including sales tax). $ $10,000.00


No

Yes







XYZ Company


CBA Company


XYZCI*0123AA


987654321

Hiring Contractor’s Registration Number

CBACI*0123AA

Hiring Contractor’s UBI Number 456789123



Yes No





Number of Workers

Total # of Hours

Worked

Rate of Hourly Pay



General Labor 2 153 41.23 8.54

Carpenter 5 210 52.26 10.13



For L&I Use Only




SPECIAL CONDITIONS 00 7400 - 1

SECTION 00 7400 – SPECIAL CONDITIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 BIDDING PROCEDURES

A. The Contractor will make all arrangements for securing material and sub-bids, issuing and recovering necessary bid documents except those that may have been distributed to the Plan Centers by the Owner.

B. The Contractor represents that all bids submitted for this project are based on the materials, systems and equipment required by the documents, unless specific exception is made.

1.2 DRAWING AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Wording of Specifications: Some of these specifications are of the abbreviated type and include incomplete sentences. Words such as “shall,” “The Contractor shall,” “shall be,” and similar mandatory phrases shall be supplied by inference in the same manner as they are in a note on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide all items, articles, materials, and operations listed, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidental required for their completion.

B. Division, Section, & Paragraph Numbering: Numbering and lettering of sections and paragraphs in these specifications are merely for identification. Sections included are listed in the “Table of Contents,” together with the number of pages in each section. The Contractor shall check the copies of the specifications with the index to be sure they are complete.

C. Number of Specified Items Required: Wherever in these specifications an article, device, or piece of equipment is referred to in a singular number, such reference shall apply to as many such articles are shown on the drawings or required to complete the installation. Wherever items on the drawings are symmetrical about a centerline or the same in a repetitive situation, reference to one applies to all.

D. Dimensions Govern: Do not scale drawings. Contractor is to verify all dimensions in the field with respect to existing or adjacent work. If dimensions are not shown, or calculations of dimensions which are shown are in conflict, the contractor shall inform the Architect immediately, prior to doing the work. If the Contractor proceeds with the work in conflict, and if the conflict cannot be resolved without negatively impacting other work, he must remove such work at no extra cost to the Owner.

E. Conflicts in Drawings and Specifications 1. Conflicts in the architectural, structural, mechanical, electrical, civil, landscape or

other drawings or conflicts between any drawings and the specification shall be



brought immediately to the attention of the Architect. The Architect will make final decisions concerning conflicts and omissions. If the Contractor proceeds with work knowing that the work is in conflict, he must remove such work at no extra cost to the Owner.

2. Bidders and sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the bidding documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least 7 days prior to the date or receipt of bids.

3. Any interpretation, correction, or change of the bidding documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections or changes of the bidding documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and bidders shall not rely upon such interpretations, corrections, and changes.

F. Substitutions 1. Except where noted “or approved equal”, no substitutions will be considered. 2. The burden of proof of the merit and quality of the proposed substitute is upon the

proposer. The Architect’s decision of acceptability of a proposed substitution shall be final.

1.3 CONTRACTOR PROJECT MANAGEMENT

A. Superintendence of Subcontractors: Each subcontractor will be represented on the jobsite by a supervisor who will introduce himself to the General Superintendent. Subcontractor’s supervisors must have, for their use on the site, a copy of the plans, shop drawings, and specifications pertaining to their work. These documents must be studied before and during the progress of their work.

A sample of each phase of their work will be inspected by the General Superintendent and the Architect before proceeding.

If materials being used are defective or not as specified, and if workmanship is not according to the best practice of their trade, it will be the General Superintendent’s responsibility to immediately curtail the operation until corrective measures are taken.

B. Architect-Contractor Communications: All communications will be between the Architect or his authorized agent (field representative) and the General Contractor or his authorized agent (Job Superintendent). The Architect shall not communicate directly with subcontractors without the knowledge and approval of the Contractor. Subcontractors and material suppliers shall not contact the Architect without prior knowledge and approval of the Contractor. Contractor or subcontractors shall not communicate directly with other engineering design consultants without prior knowledge of the Contractor and the Architect. Both Contractor and Architect shall keep the Owner advised of communications as appropriate.



1.4 SAFETY

A. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours.

The duty of the Architect to conduct construction review of the Contractor’s performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor’s safety measure, in, on, or near the construction site.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not Used)


Olympia Commons

Seattle, Washington

Non-Collusion Affidavit of Prime Bidder/Subcontractor

, being the first duly sworn, deposes and says that:

1. He/she is of

(Owner, partner, etc.) (Company)

the Bidder that has submitted the attached Bid;

2. He/she is fully informed respecting the preparation and contents of the attached Bid and of all

pertinent circumstances respecting such Bid;

3. Such Bid is genuine and is not a collusive or sham Bid;

4. Neither the said Bidder nor any of its officers, partners, owners, subcontractors, agents,

representatives, employees or parties in interest including this affiant, has in any way colluded,

conspired, connived or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any other Bidder, firm or person to

submit a sham Bid in connection with the Contract for which the attached Bid has been submitted

or to refrain from bidding in connection with such Contract, or has in any manner, directly or

indirectly sought by agreement or collusion or communication or conference with any other

Bidder, firm or person to fix price or prices in the attached Bid or of any other Bidder, or to fix

overhead, profit or cost element of the bid price or the bid price of any other bidder, or to secure

through any collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement and advantage against the

Washington State Housing Finance Commission, the Washington State Department of Commerce,

or the owner of the property interested in the proposed contract;

5. The price of prices quoted in the attached Bid are fair and proper and are not tainted by any

collusion, conspiracy, connivance or unlawful agreement on the part of the Bidder or any of its

agents, representatives, owners, employees or parties in interest including this affiant;

7. I have read and understand the attached document entitles “Additional Eligibility Requirement

of Contractors Who Bid on Community Development Funded Projects and Contracts”, and affirms

that the Bidder meets the Eligibility Requirements and agree(s) to comply with the terms and

conditions contained as the date hereof;

8. I am/The Bidder is not indebted to the Low Income Housing Institute in any form or manner.

Signature: Date:

Title: Witness:

GuyP

Text Box

NON-COLLUSION AFFADAVIT OF PRIME BIDDER/SUBCONTRACTOR 00 8000



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 1

SECTION 01 1000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Project information. 2. Work covered by Contract Documents. 3. Phased construction. 4. Work under separate contracts. 5. Access to site. 6. Coordination with occupants. 7. Work restrictions. 8. Specification and drawing conventions. 9. Miscellaneous provisions.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Owner's facilities.

1.2 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification:

1. Project Location: 318 State Avenue NE, Olympia, WA 98105. 2. Project Description: A new 4-story wood frame construction of 43 residential units and

amenity spaces on a vacant site.

B. Project Team:

Owner/ Olympia Development, LLC Developer 2407 First Avenue, Suite 200 Seattle, WA 98121 Contact: Whitney Rearick Phone: (206) 957-8055 E-mail: [email protected] Architect Bumgardner Architects 2111 Third Avenue Seattle, WA 98121 Contact: Mancong Lin Phone: (206) 223-1361



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 2

E-mail: [email protected] Contractor Pavilion Construction 4700 SW Macadam Avenue, Suite 200 Portland, OR 97239 Contact: Rodney Huschka Phone: (503) 797-3348 E-mail: [email protected] Structural Swenson Say Faget Engineer 2124 Third Avenue, Suite 100 Seattle, WA 98121 Contact: Jocelyn Tetreault Phone: (206) 443-6212 E-mail: [email protected] Surveyor Hatton Godat Pantier 3910 Martin Way E, Suite B Olympia, WA 98506 Contact: Jeff Pantier Phone: (360) 943-1599 Email: [email protected] Civil Hatton Godat Pantier Engineer 3910 Martin Way E, Suite B Olympia, WA 98506 Contact: Steve Hatton Phone: (360) 943-1599 E-mail: [email protected] Landscape Susan Black & Associates 3645 Wallingford Avenue North Seattle, WA 98103 Contact: Susan Black Phone: (206) 789-2133 E-mail: [email protected]

Geotech PanGEO 3213 Eastlake Avenue East, Suite B Seattle, WA 98102 Contact: Michael Xue Phone: (206) 262-0370 E-mail: [email protected]



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 3

Water- Wetherholt & Associates proofing 2633A Parkmont Lane SW, Suite A-1 Olympia, WA 98502 Contact: Bob Card Phone: (360) 786-1660 E-mail: [email protected]

C. Architect’s Project Information Management System:

1. Project coordination and communication will be performed via Newforma project information management (PIM) software. No other PIM software (e.g. Prolog) will be used by the Contractor for the extent of the work.

1.3 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:

1. Demolition of an existing one story commercial structure, two residences, and construction of a new mixed-use structure with ground level and below grade parking, street level retail, and four levels of residential uses above. Work will also include related site improvements.

B. The Work includes all labor and materials necessary for the complete construction of the Project as noted above, exception only those items specifically shown as “Not In Contract” (NIC), or “By Owner”, “By Others”, or as noted below:

1. Trash/Recycle dumpster bins and towing tractor: By Owner.

1.4 WORK UNDER SEPARATE CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or other contracts. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.

B. Retail tenant improvements shall be under separate contracts. Those operations may be conducted concurrently with work under this Contract, once the shell is complete.

C. Separate contracts will be issued to others including the following:

1. Telephone Systems to the property line will be provided by the Owner. Distribution necessary to provide service to designated residential units and stub empty conduit for retail tenants is part of the Work.

2. Security Systems Monitoring, if any. 3. Tenant improvements where noted. 4. Cable (Broadband) service to be provided to designated residential level

communications rooms by the Owner.



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 4

5. Electrical utility work performed by Puget Sound Energy.

1.5 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during construction period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain other contractors on portions of Project.

1.6 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES

A. The Contractor's use of the premises is limited only by the Owner's right to perform construction operations with its own forces, to employ separate contractors on portions of the project, and provision of access to businesses operating on adjacent sites.

1.7 OWNER’S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Owner Occupancy of Completed Areas of Construction: Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of building, before Substantial Completion, provided such occupancy does not interfere with completion of the Work. Such placement of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work.

1. Obtain a Certificate of Occupancy from authorities having jurisdiction before Owner occupancy.

2. Before partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational, and required tests and inspections shall be successfully completed. On occupancy, Owner will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of building.

3. On occupancy, Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for occupied portions of building.

B. Tenant Improvements: The Owner may bid and award separate contracts for retail tenant improvements. The intent of all tenant improvement work is to start this work as soon as possible without disrupting the logical sequence of the shell and core contract, but prior to substantial completion, if possible.

C. Scheduling: The Contractor will add the tenant improvements to the project schedule to establish a probable start date, and will coordinate the schedule timelines as established between the Owner and retail tenants.

1.8 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF THE SITE

A. General: Administer allocation of available space equitably among trades and other contractors needing access and space so as to produce best overall efficiency in



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 5

performance of total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

B. Storage and staging of materials for preparation of installation shall be on a job site location and/or Contractor provided bonded warehouse, approved by the Owner.

C. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.

1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

D. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work to normal business working hours allowed by the City of Seattle.

E. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to adjacent occupied buildings.

1. Notify Architect not less than two days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Architect's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

F. Nonsmoking Building: Smoking is not permitted within the building or within 25 feet of entrances, operable windows, or outdoor-air intakes.

G. Controlled Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.9 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows:

1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase.

2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products:

1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections.

2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations.



SUMMARY 01 1000 - 6

3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)




SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 01 2500 - 1

SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.


1. Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements: Requirements for selecting and submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers, product delivery, storage, and handling, and product warranties.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contractor after award of the Contract are considered requests for "substitutions." The following are not considered substitutions:

1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to requirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Owner or Architect. 3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract

Documents. 4. The Contractor's determination of and compliance with governing regulations and

orders issued by governing authorities.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Request Submittal: 1. Submit 1 original hardcopy and 1 digital PDF file of each request for substitution for

consideration. Submit requests in the form and in accordance with procedures required for Change Order proposals and using the Substitution Request Form. A copy of the Substitution Request Form is bound in this volume (attached to this section).

2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documentation showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following information, as appropriate:




a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed

to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting

test results for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect

for Project, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements

in the Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may

subsequently become necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: Within 1 to 2 weeks of receipt of the request for substitution, the Architect will request additional information or documentation necessary for evaluation of the request. Within 2 weeks of receipt of the request, or one week of receipt of the additional information or documentation, whichever is later, after consulting with the Owner, the Architect will notify the Contractor of acceptance or rejection of the proposed substitution. If a decision on use of a proposed substitute cannot be made or obtained within the time allocated, use the product specified by name. Acceptance will be in the form of a Change Order.

B. Comparable Product Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed




comparable product request within fifteen (15) days of receipt of request, or seven (7) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within sixty (60) days prior to installation of said material. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: The Contractor's substitution request will be received and considered by the Architect only when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Architect; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements.

1. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly.

2. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a governing authority, and the requested substitution can be approved.

3. A substantial advantage is offered the Owner, in terms of cost, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Owner may be required to bear. Additional responsibilities for the Owner may include additional compensation to the Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by the Owner or separate Contractors, and similar considerations.

4. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is compatible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will overcome the incompatibility.

5. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated.

6. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty.

C. In addition, the following must also be true:




1. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 2. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contract Documents. 3. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted.

D. The Contractor's submittal and Architect's acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute approval.



Attached: Substitution Form




SECTION 01 2500 - SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

SUBMITTED TO: BUMGARDNER 2111 THIRD AVENUE SEATTLE, WA 98121 PROJECT: Olympia Commons 318 State Avenue NE, Olympia, WA 98105.

Subcontractor Requesting Substitution:

SPECIFIED ITEM: SECTION NO. PARAGRAPH NO. DESCRIPTION OF SPECIFIED ITEM The undersigned requests consideration for following substitution to that specified. PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:

ATTACHED DATA

Include complete dimensional information and technical data, laboratory tests, product description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance, and test data as necessary for evaluation. Clearly identify proposed substitution and portions of data from other items where more than one item is described. Include description of changes to Contract Documents required by proposed substitution. See Section 01600 – Product Requirements for detailed requirements.

Include complete information on changes to Drawings and Specifications which proposed substitution will require for its proper installation.

Submit with request all necessary samples and substantiating data to prove equal quality, perfor-mance, and appearance to that specified. Clearly mark manufacturer’s literature to indicate equality in performance. Indicate differences in quality of materials and construction.

Fill in Blanks Below:

A. Does the substitution affect dimensions shown on drawings? Y N If yes, clearly indicate changes:

B. Will the undersigned pay for changes to the building design, including engineering and detail-ing costs caused by the requested substitution?

C. What effect does the substitution have on other trades, other contracts, and contract comple-tion date?




D. What effect does substitution have on applicable code requirements?

E. Difference between proposed substitution and specified item?

F. Manufacturer’s guarantees for the proposed substitution and specified item? Same Different Explain:

G. List names and addresses of three similar projects on which proposed substitution was used, date of installations, and Architects names and addresses.

Name:

Location:

Architect:

Name:

Location:

Architect:

Name:

Location:

Architect:

H. Cost and Schedule Impact:

CERTIFICATION

Undersigned certifies that following paragraphs are correct, except as modified by attachments:

A. Proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings. B. Undersigned will pay for changes to building design, including engineering design, detailing,

and construction costs, caused by requested substitution. C. Proposed substitution request clearly states adverse affects on other trades, Construction

Schedule, or specified warranty requirements. D. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for proposed substitution.

Undersigned further states that function, appearance, and quality of proposed substitution are equiva-lent or superior to specified item.




CERTIFICATION OF EQUAL PERFORMANCE AND ASSUMPTION OF LIABILITY FOR EQUAL PERFORMANCE The undersigned attests function and quality equivalent or superior to specified items. Submitted by: Company:

Address:

Phone:

By:

Title:

Signature: Date:

Signature must be by person having authority to legally bind his/her firm to the above term.

For use by Architect:

Accepted Accepted as Noted

Not Accepted Received Too Late Not Approved – Inadequate Information Architect: Date:

END OF SUBSTITUTION REQUEST FORM

Bumgardner Architects Olympia Commons Project 1845.00 Permit Review – September 8, 2015

CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 01 2600 - 1

SECTION 01 2600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.


1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances: Procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances.

2. Section 01 2200 – Unit Prices: Administrative requirements governing the use of unit prices.

3. Section 01 2500 – Substitution Procedures: Administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.

4. Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements: Administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

1. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by Architect are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change.

2. Unless otherwise indicated in the Proposal Request, within 10 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit to the Architect for the Owner’s review a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.



b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect

of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Work Change Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract that affect cost and/or time, Contractor shall propose changes prior to doing the Work by submitting a request for a change to Architect. Allow sufficient lead time for the Owner’s review.

1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. 5. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

7. Work Change Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 or other form acceptable to Architect.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS

A. Allowance Adjustment: See Section 01 2100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.

B. Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 01 2200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation of Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.



1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

2. The Construction Change Directive will contain a complete description of the change in the Work and designate the method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

3. Signature of Owner's Project Manager required on Construction Change Directive.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.






PAYMENT PROCEDURES 01 2900 - 1

SECTION 01 2900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.


1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances: Procedural requirements governing the handling and processing of allowances.

2. Section 01 2600 – Contract Modification Procedures: Administrative procedures for handling changes to the Contract.

3. Section 01 3200 – Construction Progress Documentation: Administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

4. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures: Submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

1. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including the following:

a. Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets. b. Submittal schedule. c. Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction

schedule.

2. Submit the schedule of values to Architect at the pre-construction conference or earlier or review and comment, but no later than ten (10) days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment. The Contractor shall revise & resubmit the Schedule of Values if requested.

B. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Division.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:

a. Project name and location.




b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703. 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued

evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and retaining in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum. Sales tax shall not be included in each item, but shall be a separate line item, after the subtotal at the end of the schedule

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

6. Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is the last calendar day of each month. If payment requests are to be made during the last week of the month, the




contractor may estimate the amount of work that will be completed during the last week of the month but shall not ask for payment of materials that are not stored at the site but which may arrive.

C. Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application as line items.

3. If applicable, the Contractor shall submit their application and certificate of payment in draft form, (hand written amounts are acceptable), at the weekly job site meeting during the week prior to the end of the month. The application shall be reviewed with the Architect and Owner at that time. After all amounts are mutually agreed upon, the final pay request will be prepared by the Contractor and transmitted to the Architect.

E. Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall be complete including waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information related to the application in a manner acceptable to the Architect.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the previous application.

1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

4. Waiver Delays: Submit each Application for Payment with the Contractor's waiver of mechanics lien for the period of construction covered by the application. a. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceeded by final waivers from

every entity involved with performance of Work covered by the application that could lawfully be entitled to a lien.

5. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.




G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors. 2. List of principal suppliers and fabricators. 3. Schedule of values. 4. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 5. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from governing authorities having jurisdiction for

performance of the Work. 10. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 11. Performance and payment bonds (if required). 12. Data needed to acquire Owner’s insurance. 13. Initial progress report. 14. Report of preconstruction conference.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of Substantial Completion (AIA Document G704), submit an Application for Payment reflecting Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

2. This application shall reflect Certificates of Partial Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

3. Administrative actions and submittals that shall proceed or coincide with this application include: a. Occupancy permits and similar approvals. b. Warranties (guarantees) and maintenance agreements. c. Test/adjust/balance records. d. Maintenance instructions. e. Meter readings. f. Start-up performance reports. g. Change-over information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation and

maintenance. h. Final cleaning. i. List of incomplete Work, recognized as exceptions to Architect's Certificate of

Substantial Completion. j. Change of door locks to Owner's access. k. Application for reduction of retainage, and consent of surety(if bonded). l. Advice on shifting insurance coverages.




I. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Completion of items specified for completion after Substantial Completion. The

beginning of warranties on these items not accepted will be the date of final payment. 3. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and

proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 4. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 5. AIA Document G706-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 6. AIA Document G706A-1994, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 7. AIA Document G707-1994, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 8. Assurance that claims will be settled. 9. Assurance that Work not complete and accepted will be completed without undue

delay. 10. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as

of date of Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.

11. Final liquidated damages settlement statement. 12. Transmittal of required Project construction records to Owner. 13. Proof that taxes, fees and similar obligations have been paid. 14. Removal of temporary facilities and services. 15. Removal of surplus materials, rubbish and similar elements.





PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 01 3100 - 1

SECTION 01 3100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Architect’s Project Information Management System 2. Coordination 3. Submittals and Coordination Drawings 4. Requests for Information (RFIs) 5. Administrative/Supervisory Personnel 6. Limitations for Use of the Site 7. Tradesmen and Workmanship Standards 8. Project Meetings


1. Section 01 1000 – Summary: Limitations for use of site. 2. Section 01 3200 – Construction Progress Documentation: Administrative requirements

governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule. 3. Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements: Tradesman and workmanship standards. 4. Section 01 7300 – Execution: Procedures for coordinating general installation and

field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 5. Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures: Administrative and procedural requirements

for contract closeout.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.

2. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract. 3. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.



1.4 ARCHITECT’S PROJECT INFORMATION MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Project coordination and communication will be done via Newforma project information management (PIM) software. No other PIM software (e.g. Prolog) will be used by the Contractor for the extent of the work.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components

to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

5. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on the layout and installation procedure of other components, either before or after its own installation, coordinate shop drawings to assure that all construction can be completed without impact to other trades and in the sequence and location required to obtain the best results. Mechanical and electrical systems are shown on the drawings in schematic detail only to allow for efficient layout and sequencing in the field.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Preinstallation conferences. 7. Building commissioning.



8. Project closeout activities. 9. Startup and adjustment of systems.

D. Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work. Refer to Division 02, Building Demolition, for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as property of the Owner.

1.6 SUBMITTALS AND COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individual Sections, where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

1. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil, mechanical, and electrical systems.

b. Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

2. Sheet Size: At least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches. 3. Electronic documents are acceptable. 4. Refer to individual Sections for Coordination Drawing requirements for Work in those

Sections. 5. Maintain one owner copy of all reviewed submittals and include with project closeout

documents. 6. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components

to ensure maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

7. Where installation of one part of the Work is dependent on the layout and installation procedure of other components, either before or after its own installation, coordinate shop drawings to assure that all construction can be completed without impact to other trades and in the sequence and location required to obtain the best results. Mechanical and electrical systems are shown on the drawings in schematic detail only to allow for efficient layout and sequencing in the field.

B. Coordination Drawings: Where work by separate trades requires off-site fabrication of products and materials which must be accurately interfaced and closely intermeshed to



produce required results, prepare coordination drawings to indicate how the work shown by separate shop drawings will be interfaced, intermeshed, and sequenced for installation. Comply with submittals requirements of “Submittals” in Technical Specifications sections.

C. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

1. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid.

2. Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodate layout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings.

3. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

4. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

5. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

6. Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility.

1.7 REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. RFI Forms: Software-generated (Newforma) form with the content including a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Architect. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.



9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's solution(s) impacts the Contract

Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data,

Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.

C. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow fourteen (14) working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract

Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will date from time of receipt of additional information.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 01 2600 "Contract Modification Procedures."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within ten (10) days of receipt of the RFI response.

D. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Use software log that is part of Project Web site. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect' response was received.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven (7) days if Contractor disagrees with response.



1. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.

1.8 ADMINISTRATIVE/SUPERVISORY PERSONNEL

A. General: In addition to a General Superintendent and other administrative and supervisory personnel required for performance of the work, provide specific coordinating personnel as specified herein.

B. Project Manager: Provide a Project Manager, who is readily available to service the project promptly, including but not limited to, value engineering, costing, coordination with the Architect and Owner’s Representative, approval and processing of submittals, who is experienced in administration and supervision of building construction including mechanical and electrical work, and who is hereby authorized to act as the general coordinator of interfaces between the work of subcontractors and other contractors hired by the Owner. For purposes of this provision, “interface” is defined to include the scheduling and sequencing of work, sharing of access to work spaces, installations, protection of work, cutting and patching, tolerances, cleaning, preparation of coordination drawings, inspections, tests, and temporary facilities and services.

1.9 LIMITATIONS FOR USE OF THE SITE

A. General: Administer allocation of available space equitably among trades and other contractors needing access and space so as to produce best overall efficiency in performance of total work of the project. Schedule deliveries so as to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on site.

B. Storage and staging of materials for preparation of installation shall be on a job site location and/or Contractor provided bonded warehouse, approved by the Owner.

C. Special conditions: See Section 01100 – Summary.

1.10 TRADESMEN AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS

A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that tradesmen performing work at the site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship standards needed to produce required quality-levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for the applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement

1.11 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.



1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting shall record significant discussions

and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within three days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than fifteen (15) days after execution of the Agreement.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Phasing. c. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. f. Procedures for RFIs. g. Procedures for testing and inspecting. h. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. i. Distribution of the Contract Documents. j. Submittal procedures. k. Preparation of record documents. l. Use of the premises. m. Work restrictions. n. Working hours. o. Owner's occupancy requirements. p. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. q. Procedures for moisture and mold control. r. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. s. Construction waste management and recycling. t. Parking availability. u. Office, work, and storage areas. v. Equipment deliveries and priorities. w. First aid. x. Security. y. Progress cleaning.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.



C. Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each construction activity that requires coordination with other construction.

1. Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that have preceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.

2. Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity under consideration, including requirements for the following:

a. Contract Documents. b. Options. c. Related RFIs. d. Related Change Orders. e. Purchases. f. Deliveries. g. Submittals. h. Review of mockups. i. Possible conflicts. j. Compatibility problems. k. Time schedules. l. Weather limitations. m. Manufacturer's written instructions. n. Warranty requirements. o. Compatibility of materials. p. Acceptability of substrates. q. Temporary facilities and controls. r. Space and access limitations. s. Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction. t. Testing and inspecting requirements. u. Installation procedures. v. Coordination with other work. w. Required performance results. x. Protection of adjacent work. y. Protection of construction and personnel.

3. Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required corrective measures and actions.

4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring information.

5. Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvene the conference at earliest feasible date.

6. Schedule of Preinstallation Conferences: The following indicates pre-installation conferences for items of particular interest. This schedule does not limit or exclude any other required pre-installation conferences. Conferences for related materials should be combined for coordination purposes. See also requirements of applicable Sections & Structural Drawing Notes.



a. Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls b. Section 02 4116 – Structure Demolition c. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete d. Section 03 3800 – Post-Tensioned Concrete e. Exterior envelope and waterproofing pre-installation conference(s) including:

1) Section 05 5100 – Metal Stairs 2) Section 05 5700 – Decorative Metal 3) Section 07 1700 – Bentonite Waterproofing 4) Section 07 2100 – Thermal Insulation 5) Section 07 2505 – Building Wrap Weather Barriers 6) Section 07 4643 – Composition Siding 7) Section 07 4646 – Fiber Cement Panel Siding and Trim 8) Section 07 5216 – SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 9) Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 10) Section 07 8413 – Penetration Firestopping 11) Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants 12) Section 08 4313 – Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 13) Section 08 5313 – Vinyl and Fiberglass Windows and Doors

f. Interior finish and cabinetry pre-installation conference(s) including:

1) Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board 2) Section 09 3000 – Tiling 3) Section 09 6500 – Resilient Flooring 4) Section 09 6800 – Carpeting 5) Section 09 8000 – Acoustical Treatment 6) Section 09 9100 – Painting 7) Section 12 3530 – Residential Casework

g. Site:

1) Section 31 1000 – Site Clearing and Demolition 2) Section 31 2000 – Earthwork 3) Section 32 8400 – Planting Irrigation 4) Section 32 9300 – Plants

h. Mechanical pre-installation conference i. Electrical pre-installation conference j. Plumbing pre-installation conference k. Fire Protection Systems pre-installation conference

D. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. The Contractor shall provide donuts. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.

1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at



these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

b. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:

1) Interface requirements. 2) Sequence of operations. 3) Status of submittals. 4) Deliveries. 5) Off-site fabrication. 6) Access. 7) Site utilization. 8) Temporary facilities and controls. 9) Work hours. 10) Hazards and risks. 11) Progress cleaning. 12) Quality and work standards. 13) Status of correction of deficient items. 14) Field observations. 15) Status of RFIs. 16) Status of proposal requests. 17) Pending changes. 18) Status of Change Orders. 19) Pending claims and disputes. 20) Documentation of information for payment requests.

3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting shall record and distribute the meeting minutes to each party present and those who should have been present, and to parties requiring information.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 01 3200 - 1

SECTION 01 3200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Construction schedule updating reports. 3. Daily construction reports. 4. Site condition reports.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 1000 – Summary. 2. Section 01 2900 – Payment Procedures: Administrative and procedural requirements

necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 3. Section 01 3233 – Photographic Documentation: Documentation of progress of work. 4. Section 01 3300 – Submittal Procedures: Submitting schedules and reports. 5. Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements: Submitting a schedule of tests and

inspections.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.



1. Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestones and Contract completion date.

E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:

1. Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated. (Note: All non-sample submittals to be transmitted electronically.)

2. One (1) PDF electronic file. 3. Confirm the above approach with Architect.

B. Submittals Schedule: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction period. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: General Contractor shall provide a project schedule with critical path shown.

E. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

F. Weekly Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

G. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.



B. Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SUBMITTALS SCHEDULE

A. Preparation: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, resubmittal, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates.

1. Coordinate Submittals Schedule with list of subcontracts, the Schedule of Values, and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2.2 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Substantial Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than twenty (20) days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabrication, and delivery.

3. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's construction schedule with submittal schedule.

4. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than fifteen (15) days for startup and testing.



5. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

6. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than thirty (30) days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

1. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.

2. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Partial occupancy before Substantial Completion. e. Use of premises restrictions. f. Provisions for future construction. g. Seasonal variations. h. Environmental control.

3. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

E. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.

F. Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind the current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractor intends to regain compliance with the schedule.

G. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

H. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.



2.3 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (GANTT CHART)

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's construction schedule within 30 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

1. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in ten (10) percent increments within time bar.

2.4 REPORTS

A. Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect, Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post

in the same locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 1

SECTION 01 3233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:

1. Preconstruction photographs. 2. Periodic construction photographs.


1. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting photographic documentation as Project Record Documents at Project closeout.


A. Key Plan: Submit key plan of Project site and building with notation of vantage points marked for location and direction of each photograph. Indicate elevation or story of construction. Include same information as corresponding photographic documentation.

1.3 USAGE RIGHTS

A. Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction of photographic documentation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA

A. Digital Photographs: Submit unaltered, original, full-size image files.

1. Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, with minimum size of 8 megapixels. 2. Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file

metadata tag:

a. Name of Project. b. Name and contact information for photographer. c. Date photograph was taken. d. Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point),

and elevation or story of construction.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 01 3233 - 2

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS

A. Digital Images: Maintain digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, without alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

1. Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image. 2. Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at

Project site, available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted to Architect.

B. Photograph work that is to be concealed and maintain a regular photographic record of the work as it progresses.

C. Record Construction Photographs: Throughout construction, compile a visual record of major phases of construction in the form of digital photographs. Photos should depict examples of typical installations, in progress, that could be useful as a reference for the contractor or owner in the execution of future alterations or repairs. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later. Representative elements of construction to be documented include but are not limited to the following:

1. Excavation. 2. Underground utilities. 3. Formwork and concrete pour. 4. Steel erection and other framing activity. 5. Major electrical and other wiring and conduit runs prior to cover. 6. Plumbing lines. 7. Installation of acoustical sound deadening devices. 8. Installation of weatherproofing components prior to cover. 9. Flashings prior to cover. 10. Installation of roofing.



SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 01 3300 - 1

SECTION 01 3300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 2900 – Payment Procedures: Administrative and procedural requirements

necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment. 2. Section 01 3200 – Construction Progress Documentation: Administrative and

procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work.

3. Section 01 7823 – Operation and Maintenance Data: Administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals.

4. Section 01 7839 – Project Record Documents: Administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Items requiring submittals: Without exception, all items of the work require submittal of shop drawings, product data and/or samples. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

B. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.



a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

C. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Section 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

D. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow fifteen (15) working days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow fifteen (15) working days for review of each resubmittal.

E. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately six by eight inches (6” x 8”) on label or beside title

block to record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect.

3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal name and number (or other unique identifier), including revision

identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06 1000.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06 1000.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.



F. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

G. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will be marked with action taken and will be returned.

H. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Submittals which are received from sources other than through Contractor’s office or without Contractor’s comments will be returned “without action”.

1. Transmittal Form: Use AIA Document G810.

I. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of

revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked “Reviewed"

J. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Include such additional copies in transmittal to Architect/Engineer where required to receive "Action" marking before final distribution. Show such distributions on transmittal forms.

K. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "Reviewed" taken by Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:



a. Manufacturer's written recommendations for applications and use. b. Manufacturer's product specifications and compliance with standards. c. Manufacturer’s application of labels and seals. d. Manufacturer's installation instructions. e. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. f. Notations of field measurements which have been checked, and modify details

as required for application into the Work. g. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. h. Printed performance curves. i. Operational range diagrams. j. Compliance with specified referenced standards. k. Testing by recognized testing agency. l. Location of product manufacture. m. Material safety data sheets for all interior adhesives, sealants, paints, and

coatings. n. Color selection information where necessary.

4. Architect’s Checking and Action: See applicable information under “Shop Drawings”.

5. Preparation and Processing: Do not submit product data, or allow its use on the project, until compliance with requirement of Contract Documents has been confirmed by Contractor. Submittal is for information and record, unless otherwise indicated. Initial submittal is final submittal unless returned promptly by Architect/Engineer, marked with an “Action” which indicates an observed noncompliance.

a. Submit one (1) PDF electronic file. b. Architect will markup notes, stamp, scan and return one (1) PDF electronic copy

to the Contractor. c. Markup and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. General: No claims for extras may be initiated, based on Work shown on shop drawings, unless so noted on Contractor’s transmittal letter. Where Work of more than one Subcontractor is involved, submit composite drawings, clearly defining the Work of each separate Subcontractor.

2. Contractor’s Checking and Approval: All submittals must have Prime Subcontractor’s and/or General Contractor’s stamp (as appropriate) as evidence of checking and approval. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to check all submittals, and to correct any errors, omissions or deviations BEFORE their transmittal to the Architect. The Architect reserves the right to return any shop drawings that have not been sufficiently checked. The Contractor shall verify all dimensions by taking field measurements. Work shall not begin until required submittals have been returned by the Architect with stamp and initials indicating review. If Work has been done which is contrary to the approved drawings, it shall be corrected at no additional cost to the Owner.

3. Architect’s Checking and Action: The meaning and intent of the Architect’s statement “No Exception Taken” when affixed to shop drawings which were prepared and submitted by the Contractor to the Architect shall mean that the Architect has reviewed



said submittal and finds no objection (except those thereon or in correspondence) to the inclusion of the items or Work indicated, into the construction, provided that it complies with the Contract Documents and Specifications as to quantities, space requirements, dimensions, non-interferences with other trades, is not a cause for union tradesmen disputes, does not infringe on patent rights, and will not cause injury or damage to persons or property. Said action shall not relieve the Contractor of any of his contractual responsibilities. The Architect’s checking is for general conformance with design concept and Contract Documents. Exceptions marked are subject to requirements of plans and specifications. Contractor is responsible for: confirming and correlating dimensions and quantities, processes pertaining to fabrication and techniques of construction, coordination of Work of all trades, safe and satisfactory performance of Work.

4. Preparation and Processing: So far as practicable, each drawing shall bear a cross reference note referring to sheet number or numbers of Architect’s Drawings and detail number showing same Work in order to facilitate checking of shop drawings in Architect’s office and their prompt return to Contractor.

a. Submit one (1) PDF electronic file. Leave 6” x 6” space for Architect’s and Engineer’s stamps.

b. Architect will markup notes, stamp, scan and return one (1) PDF electronic copy to the Contractor.

c. Markup and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

D. Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and

control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-

installed wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

3. Processing:



a. Submit one (1) PDF electronic file. b. Architect will markup notes, stamp, scan and return one (1) PDF electronic copy

to the Contractor. c. Markup and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document. d. If submittal involves work of owner’s Geotechnical consultant, submit directly to

the applicable consultant and provide the Architect a copy of the transmittal form for reference. The consultant will review the submittal first and route it to the Architect for review. The Architect will add his/her comments and return the submittal to the contractor.

E. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. General: Provide units identical with final condition of proposed materials or products for the work. Include “range” samples (not less than 3 units) where unavoidable variations must be expected, and describe or identify variations between units of each set. Provide full set of optional samples where Architect’s/Engineer’s selection is required. Prepare samples to match Architect’s/Engineer’s sample where so indicated. Include information with each sample to show generic description, source or product name and manufacturer, limitations, and compliance with standards. Samples are submitted for review and confirmation of color, pattern, texture and “kind” by Architect/Engineer. Architect/Engineer will not “test” samples (except as otherwise indicated) for compliance with other requirements, which are therefore for exclusive responsibility of the Contractor.

a. Processing: Submit two (2) sets of samples for Architect’s/Engineer’s review and “Action”; one set will be returned. Large samples, which may be incorporated into the Work, may be submitted singly.

b. Reusable Samples: Returned samples which are intended or permitted to be incorporated in the Work are so indicated in the individual Work sections, and must be in undamaged condition at time of use.

2. Warranties: Refer to individual sections for specific general requirements on warranties, product/workmanship bonds, and maintenance agreements. In addition to copies desired for Contractor’s use, furnish two executed copies.

3. Standards: Where copy submittal is indicated, and except where specified integrally with “Product Data” submittal, submit a single copy for Architect’s/Engineer’s use. Where workership at project site and elsewhere is governed by standard, furnish additional copies to fabricators, installers and others involved in performance of the Work, if required or requested by Architect.

4. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

5. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source.



d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

6. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

7. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

a. Number of Samples: Submit two (2) full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return one submittal with options selected.

8. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three (3) sets of Samples. Architect will retain one (1) Sample set; remainder will be returned.

F. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.

1. Number of Copies: a. Submit one (1) PDF electronic file. b. Architect will retain the hard copy, and markup notes, stamp, scan and return

one (1) PDF electronic copy to the Contractor.

G. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

H. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

I. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

J. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design.



1. Number of Copies: a. Submit one (1) PDF electronic file. b. Architect will markup notes, stamp, scan and return one (1) PDF electronic copy

to the Contractor.

K. Action on Submittals

1. Architect’s/Engineer’s Action: Where action and return is required or requested, Architect/Engineer will review each submittal, mark with “Action,” and where possible return within 2-4 weeks of receipt. Where submittal must be held for coordination, Contractor will be so advised without delay. When absolutely necessary to maintain the schedule, the contractor should note submittals that have a high priority and should be reviewed as soon as possible, regardless of the sequence in which they were submitted.

a. Final Unrestricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with Contract Documents, when submittal is returned with marking: “No Exception Taken.”

b. Final-But-Restricted Release: Work may proceed, provided it complies with notations and corrections on submittal wand with Contract Documents, when submittal is returned with the marking: “Make Corrections Noted.”

c. Returned for Resubmittal: Do not proceed with Work. Revise submittal in accordance with notations thereon, and resubmit without delay to obtain a different action marking. Do not allow submittals with the following marking (or unmarked submittals when a marking is required) to be used in connection with performance of the work: “Revise and Resubmit.”

d. Returned and Rejected: Do not proceed with Work. Submittal item is not acceptable and may not be used on the project when noted as “Rejected.”

e. Returned for Partial Resubmittal or Additional Submittal: Work may proceed on those items which are marked “No Exception Taken” or “Make Corrections Noted,” but additional submittal information is required for work marked “Submit Specified Item.”


A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals where required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit PDF electronic file. 2. Certificates and Certifications: Where a certification is required elsewhere, provide a

notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."



B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.



N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.




QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 01 4000 - 1

SECTION 01 4000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verify selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface between dissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups are not Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

1. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.




D. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

E. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

F. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

G. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

H. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

J. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five (5) previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 INSPECTION AND PAYMENT

A. Services for normal inspection and testing will be arranged and paid for by Owner. Additional inspection and tests required because of defective work and ill-timed notices are at Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall pay for additional inspection or testing performed at his request.

1.4 TRADESMEN AND WORKMANSHIP STANDARDS

A. General: Instigate and maintain procedures to ensure that tradesmen performing work at the site are skilled and knowledgeable in methods and craftsmanship standards needed to produce required quality-levels for workmanship in completed work. Remove and replace work which does not comply with workmanship standards as specified and as recognized in the construction industry for the applications indicated. Remove and replace other work damaged or deteriorated by faulty workmanship or its replacement.





A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies: Contact and conform with requirements of the governing building department. Services of this section which are required by the governing building department shall be performed by a testing laboratory and individual inspectors which are acceptable to the building department and the Owner.

B. Certificate at Source:

1. Product producers and associations, which have instituted approved systems of quality control, and have been approved by the governing building department, may submit certifications of compliance in lieu of further testing.

2. Concrete mixing plants certified by the governing building department and plywood grademarked by approved associations; and materials or equipment bearing Underwriters’ Laboratories and Factory Mutual labels, require no further plant inspection and testing.

1.6 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.


A. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

1.8 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.




5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing

and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with

the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following:

1. Name, address, and telephone number of representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with

requirements and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 4. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed

performance complies with requirements. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.


A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing




engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

1. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

G. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary

Laboratory Accreditation Program.

H. Manufacturer's Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

I. Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing for compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

1. Contractor responsibilities include the following:

a. Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction. b. Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and

analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. c. Build laboratory mockups at testing facility using personnel, products, and

methods of construction indicated for the completed Work. d. When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, and mockups; do

not reuse products on Project.

2. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

J. Mockups: No less than 30 days prior to installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:




1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.

2. Notify Architect seven (7) days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.

3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or

construction.

a. Allow three days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.

5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the completed Work.

6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.

K. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Specification Sections in Divisions 02 through 33.

1.10 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

B. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies with requirements, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least twenty-four (24) hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.




C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's representative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's representative's services include examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and

inspecting. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by

testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at

Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.




1.11 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to conduct special tests and inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.

5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work. 7. The agency shall not perform any duties of the Contractor.

1.12 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY

A. Access, Data and Assistance: Furnish free access to various parts of work, and assist testing and inspection personnel in performance of their duties, at no additional cost to Owner. Furnish samples, records, drawings, certificates, and the like, as required by testing and inspection personnel. Furnish incidental labor, power, turning or moving members, staging and the like. Maintain security and protection of samples and test equipment at the project site.

B. Notices and Scheduling: Contractor to notify Special Inspector and Architect not less than two working days before work requiring special inspection is started. Schedule portions of work requiring inspection and testing so that agency’s on-project time is as continuous and brief as possible.

C. Defective Work: Remove and replace any defective work, and work not complying with requirements of Contract Documents, at no additional cost to Owner.

D. Procedure: Work will be checked as it progresses. Failure to detect any defective work or materials, in no way prevents later rejection when such defects are discovered, nor shall it obligate Owner for final acceptance.

E. Submittals and Records:

1. Provide preliminary concrete design mixes that require control by the testing agency. 2. If required by the Architect or the governing building department, submit Mill Test

Reports to the Architect and the Inspection Agency for all material used in the work.




3. Maintain complete records of all quality control and testing performed by the Contractor.

4. Certify to the Architect that all welders are qualified according to the AWS B3.0-41 “Standard Qualifications Procedure”, or other acceptable standard covering the type of work to be performed.

1.13 LABORATORY DUTIES

A. Cooperate with Architect/Engineer and Contractor; provide qualified personnel with due notice.

B. Perform specified inspections, sampling and testing or materials and methods of construction: 1. Comply with specified standards. 2. Ascertain compliance of materials with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Promptly notify Architect/Engineer and Contractor of observed irregularities or deficiencies of work or products.

D. Promptly submit copies of written report of each test and inspection.

E. Each report shall include: 1. Date issued. 2. Project title and number. 3. Testing laboratory name, address and telephone number. 4. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 5. Date and time of sampling or inspection. 6. Record of temperature and weather conditions. 7. Date of Test. 8. Identification of product and specification section. 9. Location of sample or test in the project. 10. Type of inspection or test. 11. Results of tests and compliance with Contract Documents. 12. Interpretation of test results, when requested by Architect. 13. Sequential numbering of test or inspection report.

F. Final Report: The special inspector shall submit a final signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of his knowledge, in conformance with the Contract Document plans and specifications and the applicable workmanship provisions of applicable codes.





PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTIONS, TESTS AND REPORTS

A. General: Required inspection and testing services are intended to assist in determination of probable compliances of the work with requirements, but do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for those compliances, or for general fulfillment or requirements of Contract Documents. Specified inspections and tests are not intended to limit Contractor’s quality control program.

B. Required Inspections: 1. City of Seattle Inspections: Testing laboratory shall perform all testing and inspection

noted on the DPD multi-family/commercial cover sheet under "Special Inspections" of the Building Permit drawing set, and meet all requirements of the Uniform Building Code Section 306.

2. Envelope Inspection: Contractor to assist the Owner to provide prices for inspection of all envelope items, including but not limited to roofing, waterproofing, siding, stucco, and penetrations.

3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Coordinate requirements below with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:

1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

3.3 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Division 01 Section "Execution."




B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.



AIR BARRIER SYSTEM 01 4010 - 1

SECTION 01 4010 – AIR BARRIER SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes administrative, procedural, and testing requirements for accomplishing an airtight building enclosure that controls infiltration or exfiltration of air.

1. The airtight components of the building enclosure and the joints, junctures and transition between materials, products, and assemblies forming the air-tightness of the building enclosure are called “the air barrier system”. Services include coordination between the trades, the proper scheduling and sequencing of the work, preconstruction meetings, inspections, tests, and related actions, including reports performed by Contractor, by independent agencies, and by governing authorities. They do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect, Contractor, Owner, or Building Envelope Consultant.

2. The Contractor shall ensure that the intent of constructing the building enclosure with a continuous air barrier system to control air leakage into, or out of the conditioned space is achieved. The air barrier system shall have the following characteristics:

a. It must be continuous, with all joints sealed. b. It must be structurally supported to withstand positive and negative air pressures

applied to the building enclosure. c. Connection shall be made between:

1) Foundation and wall. 2) Walls and windows or doors. 3) Different wall systems. 4) Wall and roof. 5) Wall and roof over unconditioned space. 6) Walls, floor and roof across construction, control and expansion joints. 7) Walls, floors and roof to utility, pipe and duct penetration. 8) Other Building component interfaces not listed above.

3. Air Barrier Penetrations: All penetrations of the air barrier and paths of air infiltration or exfiltration shall be made air-tight.



B. Inspection and testing services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with contract document requirements.

C. Requirements of this section relate to the coordination between subcontractors required to provide an airtight building enclosure and customized fabrication and installation procedures, not production of standard products.

1. Continuity of the air barrier materials and products with joints to provide assemblies. Continuity of all the enclosure assemblies with joints and transition materials to provide a whole building air barrier system,

2. Specific quality-control requirements for individual construction activities are specified in the sections of the specifications. Requirements in those sections may also cover production of standard products. It is the Contractor’s responsibility to ensure that each subcontractor actor is adequately and satisfactorily performing the quality assurance documentation, tests and procedures, required by each section.

3. Specified inspections, tests, and related actions do not limit Contractor Document requirements.

4. Requirements for Contractor to provide an airtight building enclosure are not limited by quality-control services required by Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction and are not limited by provisions of this section.

D. Related Sections:

1. 07 2505 – Building Wrap Weather Barriers 2. 07 9200 – Joint Sealants

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Air Barrier Conference: Conduct conference prior to installation – time and location to be determined.

1. Communicate with all trades performing work on the air barrier prior to commencement of installations.

1.4 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Contractor Responsibility: Unless otherwise indicated as the responsibility of another identified entity, Contractor shall provide coordination of the trades, and the sequence of construction to ensure continuity of the air barrier system joints, junctures and transitions between materials, and assemblies of materials and products, from substructure, to walls, to roof, including all penetrations. Provide quality assurance procedures, testing and verification as specified herein. Facilitate inspections, tests, and other quality-control services specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents and required by authorities having jurisdiction or by the Owner. Costs for these services are included in the Contract Sum.



1. Organize preconstruction meetings between the trades involved in the whole building’s air barrier system to discuss where each trade begins and ends and the responsibility and sequence of installation of all the air-tight joints, junctures, and transitions between materials, products and assemblies of products specified in the different sections, to be installed by the different trades.

B. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required inspections, tests, and similar services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify the agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Auxiliary services required include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Provide access to the Work. 2. Furnish all incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate inspections and testing,

including but not limited to constructing temporary chambers and/or partitions to permit testing, sealing/taping off portions of the building not included in the specified tests, etc.

3. Take adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing or assist the agency in taking samples.

4. Deliver samples to testing laboratories. 5. Provide security and protection of samples and test equipment at the Project Site.

C. Coordination: Coordinate the sequence of activities to accommodate required services with a minimum of delay. Coordinate activities to avoid the necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate inspections and tests.

1. The Contractor is responsible for scheduling times for inspections, tests, taking samples, and similar activities.

2. The Contractor shall develop a schedule for all required air barrier testing, including time allowance to prepare the building for testing and allow for testing to occur. Contractor shall ensure that the air barrier materials, assemblies, and systems are complete for the portions of the air barrier that will be tested for any given test. For partial building tests of units, or floors, the contractor shall submit a protocol indicating how isolation of the area to be tested will be achieved that accounts for the expected completion of work at the time of testing.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Compliance:

1. Materials: materials used for the air barrier system in the opaque envelope shall have an air permeance not to exceed 0.004 cfm/sq.ft. under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (0.02 L/s.m 2 @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 2178.

2. Assemblies of materials and components: shall have an air permeance not to exceed 0.04 cfm/sq.ft. under a pressure differential of 0.3 in. water (1.57psf) (0.15 L/s.m 2 @ 75 Pa) when tested in accordance with ASTM E 1677 or E783.

B. Whole Building Air Barrier Leakage Testing



1. Testing to be in accordance with ASTM E779 or approved equivalent test method. Criteria for maximum allowed leakage to be in accordance with the applicable municipal code. This test should be conducted on a completed air barrier assembly, with no exterior cladding or interior finishes in place. Testing may take place later in the construction sequence, but the ccontractor will be liable for costs of removal of finishes and/or cladding required to provide corrections to the air barrier system in the event of failure, in addition to additional retesting and diagnostic assessment costs. Maximum allowed leakage is .4 CFM/sq.ft.@75Pa (1.57psf)

2. All penetrations through the air barrier pressure boundaries shall be sealed to an air tight condition per ASTM 2357.

3. Contractor is responsible for sealing all vents and other openings to the exterior prior to testing in accordance with checklist to be provided by Air leakage Testing Agency.

4. In the case of excessive air leakage as defined by applicable municipal code, air barrier diagnostic assessment would include Infrared Thermography and/or theatrical smoke application to determine air leakage paths and deficiencies for in-situ contractor repair. Diagnostics will be performed under pressurization or depressurization in general conformance with ASTM E 1186. Contractor shall repair deficiencies located in an effort to achieve prescribed maximum leakage rate.

5. Upon passing of the test, a Whole Building Air Barrier Test report will be issued to the project team for the purpose of Certificate of Occupancy procurement.

6. Any questions or concerns regarding air barrier testing should be addressed to BEE Consulting, LLC.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit certified written reports, in duplicate, of each inspection, test, or similar service.

1. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to the governing authority, when the authority so directs.

2. Report Data: Written reports of each inspection, test, or similar service include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Date of issue. b. Project title and number. c. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. d. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. e. Names of individuals making the inspection or test. f. Designation of the Work and test method. g. Identification of product and Specification Section. h. Complete inspection or test data. i. Test results and an interpretation of test results. j. Ambient conditions at the time of sample taking and testing. k. Comments or professional opinion on whether inspected or tested Work

complies with Contract Document requirements. l. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. m. Recommendations on retesting.




1. Qualifications for Air Barrier Testing and Inspection Agencies: Owner will engage air barrier inspection and testing service agencies, including independent testing laboratories, that are pre-qualified and that specialize in the types of air barrier system inspections and tests to be performed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. Upon completion of inspection, testing, sample taking and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

B. Protect construction exposed in the course of quality-control service activities, and protect repaired construction.

C. Repair and protection is Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for inspection, testing, or similar services.

3.2 TESTING AND INSPECTION

A. Owner will hire a testing and inspection agency to provide periodic observation and inspection during installation of the air barrier system. The testing and inspection agency may provide the following listed services:

1. Qualitative Testing and Inspection:

a. Reports of observations, with copies to the Owner, Contractor and Architect. b. Continuity of the air barrier system throughout the building enclosure with no

gaps, holes. c. Structural support of the air barrier system to withstand design air pressures. d. Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean and free of cavities,

protrusions and mortar droppings, with mortar joints struck flush, or as required by the manufacturer of the air barrier material.

e. Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates. f. Maximum length of exposure time of materials to ultra-violet deterioration. g. Surfaces are properly primed. h. Laps in material are appropriate, shingled in the correct direction, with no fish

mouths. i. Mastic applied on cut edges. j. Roller has been used to enhance adhesion.



k. Measure application thickness of liquid-applied materials to manufacturer’s specifications for the specific substrate.

l. Materials used for compatibility. m. Transitions at changes in direction, and structural support at gaps. n. Connections between assemblies (membrane and sealants) for cleaning,

preparation and priming of surfaces, structural support, integrity and continuity of seal.

o. All penetrations of the designated air barrier are sealed. p. ASTM E1186 “Standard Practices for Air Leakage Site Detection in Building

Envelopes and Air Retarder Systems”.

1) Infrared scanning with pressurization/depressurization. 2) Smoke pencil with pressurization/depressurization. 3) Pressurization/depressurization with use of anemometer. 4) Chamber pressurization/depressurization in conjunction with smoke

tracers.

B. The owner is to engage a qualified testing agency to perform both quantitative field testing of the air barrier assemblies/system during the course of construction. The following testing protocols are to be followed:

1. Whole Building Air Leakage Test per the applicable municipal code.

a. Test Preparation:

1) Two weeks in advance of testing, contractor shall coordinate a pre-testing walkthrough with the testing agency and HVAC sub-contractor to discuss pre-test preparation required by the contractor.

2) Contractor shall familiarize themselves with the Army Corps of Engineers Whole Building Air Leakage Test Protocol and City of Seattle test protocol and pre-testing preparation.

3) Contractor to provide temporary enclosures to seal off areas not included in the test parameters.

4) During scheduled testing, the contractor shall provide the testing agency complete, uninterrupted access to the entire building for the test duration.

5) Two days prior to testing, contractor shall have all temporary enclosures in place for testing agency review and pre-testing to confirm all extraneous air leakage paths are sufficiently sealed off.

6) Contractor shall undertake any re-sealing/modifications of temporary enclosures to the testing agencies satisfaction.

7) Contractor shall set the building controls a full day prior to testing to maintain a temperature of +15 degrees F from ambient.

8) During testing, contractor must coordinate with the Fire Department to have the Fire Alarm set in Test Mode.

9) Contractor shall also control access during testing to prevent any unauthorized entrance/exit to the building.

10) Complete qualified testing agency preparation check list.



b. After all air barrier materials and assemblies are installed including, but not limited to, sealed exterior sheathing, windows, flashings, interior air seal, wall WRB, penetration flashings, roof membrane, etc. on the entire building:

1) Determine the whole building extraneous air leakage per the test protocol described in the applicable municipal code by way of pressurizing and depressurizing the entire building using a blower door to 1.57 psf and report the measured leakage in cfm/sq.ft.

2) Document, by means of thermographic scans, any locations of observed air leakage.

3) Repair accessible locations of the building air barrier system per manufacturer guidelines.

c. Return to service:

1) All isolations shall be removed following the test in order to restore the various building systems to normal operational status.



CODES, DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS 01 4100 - 1

SECTION 01 4100 – CODES, DEFINITIONS AND STANDARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings, general provisions of the Contract, and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Work in this Section Includes:

1. Codes and Regulations 2. Definitions 3. Standards and Associations

B. Variations with Codes, Regulations and Standards: Promptly submit written notice to Architect of any observed variations from Contract Documents for legal requirements. Contractor assumes responsibility if work proceeds without such notice. If a contract cost adjustment is warranted, a Change Order to the Contract Documents will be made.

C. Governing Regulations and Authorities: The procedure followed by the Architect/Engineer has been to contact governing authorities where necessary to obtain information needed for the purpose of preparing the Contract Documents; recognizing that such information may or may not be of significance in relation to the Contractor’s responsibilities for performing the Work. Contact governing authorities directly for necessary information and decisions having a bearing on the performance of the Work.

1.3 CODES AND REGULATIONS

A. Contractor and Subcontractor Responsibility: Comply with codes, ordinances, rules, regulations, orders and other legal requirements of public authorities which bear on performance of work.

B. Applicable Codes and Regulations: Codes and regulations include, but are not limited to, the following as published and/or amended and adopted by the City of Olympia:

1. Building:

a. 2012 International Building Code (IBC) with Washington State Amendments – WAC 51-50

b. Olympia Municipal Code (OMC) Title 16 – Buildings and Construction



2. Accessibility:

a. ICC/ANSI A117.1-2009 Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities b. Fair Housing Act Design Manual (FHADM), Revised April 1998 c. 2010 ADA Standards for Accessible Design d. Washington Administrative Code (WAC) 51-50

3. Electrical:

a. 2008 National Electrical Code (NEC) b. Washington Cities Electrical Code c. Washington State Administrative Code (WAC) 296-46B

4. Fire:

a. 2012 International Fire Code (IFC) with Washington State Amendments – WAC 51-54A

b. 2013 NFPA 13, Installation of Sprinkler Systems c. 2013 NFPA 14, Standard for Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems d. 2007 NFPA 72, National Fire Alarm Code

5. Mechanical:

a. 2012 International Mechanical Code (IMC) with Washington State Amendments – WAC 51-52

6. Plumbing:

a. 2012 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with Washington State Amendments – WAC 51-56 & 51-57

7. Energy:

a. Non-Residential: 2012 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) with Washington State Amendments – WAC 51-11C

b. Residential: 2012 International Energy Conservation Code (IECC) with Washington State Amendments – WAC 51-11R

8. Other:

a. Washington Industrial Safety & Health Act (WISHA) b. Occupational Safety & Health Act (OSHA) c. A17.1 – 2013 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators d. City of Olympia Municipal Codes (OMC) e. City of Olympia Standards & Specifications/Streets & Related Work

C. Publication Dates: Except as otherwise indicated, comply with the latest editions of codes and regulations in effect as of date of Contract Documents.



1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. General Explanation: A substantial amount of specification language constitutes definitions for terms found in other contract documents, including the drawings which must be recognized as diagrammatic in nature and not completely descriptive of requirements indicated thereon. Certain terms used in the Contract Documents are defined generally in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of the Contract Documents.

B. General Requirements: The provisions or requirements of Division 01, General Requirements apply to the entire Work of Contract and, where so indicated, to other elements of Work which are included in the project.

C. Indicated: The term “indicated” is a cross-reference to details, notes or schedules on the drawings, to other paragraphs or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in the Contract Documents. Where terms such as “shown,” “noted,” “scheduled,” and “specified” are used in lieu of “indicated,” it is for purpose of helping reader located cross-reference, and no limitation of location is intended except as specifically noted.

D. Directed, Requested, Etc: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as “directed,” “requested,” authorized,” “selected,” “approved,” “required,” “accepted,” and “permitted” mean “directed by Architect/Engineer,” “requested by Architect/Engineer,” etc. However, no such implied meaning will be interpreted to extend Architect’s/-Engineer’s responsibility into Contractor’s area of construction supervision.

E. Approve: The term shall mean “written approval.” Architect’s approval shall be understood to mean “no exception taken.” Architect’s checking and approval is only for general conformance with the design concept of the project and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents and in no way alters the Contractor’s obligations under the requirements of the Contract Documents.

Contractor is responsible for dimensions, which shall be confirmed and correlated at the jobsite; for information that pertains solely to the fabrication process or the techniques of construction; for coordination of the Work of all trades; and for the satisfactory performance of his Work.

F. Project Site: The space available to the Contractor for performance of the Work, whether exclusively or in conjunction with others performing Work as a part of the project, is limited to the “project site” unless other arrangements are made for the necessary permits to use the adjacent sidewalks and streets as permitted by the City of Olympia

G. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “furnish” is used to mean supply and deliver to project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, etc, as applicable in each instance.



H. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “install” is used to describe operations at project site including unloading, unpacking, assembly, erection, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning and similar operations, as applicable in each instance.

I. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term “provide” means furnish and install, complete and ready for intended use, as applicable in each instance.

J. Installer: The entity (person or firm) engaged by the Contractor or its Subcontractor or Sub-subcontractor for the performance of a particular unit of work at the project sit, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.

K. Testing Laboratory: An independent entity engaged to perform specific inspections or tests of the Work, either at project site or elsewhere; and to report and (if required) interpret the results of those inspections or tests.

1.5 STANDARDS

A. General: Applicable standards of construction industry have same force and effect (and are made a part of Contract Documents by reference) as if copied directly into Contract Documents, or as it published copies were bound herewith.

B. Reference Standards: (Referenced directly in Contract Documents or by governing regulations) have precedent over non-referenced standards which are recognized in industry applicability to work.

C. Non-referenced Standards: Recognized in the construction industry are hereby defined, except as otherwise limited in Contract Documents, to have direct applicability to the Work, and will be so enforced for performance of the Work.

D. Publication Dates: Except where otherwise indicated, where compliance with and industry standard is required, comply with standard in effect as of date of Contract Documents.

E. Copies of Standards: Provide where needed for proper performance of the Work; obtain directly from publication sources, local associations or contractors.

F. Abbreviations and Names: The following acronyms or abbreviations as referenced in Contract Documents are defined to mean the associated names. Names are subject to changes, and are believed to be, but are not assured to be, accurate and up-to-date as of date of Contract Documents.

1.6 SPECIFICATION EXPLANATIONS

A. Imperative Language: Used generally in specifications. Except as otherwise indicated, requirements expressed imperatively are to be performed by Contractor. For clarity of



reading at certain locations, contrasting subjective language is used to describe responsibilities which must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor, or when so noted, by others.

B. Section Numbering: Used to facilitate cross-references in Contract Documents. Sections are placed in Project Manual in numeric sequence; however, numbering sequence is not complete, and listing of sections at beginning of Project Manual must be consulted to determine numbers and names of specification sections in the Contract Documents.

C. Page Numbering: Numbered independently for each section; recorded in listing of sections (Index of Table of Contents) in Project Manual. Section number is shown with page number at bottom of each page, to facilitate location of text in Project Manual.

D. Project Identification: Name and date of the Contract Documents are recorded at top of each page of specifications to minimize possible misuse of specifications, or confusion with other project specifications. The date(s) may vary from section to section, and from drawing to specifications. In case of conflict, the section with the latest date shall govern.

E. Content: Because of methods by which this project specification has been produced, certain general characteristics of content, and conventions in use of language are explained as follows:

1. Specifying Methods: The techniques or methods of specifying to record requirements varies throughout text, and may include “prescriptive,” “open generic-descriptive,” “compliance with standards,” “performance,” “proprietary,” or a combination of these. The method used for specifying one unit of work has bearing on requirements for another unit of work.

2. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry standards or sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, most stringent requirement (which is generally recognized to be also most costly) is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into the Contract Documents )not by way of reference to an industry standard) clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement is to be fulfilled. Refer apparently-equal-but-different requirements, and uncertainties as to which level of quality is more stringent, to Architect for a decision before proceeding. Except for overlapping or conflicting requirements, where more than one set of requirements are specified for a particular unit of work, option is intended to be Contractor’s regardless of whether specifically indicated as such.

3. Minimum Quality/Quantity: In every instance, quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum for the Work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, actual Work may either comply exactly with that minimum (within specified tolerances), or may exceed that minimum within reasonable limits. In complying with requirements, indicated numeric values are either minimum or maximums as noted or as appropriate for context of requirements. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for decision before proceeding.



4. Specialists; Assignments: In certain instances, specification text requires (or at least implies) that specific work be assigned to specialists or expert entitles, who must be engaged for performance of those units of Work. These must be recognized as special requirements over which Contractor has no choice or option. These assignments must not be confused with (and are not intended to interfere with) normal application of regulations, union jurisdictions and similar conventions. One purpose of such assignments is to establish which party or entity involved in a specific unit of work is recognized as “expert” for indicted construction processes or operations. Nevertheless, final responsibility for fulfillment of entire set of requirements remains with Contractor.

5. Trades: Except as otherwise indicated, the use of titles such as “carpentry” in specification text, implies neither that the work must be performed by and accredited or unionized tradesman of the corresponding generic name (such as “carpenter”), nor that specified requirements apply exclusively to work by tradesmen of that corresponding generic name.

6. Language: The language of specifications and other Contract Documents is of the abbreviated type in certain instances, and implies words and meanings which will be appropriately interpreted. Actual Work abbreviations of a self-explanatory nature have been included in the text. Specific abbreviations have been established, principally for lengthy technical terminology and primarily in conjunction with coordination of specification requirements with notations on drawings and in schedules. These are frequently defined in section at first instance of use. Trade association names and titles of general standards are frequently abbreviated. Singular words will be interpreted as plural and plural words will be interpreted as singular where applicable and where full context of the Contract Documents so indicates.






REFERENCES 01 4200 - 1

SECTION 01 4200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Refer to 01 1400 Codes, Definitions and Standards 1.4 for additional definitions.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

C. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Thomson Gale's "Encyclopedia of Associations" or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & Professional Associations of the U.S."

B. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AABC Associated Air Balance Council




AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI American Concrete Institute ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects (The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc.




APA Architectural Precast Association APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association APA EWS APA - The Engineered Wood Association; Engineered Wood Systems (See APA - The Engineered Wood Association) API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASCE/SEI American Society of Civil Engineers/Structural Engineering Institute (See ASCE) ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International (American Society of Mechanical Engineers International) ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWCI Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCMA) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood Protection Association (Formerly: American Wood Preservers' Association) AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association (The)




BICSI BICSI, Inc. BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee BWF Badminton World Federation (Formerly: IBF - International Badminton Federation) CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CEA Consumer Electronics Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CRRC Cool Roof Rating Council CPA Composite Panel Association CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association CRI Carpet and Rug Institute (The) CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSA Canadian Standards Association CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) CSI Cast Stone Institute




CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ESD ESD Association (Electrostatic Discharge Association) ETL SEMCO Intertek ETL SEMCO (Formerly: ITS - Intertek Testing Service NA) FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FM Approvals FM Approvals LLC FM Global FM Global (Formerly: FMG - FM Global) FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FM Global) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America




GRI (Part of GSI) GS Green Seal GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydraulic Institute HI Hydronics Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation (Now BWF) ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. ISO International Organization for Standardization Available from ANSI ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association ITS Intertek Testing Service NA




(Now ETL SEMCO) ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA) LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association, Inc. MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute




NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NOMMA National Ornamental & Miscellaneous Metals Association NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA)




OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Now ITS) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PLANET Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RIS Redwood Inspection Service SAE SAE International SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SEI/ASCE Structural Engineering Institute/American Society of Civil Engineers (See ASCE) SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIA Security Industry Association SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association




SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray

Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STI Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. (Now TCNA) TCNA Tile Council of North America, Inc. TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International TRI Tile Roofing Institute UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association




WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association

C. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICC International Code Council ICC-ES ICC Evaluation Service, Inc. UBC Uniform Building Code (See ICC)

D. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense




DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration PBS Public Buildings Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service

E. Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)




Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities Available from U.S. Access Board CFR Code of Federal Regulations Available from Government Printing Office FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point Available from Defense Standardization Program Available from General Services Administration Available from National Institute of Building Sciences FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS) MIL (See MILSPEC) MIL-STD (See MILSPEC) MILSPEC Military Specification and Standards Available from Department of Defense Single Stock Point UFAS Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards Available from Access Board






TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01 5000 - 1

SECTION 01 5000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. Specific administrative and procedural minimum actions are specified in this section as extensions of provisions in General conditions and other Contract Documents. These requirements have been included for special purposes as indicated. Nothing in this section is intended to limit types and amounts of temporary work required, and no omission from this section will be recognized as an indication by Architect or Engineer that such temporary activity is not required for successful completion of the work and compliance with requirements of Contract Documents. Provisions of this section are applicable to, but by way of limitation, utility services, construction facilities, support facilities, and security/protection provisions.

C. Scope: This section is intended to apply to all general and subcontracted work. Coordinate as necessary to avoid duplication of facilities wherever possible. Comply with all provisions unless otherwise directed by Architect.

Included are: 1. Temporary Utility Services 2. Temporary Construction Facilities 3. Temporary Support Facilities 4. Security/Protection

D. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use




temporary services and facilities without cost, including, but not limited to, Architect, testing agencies, and authorities having jurisdiction.


A. General: In addition to compliance with governing regulations and rules/recommendations of franchised utility companies, comply with specific requirements indicated and with applicable local industry standards for construction work (published recommendations by local "building councils").

B. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of ANSI A10-Series Standards for "Safety Requirements for Construction and Demolition" and NECA Electrical Design Library "Temporary Electrical Facilities.

C. NFPA Code: Comply with NFPA Code 241 "Building Construction and Demolition Operations.

D. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

E. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

F. Conservation: In compliance with Owner's policy on energy/materials conservation, install and operate temporary facilities and perform construction activities in a manner which reasonably will be conservative and avoid waste of energy and materials including water.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. General: Establish and initiate use of each temporary facility at time first reasonably required for proper performance of the work. Terminate use and remove facilities at earliest reasonable time, when no longer needed or when permanent facilities have, with authorized use, replaced the need.

B. Conditions of Use: Install, operate, maintain and protect temporary facilities in a manner and at locations which will be safe, non-hazardous, sanitary and protective of persons and property, and free of deleterious effects.

1. Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated in, the Work. Refer to Section 02 4116 Structure Demolition, for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as property of the Owner.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing; minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch- OD corner and pull posts, with 1-5/8-inch- OD top rails.

B. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section "Rough Carpentry."

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

1. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

2. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

3. Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove at end of construction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.




B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY SERVICES

A. General: The types of services required include, but not by way of limitation, water, sewerage, surface drainage, electrical power, telephones and fire protection system. Where possible and reasonable, connect to existing franchised utilities for required services; and comply with service companies' recommendations on materials and methods, or engage service companies to install services. Locate and relocate services (as necessary) to minimize interference with construction operations.

B. Water: 1. Water for Construction and Fire Protection Purposes: Provide as required from

existing system. All costs of temporary piping, including pressure reducing stations, removal of piping and restoration of Owner's utilities at the completion of work shall be paid by the Contractor. Monthly water costs will be paid by the Contractor.

2. Drinking Water: Provide from a proven safe source for all those connected with the work. Pipe or transport water in such manner as to keep it clean and fresh. Serve in single service containers or sanitary drinking fountains.

C. Temporary Power: Provide service with ground-fault circuit interrupter feature, activated from each circuit of 20-amp or less rating. Energy used shall be paid for by the Contractor.

D. Temporary Garbage Collection and Deliver Services: The Contractor shall be responsible for only normal services during normal business and garbage collection hours. It is not intended that the Contractor shall be responsible for services which would not have otherwise occurred.

E. Communication Systems: General Contractor to provide the following systems, as a minimum, at the Contractor's field office: 1. Multi-line telephone with answering machine. 2. Fax machine on dedicated telephone line. 3. Computer with Internet access and e-mail account on dedicated telephone line or

cable connection.

General Contractor's Superintendent to carry a cellular phone, available during normal working hours to receive calls from the Architect.

3.3 TEMPORARY CONSTRUCTION FACILITIES

A. General: The types of temporary construction facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, water distribution, drainage, enclosure of work, heat, ventilation, electrical power




distribution, lighting, hoisting facilities, stairs, ladders, site access and temporary bracing. Provide facilities reasonably required to perform construction operations properly and adequately.

B. Water Distribution: Pipe throughout construction site as required to facilitate doing the work, and as required by the governing building department and fire department to facilitate protection of the work. Prevent freezing of all distribution by "drain down" or other suitable protection. Verify with fire department that "drain down" will be suitable. Maintain required minimum pressures.

C. Electrical Power: Provide temporary weatherproof, grounded, power distribution system sufficient to accommodate construction operations requiring power, use of power tools, electrical heating, lighting, and start-up testing of permanent electrical equipment prior to its permanent connection to electrical system. Provide overload protection. Locate multiple outlets spaced so that entire area of construction can be reached by power tools on a single extension cord of 100’ maximum length.

Supply power for electrical welding, if any, from either temporary power distribution system or by engine-driven power generator sets, at Contractor’s option.

D. Lighting: Provide sufficient temporary lighting to ensure proper workership everywhere; by combined use of daylight, general lighting, and portable plug-in task lighting. Provide general lighting with local switching which will enable energy conservation during periods of varying activity.

Provide uniformly spaced general lighting, approximately equivalent to not less than one 200-watt incandescent lamp per 1000 SF of floor area, and one 100-watt per 50’ of corridor or per flight of stairs.

E. Enclosure: Provide temporary enclosure where indicated and where reasonably required to ensure adequate workership and protection from weather and unsatisfactory ambient conditions for the work, including enclosure where temporary heat is used. Provide tarpaulins with UL label and flame spread of 15 or less.

F. Heating: Contractor shall provide and pay for temporary heat as required to prevent freezing and to protect materials and work from dampness and cold. Where steam, hot water, or piped gas are not available, heat with self-contained LP gas or fuel oil heaters, bearing UL, FM or other approval labels appropriate for application. Vent fueled-burning heaters, and equip units with individual space thermostatic controls. Use electric-resistance space heaters only where no other, more energy-efficient, type of heater is available and allowable.

G. Elevator Use: Protect from damage, replace any damaged elevator components.

H. Vertical Access Provisions: Provide ramps, stairs, ladders, lifts, hoists and similar temporary access elements as reasonably required to perform the work and facilitate its inspection during installation. Comply with reasonable requests of governing authorities performing inspections. When permanent stairs are available for access during construction, cover




finished surfaces with sufficient protection to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of substantial completion.

3.4 TEMPORARY SUPPORT FACILITIES

A. General: The types of temporary support facilities required include, but not by way of limitation, field offices, storage sheds, fabrications sheds, sanitary facilities, drinking water, first aid facilities, bulletin board, private and public telephones, clocks, thermometers, project identification signs, clean-up facilities, waste disposal service, pigeon and seagull control, and similar miscellaneous general services, all as may be reasonably required for proficient performance of the work and accommodation of personnel at the site including Owner’s and Architect/Engineer’s personnel. Discontinue and remove temporary support facilities, and make incidental similar use of permanent work of the project, only when and in manner authorized by Architect/Engineer; and, if not otherwise indicated, immediately before time of substantial completion. Locate temporary support facilities for convenience of users, and for minimum interference with construction activities.

B. Sanitary Facilities: At Contractor’s option, provide either piped (wet) toilet facilities or self-contained toilet units of type acceptable to governing authorities, adequate (at all stages of construction) for use of personnel at project site. Provide separate facilities for male and female personnel. Provide enough natural or artificial light to read by.

C. Drinking Water: Provide dispenser-type drinking water units; either pipe with potable water or supplied with bottled water; adequate in number and locations for personnel at project site. Furnish paper cups and waste receptacles.

D. Project Identification Sign: At location directed by Architect, provide project identification sign complying with Architect’s sketch. Engage an experienced sign painter to paint graphics as indicated. Construct sign of 3/4” plywood panel - 4’ x 8’ exterior type, medium density overlay. Sign will contain graphic image of project, colored name of project, Owner's name, Contractor’s name, Architect’s name and six consultant names.

3.5 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: The types of temporary security and protection provisions required include, but not by way of limitation, fire protection, barricades, warning signs/lights, enclosure fences, sidewalk bridges, building enclosure/lockup, personnel security program (theft prevention), environmental protection, and similar provisions intended to minimize property losses, personal injuries and claims for damages at project site.

B. Fire Protection: 1. General: The Contractor shall conduct operations in a fire-safe manner subject to

approval of the City, Owner, or authorized representative. Maintain the premises cleared of excessive rubbish and debris. Comply with the applicable provisions of the governing fire department. The City, Owner, or representative, shall be authorized to




make inspections of the work in progress at any time to ensure compliance with the fire code. The Contractor shall immediately correct any deficiencies brought to attention. Where significant or continued non-compliance is noted, the Owner reserves the right to stop the work, at no extra cost or extension time, pending remedial action.

2. Fire Extinguishers: Provide proper types, sizes, numbers and locations as would be reasonably effective in extinguishing fires during early stages, by personnel at project site. Instruct all personnel at project site, at time of their first arrival, on proper use of extinguishers and other available facilities at project site. Post local fire department call number on each telephone instrument at project site.

3. Temporary Fire Protection: Provide as required by the governing fire department for typical construction conditions, and upgraded as necessary during welding.

4. Permanent Fire Protection: Complete each facility at earliest reasonable date, make ready for emergency use, and instruct personnel at site on availability and proper use.

C. Site Control: 1. Existing Buildings and Site: Adjacent buildings will remain in operation during

construction. Contractor must not block access, fire truck and delivery access, or interfere with the daily activities of these buildings, except when doing the right-of-way work. Prior to the right-of-way work, the Contractor shall coordinate with the Owner and adjacent businesses as necessary to maintain reasonable and safe access.

2. Project Site: The extent of the limits of work is shown on the site plan. The space available to the Contractor for performance of the work, either exclusively or in conjunction with others performing work as a part of the project, is limited to the “project site” unless the Contractor(s) obtains and pays for the necessary permits to use the adjacent sidewalks and streets as permitted by the City.

3. Site Enclosure Fences: At earliest reasonable date enclose the project site, and adjacent area arranged for by the Contractor, or a portion determined by Contractor to be sufficient to contain the primary area of construction activity. Provide 6’ (minimum) high chain-link steel fence. Provide gates for both personnel and trucks, with locks held under strict security control.

4. Parking: Parking may be available within the project site at the contractor's option. Only Contractor vehicles will be allowed within the enclosure fence.

5. Project Sign: Contractor to provide one 8' x 8' project sign listing Owner, Architect, Lender, Contractor and major consultants and subcontractors. Architect will provide layout. No other signs or advertising will be allowed.

6. Streets and Sidewalks: Obtain approval from the appropriate governing agencies before any streets or pedestrian walkways are to be blocked or disrupted. Provide all safety measures, such as lights, barricades and bridges with handrails over open ditches. Provide temporary plank or other dry surface walks where existing walks are removed and before finishing surfacing is installed. Supply covered walkways where necessary to provide protection from overhead work. The entire width of the sidewalk must remain unobstructed as much as possible.

D. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction as required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.




E. Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties and walkways, according to erosion- and sedimentation-control Drawings.

F. Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees to protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage, flooding, and erosion.

G. Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring of rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervals so Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operations lawfully, using environmentally safe materials.

H. Building Enclosure and Lockup: At earliest possible date, secure building against unauthorized entrance at times when personnel are not working. Provide secure temporary enclosures at floor and other locations of possible entry, with locked entrances.

I. Streets and Working Surfaces: Contractor shall maintain all existing surfacing of streets, staging and work area, promptly correcting any damage caused by their operations. Clean debris from streets and other areas outside the site on a regular basis.

J. Environmental Protection Procedures: 1. General: Provide facilities, establish procedures, and conduct construction activities in

a manner which will ensure compliance with Owner’s environmental impact statement and other regulations controlling construction activities at project site. Designate one person, the Contraction Superintendent or other, to enforce strict discipline on activities related to generation of wastes, pollution or air/water/soil, generation of noise, and similar harmful or deleterious effects which might violate regulations or reasonably irritate persons at or in vicinity of project site.

2. Dust: Dust shall be kept to a reasonable level during working hours. Erect interior barricades, cover transfer grilles and exhaust ducts, and take all other necessary measure to contain dust to work areas and prevent dust transfer into finished areas of building. Periodically wet down exterior walls, debris, trucks, chutes, etc., as required to keep flying dust to a minimum. Provide enclosed chutes from upper floors to selected ground floor collecting or loading areas. Areas adjacent to bottom of chutes shall be sprayed or dampened to control dust.

3. Noise: All operations shall be conducted in a way that employees of the Contractor, Inspectors, Owner, and the public are not subjected to excessive noise levels. Erect barriers, supply attention methods, and operate equipment as prescribed in the standards for occupational noise control.

K. Safety: The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the jobsite, including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Architect to conduct construction review of the Contractor’s performance is not




intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor’s safety measures, in, on, or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor’s responsibility to comply with Washington Industrial Safety and Health Act (WISHA) and “Safety and Health Regulations for Construction”, Volume 36 No. 75, Part II of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing all such safety measures and shall call in the State of Washington Safety Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist or whether Contractor is or is not in compliance with State or Federal Regulations.

L. Temporary Bracing: Provide temporary shoring and lateral bracing of the building structures during erection thereof as required and as directed to take care of all loads (such as winds, seismic, construction, materials, moving equipment, etc.) to which the structures may be subjected. Maintain such bracing and supports until adequate permanent connections and/or structural elements are in place.

3.6 MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL

A. Contractor's Moisture Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs of mold that may appear during construction.

B. Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject to wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect materials from water damage and keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.

C. Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure and conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambient mold spores, protect as follows:

1. Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic content, into partially enclosed building.

2. Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage. 3. Discard or replace water-damaged and wet material. 4. Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold. 5. Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before

enclosing the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

D. Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure but prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

1. Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.

2. Remove materials that cannot be completely restored to their manufactured moisture level within 48 hours.




3.7 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."




PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 01 6000 - 1

SECTION 01 6000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.


1. Section 01 2500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.





A. Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notify Contractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Approval: As specified in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures." b. Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a

comparable product request within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 01 3300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.


A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.




D. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.

2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a

weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.

4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of

installation and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 02 through 33. Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 01 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.




1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.

5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is Architect's.

6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Available Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

6. Available Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or an unnamed manufacturer, that complies with requirements. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

7. Product Options: Where Specifications indicate that sizes, profiles, and dimensional requirements on Drawings are based on a specific product or system, provide the specified product or system. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for consideration of an unnamed product or system.

8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

9. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.




a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

10. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses

and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested. 6. Complete Substitution Request Form, Refer to Section 01 2500.





FIELD ENGINEERING 01 7123 - 1

SECTION 01 7123 - FIELD ENGINEERING

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division-1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. General: This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for field engineering services.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates: Submit a certificate certifying that the location and elevation of improvements comply with the Contract Documents.

B. Project Record Documents: Submit a record of Work performed and record survey data as required under provisions of Sections "Submittals" and "Project Closeout".


A. Surveyor: Engage a Registered Land Surveyor registered in the State of Washington to perform land surveying services required. The contractor can rely on the survey in the contract documents as modified in this section for existing conditions; however, any conflicts or discrepancies should be reported to the Architect prior to proceeding with any work.

1.5 FIELD VERIFICATION OF NEW BUILDING

A. Existing Control Data: The survey drawings and established bench marks shall be used for laying out the new building.

B. Field Verification: The Contractor shall survey and layout the primary grids for the new building per the Architectural and Civil drawings. Any discrepancies shall be reported to the Owner and Architect prior to excavation.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, and as shown in relation to the work, establish and maintain bench marks and other dependable markers to set lines and levels for the work at the joining of the new and existing buildings and elsewhere on site as needed to properly locate each element of the entire project. Calculate and measure required dimensions as shown (within recognized tolerances if not otherwise indicated); do not scale drawings to determine dimensions. Advise tradesmen performing the work of marked lines and levels provided for their use in layout of work.

B. Verify layout information shown on the Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks before proceeding to layout the Work. Locate and protect existing benchmarks and control points. Preserve permanent reference points during construction. 1. Do not change or relocate benchmarks or control points without prior written

approval. Promptly report lost or destroyed reference points, or requirements to relocate reference points because of necessary changes in grades or locations.

2. Promptly replace lost or destroyed project control points. Base replacements on the original survey control points.

C. Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on the site, referenced to data established by survey control points. 1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record

Documents.

D. Existing utilities and equipment: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction. 1. Prior to construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of

connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer and water service piping.

3.2 PERFORMANCE

A. Working from lines and levels established by the property survey, establish benchmarks and markers to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to properly locate each element of the Project. Calculate and measure




required dimensions within indicated or recognized tolerances. Do not scale Drawings to determine dimensions. 1. Advise entities engaged in construction activities, of marked lines and levels

provided for their use. 2. As construction proceeds, check every major element for line, level and plumb.

B. Surveyor's Log: Maintain a surveyor's log of control and other survey Work. Make this log available for reference. 1. Record deviations from required lines and levels, and advise the Architect when

deviations that exceed indicated or recognized tolerances are detected. On Project Record Drawings, record deviations that are accepted and not corrected.

2. On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other Work requiring field engineering services, prepare a survey showing dimensions, locations, angles and elevations of construction and sitework.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, stakes for grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes and invert elevations by instrumentation and similar appropriate means.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out batter boards for structures, building foundations, column grids and locations, floor levels and control lines and levels required for mechanical and electrical Work.

E. Existing Utilities: Furnish information necessary to adjust, move or relocate existing utility poles, lines, services or other appurtenances located in, or affected by construction. Coordinate with local authorities having jurisdiction.




EXECUTION 01 7300 - 1

SECTION 01 7300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction. 9. Correction of the Work.


1. Section 01 1000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with

Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.

3. Section 07 8413 "Penetration Firestopping" for patching penetrations in fire-rated construction.


A. Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation of improvements comply with requirements.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

C. Certified Surveys: Submit two (2) copies signed by land surveyor.

D. Final Property Survey: Submit three (3) copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.





A. Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of the kind indicated.

B. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

1. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural element during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection

2. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

3. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

4. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with requirements of Division 01 sustainable design requirements Section.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Seattle City Light, Seattle Public Utilities, or other local authority, that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.




D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Division 01 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish limits on use of Project site. 3. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain

required dimensions. 4. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 5. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 6. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable

tolerances. 7. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard

established by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect and Construction Manager.

3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING

A. Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference points before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points during construction operations.




B. Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two (2) permanent benchmarks on Project site, referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction for type and size of benchmark.

1. Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.

C. Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiring field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, and elevations of construction and sitework.

D. Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significant features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, that principal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

1. Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

3.5 INSTALLATION

A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner.

B. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for

maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommendations, to the extent that those instructions and recommendations are more explicit or stringent than requirements contained in Contract Documents.

D. Inspect materials or equipment immediately upon delivery and again prior to installation. Reject damaged and defective items.

E. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion. Isolate each part of the completed construction from incompatible material as required to prevent deterioration.

F. Recheck measurements and dimensions, before starting each installation.




G. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

H. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

I. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

J. Coordinate temporary enclosures with required inspections and tests, so as to avoid necessity of uncovering completed construction for that purpose.

K. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

L. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

M. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and

directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

N. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

O. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.




3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.

2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.

3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the

entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.




3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

B. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Division 01 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.9 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.




CUTTING AND PATCHING 01 7329 - 1

SECTION 01 7329 - CUTTING AND PATCHING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes procedural requirements for unanticipated cutting and patching of new Work.

B. See Divisions 2 through 16 Sections for specific requirements and limitations applicable to cutting and patching individual parts of the Work.

C. See Division 7 Section "Firestopping" for patching/repairing fire-rated construction.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Proposal: Submit a proposal describing procedures at least 10 days before the time cutting and patching will be performed, requesting approval to proceed. Include the following information:

1. Extent: Describe cutting and patching, show how they will be performed, and indicate why they cannot be avoided.

2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural elements and operating components as well as changes in building's appearance and other significant visual elements.

3. Products: List products to be used and firms or entities that will perform the Work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: List services/systems that cutting

and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services/systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate how long services/systems will be disrupted.

6. Structural Elements: Where cutting and patching involve adding reinforcement to structural elements, submit details and engineering calculations showing integration of reinforcement with original structure.

7. Architect's Approval: Obtain approval of cutting and patching proposal before cutting and patching. Approval does not waive right to later require removal and replacement of unsatisfactory work.


A. Structural Elements: Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or load-deflection ratio.




B. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

C. Miscellaneous Elements: Do not cut and patch miscellaneous elements or related components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

D. Visual Requirements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch construction exposed on the exterior or in occupied spaces in a manner that would, in Architect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will match the visual and functional performance of in-place materials. Use materials whose installed performance will equal or surpass that of existing materials.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to be cut and patched and conditions under which cutting and patching are to be performed.

1. Compatibility: Before patching, verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with in-place finishes or primers.




2. Proceed with installation only after unsafe or unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3. Before proceeding, meet at the site with parties involved in cutting and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of Work to be cut.

B. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

C. Adjoining Areas: Avoid interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas.

D. Take all precautions necessary to avoid cutting existing pipe, conduit or ductwork serving the building, but scheduled to be removed or relocated until provisions have been made to bypass them.

3.3 PERFORMANCE

A. General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations.

1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots as small as possible, neatly to size required, and with minimum disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.

2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.

3. Concrete: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core drill.

4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Division 2 Sections where required by cutting and patching operations.




5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting.

6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

C. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other Work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections.

1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate integrity of installation.

2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will eliminate evidence of patching and refinishing.

3. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

4. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

5. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weathertight condition.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Thoroughly clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching is performed or used as access. Remove completely paint, mortar, oils, putty and items of similar nature. Thoroughly clean piping, conduit and similar features before painting or other finishing is applied. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.




CLEANING 01 7400 - 1

SECTION 01 7400 - CLEANING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Construction and final cleaning prior to Certification of Substantial Completion.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 7419 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal. 2. Section 01 8100 – Jobsite Indoor Air Quality Management.

1.2 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Execute cleaning during progress of work and at completion of work as required by this section and the Conditions of the Contract.

B. Hazards Control: 1. Store volatile wastes in covered safety containers. 2. Remove containers from premises daily. 3. Prevent accumulation of waste which creates hazardous conditions. 4. Provide adequate ventilation during use of volatile or noxious substances.

C. Conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with local ordinances and anti-pollution laws. 1. Do not burn or bury rubbish and waste materials on Project site. 2. Do not dispose of volatile wastes or hazardous materials such as mineral spirits, oil, or

paint thinner in storm or sanitary drains. 3. Do not dispose of wastes into streams or waterways.

D. Recycle Requirements: Owner's goal is to recycle as much nonhazardous demolition and construction waste as possible.

1.3 QUALITY ASUSRANCE

A. Coordinate with Section 01 7419 – Construction Waste Management and Disposal, Section 01 8113 – Sustainable Building Requirements, and Section 01 8100 – Jobsite Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Management.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CLEANING MATERIALS

A. Utilize non-toxic cleaning materials and methods where feasible and complies with manufacturer’s requirements and recommendations. 1. Comply with Green Seal GS 37 for general purpose cleaning and toilet room

cleaning. 2. Use natural cleaning materials where feasible and complies with manufacturer’s

requirements and recommendations. Natural cleaning materials include. a. Abrasive cleaners: substitute 1/2 lemon dipped in borax. b. Ammonia: substitute vinegar, salt and water mixture, or baking soda and water. c. Disinfectants: substitute 1/2 cup borax in gallon water. d. Drain cleaners: substitute 1/4 cup baking soda and 1/4 cup vinegar in boiling

water. e. Upholstery cleaners: substitute dry cornstarch.

B. Use only materials and methods recommended by manufacturer of material being cleaned.

C. Do not use materials which will create hazards to health or property, or which will damage surfaces.

D. Provide covered containers for deposit of waste materials, debris, and rubbish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. Execute periodic cleaning to keep building, site, and adjacent properties free of accumulations of waste materials, debris, rubbish, and wind blown debris resulting from construction operations.

B. Prior to Substantial Completion remove construction tools, scaffolding, equipment, machinery, and surplus materials.

C. Broom clean and vacuum interior areas prior to start of surface finishing, and continue cleaning to eliminate dust.

D. Schedule cleaning operations so that dust and other contaminants will not fall on or adhere to wet or newly-coated surfaces.

E. Remove debris and rubbish from pipe chases, plenums, attics, crawl spaces, and other closed or remote spaces, prior to enclosing space.




F. Do not throw materials from heights.

G. Open free-fall chutes not permitted. Terminate closed chutes into appropriate containers with lids.

H. Collect and remove waste materials, debris, and rubbish from site periodically until execution of final cleaning and dispose off-site in lawful manner.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. Comply with ASTM E1971 Standard Guide for Stewardship for the Cleaning of Commercial and Institutional Buildings and manufacturer’s instructions.

B. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

C. Employ experienced personnel or professional cleaning firm.

D. Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to dirt-free condition, free

of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. 2. Remove labels which are not required as permanent labels. 3. Clean glossy materials to polished condition; remove foreign substances. 4. Polish reflective surfaces to clear shine. 5. Glass and glazing:

a. Wash and clean mirrors and both sides of glass. b. Remove putty and other substances which obscure vision. c. Replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass.

6. Clean concrete floors. 7. Clean resilient flooring, stone flooring, tile, pavers, and other similar hard-surface

flooring, including associated bases. Refer to individual Specification sections for requirements of sealing, buffing, waxing, and polishing.

8. Clean carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris, soil, and excess nap. 9. Clean exposed surfaces of equipment; remove excess lubrication. 10. Clean plumbing fixtures, drinking fountains, and similar equipment to sanitary

condition. 11. Clean appliances to sanitary condition, ready and acceptable for its intended use. 12. Clean light fixtures and lamps; replace burned-out lamps.

E. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces.

F. Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning Systems:




1. Clean permanent filters and replace disposable filters for units operated during construction.

2. Clean ducts, blowers, and coils for units operated without filters during construction.

G. Site: 1. Clean areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape areas, free of

rubbish, litter and foreign substances. 2. Power wash paved areas to broom clean condition. 3. Remove stains, spills, and other foreign deposits. 4. Rake grounds that are neither paved nor planted to even-textured surface.

H. Remove waste, foreign matter, and debris from roofs, gutters, areaways, and drainage systems.

I. Prior to final completion, conduct inspection of sight-exposed interior surfaces, exterior surfaces, and associated work areas to verify that entire Work is clean.

J. Maintain cleaning until Project, or portion thereof, is accepted by Owner.



CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 01 7419 - 1

SECTION 01 7419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Generate the least amount of waste possible due to error, poor planning, breakage, mishandling, contamination, or other factors.

B. Reuse, recycle and salvage as much of the waste materials generated as is economically feasible.

C. Recycle a minimum of 75% of construction waste by weight – goal percentage is 95%. Provide calculations on end-of project recycling rates, salvage rates, and landfill rates demonstrating that 75% of construction wastes were recycled or salvaged.

D. Provide a Waste Management Plan for this Project. Resources are included which may be used in the development of this plan.

1.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Burying of construction waste shall be prohibited in compliance with local and state requirements.

B. Recycle Antifreeze, Oil and Oil Filters at Appropriate Outlets.

C. Dispose of Non-recyclable Hazardous Waste at Legally Permitted Facilities.

D. Establish and Post Cleanup Procedures for Spills to Prevent Illegal Discharges: Contractor shall include cleanup procedures as a component of Contractor’s safety program. Cleanup procedures shall be posted in a prominent location and referenced during safety meetings.

E. Reduce Hazardous Waste Through Good Jobsite Housekeeping: Minimize sources of hazardous waste, minimize spills and promptly respond to spills and leakages to eliminate sources of hazardous waste.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Evergreen Standards: Comply with Credit 6.3 Construction Waste Management.

B. Draft Waste Management Plan, as described below.

C. Final Waste Management Plan, as described below.



D. Progress Reports: The Contractor shall submit a summary of Waste generated at the Project with each Application for Payment. The Summary shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the following information:

1. A record of each material recycled, reused, or salvaged from the Project, the amount (in tons of material), the date removed from the jobsite, receiving party, transportation cost, amount of any money paid or received for the recycled or salvaged material, and the net total cost or savings of salvage or recycling the material. Attach manifests, weight tickets, receipts and invoices.

2. The amount (in tons of material) disposed of as garbage from the Project, the location of the Receiving Facility, total amount of tip fees paid at the landfill, and total disposal cost. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

3. Materials above may be described in cubic yards of material, if both items 1 and 2 are described in this manner and throughout the project in the same manner

E. Final Report: The Contractor shall submit within 14 days of completing the project a final report on waste generated at the Project. The final report shall be submitted on a form acceptable to the Owner and shall contain the following information:

1. For each material recycled, reused, or salvaged from the Project, the total amount (in tons of material), the receiving party, and the total cost of salvage or recycling of the materials.

2. The total amount (in tons of material) disposed of as garbage from the Project, the receiving facility, and the total disposal cost.

3. Materials above may be described in cubic yards of material, if both items 1 and 2 are described in the same manner.

1.4 DRAFT WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. Within fourteen working days of receipt of Notice of Award of Bid, or prior to waste removal, whichever occurs sooner, submit 3 copies of the Draft Waste Management Plan to the Architect.

B. The Draft Plan shall contain the following:

1. List of each material proposed to be salvaged, reused or recycled during the course of the Project.

2. Separation requirements. 3. On-site storage method for each waste stream. 4. Transportation method for each waste stream. 5. Destination of each waste stream.

C. Include the following minimum list of materials:



1. Cardboard. 2. Clean dimensional wood. 3. Land clearing debris. 4. Concrete. 5. Bricks. 6. Concrete Masonry units (CMU’s). 7. Asphalt. 8. Metals from banding, stud trim, ductwork, piping, rebar, roofing, other trim, steel,

iron, galvanized sheet steel, stainless steel, aluminum, copper, zinc, lead, brass, and bronze.

9. Gypsum. 10. Excavated soils.

D. The Draft Plan shall include the names of subcontractors who will transport solid or

hazardous waste from the site and the name of the Receiving Facility that will accept waste for disposal.

1.5 FINAL WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN

A. The Owner shall determine which of the recycling options addressed in the above draft Waste Management Plan are acceptable. The Contractor shall then submit, within 14 working days, a Final Waste Management Plan.

B. The Final Waste Management Plan shall contain the following:

1. Analysis of the proposed jobsite waste to be generated, including types. 2. A list of materials from the Project that will be separated for reuse, salvage or

recycling. 3. Separation and storage requirements for each waste type: A description of the means

by which any waste materials identified in above will be protected from contamination, and a description of the means employed in recycling the above materials consistent with requirements for acceptance by designated facilities.

4. Recycling Vendor: Name of the recycling processor for each material. If recycling vendor handles comingled waste, provide monthly diversion rate for the vendor.

5. Receiving Facilities: The name of the Receiving Facilities intended for receipt of non-recycled CDL materials. If a receiving facility handles waste and recyclables, provide monthly diversion rate for the facility.

6. Transportation: A description of the means of transportation of the recyclable or waste materials and the unit cost of transportation. Include the names of haulers.

7. Meetings: A description of information to be addressed at Project meetings regarding training and updates on waste management requirements.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANAGEMENT PLAN IMPLEMENTATION

A. Designate an on-site party (or parties) responsible for instructing workers and overseeing and documenting results of the Waste Management Plan for the Project.

B. Provide on-site instruction of appropriate separation, handling separation, handling, and recycling, salvage, reuse and return methods to be used by all parties at the appropriate stages of the Project.

C. Distribution: Distribute copies of the Waste Management Plan to the Job Site Foreman, each Subcontractor, the Owner and the Architect.

D. Separation facilities: Lay out and label a specific area to facilitate separation of materials for potential recycling, salvage, reuse and return. Recycling and waste bin areas are to be kept clean and clearly marked in order to avoid contamination of materials.

E. Hazardous wastes: Hazardous wastes shall be separated, stored, and disposed of according to local regulations.

3.2 RECYCLING DEMOLITION AND CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL

A. General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.

B. Recycling Receivers and Processors: List below is provide for information only; available recycling receivers and processors include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Renu, 877-444-7368 2. Recovery 1, 800-949-5852 3. CDL Recycle, 206-763-2002

4. “Contractors’ Guide for Preventing Waste and Recycling” http://dnr.metrokc.gov/greenworks/sus_build/ContrGde.pdf

5. “Seattle/King County Construction Recycling Directory.” 6. Resale – see Recycling Directory for contact information.

C. Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. Separate recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical.

1. Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until they are removed from Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

a. Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.

2. Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

3. Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.



4. Store components off the ground and protect from the weather. 5. Remove recyclable waste off Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or

processor.

3.3 RECYCLING DEMOLITION WASTE

A. Asphaltic Concrete Paving: Break up and transport paving to asphalt-recycling facility.

B. Concrete: Remove reinforcement and other metals from concrete and sort with other metals.

C. Masonry: Remove metal reinforcement, anchors, and ties from masonry and sort with other metals.

1. Clean and stack undamaged, whole masonry units on wood pallets.

D. Wood Materials: Sort and stack members according to size, type, and length. Separate lumber, engineered wood products, panel products, and treated wood materials.

E. Metals: Separate metals by type.

1. Structural Steel: Stack members according to size, type of member, and length. 2. Remove and recycle as allowed: bolts, nuts, washers, and other rough hardware.

F. Asphalt Shingle Roofing: Separate organic and glass-fiber asphalt shingles and felts. Remove and dispose of nails, staples, and accessories.

G. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location. Remove edge trim and sort with other metals. Remove and dispose of fasteners.

H. Acoustical Ceiling Panels and Tile: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

1. Separate suspension system, trim, and other metals from panels and tile and sort with other metals.

I. Carpet and Pad: Roll large pieces tightly after removing debris, trash, adhesive, and tack strips.

1. Store clean, dry carpet and pad in a closed container or trailer provided by Carpet Reclamation Agency or carpet recycler.

J. Equipment: Drain tanks, piping, and fixtures. Seal openings with caps or plugs. Protect equipment from exposure to weather.

K. Plumbing Fixtures: Separate by type and size.

L. Piping: Reduce piping to straight lengths and store by type and size. Separate supports, hangers, valves, sprinklers, and other components by type and size.

M. Lighting Fixtures: Separate lamps by type and protect from breakage.

N. Electrical Devices: Separate switches, receptacles, switchgear, transformers, meters, panelboards, circuit breakers, and other devices by type.

O. Conduit: Reduce conduit to straight lengths and store by type and size.



3.4 RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE

A. Packaging:

1. Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.

2. Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials. 3. Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from

Project site. For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

4. Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for recycling wood.

B. Wood Materials:

1. Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces. 2. Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.

C. Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets and store in a dry location.

1. Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

3.5 DISPOSAL OF WASTE

A. General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove waste materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate on-site.

2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.

B. Burning: Do not burn waste materials.

C. Disposal: Transport waste materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.




STARTING AND ADJUSTING 01 7500 - 1

SECTION 01 7500 - STARTING AND ADJUSTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Perform operations in following order prior to request for Substantial Completion: 1. Starting of Systems 2. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 3. Demonstration of Systems 4. Instruction of Owner’s designated personnel.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 01 5000 – Temporary Facilities and Controls: Temporary use of permanent

systems prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Section 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals: Operations and maintenance manuals, and

warranties and bonds. 3. Section 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit in accordance with Section 01 3300 – Submittal Proceedures.

B. Submit following items as required by this Section: 1. Systems Startup Report. 2. Testing and Balancing Report. 3. Commissioning Report. 4. Record of Owner’s Instructions.

1.3 STARTING OF SYSTEMS

A. Coordinate schedule for startup of various equipment and systems.

B. Notify Architect and Owner at least 7 days prior to startup of each item.

C. Verify that each piece of equipment or system has been checked for proper lubrication, drive rotation, belt tension, control sequence, or for other conditions which may cause damage.

D. Verify that tests, meter readings, and specified electrical characteristics agree with those required by contract documents and equipment or system manufacturer.




E. Verify wiring and support components for equipment are complete and tested.

F. Execute startup under supervision of applicable manufacturer’s representatives and Contractor’s personnel in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

G. When specified in individual Specification Sections, require manufacturer to provide authorized representative to be present at site to inspect, check, and approve equipment or system installation prior to startup, and to supervise placing equipment or system in operation.

H. Submit manufacturer’s field report in accordance with Section 014000 stating that equipment or system has been properly installed and is functioning correctly.

1.4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING (TAB)

A. Owner will appoint, employ, and pay for services of independent firm to perform testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Comply with commissioning requirements specified in Section 01 9113 – General Commissioning Requirements.

C. Submit reports to Architect indicating observations and results of tests and indicating compliance or non-compliance with Contract Document requirements.

1.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstration is for verification that systems will start and operate properly.

B. Demonstrate systems operation to Owner’s personnel prior to performing instruction of Owner’s personnel.

C. Demonstrate Project equipment by qualified manufacturers’ representative who is knowledgeable about Project requirements and operation and maintenance of equipment being demonstrated.

D. For equipment or systems requiring seasonal operation, perform demonstration for other season within 6 months.

E. Demonstrate startup, operation, control, adjustment, trouble-shooting, servicing, maintenance, and shutdown of each item of equipment.

F. Prepare and insert additional data in operations and maintenance manuals required by Section 01 7800 – Closeout Submittals when need for additional data becomes apparent during instruction.




1.6 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Prior to Substantial Completion, fully instruct Owner’s designated operation and maintenance personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment and systems requiring regular maintenance. Perform instructions within continuous period of 30 days. For equipment that requires seasonal operation, provide similar instruction during other seasons.

B. Arrange and pay for services of qualified manufacturer’s representatives to fully instruct Owner on specialized portions of installation, such as refrigeration machines, automatic controls, water treatment, and electrical systems.

C. Use operations and maintenance manual as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual with personnel in full detail to explain all aspects of operations and maintenance. Include detailed review of following items: 1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels.

D. Submit complete record of instructions as part of operations and maintenance manual given to Owner. For each instructional period, supply following data: 1. Date. 2. System or equipment involved. 3. Names of persons giving instructions. 4. Other persons present.





CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 01 7700 - 1

SECTION 01 7700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Closeout is hereby defined to include general requirements near the end of the Contract Time, in preparation for final acceptance, final payment, normal termination of contract, occupancy by Owner and similar actions evidencing completion of the work. Specific requirements for individual units of work are specified in sections of Division 2 through 16. Time of closeout is directly related to "Prior Occupancy" and Substantial Completion, and therefore may be either a single time period for entire work or a series of time periods for individual parts of the work which have been certified as occupied or substantially complete at different dates. That time variation (if any) shall be applicable to other provisions of this section.

C. Related Requirements:

1. Section 01 3233 "Photographic Documentation" for submitting final completion construction photographic documentation.

2. Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

3. Section 01 7839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Specifications, and record Product Data.

4. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.


A. Product Data: For cleaning agents.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.



1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.4 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

1.5 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and corrected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10) days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

2. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographic documentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

3. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

4. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Divisions 02 through 33 Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Architect. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

a. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Specification Section. Obtain Architect's signature for receipt of submittals.

5. Submit test/adjust/balance records. 6. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and

maintenance.



C. In the Application for Payment that coincides with, or first follows, the date Substantial Completion is claimed, show 100 percent completion for the portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete. Include supporting documents for completion as indicated in these Contract Documents and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

D. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of ten (10) days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

1. If 100 percent completion and corrected (punch list) cannot be shown, include a list of incomplete items, the value of incomplete construction, and reasons the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements,

final certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access

to services and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel of changeover in security provisions.

8. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 9. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 10. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Division 01 Section "Demonstration and Training."

11. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

12. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 13. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local

emergency responders. 14. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups,

construction tools, and similar elements. 15. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 16. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual

defects.

E. Inspection Procedures: The contractor will inspect and prepare a list of corrections for the subcontractors and this work shall be corrected prior to requesting inspection by the architect. On receipt of a request for inspection (punch list), the Architect will either proceed with inspection or advise the Contractor of unfilled requirements. The Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion following inspection, or advise the Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before the certificate will be issued.



1. The Architect will repeat inspection only when assured by Contractor that all items on previous punch lists have been corrected.

2. Results of the completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Acceptance.

1.6 PRIOR OCCUPANCY

A. General: The Owner shall have the right to occupy part(s) of the project before final acceptance, and such occupation shall not be considered as an acceptance of the project. Prior to occupancy, the Owner and Contractor shall mutually agree to a date for prior occupancy; the area to be occupied; that prior occupancy is commencing within the requirements of all applicable codes and ordinances; that endorsements from all insurance of the project regardless of prior occupancy, have been obtained; and that all other necessary provisions are completed.

B. Inspection Procedures: Upon receipt of a Joint Owner/Contractor written request the Architect will inspect the areas designated for prior occupancy and forward a letter of acceptance, or a list of deficiencies to be corrected, to the Contractor. The Contractor will correct the deficiencies as required prior to the date of occupancy.

The Contractor shall submit written documentation that all deficiency items are corrected, or stating the procedures to resolve all uncorrected items in the future.

1.7 FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining final acceptance, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2. Submit an updated final statement, accounting for final additional changes to the Contract Sum.

3. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

4. Submit consent of surety to final payment. 5. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance

requirements. 6. Submit record drawings, maintenance manuals, and similar final record information. 7. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 8. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products,

equipment, and systems. 9. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra stock, and similar items. 10. Complete final clean up requirements, including touch-up painting. Touch-up and

otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes.



B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

1. Reinspection Procedure: The Architect will reinspect the Work upon receipt of notice that the Work, including inspection list items from earlier inspections, has been completed, except items whose completion has been delayed because of circumstances acceptable to the Architect.

a. Upon completion of reinspection, the Architect will prepare a certificate of final acceptance, or advice the Contractor of Work that is incomplete or of obligations that have not been fulfilled but are required for final acceptance.

b. If necessary, reinspection will be repeated one time; however, if additional inspections are necessary because work has not been completed, the Contractor will be responsible for reimbursing the Owner for the Architect's time required to do the inspection, unless circumstances exist that justify the uncompleted work.

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order. 2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for

ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the



product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

4. Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Suppliers and Installers: Submit a complete listing of names and addresses of all suppliers of materials, equipment and specialty items and/or installers who worked on the project. List shall also include brand names, model numbers or series numbers, style, etc, of any or all items furnished and installed.

E. Record Sample Submitted: Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, the Contractor will meet at the site with the Architect and the Owner's personnel to determine which if any of the submitted Samples have been maintained during progress of the Work are to be transmitted to the Owner for record purposes.

F. Miscellaneous Record Submittals: Refer to other Specification Sections for requirements of miscellaneous record-keeping and submittals in connection with actual performance of the Work. Immediately prior to the date or dates of Substantial Completion, complete miscellaneous records and place in good order, properly identified and bound or filed, ready for continued use and reference. Submit to the Architect for the Owner's records.

G. Maintenance Manuals: Organize operating and maintenance data into suitable sets of manageable size. Bind properly indexed data in individual heavy-duty 2-inch, 3-ring vinyl-covered binders, with pocket folders for folded sheet information. Mark appropriate identification on front and spine of each binder. Include the following types of information: 1. Emergency instructions. 2. Spare parts list. 3. Copies of warranties. 4. Wiring diagrams. 5. Recommended "turn around" cycles. 6. Inspection procedures. 7. Shop Drawings and Product Data. 8. Fixture lamping schedule.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CLOSEOUT PROCEEDURES

A. Operating and Maintenance Instructions: Arrange for each installer of equipment that requires regular maintenance to meet with the Owner's personnel to provide instruction in proper operation and maintenance. If installers are not experienced in procedures, provide instruction by manufacturer's representatives. Include a detailed review of the following items:

1. Maintenance manuals. 2. Record documents. 3. Spare parts and materials. 4. Tools. 5. Lubricants. 6. Fuels. 7. Identification systems. 8. Control sequences. 9. Hazards. 10. Cleaning. 11. Warranties and bonds. 12. Maintenance agreements and similar continuing commitments.

B. As part of instruction for operating equipment, demonstrate the following procedures: 1. Start-up. 2. Shut down. 3. Emergency operations. 4. Noise and vibration adjustments. 5. Safety procedures. 6. Economy and efficiency adjustments. 7. Effective energy utilization.

3.2 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.



B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.

d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.

e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free

condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean

according to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows.

Remove glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and

similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

m. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. n. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains

resulting from water exposure. o. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed

surfaces of diffusers, registers, and grills. p. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. q. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

2. Upon Architect/Owner acceptance, an area that has been final cleaned will be

marked as such and taped off. Subsequent cleaning due to Owner or Architect tours shall be the responsibility of the Owner.



C. Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls." Prepare written report.

D. Removal of Protection: Remove temporary protection and facilities installed for protection of the Work during construction.

E. Comply with regulations of authorities having jurisdiction and safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.

1. Where extra materials of value remaining after completion of associated Work have become the Owner's property, arrange for disposition of these materials as directed.

3.3 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Substantial Completion.

B. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

1. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

2. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

a. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

3. Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or reduce longevity.

4. Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.




CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS 01 7800 - 1

SECTION 01 7800 - CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RECORDING

A. Post changes and modifications to record documents as they occur. Do not wait until end of Project. Architect will periodically review record documents to assure compliance with this requirement.

1.2 SUBMITTAL

A. Deliver closeout submittals and samples to Architect for transmittal to Owner.

B. Include typed list identifying each item submitted as closeout document.

1.3 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare data in form of instructional manual in heavy-duty three-ring binders with durable plastic covers. 1. Where written instructions are required, use personnel skilled in technical writing to

extent necessary for communication of essential data. 2. Where drawings or diagrams are required, use personnel capable of preparing

drawings clearly in understandable format.

B. Examine for completeness.

C. Submit one draft copy of completed volumes in final form after instructing Owner’s personnel under Section 01 7500 Starting and Adjusting, but prior to request for Substantial Completion. This copy will be returned with Architect’s comments. Revise as necessary prior to final submittal.

D. Prepare and insert additional data in manuals when need for such data becomes apparent during Owner’s instruction.

E. Submit 2 copies of final volumes at time of request for Substantial Completion plus one electronic copy.

F. Label covers and spine of each binder with typed or printed title OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL, title of project, and subject matter of binder when multiple binders are required.




G. Separate contents with tab dividers, logically organized with tab title clearly printed under reinforced laminated plastic tabs.

H. Manuals shall contain: 1. Table of contents. 2. Directory listing names, addresses, and telephone numbers of Architect, Engineer, and

Contractor. 3. List names, addresses and telephone numbers of subcontractors, suppliers, and

service representatives, including local source of supplies and replacement parts. 4. General system or equipment description. 5. Copies of applicable shop drawings and product data. 6. Mark product data to clearly identify specific products and component parts. 7. Supplement product data with drawings necessary to illustrate relationship of

component parts of equipment and systems, include control and flow diagrams. 8. Arranged by product, system, or process flow, and subdivided by Specification section.

Identify following: a. Significant design criteria. b. List of equipment. c. System or equipment identification, including:

1) Name of manufacturer. 2) Model number. 3) Serial number of each component.

d. Parts list for each component. e. Operating instructions. f. Maintenance instructions and schedules for equipment and systems. g. Emergency instructions. h. Wiring and piping diagrams. i. Inspection and test procedures. j. Precautions against improper use and maintenance.

9. Copies of warranties. 10. Protective plastic jackets: Provide protective transparent plastic jackets designed to

enclose diagnostic software for computerized electronic equipment. 11. Text material:

a. Provide manufacturer’s standard printed material or typewritten specially

prepared data. b. Provide text on 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches, 20 pound white bond paper.

12. Drawings and diagrams:

a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs on drawings and bind in with text.




b. Oversize drawings: 1) Fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as fold-out. 2) Drawings too large to be used as fold-out, place folded drawing in front

or rear pocket of binder. Insert typewritten page indicating drawing title, description of contents, and drawing location at appropriate location in manual.

1.4 MATERIAL AND FINISHES MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Manual: 1. Submit 3 copies plus 1 electronic version of each manual, in final form, on material

and finishes to Architect for distribution. 2. Provide one section for interior products, including applied materials and finishes, and

second for products designed for exterior products.

B. Interior Products: 1. Provide manufacturer’s data and instructions on care and maintenance of

architectural products, including applied materials and finishes. 2. Product data: Provide complete information on architectural products, including

following, as applicable: a. Manufacturer’s catalog number. b. Size. c. Material composition. d. Color. e. Texture. f. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

3. Care and maintenance instructions: Provide information on care and maintenance

including manufacturer’s recommendations for types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. Provide information regarding cleaning agents and methods that could prove detrimental to product. Include manufacturer’s recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance.

C. Exterior Products: 1. Provide complete manufacturer’s data with instructions on inspection, maintenance,

and repair of products exposed to weather or designed for moisture-protection purposes.

2. Manufacturer’s data: Provide manufacturer’s data giving detailed information, including following, as applicable. a. Applicable standards. b. Chemical composition.




c. Installation details. d. Inspection procedures. e. Maintenance information. f. Repair procedures.

1.5 SPARE PARTS AND MAINTENANCE MATERIALS

A. Provide tools, spare parts, maintenance, and attic stock materials in quantities specified in individual Specification sections.

B. Deliver to Project site and place in locations as directed; obtain receipt from subcontractors and suppliers.

C. Submit letter at time of inspection for Substantial Completion listing items and quantities; attach receipts.

1.6 WARRANTIES AND BONDS

A. A. Disclaimers and Limitations: Manufacturer’s disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of warranty on Work that incorporates products, nor does it relieve suppliers, manufacturers, and subcontractors required to countersign special warranties with Contractor.

B. Owner’s Recourse: 1. Written warranties made to Owner are in addition to implied warranties, and shall not

limit duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise available under law. 2. Warranty periods shall not be interpreted as limitations on time in which Owner can

enforce such other duties, obligations, rights, or remedies. 3. Rejection of warranties: Owner reserves right to reject warranties and to limit

selections to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of Contract Documents.

C. Submit 3 copies of warranties, maintenance bonds, and maintenance/service contracts as specified in various Specification sections. Include one copy of each warranty in Operations and Maintenance Manual, or in Material and Finishes Maintenance Manual.

D. Assemble data in heavy-duty three-ring binders with durable plastic covers, two required.

E. Label cover and spine of each binder with typed or printed title WARRANTIES AND BONDS and title of Project.

F. Prepare table of contents in sequence of table of contents of Project Manual, with each item identified with number and title of Specification section in which specified, and name of product or work item.




G. Separate each warranty, bond, or service contract with tab and index sheets keyed to listing in table of contents. Provide full information, using separate typed sheets as necessary. List subcontractor, supplier, and manufacturer, with name, address, and telephone number of responsible principal.

H. Obtain warranties, bonds, and maintenance/service contracts executed in triplicate by responsible subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers; warranties commence on Date of Substantial Completion.

I. Verify that documents are in proper form, contain full information, and are notarized.

J. Time of Submittals: 1. Submit binders containing warranties, bonds, and maintenance/service contacts within

10 days after date of Substantial Completion. 2. For equipment or component parts of equipment put into service during construction

with Owner’s permission, submit photo copies of documents within 10 days after acceptance listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period. Retain originals of executed documents for final submittal as indicated in subparagraph above.

3. For items of Work when acceptance is delayed beyond date of Substantial Completion, submit within 10 days after acceptance listing date of acceptance as beginning of warranty period.

1.7 RECORD DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Maintain at Project site record copy of: 1. Project Manual. 2. Contract Drawings. 3. Addenda. 4. Change Orders, Change Directives, Supplemental Instructions, and other

modifications to Contract. 5. Approved shop drawings, product data, samples, and similar required submittals. 6. Approved substitutions. 7. Reports of inspection and testing agencies. 8. Inspection certificates. 9. Manufacturer’s certificates, manufacturer’s instructions, and reports of manufacturer’s

field observations. 10. Samples. 11. Other items indicated in various sections within Division 01.

B. Obtain from Architect and pay reproduction costs for one set of reproducible Contract Drawings for recording changes and modifications.

C. Obtain from Architect and pay reproduction costs for one set of Project Manuals for record purposes.




D. Store record documents and samples in field office apart from documents used for construction. Provide files and racks for secure storage.

E. Label and file documents and samples in accordance with section number listings in Table of Contents of Project Manual. Label each item PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENT in stamped or printed letters in prominent location on each Drawing.

F. Maintain documents and samples in clean, dry, legible condition; do not use for construction purposes.

G. Record information concurrently with construction progress.

H. Make documents available for review by Architect and Owner during construction period.

1.8 CONTRACT DRAWINGS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Legibly mark drawings to record actual construction which varies appreciably from Contract Documents. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements which would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. Items required to be marked include but are not limited to: 1. Dimensional changes to Drawings. 2. Measured depths of foundation below first floor datum. 3. Measured horizontal and vertical locations of underground utilities and

appurtenances, referenced to permanent surface improvements. 4. Measured locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in construction,

referenced to visible and accessible features of construction. 5. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. 6. Revisions to electrical circuitry. 7. Actual equipment locations. 8. Duct size and routing. 9. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. 10. Details not on original Contract Drawings. 11. Changes made by addenda, change orders, change directives, supplemental

instructions, and other issued modifications. 12. References to related shop drawings and other similar detailed modifications.

B. Mark-up Procedures: 1. Mark completely and accurately record prints of Contract Drawings or shop drawings,

whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions. Where shop drawings are marked, show cross-reference on Contract Drawings location.

2. Mark record sets with red erasable colored pencil; use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of Work at same location.

3. Mark important additional information which was either shown schematically or omitted from original Drawings.




4. Record modifications caused by Supplemental Instructions, Construction Change Directives, Change Orders, Alternates, and similar modifications.

5. Accurately record information using understandable technique. 6. Record data as soon as possible after it has been obtained. In case of concealed

installations, record and check mark-up prior to concealment. 7. At time of Substantial Completion, submit Record Drawings to Architect for Owner’s

records. Organize into sets, bind and label sets for Owner’s continued use.

C. Preparation of Reproducibles: 1. Immediately prior to request for Substantial Completion, review completed marked-up

Record Drawings with Architect. 2. When authorized, prepare full set of corrected reproducible of Contract Drawings and

shop drawings. 3. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on print sets.

Erase, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. Identify and date each Record Drawing.

D. Review of Reproducibles: 1. Before copying and distributing, submit corrected reproducibles and original marked-

up prints to Architect for review. 2. When acceptable, Architect will initial and date each reproducible, indicating

acceptance of general scope of changes and additional information recorded, and of quality of drafting.

3. Reproducibles and original marked-up prints will be returned to Contractor for organizing into sets, printing, binding and final submittal.

E. Copies and Distribution: 1. After completing preparation of reproducible Record Drawings, print 3 copies of each

Record Drawing, whether or not changes and additional information were recorded. 2. Organize copies into manageable sets. 3. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets, with appropriate identification,

including titles, dates and other information on cover sheets. 4. Organize and bind original marked-up set of prints that were maintained during

construction period in same manner. 5. Organize record reproducibles into sets matching print sets. Place reproducible sets in

durable tube-type drawing containers with end caps. Mark end cap of each container with suitable identification.

6. Submit marked-up record set, reproducibles, and prints to Architect for Owner’s records; Architect will retain one copy set.

1.9 PROJECT MANUALS

A. Legibly record changes and modifications issued by addenda and change orders.




PART 2 – PRODUCTS (Not used) PART 3 – EXECUTION (Not used)




OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01 7823 - 1

SECTION 01 7823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 4. Product maintenance manuals. 5. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.


1. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.


A. Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual Specification Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section.

1. Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are acceptable.

2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:

1. PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on digital media acceptable to Architect.

a. Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name. Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.

b. Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.

2. Three paper copies. Include a complete operation and maintenance directory. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. Architect will return two copies.




C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substantial Completion and at least fifteen (15) days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copy with comments.

1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within fifteen (15) days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencing demonstration and training.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data and materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information.

B. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

C. Title Page: Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Architect. 7. Name and contact information for Commissioning Authority. 8. Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed

the systems contained in the manuals. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

D. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

E. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

F. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required.




1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.

2. File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

G. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard copy, bound and labeled volumes.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:

1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.




B. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

C. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

D. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

2.3 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information:

1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents.

2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component.




4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.

C. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Startup procedures. 2. Equipment or system break-in procedures. 3. Routine and normal operating instructions. 4. Regulation and control procedures. 5. Instructions on stopping. 6. Normal shutdown instructions. 7. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. 8. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. 9. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.

2.4 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:

1. Inspection procedures.




2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.5 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including the following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly

and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures:

1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly

instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions. 6. Demonstration and training video recording, if available.

E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.




F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephone number of service agent.

H. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.

B. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

C. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

D. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

E. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

F. Comply with Section 01 7700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.



PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01 7839 - 1

SECTION 01 7839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.


1. Division 01 Section “Photographic Documentation” for record construction photos. 2. Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and

maintenance manual requirements. 3. Divisions 02 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for project record

documents of the Work in those Sections.


A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following:

1. Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints. 2. Number of Copies: Submit copies of record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal:

1) Submit PDF electronic files of scanned record prints. 2) Architect will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional

information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable.

b. Final Submittal:

1) Submit one (1) paper-copy set of marked-up record prints and the following:

2) Record PDF Files.

B. Record Specifications: Submit one paper copy annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one paper copy annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.



D. Record Construction Photos: Submit one (1) copy of construction photos in TIFF or JPEG file format on CD or DVD media at final completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. In lieu of hard copies noted below, Contractor may provide Record Drawings in digital PDF form if available to view by Architect and Owner on a monitor in the Contractor’s jobsite office capable of displaying fullsize sheets.

B. General: Do not use record documents for construction purposes; protect from deterioration and loss in a secure, fire-resistive location; provide access to record documents for the Architect's reference during normal working hours.

C. Record Prints: Maintain one clean, undamaged set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corresponding marked-up record prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. c. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Mark new information that is important to the Owner, but was not shown on Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings.

5. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

6. Organize record drawing sheets into manageable sets, bind with durable paper cover sheets, and print suitable titles, dates and other identification on the cover of each set.

7. Give particular attention to concealed work, which would be difficult to measure and record at a later date.. Accurate notation, elevations, and depths of all underground services, utilities and the like, referenced to the building elevations, shall be recorded. The record of buried items should note changes of direction and locations by dimensions.

8. Upon completion of the work, submit to Architect one full set of record drawings on reproducible paper. Xerox of the jobsite set on vellum is acceptable if readable.



D. Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, review marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files of the Contract Drawings, as follows: 1. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 2. Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints.

Delete, redraw, and add details and notations where applicable. 3. Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution. 4. Owner will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for

use in recording information.

E. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file with comment function enabled. 3. Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic

files that correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification. Include identification in each digital data file.

4. Identification: As follows:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Architect. e. Name of Contractor.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. General: Maintain one complete copy of the Project Manual, including addenda, and one copy of other written construction documents such as Change Orders and modifications issued in printed form during construction. Mark these documents to show substantial variations in actual Work performed in comparison with the text of the Specifications and modifications. Note related record drawing information and Product Data.

1. Upon completion of the Work, submit record Specifications to the Architect for the Owner's records.

2. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

3. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

4. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

5. Note related Requests for Information, Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.



B. Format: Submit record Specifications as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Specifications.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation:

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders and record Drawings where applicable.

B. Format: Submit record Product Data as scanned PDF electronic file(s) of marked-up paper copy of Product Data.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project record document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not wait until end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents for construction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.




JOBSITE INDOOR AIR QUALITY MANAGEMENT 01 8100 - 1

SECTION 01 8100 – JOBSITE INDOOR AIR QUALITY CONSTRUCTION PLAN

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Description of an Indoor Air Quality (IAQ) Construction Plan 2. IAQ Construction Requirements 3. Building Flushout Procedures

B. Related Sections: Site protection specifications included in this section should be coordinated with the following sections of the Project Manual, including:

1. Section 01 7419 – Construction Waste Management 2. Section 01 8113 – Sustainable Design Requirements 3. Division 6 – Woodwork 4. Division 9 – Finishes 5. Division 24 – Bidder Design Provisions, HVAC

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Indoor Air Quality Plan: Within fourteen (14) days after receipt of Notice of Award and prior to any waste removal by the Contractor from the Project, the Contractor shall develop and submit to the Owner for review a plan for mitigating hazardous air quality conditions that may arise from work operations during the project. The plan shall follow the recommended design approaches of SMACNA IAQ guidelines for occupied buildings under construction, 2nd Edition 2007 and shall include the following:

1. Protection of stored on-site and installed absorptive materials from moisture 2. Protection of ventilation system and permanently installed air handlers 3. Source control of construction contaminants, including sawdust, drywall dust,

ventilation of paint operations 4. Pathway interruption 5. Housekeeping 6. Scheduling of work to minimize contamination 7. Schedule for inspection and maintenance of IAQ measures

B. Product Data: Include product data for temporary filtration media (if used) and for filtration media used during occupancy.




C. Photographs: Provide photographs with date and time stamp taken at two different occasions during construction along with a brief description of the SMACNA approach employed, documenting implementation of the IAQ management measures.

1.3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Should the Contractor desire to use procedures, materials, equipment, or products that are not specified but meet the intent of these specifications to protect air quality on the site, the Contractor shall propose these substitutions in accordance with Section 01 6300 – Product Substitutions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Low emitting products have been specified in appropriate sections. See Section 01 8113 – Sustainable Design Requirements for listing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ALL PHASES

A. The Contractor is minimally required to meet or exceed the minimum requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning National Contractors Association (SMACNA) IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2nd Edition 2007 to:

1. Protect the ventilation system components from contamination, and/or provide cleaning of the ventilation components exposed to contamination during construction prior to occupancy.

B. During installation of carpet, paints, furnishings, and other VOC-emitting products, provide supplemental (spot) ventilation for at least 72 hours after work is completed. Preferred HVAC system operation uses supply air fans and ducts only; exhaust provided through building openings. Use exhaust fans to pull exhaust air from deep interior locations. Stair towers and other paths to exterior can be useful during this process.

C. Conduct regular inspection and maintenance of indoor air quality measures including ventilation system protection, and ventilation rate.

D. Require VOC-safe masks for workers installing VOC-emitting products (interior and exterior) defined as products that emit 150 g/l or more UNLESS local jurisdiction's requirements (Canadian or US) are stricter, in which case the strictest requirement shall be followed for use of VOC-safe masks.




E. Use low-toxic cleaning supplies for surfaces, equipment, and worker’s personal use.

F. Use wet sanding for gypsum board assemblies. Exception: Dry sanding allowed subject to owner approval of the following measures:

1. Full isolation of space under finishing 2. Plastic protection sheeting is installed to provide air sealing during the sanding 3. Closure of all air system devices and ductwork 4. Sequencing of construction precludes the possibility of contamination of other spaces

with gypsum dust 5. Worker protection is provided

G. Use safety meetings, signage, and subcontractor agreements to communicate the goals of the indoor air quality construction plan.



SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 01 8113 - 1

SECTION 01 8113 – SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. This Section includes general requirements and procedures for the Project to meet the requirements of the Department of Commerce Housing Trust Fund Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS) v2.2.

B. Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard is incorporated into this Project Manual and shall be read as if printed herein. A copy of the Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard is required to be on site during the construction.

C. Related Sections:

1. Divisions 01 through 49 Sections for Sustainable Design requirements specific to the

Work of each of those Sections. These requirements may or may not include specific reference to ESDS.

2. All other sections where indicated. 3. Section 01 7419 for Construction Waste Management and Disposal.

1.2 PROGRAM DESCRIPTION

A. To be eligible for funding from the Washington State Housing Trust Fund (HTF), an applicant project must satisfy the requirements of the Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS). This rating system sets a standard definition for green affordable housing and includes a checklist for evaluating projects. New construction projects must comply with the listed mandatory criteria and must also earn a minimum of fifty (50) additional points from the optional criteria. The Contractor is required to participate with the Architect and Owner in this effort. The specific criteria this project is pursuing are highlighted in the Evergreen Checklist following this Section.

B. The program consists of eight (8) environmental categories. Points are awarded for achieving the requirements of each criterion and are added together to arrive at a total score for the building. The eight categories are as follows: 1. Integrative Design Process. 2. Location and Neighborhood Fabric. 3. Site Improvements. 4. Water Conservation. 5. Energy Efficiency. 6. Materials Beneficial to the Environment. 7. Healthy Living Environment.



8. Operations and Maintenance.

C. Sustainable building requirements have been incorporated into the design, specifications, and General Requirements of this project in support of the criteria available in the checklist.

1.3 COMPLIANCE

A. The Owner supports the ESDS program whether or not the project intends to achieve any specific point total available in the checklist.

B. Performance-based product criteria are specified in many Sections of this Manual to achieve the requirements of a credit. Careful attention to the specifications will be essential to achieving the sustainable goals of the project and to becoming certified.

C. There are a number of submittals required from the General Contractor and subcontractors to satisfy the program. Submittals are identified in appropriate Sections of this Manual. Refer to Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures.

1.4 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. BAAQMD Regulation 8, Rule 51 – Bay Area Air Quality Management District Adhesive and Sealant Products.

B. Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI).

C. Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS).

D. GS 11 – Green Seal VOC Guidelines for Paints.

E. GS 37 – Green Seal Environmental Standard for General Purpose Cleaning Materials, March 2005.

F. SCAQMD Rule # 1168 –South Coast Air Quality Management District Adhesive and Sealant Applications.

G. SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings Under Construction, 2007, Chapter 3.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. Agrifiber Product: Products consisting of fibrous material derived from the agricultural industry and typically characterized by rapidly renewable characteristics. Such products may consist of wheat straw, sugar cane, and other agricultural crops.

B. Chain-of-Custody Certificates: Certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that wood used to make products was obtained from forests certified by an FSC-accredited certification body



to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship." Certificates shall include evidence that manufacturer is certified for chain of custody by an FSC accredited certification body.

C. Cost Basis: A basis of calculation wherein the input values are in terms of monetary cost (US Dollar).

D. Environmentally preferable products: Products and materials that promote stewardship of the earth’s resources, promote good indoor environmental quality (IEQ), and promote efficiencies in operational performance. Environmentally preferable products: 1. Preserve or renew biodiversity and ecosystems. 2. Maximize use of biobased and recycled content materials. 3. Maintain or improve water quality and promote water stewardship. 4. Maximize use of non-toxic, non-hazardous, healthy and safe building materials.

E. Green: If used in the context of the program requirements, shall be synonymous with the term

“sustainable”.

F. Postconsumer Material: Material generated by households or commercial, industrial, and institutional facilities in their role as end-users of the product which can no longer be used for its intended purpose.

G. Preconsumer Material: Material diverted from the waste stream during the manufacturing process. Excluded is reutilization of materials such as rework, regrind or scrap generated in a process and capable of being reclaimed within the same process that generated it.

H. Rapidly Renewable Materials: Materials made from agricultural products that are typically harvested within a ten-year or shorter cycle. Rapidly renewable materials include products made from bamboo, cotton, flax, jute, straw, sunflower seed hulls, vegetable oils, or wool.

I. Regionally Manufactured Materials: Materials that are manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project location. Manufacturing refers to the final assembly of components into the building product that is installed at the Project site.

J. Regionally Extracted, Harvested, or Recovered Materials: Materials that are extracted, harvested, or recovered and manufactured within a radius of 500 miles from the Project site. Regionally recovered materials include materials made from recycled products where the recycled material was recovered within 500 miles.

K. Recycled Content Materials: Products that contain preconsumer or post-consumer materials as all or part of their feedstock. Recycled content claim shall be consistent with Federal Trade Commission (FTC) Guide for the Use of Environmental Marketing Claims.

L. Recycled Content: The percentage by weight of constituents that have been recovered or otherwise diverted from the solid waste stream, either during the manufacturing process (post -



industrial), or after consumer use (post-consumer). 1. Spills and scraps from the original manufacturing process that are combined with other

constituents after a minimal amount of reprocessing for use in further production of the same product are not recycled materials.

2. Discarded materials from one manufacturing process that are used as constituents in another manufacturing process are post-industrial recycled materials.

3. Recycled content materials claims shall meet the following requirements: a. Defined in accordance with the Federal Trade Commission document, Guides for the

Use of Environmental Marketing Claims, 16 CFR 260.7 (e). b. The recycled content of each material shall be provided for the percentage by weight

of post-consumer and post-industrial content, as defined in the document referenced above, used in each product type used.

4. The value of recycled content of an item shall be determined by dividing the weight of recycled content in the item by the total weight of all material in the item, then multiplying the resulting percentage by the value of the item.

5. Mechanical and electrical components of equipment such as elevators shall not be included in the calculation of cost of project materials.

M. Stewardship: Responsible use and management of resources in support of sustainability.

N. Sustainability: The maintenance of ecosystem components and functions for future generations.

O. Volatile Organic Compounds (VOC’s): Carbon compounds emitted by materials that participate in atmospheric photochemical reactions. VOC’s are common in building products and are emitted over time through outgassing. Sources of VOC’s may include solvents in paints and other coatings; wood preservatives; strippers and household cleaners; adhesives in particleboard, fiberboard, and some plywoods; and foam insulation.

P. Weight Basis: A basis of calculation wherein the input values are in terms of weight (US Pound).

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Comply with Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures, this Section and specific submittal requirements of Divisions 2-33. Refer to the Checklist attached to this specification section for a list of program points being pursued for the project. Specific action required of the contractor is listed for each credit point.

B. Project Materials Cost Data: Provide statement indicating total cost of building materials used for Project. Statement of total cost is not to include mechanical and electrical equipment.



C. Mandatory Criteria Documentation: As indicated on the attached ESDS v2.2 Checklist, Mandatory Criteria must be met to comply with the ESDS.

D. Optional Criteria Documentation: Comply as indicated on v2.2 checklist, attached at the end of this Section.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Waste management coordination: Coordinate recycling of materials with Owner and as

required to conform to the Construction Waste Management Plan outlined in Section 01 7419.

1.8 SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor’s Responsibilities: The design intent and the Contract Documents provide the opportunity for the program criteria to be achieved, and participation from the Contractor is required to achieve the program sustainability goals. The Contractor acknowledges that, as a condition of bidding (or subcontractor bidding) this Project, the Contractor will make every reasonable effort to perform the Work in such a way as to enable the stated goals to be achieved. To this end, the Contractor’s responsibilities include, but are not limited to the following: 1. Compliance with all requirements of the Contract Documents including submittal of all

required documentation in this Section and in all other specification Divisions 1-33. 2. Compliance with the requirements of the program. However, performance criteria for all

products and materials with respect to health, safety, and durability, shall take precedence over the ESDS criteria. The Contractor shall inform the Owner of any known conflicts that may result between noted ‘green’ products or materials and the health, safety, and durability characteristics of the products or materials.

3. Contractor shall prepare final ESDS documentation for program certification as set forth in the Contract Documents.

4. If it is determined, during the course of the Work that other program points (not previously noted to be obtained) may be achievable the Contractor shall cooperate with and assist the Owner in obtaining other points. If obtaining such points requires an adjustment in the Contract Sum, adjustments shall be made as provided in the General Conditions for Changes to the Work.

5. Designating a ‘Green’ advocate within the Contractor’s organization who will be responsible for ensuring compliance with the requirements.

6. The Contractor shall track the use of materials using the checklist for reference. Included, but not limited to, are material qualities, costs, the percentage of post-consumer and post-industrial recycled content, and substantiating chain of custody for certain products.

B. The Contractor will determine that conditions of construction comply with the program requirements. Do not proceed with Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.



C. Correction of Work nonconforming with the certification requirements shall be performed at Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall provide the necessary documentation to show compliance of corrected Work. The Architect will be the sole judge in determining compliance with certification requirements.

D. Performance-based product criteria are specified in many of the Sections of the specifications to achieve the requirements of the certification. Careful attention to the specifications will be essential to achieving the sustainable goals of the project.

E. Some products specified may have limited suppliers and supply. Therefore it is advisable to initiate the ordering of these products as early in the construction process as possible. For example, certified wood is available from several sources but is milled only on demand, and a sufficient lead-time is required to ensure a timely delivery.

1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Requests for substitutions shall comply with the provisions of Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures, with the following additional information required where ESDS requirements are specified. Trade Contractor shall: 1. Demonstrate as per the requirements of this Section that proposed substitution complies

with VOC emission limits. 2. Demonstrate as per the requirements of this Section that proposed substitution complies

with requirements for recycled content. 3. Demonstrate as per the requirements of this Section that proposed substitution complies

with any further section specific ESDS compliance requirements applicable to substitution. 4. Trade Contractor shall include on the transmittal sheet of each request for substitution the

relevant ESDS credit number. PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Low/No VOC Paints and Primers: For interior site applied applications use paints and

coatings that comply with the following combination of Green Seal standard GS-11 and MPI for the following limits for VOC content: 1. Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 2. Non-Flat Paints and Coatings: VOC not more than 50 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive Coatings: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. If colorant is added at point of Sale, the VOC content shall not exceed the following

maximum VOC limits: a. Flats: 100 g/L b. Non-Flats: 100 g/L



c. Primer or Undercoat: 100 g/L d. Floor: 100 g/L e. Anti-Corrosive: 250 g/L

B. Low/No VOC Adhesives and Sealants: For interior site applied applications use adhesives and sealants that comply with the following limits for VOC content: 1. Adhesives must comply with most recent version of SCAQMD Rule 1168. 2. Sealants must comply with BAAQMD Regulation 8 Rule 51.

C. Construction Waste Management: In accordance with Section 01 7419. The following

materials shall be diverted from landfill: 1. Cardboard 2. Wood 3. Drywall 4. Concrete, brick and asphalt 5. Metals 6. Land-clearing debris. 7. Paint. 8. Glass. 9. Plastics. 10. Carpeting material. 11. Beverage containers.

D. Environmentally Preferable Materials: Use materials that are extracted, harvested,

manufactured or processed within 500 miles of the construction site. 1. Exterior wall framing. 2. Flooring 3. Interior walls and ceilings 4. Landscape materials 5. Interior finishes 6. Exterior wall 7. Roof 8. Envelope

PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 PROGRAM COMPLIANCE, GENERAL

A. Determine that conditions of construction are acceptable to comply with program requirements. Do not proceed with the Work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Owner.



B. Correction of Work that is non-complying with program requirements, or that is judged by the Owner/Architect to potentially compromise the requirements of the program, shall be performed at the Contractor’s expense. Contractor shall provide the necessary documentation to demonstrate compliance of the corrected work.

C. The checklist attached to this Section provides a summary of all possible program points. The Contractor shall be responsible for all specific requirements identified within the Specifications Divisions 1-33, using this table as an overall checklist and for reference. As the checklist is completed and any discrepancies become apparent between the checklist and the other Contract Documents, the Contractor shall bring such discrepancy to the attention of the Owner and Architect for resolution.


Form 2C

Evergreen Checklist - Rural Project (NC)

Project Name

2.1 Access to Fresh, Local Foods Optional 3

Section 2 SUBTOTAL 14

2.8 Smart Site Location: Passive Design Optional 0

2.9 Brownfield or Adaptive Reuse Site Optional 0

2.7a Walkable Neighborhoods- Sidewalks & Pathways Mandatory X

2.7b Walkable Neighborhoods- Sidewalks & Pathways Optional - Tribal projects only 0

2.5 Access to Services & Public Transportation Mandatory and optional 5 5

2.6 Preservation of & Access to Open Space Optional 1

2.3 Compact Development Mandatory X

2.4 Maximizing Density Optional 5

2.1 Sensitive Site Protection Mandatory X

2.2 Connections to Existing Development & Infrastructure Mandatory X


Design Element: Location & Neighborhood Fabric

# Criteria Requirement Type/Optional Points Points

1.1 Green Development Plan Mandatory X

1.2 Universal Design Optional 1

OLYMPIA COMMONS

URBAN PROJECT

New Construction

Design Element: Integrative Design


Form 2D ESDS v2.2 Checklist - Urban New Construction ProjectINSTRUCTIONS: Do not leave any cells blank.

For Mandatory Criteria:

� Indicate with an X all criteria that apply to your project in the Points column.

� Select "N/A" if the criterion does not apply to your project.

For Optional Criteria:� New construction projects must achieve 50 points. Moderate & Substantial Rehab projects must achieve 40 points.

� Insert the appropriate number of optional points you are claiming in the Specify column, or 0 if no points are selected.

Link to Evergreen

Criteria

Form 2D ESDS v2.2 Checklist - Urban New Construction ProjectINSTRUCTIONS: Do not leave any cells blank.

For Mandatory Criteria:

� Indicate with an X all criteria that apply to your project in the Points column.

� Select "N/A" if the criterion does not apply to your project.

For Optional Criteria:� New construction projects must achieve 50 points. Moderate & Substantial Rehab projects must achieve 40 points.

� Insert the appropriate number of optional points you are claiming in the Specify column, or 0 if no points are selected.

Link to Evergreen

Criteria


4.2 Advanced Water-Conserving Fixtures Optional 4

4.3 Water Reuse Optional 0

Design Element: Water Conservation


4.1 Water-Conserving Fixtures Mandatory X

3.6 Storm Drain Labels Mandatory X


3.4 Efficient Irrigation Mandatory if irrigation is utilized X

3.5 Surface Water Management Optional 0

3.3b Landscaping Optional 5

3.3c Landscaping-Significant Trees Optional 0

3.2 Erosion & Sedimentation Control Mandatory X

3.3a Landscaping Mandatory if providing Landscaping X

Design Element: Site Improvements


3.1 Environmental Remediation Mandatory X


Form 2C Evergreen Checklist - Rural Project (New Construction)

ESDS v2.2

CFA Forms 2014, v1.0

June 2014

Form 2C


7.2a Healthy Flooring Materials Mandatory if providing floor coverings X

7.2b Healthy Flooring Materials Optional 0

Design Element: Healthy Living Environment


7.1 Composite Wood Products that Contain No Added Urea Formaldehyde Mandatory X

6.8 Socially Sustainable Products Optional 0


6.7a Reduced Heat-Island Effect: Roofing Optional 5

6.7b Reduced Heat-Island Effect: Paving Optional 0

6.5 Water-Permeable Walkways Optional 0

6.6 Water-Permeable Parking Areas Optional 0

6.3 Construction Waste Management Optional 5

6.4 Environmentally Preferable Materials Optional

6.1 Low/No VOC Paints & Primers Mandatory X

6.2 Low/No VOC Adhesives & Sealants Mandatory X


Design Element: Materials Beneficial to the Environment


5.9 Domestic Water Heating Mandatory X

5.10 Domestic Water Heating Optional 0

5.8b Photovoltaic/Solar Hot Water Ready Optional 0

5.8c Solar Water Heating Optional 0

5.7a Electricity Meter Mandatory X

5.8a Renewable Energy Optional 0

5.5 Central Laundry Optional 3

5.6 Efficient Lighting Mandatory X

5.3 Sizing of Heating & Cooling Equipment Mandatory X

5.4 EnergyStar Appliances Mandatory if providing appliances X

5.1a Building Performance Standard - New Construction Mandatory X

5.2a Additional Reduction in Energy Use - New Construction (PLEASE SEE NOTE) Optional

Design Element: Energy Efficiency


7.17 Smoke-Free Building Optional 7


7.15 Integrated Pest Management Mandatory X

7.16 Lead-Safe Work Practices Mandatory X

7.13 Enhanced Building Envelope Design Optional 6

7.14 Garage Isolation Mandatory X

7.11 Radon Mitigation Mandatory X

7.12 Water Drainage Mandatory X

7.9c Mold Prevention: Tub & Shower Enclosures Mandatory X

7.10 Vapor Barrier Strategies Mandatory X

7.9a Mold Prevention: Water Heaters, Condensing Boilers, Furnaces & Air ConditioningMandatory X

7.9b Mold Prevention: Surfaces Mandatory X

7.7 Combustion Equipment Mandatory X

7.8 Cold Water & Hot Water Pipe Insulation Mandatory X

7.5 Ventilation Mandatory X

7.6 Clothes Dryer Exhaust Mandatory X

7.3a Exhaust Fans-Bathroom Mandatory X

7.4a Exhaust Fans-Kitchen Mandatory X

7.2b Healthy Flooring Materials Optional 0


ESDS v2.2


June 2014

Form 2C


Section 8 2

Overall Checklist Total 52

Section 5 3

Section 6 10

Section 7 13

Section 2 14

Section 3 5

Section 4 4


Section 1 1

8.4 Project Data Collection Optional 0

8.5 Educational Signage Optional 2

8.2 Resident Manual Mandatory X

8.3 Resident & Property Manager Orientation Mandatory X

Design Element: Operations & Maintenance


8.1 Building Maintenance Manual Mandatory X

Thresholds

In order to ensure that your project will pass the threshold for the Evergreen

Sustainable Development Standard, we advise building in a "cushion" of 5-10 points

above what is required.

New Construction projects must achieve 50 points

Rehab - Moderate and Rehab - Substantial projects must achieve 40 points

Thresholds

In order to ensure that your project will pass the threshold for the Evergreen

Sustainable Development Standard, we advise building in a "cushion" of 5-10 points

above what is required.

New Construction projects must achieve 50 points

Rehab - Moderate and Rehab - Substantial projects must achieve 40 points


ESDS v2.2


June 2014


GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

01 9113 - 1

SECTION 01 9113 – GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 PURPOSE

A. This section includes the general requirements that apply to the implementation of the commissioning process.

B. Commissioning is a systematic process that provides documented confirmation that the building systems perform according to the criteria set forth in the design intent defined in the Basis of Design and satisfy the operational needs defined in the Owner’s Project Requirements.

C. Commissioning during the construction phase is intended to achieve the following specific objectives:

1. Verify that applicable equipment and systems are installed according to the manufacturer’s recommendations and to industry accepted minimum standards and that they receive adequate operational checkout by the installing contractors.

2. Verify and document proper performance of equipment and systems. 3. Verify that O&M documentation left on site is complete. 4. Verify that the Owner’s operating personnel are adequately trained.

1.2 ABBREVIATIONS

A/E- Architect and design engineers GC- General contractor (prime) CxA- Commissioning authority MC- Mechanical contractor CC- Controls contractor OR- Owner's Representative CM- Construction Manager PFC- Pre-functional checklist Cx- Commissioning PM- Project manager (of the Owner) EC- Electrical contractor Subs- Subcontractors to General FPT- Functional performance test TAB- Test and balance contractor

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Owner’s Project Requirements (OPR): A document that details the functional requirements of a project and the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurable performance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.

B. Basis of Design (BOD) Basis of Design: A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selections used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory



01 9113 - 2

requirements, standards, and guidelines. The document includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.

C. Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, and documentation requirements of the commissioning process as dictated by the Commissioning Specification.

D. Pre-Functional Checklist (PFC): A list of items to inspect and elementary component tests to conduct to verify proper installation of equipment, provided by the CxA to the contractors. Pre-functional checklists are primarily static inspections and procedures to prepare the equipment or system for initial operation (e.g., belt tension, oil levels OK, labels affixed, gages in place, sensors calibrated, etc.). However, some pre-functional checklist items entail simple testing of the function of a component, a piece of equipment or system (such as measuring the voltage imbalance on a three phase pump motor of a chiller system). The word pre-functional refers to before functional testing. Pre-functional checklists augment and are combined with the manufacturer’s start-up checklist. Even without a commissioning process, contractors typically perform some, if not many, of the pre-functional checklist items a commissioning authority will recommend. However, few contractors document in writing the execution of these checklist items. Therefore, for most equipment, the contractors execute the checklists on their own. The commissioning authority only requires that the procedures be documented in writing, and does not witness much of the pre-functional checklist completion, except for larger or more critical pieces of equipment.

E. Sampling: Functionally testing only a fraction of the total number of identical or near identical pieces of equipment.

F. Functional Test Procedure (FTP): Test of the dynamic function and operation of equipment and systems using manual (direct observation) or monitoring methods. Functional testing is the dynamic testing of systems (rather than just components) under full operation (e.g., the chiller pump is tested interactively with the chiller functions to see if the pump ramps up and down to maintain the differential pressure setpoint). Systems are tested under various modes, such as during low cooling or heating loads, high loads, component failures, unoccupied, varying outside air temperatures, fire alarm, power failure, etc. The systems are run through all the control system’s sequences of operation and components are verified to be responding as the sequences state. Traditional air or water test and balancing (TAB) is not functional testing, in the commissioning sense of the word. TAB’s primary work is setting up the system flows and pressures as specified, while functional testing is verifying that which has already been set up. The commissioning authority develops the functional test procedures in a sequential written form, coordinates, oversees and documents the actual testing, which is usually performed by the installing contractor or vendor. FTPs are performed after pre-functional checklists and startups are complete.

G. Issue Resolution Log (IRL): A formal and ongoing record of problems or concerns – and their resolution – that has been raised by members of the Commissioning Team during the course of the Commissioning Process.



01 9113 - 3

1.4 RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. General

1. 01 3100 PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 2. 01 3300 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 3. 01 7700 CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 4. 01 7823 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

B. Plumbing

1. 22 0000 PLUMBING NARRATIVE

C. HVAC

1. 23 0000 HVAC NARRATIVE

D. Electrical

1. 26 0000 ELECTRICAL NARRATIVE

1.5 RESPONSIBILITIES

A. Owner & Owner Representatives

1. Arrange for facility operating and maintenance personnel to attend various field commissioning activities and field training sessions.

2. Provide final approval for the completion of the commissioning work. 3. Ensure that any seasonal or deferred testing and any deficiency issues are addressed. 4. Attend commissioning kickoff meetings and additional meetings as necessary.

B. Commissioning Authority

1. The primary role of the CxA is to ensure that the commissioned systems meet the owner’s project requirements and function according to the design intent. The CxA is not responsible for design concept, design criteria, compliance with codes, design or general construction scheduling, cost estimating, or construction management. The CxA may assist with problem-solving non-conformance or deficiencies, but ultimately that responsibility resides with the general contractor and the A/E.

a. Coordinates and directs the commissioning activities b. Develops and updates the following commissioning documentation as

necessary:

1) Commissioning Plan 2) Pre-functional Checklists (PFC) 3) Commissioning Site Observation Reports 4) Functional Test Procedures (FTP)



01 9113 - 4

5) Completed Functional Performance Test (FTP) - as witnessed 6) Issue Resolution Log (IRL) 7) Commissioning Report 8) Systems Manual

c. Reviews and provides input on the following commissioning documentation:

1) Commissioning Schedule 2) Commissioning Agenda and Meeting Minutes 3) Equipment and Control Submittal related to commissioned systems 4) Completed Pre-functional Checklists (PFC) 5) Start-up Reports 6) Training Agendas and completion verifications 7) Operation and Maintenance Manuals related to commissioned systems 8) Warranties related to commissioned systems

d. Attend commissioning Kickoff meeting and other commissioning meetings. e. Perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. f. Direct and witness functional testing as conducted by installing contractors. g. Analyze functional performance trend logs and monitoring data to verify

performance. h. Tab verification as described in section 3.9 below i. Deferred Testing coordination j. Warranty Review coordination

C. Engineer of Record

1. The EOR shall participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Attend the commissioning kickoff meeting and selected commissioning team meetings.

b. Provide a Basis of Design. c. Participate in the resolution of system deficiencies identified during

commissioning. d. Participate in the resolution of design non-conformance and design deficiencies

identified during performance testing and warranty-period commissioning.

D. General Contractor

1. Contractor shall assign a representative with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Designate a Commissioning coordinator. b. Coordinate and attend commissioning team meetings held on a periodic basis.

Create a meeting agenda for distribution prior to the meeting and document the meetings minutes.



01 9113 - 5

c. Ensure and coordinate the participation of the subcontractors in the Commissioning process.

d. Track completion of equipment start up and forward start up reports generated by contractor to CxA at least 7 days prior to functional testing.

e. Track completion of test and balance and forward test and balance report generated by contractor to CxA at least 7 days prior to functional testing.

f. Coordinate the completion of the Pre-functional checklists (PFC) by the Discipline Specific Contractors and submit completed forms to the CxA for approval.

g. Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the CxA. h. Coordinate all necessary parties for scheduled functional testing. i. Coordinate access to all commissioned system components as necessary for

CxA to witness functional test procedures. j. Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration

with entity responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.

k. Review and follow procedures outlined in the Commissioning Plan. l. Track completion of resolution of issues recorded in the Issue Resolution Log.

Coordinate installing contractor’s responses and updates to Issue Resolution Log.

m. Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with commissioning schedule based upon the construction schedule. Identify other activities that may impede the commissioning process (air barrier testing, TAB, fire alarm testing, etc.)

n. Coordinate the training of Owner personnel and provide the times and dates of training to the CxA. Provide training agendas prior to training and evaluation forms completed by training participants to the CxA.

o. Deferred Testing participation p. Warranty Review participation

E. Subcontractors

1. Subcontractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Attend commissioning kickoff meetings and additional meetings as necessary. b. Provide all requested submittal data, including detailed start-up procedures and

specific responsibilities of the Owner to keep warranties in force. c. Complete their related sections on the Pre-functional Checklists (PFC). d. Perform the test procedures laid out in the Functional Performance Tests (FPT)

for pretesting prior to final testing witness by the CxA. e. Perform the test procedures laid out in the Functional Performance Tests (FPT)

for witness by the CxA. f. Review and follow procedures outlined in the Commissioning Plan. g. Provide requested graphical trends to the CxA for demonstration of system

performance and incorporation into the CxA documentation.



01 9113 - 6

h. Include all special tools and instruments (only available from vendor, specific to a piece of equipment) required for testing equipment according to these Contract Documents in the base bid price to the Contractor, except for stand-alone data logging equipment that may be used by the CxA.

i. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of operation and testing procedures.

j. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives. k. Deferred Testing participation l. Warranty Review participation

F. Equipment Supplier

1. The equipment suppliers shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall schedule them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, the following:

a. Assist in equipment testing per agreements with Subs. b. Provide information requested by CxA regarding equipment sequence of

operation and testing procedures. c. Review test procedures for equipment installed by factory representatives. d. Attend commissioning kickoff meetings and additional meetings as necessary.

1.6 SYSTEMS TO BE COMMISSIONED

Category Systems/Equipment

HVAC Air Side Split System Air-to-Air Heat Pump Systems

General Exhaust Fans

General Supply Fans

Electric Unit Heaters

Plumbing Domestic Hot Water

Lighting Occupancy sensors

Daylight sensors

Photocells

Switch controls

Programmable controllers

1.7 CODES AND STANDARDS

A. Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard v 2.2

B. Washington State Energy Code

C. ICC

D. BCA guidelines



01 9113 - 7

E. ASHRAE commissioning guidelines

F. ACG guidelines

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT

A. All standard testing equipment required to perform startup and initial checkout and required functional performance testing shall be provided by the Contractor. Two-way radios shall be provided by the Contractor when necessary.

B. Special equipment, tools, test gas, and instruments required for testing equipment shall be provided by the Contractor.

C. All testing equipment shall be of sufficient quality and accuracy to test and/or measure system performance with the tolerances specified in the Specifications. If not otherwise noted, the following minimum requirements apply: Temperature sensors and digital thermometers shall have a certified calibration within the past year to an accuracy of 0.5°F and a resolution of ± 0.1°F. Pressure sensors shall have an accuracy of ± 2.0% of the value range being measured (not full range of meter) and have been calibrated within the last year. All equipment shall be calibrated according to the manufacturer’s recommended intervals and when dropped or damaged. Calibration tags shall be affixed or certificates readily available.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 COMMISSIONING TEAM

A. The members of the commissioning team consist of the Commissioning authority (CxA), the Owner's Representative (OR), the designated representative of the owner’s Construction Management firm (CM), the General Contractor commissioning coordinator (GC), the architect and design engineers (AE & EOR), the designated representative of the Mechanical Contractor (MC), the designated representative of the Electrical Contractor (EC), the TAB representative, the designated representative of the Controls Contractor (CC), any other installing discipline contractors or suppliers of equipment. If known, the Owner’s building or plant operator/engineer is also a member of the commissioning team.

3.2 COMMISSIONING PLAN

A. The CxA will develop the commissioning plan with review and input from the rest of the Commissioning Team.



01 9113 - 8

3.3 COMMISSIONING KICK OFF MEETING:

A. An initial kick off meeting organized by the General Contractor Commissioning Coordinator (GC) and facilitated by the Commissioning Authority (CxA) during construction where the commissioning process is reviewed with the project commissioning team members.

3.4 COMMISSIONING SCHEDULE

A. The GC will be required to maintain a commissioning schedule that is updated periodically during the commissioning process and is presented and discussed at the commissioning meetings.

B. Include the following typical types of milestone and predecessors:

1. Utilities Available 2. System Readiness (by system)

a. Utilities available to equipment (water, power, gas) b. Equipment Startup c. Controls Point to Point d. Test and Balancing e. Functional performance testing

3. Conflicting construction activities (preventing Cx activities), some examples as follows:

a. Fire alarm testing b. Air barrier testing c. Air quality measuring

C. The schedule shall be submitted to the CxA for review and discussion during the Commissioning Meetings.

3.5 COMMISSIONING MEETINGS

A. Periodic meeting held during construction organized and managed by the GC to plan, scope, coordinate, and schedule future activities and resolve problems with the commissioning team members.

3.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Equipment documentation shall be submitted to the CxA from the GC to detail startup procedures.



01 9113 - 9

3.7 STARTUPS

A. The CxA may be required to witness startup of selected equipment identified in the Commissioning Plan. Scheduling of these startups shall be incorporated into the Commissioning Schedule.

3.8 PRE-FUNCTIONAL CHECKLIST (PFC)

A. The CxA will develop the PFCs with review and input from the Commissioning Team. After equipment is installed, the PFCs shall be filled out by the EC, MC, and the CC. The GC shall verify the completion of the forms prior to submitting them to the CxA. The submission of the PFC is an indication that the equipment is ready to begin functional performance testing.

B. Contractor will conduct independent start up and testing. Contractor completes manufacturer start up documentation which covers basic component set up, calibration, and functionality which shall be prerequisite to functional performance testing. CxA collects and reviews start up documentation completed by the contractor.

C. Only field individuals that have direct knowledge and witnessed that a line item task on the PFC was actually performed shall initial or check that item.

3.9 TEST DOCUMENTATION

A. TAB report:

1. Prior to functional testing, certified and approved TAB report shall be submitted to the CxA for review.

2. The CxA may verify the TAB report for verification equipment performance. At the request of the CxA, the contractor will be available on the jobsite and with the same portable measurement instrument used during balancing, start-up and to verify 10% of the report values in the field.

B. DDC point to point

1. CC shall submit a point to point checkout report that verifies all the end to end device conditions. Checkout report shall verify all installation of end device, wiring between device and controller and controller software is configured correctly reflected in the software.

3.10 SITE OBSERVATIONS

A. The CxA will periodically perform site visits, as necessary, to observe component and system installations. Deficiencies will be identified in the Issue Resolution Log and discussed at Commissioning Meetings.



01 9113 - 10

3.11 FUNCTIONAL TEST PROCEDURES (FTPS)

A. The CxA develops the FTPs based upon the sequence of operations laid out in the contract documents and approved control submittal and with review and input from the rest of the Commissioning Team.

B. It is important that the GC, EC, MC, and CC review the FTPs for consistency with the current contract document requirements. Lack of coordination on the FTP may result in retesting and delay the commissioning process.

C. Once the PFCs have been completed, the GC shall schedule testing with the CxA and Owner at least 7 days in advance.

D. The GC shall ensure that the systems have been pretested by the installing contractor, according to the approved FTP to ensure that systems are operating properly and to avoid retesting.

3.12 SAMPLING

A. When sampling is conducted a random spot check is required with sufficient sample size to provide reasonable confidence that the sampled results represent the entire population of units. The commissioning process will establish that critical equipment and systems perform properly when the building is turned over to the owner.

B. The CxA shall observe, at minimum, the procedures for each piece of primary equipment, unless there are multiple units, (in which case a sampling strategy may be used as approved by the CM). In no case will the number of units witnessed be less than four on any one building, nor less than 10% of the total number of identical or very similar units.

C. For lower-level components of equipment, (e.g., VAV boxes, sensors, controllers), the CxA shall observe a sampling of the prefunctional, start-up procedures, and functional performance testing. The sampling procedures are identified in the commissioning plan.

3.13 NON-CONFORMANCE

A. The CxA will record the results of the functional test on the procedure or test form. All deficiencies or non-conformance issues shall be identified on the IRL.

B. Corrections of minor deficiencies identified may be made during the tests at the discretion of the CxA. In such cases the deficiency and resolution will be documented on the procedure form.

C. Every effort will be made to expedite the testing process and minimize unnecessary delays, while not compromising the integrity of the procedures.



01 9113 - 11

3.14 RETESTING

A. If a functional performance test has been unable to be satisfactorily completed, it will need to be retested.

B. Once the non-conformance has been resolved, the GC shall schedule test witnessing with the CxA and Owner at least 7 days in advance.

C. Cost of Retesting.

1. The cost for the subcontractor to retest a prefunctional or functional test, if they are responsible for the deficiency, shall be theirs. If they are not responsible, any cost recovery for retesting costs shall be negotiated with the GC.

2. For a deficiency identified, not related to any prefunctional checklist or start-up fault, the following shall apply: The CxA will direct the retesting of the equipment once at no additional cost. However, the Owner may charge the GC for the CxA’s time for a second retest.

3. The time for the CxA to direct any retesting required because a specific prefunctional checklist or start-up test item, reported to have been successfully completed, but determined during functional testing to be deficient, may be charged by the Owner to the GC.

3.15 DEFERRED TESTING

A. Unforeseen Deferred Tests occur if any check or test cannot be completed due to the building structure, required occupancy condition or other deficiency, execution of checklists and functional testing may be delayed upon approval of the OR. These tests will be conducted in the same manner as the seasonal tests as soon as possible. Services of necessary parties will be negotiated.

B. Seasonal Testing occur if any testing is delayed until the weather conditions are closer to the system’s design. During the warranty period, seasonal testing shall be completed as part of this contract. The CxA shall coordinate this activity. Tests will be executed, documented and deficiencies corrected by the appropriate Subs, with facilities staff and the CxA witnessing. Any final adjustments to the O&M manuals and as-builds due to the testing will be made.

3.16 PERFORMANCE PERIOD

A. Upon successful completion of functional test procedures, a performance period of 14 consecutive calendar days shall commence on first day following the last acceptance test. This period shall be completed prior to final acceptance of the project. In event of failure to meet standard of performance during any initiated performance period, it is not required that one 14-calendar day period expire in order for another performance period to begin.

B. Contractor shall provide Commissioning Authority with trend logs of the system performance for the control variables and set point in each control process in 15-minute time intervals.



01 9113 - 12

C. Upon Contractor’s completion of the requirements of the commissioning plan and the successful completion of the performance period, and receipt of the required documentation, the Commissioning Authority shall provide the Owner with a statement of acceptable performance.

D. Equipment will not be accepted by the Owner and final payment will not be made by the Owner until acceptable performance is met.

3.17 WARRANTY REVIEW

A. During the first year of the building’s operation, it is important to ensure that the performance of the facility is maintained, particularly before the warranty period expires. At 10 months into the warranty period, operation of system and components is reviewed by the Owner, Contractor, and the CxA to identify any items that must be repaired or replaced under warranty. CxA will also interview building operating personnel to identify any outstanding warranty failures and any persistent equipment failures that shall be handled within the warranty period. This review is based on warranty items and continued conformance with Owner’s Project Requirements. The CxA will document the results and forward recommendations to the Owner and Contractor for resolution.




STRUCTURE DEMOLITION 02 4116 - 1

SECTION 02 4116 - STRUCTURE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Removing below-grade construction. 2. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilitie


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

C. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Hazardous Materials: It is not expected that hazardous materials will be encountered in the Work.

1. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner before start of the Work. 2. If materials suspected of containing hazardous materials are encountered, do not

disturb; immediately notify Architect and Owner. Hazardous materials will be removed by Owner under a separate contract.

B. On-site storage or sale of removed items or materials is not permitted.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Satisfactory Soils: Comply with requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earthwork."




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting demolition operations.

B. Inventory and record the condition of items to be removed and salvaged.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utilities: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utilities serving buildings and structures to be demolished.

1. Cut off pipe or conduit a minimum of 24 inches below grade. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit after bypassing according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Do not start demolition work until utility disconnecting and sealing have been completed.

3.3 DEMOLITION

A. General: Demolish indicated site improvements completely. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations.

1. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. Maintain portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

2. Maintain fire watch during and for at least 48 hours after flame cutting operations. 3. Maintain adequate ventilation when using cutting torches.

B. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct building demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, walkways, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Use water mist and other suitable methods to limit spread of dust and dirt. Comply with governing environmental-protection regulations.

C. Explosives: Use of explosives is not permitted.

D. Demolish foundation walls and other below-grade construction.

E. Existing Utilities: Demolish existing utilities and below-grade utility structures. Cut utilities flush with grade.




F. Below-Grade Areas: Completely fill below-grade areas and voids resulting from building demolition operations with satisfactory soil materials according to backfill requirements in Section 31 2000 "Earthwork."

G. Site Grading: Uniformly rough grade area of demolished construction to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Remove demolition waste materials from Project site and legally dispose. See Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal" for recycling and disposal of demolition waste.

B. Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before building demolition operations began.




CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03 3000 - 1

SECTION 03 3000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes: 1. Cast-in place reinforced concrete, including formwork, reinforcing, mix design,

placement procedures, and finishes.

B. Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: 1. Foundations, footings, columns, beam and walls. 2. Slabs-on-grade and ramps, interior and exterior 3. Equipment pads and bases. 4. Concrete topping slabs.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Section 03 5413 – Gypsum Cement Underlayment. 3. Section 09 9100 – Painting. 4. Section 31 2000 – Earthwork.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following according to Conditions of the Contract & Division-1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for proprietary materials and items, including reinforcement and forming accessories, admixtures, patching compounds, waterstops, joint systems, curing compounds, dry-shake finish materials, sealer products (including application and maintenance recommendations) and others if requested by Architect.

C. Shop Drawings 1. Shop drawings for reinforcement detailing fabricating, bending, and placing

concrete reinforcement. Comply with ACI 315 "Manual of Standard Practice for




Detailing Reinforced Concrete Structures" showing bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, and arrangement of concrete reinforcement. Include special reinforcing required for openings through concrete structures and embed placement.

2. Shop drawings for slabs on grade showing contraction joint locations, plus heights, lengths and thicknesses of curbs and stem walls.

D. Laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test.

E. Material certificates in lieu of material laboratory test reports when permitted by Architect. Material certificates shall be signed by manufacturer and Contractor, certifying that each material item complies with or exceeds specified requirements. Provide certification from admixture manufacturers that chloride content complies with specification requirements.

F. Mockups:

1. 24” x 36” panel of each slab finish.

G. Formwork inspection by Architect: 1. Architectural Finish Concrete: Architect shall be notified two days in advance when

exposed wall side form is ready to review. Review is for general architectural applications and features only. Designing formwork for structural stability, tightness of joints and efficiency is Contractor's responsibility.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following codes, specifications, and standards, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1. American Concrete Institute (ACI) 301, "Specifications for Structural Concrete for

Buildings." 2. ACI 318, "Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete." 3. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute (CRSI) "Manual of Standard Practice." 4. ACI 117, “Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials.”

B. Concrete Testing Service: Owner will engage a testing agency acceptable to the governing jurisdiction to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixes.

C. Materials and installed work may require testing and retesting at any time during progress of Work. Tests, including retesting of rejected materials for installed Work, shall be done at Contractor's expense.

D. Coordination: The wood framing for the residential floors sits on the concrete foundations. Framing installer and concrete installer shall meet prior to the placing of concrete to be sure that all bolts, anchors, holddowns, inserts and the like for transferring lateral and vertical loads from the wood framing to the concrete slab are coordinated. Concrete installer shall also meet with the mechanical and electrical subcontractors to coordinate all




piping, conduit, openings, sleeves, block-outs and the like.

E. Mockups:

1. Build field-constructed mockups, 14 day prior to installation of all exterior 2. Concrete slab finishes, to verify selections made under sample submittals and to

demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 3. Notify Architect one week in advance of the dates and times when mockups will be

installed. 4. Build mockups for each type of slab finish in sizes approximately 24 inches long by

36” wide by typical slab thickness. 5. Retain and maintain mock-ups during construction in undisturbed condition as

standard for judging work of section. 6. Do not install slab until Architect has approved shop drawings and mock-up. 7. Demolish and remove mockups from Project site when directed. 8. Integrally Edged Concrete Mockup:

a. Provide slab mockup at least one month before start of slab work to allow concrete cure before observation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FORM MATERIALS

A. Forms for exposed Concrete: Plywood faced, or other acceptable panel-type materials to provide continuous, straight, smooth, exposed surfaces – including smooth (e.g. not spiral) forms for concrete columns. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Medium Density (MDO), Class 1 or better, mill release agent treated and edge

sealed. 2. Architectural Finish Concrete: Panels shall be new or in like new condition.

B. Forms for unexposed finish Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another acceptable material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Form Release Agent: Provide commercial formulation form release agent with a maximum of 350 mg/l volatile organic compounds (VOCs) that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

D. Form Ties: Factory-fabricated, adjustable-length, removable or snap-off metal form ties designed to prevent form deflection and to prevent spalling of concrete upon removal. Provide units that will leave no metal closer than 1-1/2 inches to the plane of the exposed concrete surface. 1. Architectural concrete: Provide ties that, when removed, will leave cone shaped holes

not larger than 1 inch in diameter in the concrete surface.




2.2 REINFORCING MATERIALS

A. General: See structural drawings for size of reinforcing.

B. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615, Grade 60, deformed, except as noted on the structural drawings

C. Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, plain, cold-drawn steel.

D. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185, welded steel wire fabric.

E. Supports for Reinforcement: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Use wire bar-type supports complying with CRSI specifications.

2.3 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I. 1. Use one brand of cement throughout Project unless otherwise acceptable to

Architect.

B. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Type F.

C. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33 and as specified. Provide aggregates from a single source for exposed concrete. 1. For exposed exterior surfaces, do not use fine or coarse aggregates that contain

substances that cause spalling. 2. Local aggregates not complying with ASTM C 33 that have been shown to produce

concrete of adequate strength and durability by special tests or actual service may be used when acceptable to Architect.

D. Water: Potable.

E. Admixtures, General: Provide concrete admixtures that contain not more than 0.1 percent chloride ions.

F. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260, certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other required admixtures.

G. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type A.

H. High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type F or Type G.

I. Water-Reducing, Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type E.

J. Water-Reducing, Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494, Type D.




2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Non-Shrink Grout: Premixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate, cement, water reducing and plasticizing agents; capable of developing minimum compressive strength per structural notes. Provide Master buildings Embeco 885 or approved equal.

B. Water Based Sealer and Curing Compound: Tamm’s Industries’ Seal-Cure WB 150. 1-800-21-TAMMS

2.5 JOINT DEVICES AND FILLER MATERIALS

A. Joint Filler Type A: ASTM D1751; Asphalt impregnated fiberboard or felt.

B. Construction Joint Devices: Integral galvanized steel or extruded plastic; ¼ inch thick, formed to tongue and groove profile.

C. Sealant and Primer: As specified in Section 07900.

2.6 RELATED MATERIAL

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: One of the following, complying with ASTM C 171. 1. Waterproof paper. 2. Polyethylene film. 3. Polyethylene-coated burlap.

B. Liquid Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: Liquid-type membrane-forming curing compound complying with ASTM C 309, Type I, Class A. Moisture loss not more than 0.55 kg/sq. meter when applied at 200 sq. ft./gal. 1. Provide material that has a maximum volatile organic compound (VOC) rating of D

mg per liter.

C. Water-Based Acrylic Membrane Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type I, Class B.

D. Evaporation Control: Monomolecular film-forming compound applied to exposed concrete slab surfaces for temporary protection from rapid moisture loss.

E. Bonding Agent: Polyvinyl acetate, interior only or acrylic base.

F. Epoxy Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component material suitable for use on dry or damp surfaces. Provide material type, grade, and class to suit project requirements per General Structural Notes.

H. Lean Concrete: For a bearing surface, as required, below footings or over excavated footprints, fc=1000 psi at 28 days.




2.7 PROPORTIONING AND DESIGNING MIXES

A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete by either laboratory trial batch or field experience methods as specified in ACI 301. For the trial batch method, use an independent testing agency acceptable to Architect for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs.

1. Limit use of fly ash to not exceed 25 percent of cement content by weight.

B. Submit written reports to Architect of each proposed mix for each class of concrete at least 15 days prior to start of Work. Do not begin concrete production until proposed mix designs have been reviewed by Architect.

C. Design mixes to provide normal concrete as indicated on the structural drawings and schedules. If not noted, all concrete shall be 3000-psi, 28-day compressive strength; water-cement ratio 0.45 maximum.

D. Adjustment to Concrete Mixes: Mix design adjustments may be requested by Contractor when characteristics of materials, job conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant, as accepted by Architect. Laboratory test data for revised mix design and strength results must be submitted to and accepted by Architect before using in Work.

2.8 ADMIXTURES

A. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (superplasticizer) in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

B. Use accelerating admixture in concrete slabs placed at ambient temperatures below 50 deg F (10 deg C).

C. Use high-range water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for architectural concrete, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with water-cement ratios below 0.50.

D. Use air-entraining admixture in exterior exposed concrete unless otherwise indicated. Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having total air content of 5.5% with a tolerance of plus or minus 1-1/2 percent within the following limits:

E. Use admixtures for water reduction and set accelerating or retarding in strict compliance with manufacturer's directions.

2.9 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Comply with Structural Notes and Referenced Standards




B. Job-Site Mixing: Mix concrete materials in appropriate drum-type batch machine mixer. For mixers of 1 cu. yd. or smaller capacity, continue mixing at least 1-1/2 minutes, but not more than 5 minutes after ingredients are in mixer, before any part of batch is released. For mixers of capacity larger than 1 cu. yd., increase minimum 1-1/2 minutes of mixing time by 15 seconds for each additional cu. yd. 1. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating

Project identification name and number, date, mix type, mix time, quantity, and amount of water introduced.

C. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Comply with requirements of ASTM C 94, and as specified. 1. When air temperature is between 85 deg F (30 deg C) and 90 deg F (32 deg C),

reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes, and when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

2. Use accelerating admixtures in cold weather only when approved by Architect/Engineer. Use of admixtures will not relax cold weather placement requirements.

3. Do not use calcium chloride. 4. Use set retarding admixtures during hot weather only when approved by

Architect/Engineer. 5. Add air-entraining agent to normal weight concrete mix for work exposed to exterior

per structural notes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Coordinate the installation of joint materials, vapor retarder/barrier, and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel.

3.2 FORMS

A. General: Design, erect, support, brace, and maintain formwork to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads that might be applied until concrete structure can support such loads. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of correct size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position. Maintain formwork construction tolerances and surface irregularities complying with the following ACI 347R limits: 1. Provide Class A tolerances for Architectural Finish concrete. 2. Provide Class B tolerances for other concrete surfaces exposed to view. 3. Provide Class C tolerances for unexposed concrete surfaces.

B. Construct forms to sizes, shapes, lines, and dimensions shown and to obtain accurate alignment, location, grades, level, and plumb work in finished structures. Provide for




openings, offsets, sinkages, keyways, recesses, moldings, rustications, reglets, chamfers, blocking, screeds, bulkheads, anchorages and inserts, and other features required in the Work. Use selected materials to obtain required finishes. Solidly butt joints and provide backup at joints to prevent cement paste from leaking.

C. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush plates or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces where slope is too steep to place concrete with bottom forms only. Kerf wood inserts for forming keyways, reglets, recesses, and the like for easy removal.

D. Provide temporary openings for clean-outs and inspections where interior area of formwork is inaccessible before and during concrete placement. Securely brace temporary openings and set tightly to forms to prevent losing concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

E. Chamfer all corners and edges of all exposed concrete , using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. Chamfers to be 3/4” x 3/4” unless noted otherwise.

F. Provisions for Other Trades: Provide openings in concrete formwork to accommodate work of other trades as shown on the drawings or as required to do the work. Review civil, architectural, structural, mechanical, and electrical drawings. Determine size and location of openings, recesses, and chases from trades providing such items. Accurately place and securely support items built into forms.

G. Cleaning and Tightening: Thoroughly clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, or other debris just before placing concrete. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

H. Ties: Install in even, consistent pattern.

1. Architectural concrete: Do not place ties within 3” of a chamfer or reveal. Layout tie pattern to be centered in walls or panels created by reveals.

3.3 POUR JOINTS, REVEALS, AND CHAMFERS

A. Chamfers: Chamfer all exposed corners and edges of all exposed concrete, using wood, metal, PVC, or rubber chamfer strips fabricated to produce uniform smooth lines and tight edge joints. Chamfer all openings in exposed concrete wall, such as doors, louvers, etc. Chamfers to be ¾” x ¾” unless noted otherwise.

B. Exposed Pour Joints: Contractor to carefully review architectural drawings and note locations to receive reveal joints noted below. Notify Architect of any pour joints noted by structural or requested by Contractor well in advance of formwork in order to minimize or




eliminate any visible pour joints. Generally, only indicated reveals will be allowed and Contractor will be required to modify forming approach to eliminate pour joints.

C. Reveal Joints: 1. Provide where noted on the drawings. Review layout with Architect prior to

constructing forms. Contact Architect for inspection after chamfers and reveals are in place. Contractor is responsible for missed chamfers and reveals and will be required to remove sections of concrete with missed reveals and chamfers to a plane break as determined by Architect. Reveals and chamfers may not be "cut in".

3.4 VAPOR RETARDER/BARRIER INSTALLATION

A. General: Place vapor retarder/barrier per Division 7 under all interior slabs on grade. Place vapor retarder/barrier sheeting in position with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour.

3.5 PLACING REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Comply with Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute's recommended practice for "Placing Reinforcing Bars," for details and methods of reinforcement placement and supports and as specified. 1. Avoiding cutting or puncturing vapor retarder/barrier during reinforcement

placement and concreting operations. Repair damages before placing concrete. 2. All concrete to receive reinforcing bars unless otherwise noted.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other materials that reduce or destroy bond with concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcing by metal chairs, runners, bolsters, spacers, and hangers, as approved by Architect.

D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Arrange, space, and securely tie bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. Set wire ties so ends are directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire fabric in lengths as long as practicable. Lap adjoining pieces at least one full mesh and lace splices with wire. Offset laps of adjoining widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction.

F. Install welded wire fabric in all slabs and topping slabs unless reinforcing steel is called for on the structural drawings.




3.6 JOINTS

A. Construction Joints: See Item 3.3.B Exposed Pour Joints.

1. Provide keyways at least 1-1/2 inches deep in construction joints in walls and footings. Joints between walls and footings may be roughened per the structural drawings in lieu of using keyways to 1/2" minimum amplitude. Bulkheads designed and accepted for this purpose may be used for slabs Joint slabs as per drawing.

2. Place construction joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints except as indicated otherwise. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements.

B. Use bonding agent on existing concrete surfaces (older than 56 days) that will be joined with fresh concrete.

C. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Construct isolation joints with ½" joint filler in slabs-on-grade at points of contact between slabs-on-grade and vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations or as indicated. 1. Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

D. Contraction (Control) Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Provide contraction joints in slabs-on-grade by pouring slabs in sections, or use saw cuts 1/8 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth, or inserts 1/4 inch wide by one-fourth of slab depth, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Form contraction joints by inserting premolded plastic, hardboard, or fiberboard strip

into fresh concrete until top surface of strip is flush with slab surface. Tool slab edges round on each side of insert. After concrete has cured, remove inserts and clean groove of loose debris.

2. Contraction joints in unexposed floor slabs may be formed by saw cuts as soon as possible after slab finishing as may be safely done without dislodging aggregate.

3. If joint pattern is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 20 feet in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible (at column centerlines, half bays, third bays).

4. Contraction joint layout shall form no acute angles. 5. Joint Sealants are specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.7 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. General: Set and build into formwork anchorage devices and other embedded items required for other work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, diagrams, instructions, and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached.




B. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

3.8 PREPARING FORM SURFACES

A. General: Coat contact surfaces of forms with an approved, nonresidual, low-VOC, form-coating compound before placing reinforcement.

B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions. 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining, rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel

formwork is not acceptable.

3.9 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Inspection: Before placing concrete, inspect and complete formwork installation, reinforcing steel, and items to be embedded or cast in. Notify other trades to permit installation of their work.

B. General: Comply with ACI 304, "Guide for Measuring, Mixing, Transporting, and Placing Concrete," and as specified.

C. Deposit concrete continuously or in layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened sufficiently to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation at its final location.

D. Placing Concrete in Forms: Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints. Where placement consists of several layers, place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic to avoid cold joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete by mechanical vibrating equipment supplemented by

hand-spading, rodding, or tamping. Use equipment and procedures for consolidation of concrete complying with ACI 309.

2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than the visible effectiveness of the machine. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to set. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix to segregate.




E. Placing Concrete Slabs and Topping: Deposit and consolidate concrete in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until completing placement of a panel or section. 1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so that concrete is thoroughly

worked around reinforcement, other embedded items and into corners. 2. Bring slab surfaces to correct level with a straightedge and strike off. Use bull floats

or darbies to smooth surface free of humps or hollows. Do not disturb slab surfaces prior to beginning finishing operations.

3. Maintain reinforcing in proper position on chairs during concrete placement.

F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with provisions of ACI 306 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

G. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4 deg C), uniformly heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) and not more than 80 deg F (27 deg C) at point of placement. 1. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place

concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials. 2. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents.

H. Hot-Weather Placement: When hot weather conditions exist that would impair quality and strength of concrete, place concrete complying with ACI 305 and as specified. 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature at time of

placement to below 90 deg F (32 deg C). Mixing water may be chilled or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Cover reinforcing steel with water-soaked burlap if it becomes too hot, so that steel temperature will not exceed the ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete.

3. Fog spray forms, reinforcing steel, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade moisture uniform without puddles or dry areas.

4. Use water-reducing retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placing conditions, as acceptable to Architect.

3.10 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Architectural Concrete is to be an as-cast finish meeting the standards set forth in the QUALITY ASSURANCE section of this specification. Concrete is to be cleaned and minor fins removed. However, Architectural Concrete is not to be ground, sacked, patched, or repaired except as noted under CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIR section of this specification.




B. Architectural Concrete is considered to be all exterior concrete areas exposed to view, or noted in the drawings (except where noted below as not considered architectural finish concrete). Architectural Concrete areas include, but are not limited to, portions of the following elements, where exposed to view:

Architectural Concrete

1. Concrete walls and columns exposed at Level 1.

C. Areas exposed to view which are not considered Architectural Concrete include:

1. Tops of slabs, stairs and curbs 6” high or less.

D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike-off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3.11 MONOLITHIC SLAB FINISHES

A. General: Verify all slab finishes with Architect prior to pouring. Coordinate tenant space finishes with Architect, Owner and Tenant.

B. Float Finish: Apply float finish to monolithic slab surfaces to receive trowel finish and to floor and slab surfaces to be covered with fluid applied or sheet water proofing or built-up roofing. 1. After screeding, consolidating, and leveling concrete slabs, do not work surface until

ready for floating. Begin floating, using float blades or float shoes only, when surface water has disappeared, or when concrete has stiffened sufficiently to permit operation of power-driven floats, or both. Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand-floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 18 (floor flatness) and F(L) 15 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. See Section 09550 for tolerances required at recesses for wood floors. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Uniformly slope surfaces to drains. Immediately after leveling, refloat surface to a uniform, smooth, granular texture.

C. Trowel Finish: Apply a trowel finish to monolithic slab surfaces exposed to view, and slab surfaces to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over cleavage membranes, paint, or another thin film-finish coating system. 1. After floating, begin first trowel-finish operation using a power-driven trowel. Begin

final troweling when surface produces a ringing sound as trowel is moved over surface. Consolidate concrete surface by final hand-troweling operation, free of




trowel marks, uniform in texture and appearance, and finish surfaces to tolerances of F(F) 20 (floor flatness) and F(L) 17 (floor levelness) measured according to ASTM E 1155. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied floor covering system.

2. Apply concrete hardener to exposed interior floors.

D. Trowel and Fine Broom Finish: Where ceramic or quarry tile or stone is to be installed with thin-set mortar, apply a trowel finish as specified, then immediately follow by slightly scarifying the surface with a fine broom.

E. Light/Nonslip Broom Finish: Apply a light/nonslip broom finish to trash and recycling room, walks, steps, ramps, curbs, and elsewhere as indicated. Tool all edges to 1/2” radius unless noted otherwise. See also Section 32 1313 – Concrete Paving. 1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen concrete surface by brooming with

fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application

F. Slab Sealer: Provide SprayLock SCP 327 TreatProof penetrating sealer on the Level P1 parking level slab that is over Level P2 parking.

G. Wax Finish for Exposed Concrete Floors: Locations as noted in Amenity Finish Schedule.

1. Cleaner: pH neutral cleaner.

a. Available from: Coastwide Laboratories 624 Lander Street, Unit 32 Seattle, WA 98134 (206) 624-1225

2. Finish: Carefree Matt Floor Finish.

a. Available from: Coastwide Laboratories 624 Lander Street, Unit 32 Seattle, WA 98134 (206) 624-1225

3. Installation:

a. Mop concrete clean with water and allow to dry. b. Clean with pH neutral cleaner and allow to dry. c. Apply four (4) coats of Carefree Matt floor Finish per manufacturer’s

instructions, allowing to completely dry between coats.

3.12 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS




A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures for passage of work by other trades, unless otherwise shown or directed, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete as specified to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling shown or required to complete Work.

B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment to template at correct elevations, complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment.

3.13 CONCRETE CURING AND PROTECTION

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. In hot, dry, and windy weather protect concrete from rapid moisture loss before and during finishing operations with an evaporation-control material. Apply according to manufacturer's instructions after screeding and bull floating, but before power floating and troweling.

B. Start initial curing as soon as free water has disappeared from concrete surface after placing and finishing. Weather permitting, keep continuously moist for not less than 7 days.

C. Curing Methods: Cure concrete by curing compound or by moisture-retaining cover curing, or by combining these methods, as specified.

D. Apply curing compound on exposed interior slabs and on exterior slabs, walks, and curbs as follows: 1. Apply curing compound to concrete slabs as soon as final finishing operations are

complete (within 2 hours and after surface water sheen has disappeared). Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's directions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within 3 hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

2. Use membrane curing compounds that will not affect surfaces to be covered with finish materials applied directly to concrete.

E. Provide moisture-retaining cover curing as follows:

1. Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width with sides and ends lapped at least 3 inches and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

F. Curing Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces, by moist curing with forms in place for the full




curing period or until forms are removed. If forms are removed, continue curing by methods specified above, as applicable.

G. Curing Unformed Surfaces: Cure unformed surfaces, including slabs, floor topping, and other flat surfaces, by applying the appropriate curing method. 1. Final cure concrete surfaces to receive finish flooring with a moisture-retaining cover,

unless otherwise directed.

3.14 REMOVING FORMS

A. General: Formwork not supporting weight of concrete, such as sides of beams, walls, columns, and similar parts of the work, may be removed after cumulatively curing at not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete, provided concrete is sufficiently hard to not be damaged by form-removal operations, and provided curing and protection operations are maintained. Otherwise, forms must remain for 3 days.

B. Formwork supporting weight of concrete, such as beam soffits, joists, slabs, and other structural elements, may not be removed in less than 7 days or until concrete has attained at least 75 percent of design minimum compressive strength at 28 days. Determine potential compressive strength of in-place concrete by testing field-cured specimens representative of concrete location or members.

C. Form-facing material may be removed 4 days after placement only if shores and other vertical supports have been arranged to permit removal of form-facing material without loosening or disturbing shores and supports.

3.15 REUSING FORMS

A. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-facing material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-coating compound as specified for new formwork.

B. When forms are extended for successive concrete placement, thoroughly clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance, and tighten forms to close joints. Align and secure joint to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces except as acceptable to Architect.

C. Forms for Architectural Finish concrete; if re-used, forms must be brought to "like new" condition before re-using. Patched forms may not be used.

3.16 FORM TIE HOLES

A. Exposed Architectural Concrete: Fill holes to within ¼” of the surface with pre-cast concrete plugs secured with epoxy.




3.17 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Architectural Finish Concrete: Concrete surfaces so indicated are not to be repaired or patched other than to fill tie holes. Architect may allow minor imperfections to remain or be carefully and selectively filled. Concrete with significant defects must be removed and replaced.

B. Patching Defective Areas: Repair and patch defective areas with cement mortar immediately after removing forms, when acceptable to Architect.

C. Mix dry-pack mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to 2-1/2 parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 mesh sieve, using only enough water as required for handling and placing. 1. Cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, voids over 1/4 inch in any dimension, and holes

left by tie rods and bolts down to solid concrete but in no case to a depth less than 1 inch. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to the concrete surface. Thoroughly clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat the area to be patched with bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried.

2. For surfaces exposed to view, blend white portland cement and standard portland

cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Provide test areas at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike-off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

D. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Remove and replace concrete having defective surfaces if defects cannot be repaired to satisfaction of Architect. Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycomb, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1. Repair concealed formed surfaces, where possible, containing defects that affect the

concrete's durability. If defects cannot be repaired, remove and replace the concrete.

E. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as monolithic slabs, for smoothness and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface and finish. Correct low and high areas as specified. Test unformed surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness by using a template having the required slope. 1. Repair finished unformed surfaces containing defects that affect the concrete's

durability. Surface defects include crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch wide or that penetrate to the reinforcement or completely through nonreinforced sections regardless of width, spalling, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, and other objectionable conditions.

2. Correct high areas in unformed surfaces by grinding after concrete has cured at least 14 days.




3. Correct low areas in unformed surfaces during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. Proprietary underlayment compounds may be used when acceptable to Architect.

4. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes not exceeding 1 inch in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose reinforcing steel with at least 3/4-inch clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials to provide concrete of same type or class as original concrete. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

F. Repair methods not specified above may be used, subject to acceptance of Architect.

3.18 QUALITY CONTROL TESTING DURING CONSTRUCTION

A. General: The Owner will employ a testing agency to perform tests and to submit test reports.

B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following, as directed by Architect. 1. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172, except modified for slump to comply with

ASTM C 94. a. Slump: ASTM C 143; one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of

each type of concrete; additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed.

b. Air Content: ASTM C 173, volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; one for each day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete.

c. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4 deg C) and below, when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens.

d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each compressive-strength test, unless otherwise directed. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens are required.

e. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39; one set for each day's pour exceeding 5 cu. yd. plus additional sets for each 50 cu. yd. more than the first 25 cu. yd. of each concrete class placed in any one day; one specimen tested at 7 days, two specimens tested at 28 days, and one specimen retained in reserve for later testing if required.

2. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five strength tests for a given class of concrete, conduct testing from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.




3. Strength level of concrete will be considered satisfactory if averages of sets of three consecutive strength test results equal or exceed specified compressive strength and no individual strength test result falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi.

C. Test results will be reported in writing to Architect, Structural Engineer, ready-mix producer, City or County Regulatory Agency and Contractor within 24 hours after tests. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing service, concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mix proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day tests.

D. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sole basis for acceptance or rejection.

E. Additional Tests: The testing agency will make additional tests of in-place concrete when test results indicate specified concrete strengths and other characteristics have not been attained in the structure, as directed by Architect. Testing agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42, or by other methods as directed.




GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT 03 5413 - 1

SECTION 03 5413 - GYPSUM CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling underlayment for application below interior floor coverings and over sound control/acoustical underlayment at designated assemblies.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry: Floor sheathing. 2. Section 09 6118 – Sound Isolation Membranes. 3. Section 09 6516 – Resilient Flooring. 4. Section 09 6800 – Carpeting. 5. Section 09 8000 – Acoustical Treatment.


A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.


A. Product certificates.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment products required for this Project.

B. Product Compatibility: Manufacturers of underlayment and floor-covering systems certify in writing that products are compatible.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Gypsum-cement-based, self-leveling product that can be applied in minimum uniform thickness of 1/8 inch and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Keene Building Products (basis of design) 2. Ardex Engineered Cements 3. Maxxon Corporation 4. US Gypsum Corporation




C. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 inch; or coarse sand as recommended by underlayment manufacturer.

1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment thickness required.

D. Sound Control/Acoustical Underlayment: See Section 09 8000 Acoustical Treatment, Item 2.1.E.a. for description of product:

1. Load-bearing, shock and vibration resistant complying with following:

a. Minimum Thickness: 1/4 inch. b. Density: 5.5 lbs/cu.ft. c. Fire Classification: Non-combustible

2. Floor/Ceiling Assembly: Comply with following:

a. Sound Transmission Class (STC): As indicated on the Drawings, but not less than 58 when field tested with the specified floor-ceiling assembly.

b. Impact Insulation Class (IIC): As indicated on the Drawings, but not less than 53 when field tested with vinyl flooring on the specified floor-ceiling assembly.

E. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F.

F. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and application indicated.

2.2 GYPSUM CONCRETE MIX

A. Mix Proportions: 6 to 8 gallons water and 2.1 cubic feet of sand measured accurately per 80 lb. bag of gypsum. Do not over water. (Water amount will vary with condition of sand).

B. Gypsum Concrete Properties (Cured):

1. Dry Density: 100 pfc minimum. 2. Compressive Strength (ASTM C 472): As follows unless otherwise indicated on

Drawings:

a. Compressive Strength: 2,500 to 3,000 PSI minimum at 28 days. b. Thickness: As indicated on the Drawings.

3. Weight:

a. 1” thickness: 8.7 psf. b. 1-1/4” thickness: 10.8 psf.

4. Thickness: Refer to Drawings. 5. Point Load: 3,000 lbs on 1” diameter disk. 6. Shrinkage: No shrinkage cracking.




7. Fire Hazard Classification (ASTM E 84): Flame spread = 0, fuel contributed = 0, smoke density = 0.

8. Underwriters Laboratories Fire-Rating (Design No. L528, No. L530, and No. L529): 1 hour (applied 3/4” thick over 3/4” T&G plywood on wood trusses, protected on underside with gypsum board).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine conditions and proceed with Work when substrates are acceptable.

B. Verify wood substrates are acceptable to manufacturer, structurally sound, properly fastened and dry. Wood subfloor shall be able to withstand live and dead loads with a deflection limitation of L/360.

C. Verify substrate surfaces are clean, dry, unfrozen, free from efflorescence, wax, curing compounds, and do not contain petroleum by-products or other compounds detrimental to underlayment material bond to substrate.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. General: Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks to prevent cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Wood Substrates: Mechanically fasten loose boards and panels to eliminate substrate movement and squeaks. Sand to remove coatings that might impair underlayment bond and remove sanding dust.

1. Install underlayment reinforcement.

C. Nonporous Substrates: Remove sealants and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces.

D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. General: Mix and apply underlayment components according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended in writing by manufacturer.

2. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat adhesion.




3. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through underlayment.

B. Mixing: Proportion mix design to provide an average compressive strength of 2500 psi or greater with a density of 115 pounds per cubic foot.

1. Test underlayment mix for slump using a 2-inch inside diameter by 4-inch cylinder resulting in a patty size of between 8-1/2 and 9-1/2-inches.

2. Take slump at the beginning of each installation to verify required mix. Slump should be tested periodically thereafter at a minimum of every 2500 sq. ft. to verify it is being maintained during installation.

C. Sound Deadening Mat: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions over structurally sound, level, and clean wood substrate and as follows:

1. Install a perimeter isolation strip of 2 inch by ¼ inch foam at the perimeter of entire subfloor, including door frames. Secure temporarily with duct tape.

2. Sound mat to be installed “free floating.” Do not install with mechanical fasteners. 3. Seal seams between sections of mat with tape. 4. Prime mat with manufacturer’s recommended primer to bond underlayment to mat. 5. Pour gypsum cement underlayment directly on top of acoustical underlayment.

D. Gypsum Cement Underlayment:

1. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. 2. Place to thickness indicated or required by manufacturer for proper application. 3. Allow moving joints of same width to continue through underlayment. 4. Self-Leveling Type: Maintain top surface level to within 1/8 inch in 10 feet. 5. Air cure in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 6. Seal areas that receive glue down floor goods according to manufacturer’s

instructions. 7. Clean and seal floor areas where the surface has been damaged regardless of floor

covering to be used. 8. Where floor goods manufacturers require special adhesive or installation systems, their

requirements supersede these recommendations.

E. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer.

F. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

G. Do not permit traffic over unprotected floor. Place temporary wood planking or plywood over underlayment wherever it will be subjected to traffic or concentrated loads.




STRUCTURAL STEEL 05 1200 - 1

SECTION 05 1200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Structural steel framing members, support members struts and related items.

C. Base plates, shear stud connectors.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 05 5000 - Metal Fabrications: Steel fabrications affecting structural steel work.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AISC - Code of Standard Practice - Manual of Steel Construction - Allowable Stress Design (ASD).

B. ASTM A36/A36M - Structural Steel.

C. ASTM A307 - Carbon Steel Externally Threaded Standard Fasteners.

D. ASTM A325 - High Strength Bolts for Structural Steel Joints.

E. ASTM A563 - Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts.

F. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.

1.4 SUBMITTALS FOR REVIEW

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings prior to commencing any fabrication of structural steel. Show framing layout, dimensions, connections with adjoining materials and construction, finishes, welds, bolts and fasteners, and anchoring; show field welds, cuts, holes and fasteners; verify all dimensions; indicate size, type, grade, and camber of all members.

1. Indicate welds by standard AWS symbols and show size, length, and type of each

weld.




2. Provide setting drawings, templates, and directions for installation of anchor bolts and other anchorages to be installed as work of other sections.

3. Include with each detail shown on the shop drawings, a reference to the Architect’s and Engineer’s drawings and details, where applicable.

1.5 SUBMITTALS FOR INFORMATION

A. Section 01 3300 - Submittals: Procedures for submittals.

B. Certificates of Conformance: Submit certificates of conformance or product data for welding electrodes and rods, high-strength bolts and nuts, galvanizing repair compound and deformed bar anchors.

C. Testing Agency Reports: Submit the following reports from the testing agency to the Architect and Structural Engineer.

1. Welder Certifications. 2. Welding Inspections. 3. High-Strength Bolted Connection Inspection.

D. Fabricators shall submit certificate of compliance that the work was performed in accordance with the approved construction documents to the local building official and Architect.


A. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of following, except as otherwise indicated:

1. American Institute of steel Construction (AISC) “Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges.” a. Paragraph 4.2.1 of the above code is hereby modified by deletion of the

following sentence:

1) “This approval constitutes the owner’s acceptance of all responsibility for the design adequacy of any detail configuration of connections developed by the fabricator as a part of his preparation of these shop drawings.”

2. AISC “Specifications for the Design Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings.”

3. “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts” approved by the Research Council on Structural Connections.

4. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.1 “Structural Welding Code--Steel.” 5. ASTM A 6 “General Requirements for Delivery of Rolled Steel Plates, Shapes, Sheet

Piling and Bars for Structural Use.” 6. Washington Association of Building Officials (WABO).




B. Qualifications for Welding Work: Qualify welding procedures and welding operators in accordance with AWS “Qualification” requirements. 1. Provide certification that welders to be employed in work have satisfactorily passed

AWS qualification test and are WABO certified. 2. If recertification of welders is required, retesting will be Contractor’s responsibility. 3. Fabricator’s shop shall be registered and approved by the building official for all shop

welding procedures to be used.

C. Allowable Tolerances: Unless otherwise noted on drawings or specified, provide structural steel work in accordance with the following minimum tolerances:

1. Fabrication Tolerances: In accordance with requirements of AISC “Code of Standard

Practice,” except as required to maintain the erection tolerances specified herein. 2. Erection Tolerances: Level and plumb individual members within AISC specified

tolerances.

D. Tests and Inspection: Work is subject to special testing and inspection. The fabricator shall provide the Owner’s Inspector access to places where material is being fabricated.

E. Mill Test Reports: Submit mill test reports on all steel which can be identified to the Inspector verifying compliance with specified requirements as required by regulations and standard specifications.

F. Fabricator: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.

G. Erector: Company specializing in performing the work of this section with minimum 5 years experience.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials to site at such intervals to ensure uninterrupted progress of work.

B. Deliver anchor bolts and anchorage devices, which are to be embedded in cast-in-place concrete or masonry, in ample time to not to delay work.

C. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground by using pallets, platforms, or other supports. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration. If bolts and nuts become dry or rusty, clean and relubricate before use.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion or damage

to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.




D. Project/Site Holding and Protection: In assembling and during welding, the component parts shall be held with sufficient clamps or other adequate means to keep parts straight and in close contact. In welding, precautions shall be taken to minimize “lock-up” stress and distortion due to heat. In wind, welding shall be done only after adequate wind protection is furnished and set up.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel Members: ASTM A36 and ASTM A572 Grade 50 as noted on the structural drawings.

B. Structural Tubing: ASTM A500, Grade B.

C. Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Type E or S.

D. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A325 bolts.

E. Anchor Bolts: ASTM A307, Grade A, including ASTM A563, Hex, Grade A, nuts and washers.

F. Welding Electrodes: 1. Electrodes used for making complete penetration welds shall be of classification that

will provide weld metal with a tensile strength not less than that of the base metal being welded.

2. Electrodes for making fillet, plug, slot, or partial penetration groove welds shall conform to AWS A5.1 or A5.5, E70XX Series.

3. Use only low hydrogen electrodes for all welding of complete and partial penetration groove welds of ASTM A572 base metal made in the field and for manual shielded metal arc welding of ASTM A36 steel which is more than one inch thick.

G. Galvanizing: Hot dipped, 1.5 ounces per square foot. Galvanize all steel exposed to weather. Areas that have been field welded shall be coated with zinc-rich paint such as “Galvacon,” or as approved. Exterior steel canopies to be galvanized.

H. Drilled in Concrete Anchors: Refer to Structural Drawings “General Notes;” “Expansion Bolts” for acceptable products.

I. Sliding Bearing Plates: Manufactured by Fabreeka or an approved equal.

J. Grout: Non-shrink type per Section 03 3000.

K. Shop and Touch-Up Primer: SSPC 15, Type 1, red oxide.




2.2 FABRICATION

A. Shop Fabrication and Assembly: All shop fabrication and assembly shall be performed in an approved fabricator’s shop, following AISC standards. Contractor shall be responsible for any and all costs associated with testing and inspections when work is not performed in an approved shop, including welding performed by other than WABO certified welders in the shop or in the field. Fabricate and assemble all structural assemblies in shop unless specifically noted as field installed. Fabricate items of structural steel in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on final approved shop drawings. Provide camber in structural members where indicated. 1. Properly mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. Fabricate for delivery

sequence that will expedite erection and minimize field handling of materials. 2. Where finishing is required, complete assembly, including welding of units, before start

of finishing operations. Provide finish surfaces of members exposed in final structure free of markings, burrs, and other defects.

B. Connections: Weld shop connections, as indicated.

C. Bolt field connections, except where welded connections or other connections are indicated. 1. Provide high-strength threaded fasteners for all bolted connections, except where

unfinished bolts are indicated. 2. Provide unfinished threaded fasteners for temporary bracing to facilitate erection.

D. High-Strength Bolted Construction: Install high-strength threaded fasteners in accordance with AISC “Specifications for Structural Joints using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts.”

E. Welded Construction: Comply with AWS Code for procedures, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used in correction welding work. 1. Unless specifically permitted in writing by the Architect, welding processes other than

shielded metal arc, submerged arc, gas metal arc, and flux cored arc shall not be used on this project. Electroslag and electrogas welding processes may also be used, provided they are qualified by applicable tests.

2. For high-strength, low-alloy steels, follow welding procedures as recommended by steel producer for exposed and concealed connections.

3. Welds not specified shall be continuous fillet welds, using not less than the minimum fillet as specified by AWS.

F. Holes in Steel Members: Punch and ream or drill as necessary to receive bolt and similar items. Do not cut holes with a torch. Drill holes in bearing plates. Provide holes required for securing other work to structural steel framing and for passage of other work through steel framing and other specialty items as indicated to receive other work. Bolt holes in steel shall be drilled 1/16” larger in diameter than bolt size used, unless noted otherwise. Bolt holes in steel base plates for anchor bolts shall be drilled 3/16” larger in diameter than anchor bolt size used.




2.3 SHOP FINISH

A. Surface Preparation: After Fabrication, but before erection, clean all surfaces by mechanical or chemical methods, to remove rust, scale, oil, corrosion, or other substances detrimental to bonding of subsequently applied protective coatings.

B. Galvanizing: For metal items exposed to moisture, and where so noted on drawings, galvanize fabricated steel items in accordance with ASTM A123. Sheet with G90 coating in accordance with ASTM A525.

C. Painting: Exposed exterior steel to be powder coated. See Exterior Materials, Finishes and Colors schedule.

D. Touch-up damaged areas in galvanizing or primer coatings with same materials, before installation. Apply zinc coatings and paint primers uniformly and smoothly; leave ready for finish painting.

E. Unless noted otherwise, shop prime all steel surfaces except the following: 1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded

members to a depth of 2 inches. 2. Surfaces to be field welded. 3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section 01039 - Coordination and Meetings: Verification of existing conditions prior to beginning work.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Allow for erection loads, and for sufficient temporary bracing to maintain structure safe, plumb, and in true alignment until completion of erection and installation of permanent bracing.

B. Surveys: Employ a licensed land surveyor for accurate erection of structural steel. Check elevations of concrete and masonry bearing surfaces, and locations of anchor bolts and similar devices, before erection work proceeds, and report discrepancies to Architect. Do not proceed with erection until corrections have been made or until compensating adjustments to structural steel work have been agreed upon with Architect.

C. Anchor Bolts:




1. Furnish anchor bolts and other connectors required for securing structural steel to foundations and other in-place work.

2. Furnish steel templates and other devices as necessary for presenting bolts and other anchors to accurate locations.

D. Setting Bases and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of base and bearing plates. 1. Set loose and attached base plates and bearing plates for structural members on

wedges or other adjusting devices. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed.

Do not remove wedges or shims, but if protruding, cut off flush with edge of base or bearing plate prior to packing with grout.

3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and bases or plates to ensure that no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces, protect installed materials, and allow to cure.

E. Field Assembly: Set structural frames accurately to lines and elevations indicated. Align and adjust various members forming part of complete frame or structure before permanently fastening. Clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact before assembly. Perform necessary adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment.

F. Level and plumb individual members of structure within specified AISC tolerances.

G. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operation temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service.

H. Splice members only where indicated and accepted on shop drawings.

I. Erection Bolts: On exposed welded construction, remove erection bolts, fill holes with plug welds, and grind smooth at exposed surfaces. 1. Comply with AISC Specifications for bearing, adequacy of temporary connections,

alignment, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds. 2. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or by using drift pins. Ream holes

that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

J. Gas Cutting: Do not use gas cutting torches in field for correcting fabrication errors in primary structural framing. Cutting will be permitted only on secondary members that are not under stress, as acceptable to Architect. Finish gas-cut sections equal to a sheared appearance when permitted.

K. Touch-Up Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint. Apply paint to exposed areas using same material as used for shop painting.




1. Apply by brush or spray to provide minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils.

L. Erection Loading: The structural design of the building is based on resistance to dead loads, code specified lateral loads, and maximum expected service loads. No consideration has been given to loads which will be induced by erection procedures. The Contractor shall verify, to the satisfaction of himself and the Owner, the ability of the structure to resist all erection loads without exceeding the allowable stresses of the materials used. Where erection loads would overstress the structure, special temporary bracing and strengthening shall be utilized to prevent such overstress during erection.

3.3 BOLTED CONNECTIONS

A. Except as otherwise indicated on the drawings or specified, all bolted connections shall be bearing type ASTM A325 high-strength bolts conforming to the requirements of “Specifications for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.”

B. Install all high-strength bolts in accordance with Section 8, “Installation and Tightening.” All bolts are to be fully pretensioned to the requirements of Paragraph 8(d), except that bolts in beam-to-beam connections may be tightened to the snug tight condition of Paragraph 8(c), upon approval of the Owner and structural engineer. In connections requiring fully pretension bolts, per the structural drawings, the tightening is to be verified by the turn-of-nut method or by direct tension indicating bolts or washers. 1. Load indicator washers shall be positioned with the protrusions facing the bolt head

when the nut is the turning element. 2. If the load indicator is placed under the bolt head and the bolt head is the turning

element, then place a hardened flat washer against the load indicator protrusion. 3. When it is required to use the load indicator under the nut, fit a hardened flat washer

against the load indicator protrusions before the nut is installed. Either the nut or the bolt may be turned in tightening this assembly.

C. To avoid excessive galling of soft nuts or steel surfaces, hardened flat washers shall always be used under the nuts of all A325 bolts 7/8 inch diameter or larger.

D. None of the above requirements shall relieve the use of hardened flat washers required with short slotted or oversize holes but may be used in conjunction with load indicators.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Section 01 4000 - Quality Rrequirements

B. Design of Members and Connections: Details shown are typical; similar details apply to similar conditions, unless otherwise indicated. Verify dimensions at site whenever possible without causing delay in the work. 1. Promptly notify Architect whenever design of members and connections for any portion

of structure are not clearly indicated.




C. Inspection: 1. An independent testing laboratory selected by the Architect and paid by the Owner will

perform all tests required for shop and field work except that costs of certain testing and inspection as specified herein shall be paid by the Contractor. All testing shall be in accordance with applicable sections of the IBC, IBC Standards, and as specified herein.

D. Access to Shop and Field: 1. The contractor shall cooperate in giving advance notice of his operations and shall

provide access to the work. Inspection in shop or field shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility to furnish satisfactory products. The acceptance of material or finished members by the inspector shall not prevent subsequent rejection if found defective either because of inferior materials or inferior workmanship. Inferior material or workmanship will be subject to rejection unless correction acceptable to the Architect can be made prior to final acceptance of the structure and at no extra cost to the Owner.

2. Testing agency shall inspect structural steel in the field before installation. Correct deficiencies in structural steel work which inspections and laboratory test reports have indicated to be in non-compliance with requirements. Perform additional tests, at Contractor’s expense, as may be necessary to reconfirm any non-compliance of original work and as may be necessary to show compliance of corrected work.

E. Welding Inspection: All shop and field welding shall be subject to inspection by a qualified welding inspector engaged by the Owner. To determine the quality of welds, the welding inspector shall utilize X- or gamma-ray tests, ultrasonic testing, magnetic particle inspection, and any other aid to visual inspection which he may deem necessary to assure himself of the adequacy of the welding.

F. Welds to be Inspected: The following welds shall be inspected by the methods given below without costs to the Contractor. 1. 25 percent of all complete and partial penetration welds at each story shall be

checked by radiographic or ultrasonic testing. 2. All fillet and other remaining welds at each story shall be visually inspected. 3. Where radiographic testing is performed, it shall consist of one spot test per weld.

Where a spot radiographic test shows defects that required repair, the remainder of that weld shall be radiographed at the expense of the Contractor. Each 6 inch increment of weld or fraction thereof shall be considered one weld.

4. Where ultrasonic testing is performed, the entire weld shall be tested.

G. Standards of Acceptance: Welds tested by radiographic and ultrasonic methods shall be accepted or rejected in accordance with ASNI/AWS D1.1.

H. Defective Welds. All welds found defective and repaired shall be reinspected by the same methods originally used and this reinspection shall be paid for by the contractor.

I. Bolted Connection Inspection:




1. The sizes and grades of bolts shall be inspected to verify conformance with plans and specifications without costs to the Contractor, unless reinspection is required because of products or installation that does not meet specification requirements.

2. High-strength bolted connections shall be inspected in accordance with the specification for “Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts.”

3. Test a minimum of 10% of bolts in all fully tensioned connections (2 bolts minimum) with a calibrated wrench. Verify that minimum required bolt tension is furnished. Should any bolt in a given connection test below minimum tension required, test all bolts in that connection.

4. If snug tight bolts are approved for beam-to-beam connections, visually inspect all connections to ensure that plates are brought into contact. Randomly observe bolt tightening operations to verify that AISC minimum snug tight requirements are complied with.




METAL FABRICATIONS 05 5000 - 1

SECTION 05 5000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Shelf angles. 3. Metal ladders (elevator pit, roof hatch). 4. Steel weld plates and angles. 5. Miscellaneous steel trim. 6. Loose bearing and leveling plates. 7. Elevator threshold/sill support angles. 8. Elevator intermediate guide rail supports. 9. Elevator hoist beams and hoistway divider beams. 10. Elevator sump gratings. 11. MEP equipment support frames.

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts

indicated to be cast into concrete or built into unit masonry. 3. Steel weld plates and angles for casting into concrete.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 05 5100 – Metal Stairs: Exterior Stair #2. 2. Section 05 5700 – Decorative Metal: Steel and glass canopy, decorative screen/gates,

metal handrails and metal sunshades.


A. Delegated Design: Design ladders, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.




B. Delegated-Design Submittal: For installed products indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.

2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Stainless-Steel Bars and Shapes: ASTM A 276, Type 316L.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M.

2.3 NONFERROUS METALS

A. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T6.

B. Aluminum-Alloy Rolled Tread Plate: ASTM B 632/B 632M, Alloy 6061-T6.

C. Aluminum Castings: ASTM B 26/B 26M, Alloy 443.0-F.

2.4 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 316 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.

1. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening aluminum. 2. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening stainless steel. 3. Provide stainless-steel fasteners for fastening nickel silver. 4. Provide bronze fasteners for fastening bronze.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or




ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches long at not more than 8 inches o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer compatible with topcoat.

B. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

C. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches o.c.




2.7 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.

C. Elevator Hoist Beams: Designed to support 10,000 lb load minimum, or as specified by elevator manufacturer. Notify Architect and Structural Engineer for loads greater than 10,000 lb.

2.8 SHELF ANGLES

A. Fabricate shelf angles from steel angles of sizes indicated and for attachment to concrete framing. Provide horizontally slotted holes to receive 3/4-inch bolts, spaced not more than 6 inches from ends and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.

B. For cavity walls, provide vertical channel brackets to support angles from backup masonry and concrete.

C. Galvanize shelf angles located in exterior walls.

2.9 METAL LADDERS

A. General:

1. Comply with ANSI A14.3 unless otherwise indicated. 2. For elevator pit ladders, comply with ASME A17.1.

B. Steel Ladders:

1. Space siderails 16 inches apart unless otherwise indicated. 2. Space siderails of elevator pit ladders 12 inches apart. 3. Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges. 4. Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars. 5. Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces. 6. Provide nonslip abrasive surfaces on top of each rung. 7. Galvanize elevator pit and exterior ladders, including brackets and fasteners.

2.10 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.




B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Galvanize exterior miscellaneous steel trim.

2.11 PIPE AND DUCT GUARDS

A. Fabricate pipe and duct guards from 3/8-inch- thick by 12-inch- wide steel plate, bent to fit flat against the wall or column at both ends and to fit around pipe with 2-inch clearance between pipe and pipe guard. Drill each end for two 3/4-inch anchor bolts. Locate at best height to protect pipe from vehicle damage.

B. Galvanize pipe guards.

2.12 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.13 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Galvanize loose steel lintels located in exterior walls.

C. Galvanize or prime loose steel lintels located in exterior walls with zinc-rich primer.

2.14 STEEL WELD PLATES AND ANGLES

A. Provide steel weld plates and angles not specified in other Sections, for items supported from concrete construction as needed to complete the Work. Provide each unit with no fewer than two integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete.

2.15 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.




2.16 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items located on the exterior of the building, to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items at interior locations unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with universal shop primer.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.




3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.




METAL STAIRS 05 5100 - 1

SECTION 05 5100 - METAL STAIRS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes concrete filled metal pan, steel-framed metal stairs at Stair #2.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 - Cast-In-Place Concrete: Concrete fill. 2. Section 05 5700 - Decorative Metal Railings.


A. Delegated Design: Design metal stairs, including comprehensive engineering analysis by a Washington State qualified professional engineer, using performance requirements and design criteria indicated.

B. Structural Performance of Stairs: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated.

1. Uniform Load: 100 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Concentrated Load: 300 lbf applied on an area of 4 sq. in. 3. Uniform and concentrated loads need not be assumed to act concurrently. 4. Stair Framing: Capable of withstanding stresses resulting from railing loads in

addition to loads specified above. 5. Limit deflection of treads, platforms, and framing members to L/240 or 1/4 inch,

whichever is less.

C. Seismic Performance: Metal stairs shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

1. Component Importance Factor is 1.5.


A. Product Data: For metal stairs.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.





A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to the following:

1. AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel." 2. AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

1.5 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint and coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatible with one another. Shop primers with topcoats to be field patched per manufacturer’s standards.

B. Coordinate installation of anchorages for metal stairs. Exterior stair to attach to flanged knife plates in exterior walls – locations to be coordinated with Architect and Structural Engineer. Knife plates to be wrapped/flashed per waterproofing details. Acoustic isolation per SSA (acoustical consultant). Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

C. Coordinate locations of hanger rods and struts with other work so that they will not encroach on required stair width and will be within the fire-resistance-rated stair enclosure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL STAIRS, GENERAL

A. NAAMM Stair Standard: Comply with "Recommended Voluntary Minimum Standards for Fixed Metal Stairs" in NAAMM AMP 510, "Metal Stairs Manual," Architectural class, unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

B. Stair Treads: Site cast concrete treads in metal pans. See 03 3000 “Cast-in-Place Concrete”.

2.2 METALS

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. For components exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.




B. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500 (cold formed) or ASTM A 513.

D. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Uncoated, Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel, Type B, or structural steel, Grade 25, unless another grade is required by design loads; exposed.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 12 for exterior use, and Class Fe/Zn 5 where built into exterior walls. Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.


A. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with compatible with topcoat.

B. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.


A. Provide complete stair assemblies, including metal framing, hangers, struts, clips, brackets, bearing plates, and other components necessary to support and anchor stairs and platforms on supporting structure.

1. Join components by welding unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing work.

D. Weld connections to comply with the following:


2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately.




4. Weld exposed corners and seams continuously unless otherwise indicated. 5. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary

Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

E. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

2.6 STEEL-FRAMED STAIRS

A. Stair Framing:

1. Fabricate stringers of steel plates or channels or tubes.

a. Provide closures for exposed ends of channel or tube stringers.

2. Construct platforms of steel plate or channel or tube headers and miscellaneous framing members as indicated.

3. Weld stringers to headers; weld framing members to stringers and headers. If using bolts, fabricate and join so bolts are not exposed on finished surfaces.

B. Metal-Pan Stairs: Form risers, subtread pans, and subplatforms to configurations shown from steel sheet of thickness needed to comply with performance requirements but not less than 0.067 inch.

C. Concrete Materials and Properties: Comply with requirements in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, ready-mix concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi unless otherwise indicated.

D. Nonslip-Aggregate Concrete Finish: Factory-packaged abrasive aggregate made from fused, aluminum-oxide grits or crushed emery; rustproof and nonglazing; unaffected by freezing, moisture, or cleaning materials.

E. Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185/A 185M, 6 by 6 inches, W1.4 by W1.4, unless otherwise indicated.

2.7 STAIR RAILINGS

A. Comply with applicable requirements in Section 05 7300 "Decorative Metal Railings." Intermediate members spaced to prevent passage of 4” sphere per IBC.

2.8 FINISHES

A. Finish metal stairs after assembly.

B. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."




C. Apply shop primer to uncoated surfaces of metal stair components, except those with galvanized finishes and those to be embedded in concrete or masonry unless otherwise indicated. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal stairs. Set units accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels and free of rack.

B. Install metal stairs by welding stair framing to steel structure or to weld plates cast into concrete unless otherwise indicated.

C. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints.

D. Field Welding: Comply with requirements for welding in "Fabrication, General" Article.


A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas of shop paint, and paint exposed areas with same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.




DECORATIVE METAL 05 5700 - 1

SECTION 05 5700 - DECORATIVE METAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Custom metal requiring higher standard of care in fabrication. Items to include the following: 1. Steel and glass canopy. 2. Decorative screens/gates and handrails. 3. Sunshades at windows.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 01 2100 – Allowances: Decorative metal gates and screens. 2. Section 05 7300 – Decorative Metal Railings: Aluminum and glass ornamental

railings. 3. Section 09 9100 – Painting: Field finish of decorative metals not scheduled for

powder coating.


A. General: Fabricate and install fabricated items to withstand loads from gravity, wind, ponding, drift, seismic, and structural movement, including thermally induced movement; and to resist, without failure, other conditions of in-service use, including exposure to weather.

1. Employ registered professional engineer, licensed to practice structural engineering, to engineer any component of decorative metalwork that is not shown in the structural drawings.

2. Provide components, including necessary modifications, to meet specified requirements and maintaining visual design concepts.

3. Requirements Shown by Details: Establish basic dimension of units, sight lines and profiles of members.

4. Assemblies: Free from rattles, wind whistles and noise due to thermal and structural movement and wind pressure.

5. Attachments: Account for site peculiarities and expansion and contraction movements so there is no possibility of loosening, weakening and fracturing connection between units and building structure or between units themselves.

6. Anchors, Fasteners and Braces: Structurally stressed not more than 50 percent of allowable stress when maximum loads are applied.

7. Provide for expansion and contraction due to structural movement without detriment to appearance or performance.




8. Provide uniform color and profile appearance at components exposed to view.

B. Structural Performance: Provide fabricated items capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated:

1. Wind Loads: Determine loads based on minimum design wind pressures indicated on Drawings.

C. Seismic Performance: Provide fabrications capable of withstanding the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures."

D. Thermal Movements: Provide fabrications that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, tearing of fabric, and other detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated, including finishing materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Indicate materials, finishes, fasteners, anchorages, and accessory items.

C. Samples: For each type of exposed finish required.

D. Coordination Drawings: For decorative formed metal elements that house items specified in other Sections. Show dimensions of housed items, including locations of housing penetrations and attachments, and necessary clearances.


A. Fabricator Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in fabricating architecturally exposed structural steel similar to that indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to fabricate structural steel without delaying the Work.

B. Certification is required from a structural engineer licensed to practice in the jurisdiction that the project is being constructed, that all fabrications (whether or not submitted as a shop drawing) were designed, and fabricated to comply with applicable codes and that all attachments shown are designed to comply with applicable code.




C. Architecturally Exposed Structural Steel (AESS): Fabricate and erect members identified within the Contract Documents to be AESS, with care and dimensional tolerances stipulated in AISC Section 10.

D. Welding Standards: Comply with applicable provisions of AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel".


A. Store decorative metal in a well-ventilated area, away from uncured concrete and masonry, and protected from weather, moisture, soiling, abrasion, extreme temperatures, and humidity.

B. Deliver and store cast-metal products in wooden crates surrounded by sufficient packing material to ensure that products will not be cracked or otherwise damaged.


A. Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with decorative metal by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for decorative metal items. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ALUMINUM

A. Aluminum, General: Provide alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of use and finish indicated, and with strength and durability properties for each aluminum form required not less than that of alloy and temper designated below.

B. Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5/T52.

C. Plate and Sheet: ASTM B 209, Alloy 3003-H14.




2.2 STEEL AND IRON

A. Bars: Hot-rolled, carbon steel complying with ASTM A 29/A 29M, Grade 1010.

B. Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M unless otherwise indicated.

D. Steel Sheet, Cold Rolled: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, either commercial steel or structural steel, exposed.

2.3 LAMINATED GLASS AT CANOPIES (see Drawings)

A. General: Proprietary manufacturer of glass material and clips: Crystalite Skylights or approved alternate by Architect.

B. Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble, discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

1. Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer manufacturer's written instructions.

2. Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with requirements.

3. Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.


A. Gaskets: As required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.

B. Sealants, Exterior: ASTM C 920; elastomeric silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in decorative formed metal and remain weathertight; and as recommended in writing by decorative formed metal manufacturer.

C. Filler Metal and Welding Electrodes: Provide type and alloy as necessary for strength, corrosion resistance, and compatibility in fabricated items.

1. Use filler metals that will match the color of metal being joined.

D. Fasteners: Fabricated from same basic metal and alloy as fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide tamper-resistant flat-head machine screws for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

2. Aluminum Items: Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners.




E. Anchors: Provide anchors of type, size, and material necessary for type of load and installation indicated, as recommended by manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Welding Rods and Bare Electrodes: Select according to AWS specifications for metal alloy welded.

G. Brazing Rods: For copper alloys, provide type and alloy as recommended by producer of metal to be brazed and as required for color match, strength, and compatibility in fabricated items.

H. Etching Cleaner for Galvanized Metal.

I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

J. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9100 Painting.

K. Shop Primer for Galvanized Steel: Provide primers that comply with Section 09 9100 Painting.


A. Assemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible to minimize field splicing and assembly. Disassemble units only as necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Form decorative metal to required shapes and sizes, true to line and level with true curves and accurate angles and surfaces. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris.

C. Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwise impairing the Work.

D. Form simple and compound curves in bars, pipe, tubing, and extruded shapes by bending members in jigs to produce uniform curvature for each configuration required; maintain cross section of member throughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces.

E. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

F. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

G. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate. Locate weep holes in inconspicuous locations.




H. Provide necessary rebates, lugs, and brackets to assemble units and to attach to other work. Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap as needed to receive finish hardware, screws, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

I. AESS Items: 1. General: Fabricate items of architecturally exposed steel with special care using

material selected for best appearance, in accordance with AISC Specifications and as indicated on the final shop drawings. Apply necessary fabricating techniques to produce and maintain the quality of work within required tolerances.

2. Finish exposed surfaces to smooth, sharp, well-defined lines and arris. 3. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections

that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. 4. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. 5. Hot-dip galvanize after fabrication at exterior locations. 6. Welding: Interconnect members with full-length, continuous, full-penetration welds,

unless otherwise indicated. Use welding method that is appropriate for metal and finish indicated and that develops full strength of members joined. Surface “bleed” of backside welding on exposed surfaces will not be acceptable. Finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth, grind flush, and blended to match adjoining surfaces. Dress exposed welds, remove all run-off tabs and backer bars and neatly grind flush.

7. Holes for Other Work: Provide holes required for securing other work to steel framing and for the passage of other work through steel framing members, as shown on the final shop drawings. Provide threaded nuts welded to framing and other specialty items as shown to receive other work. Cut, drill, or punch holes perpendicular to metal surfaces. Do not flame cut holes or enlarge holes by burning.

8. Brackets, Fittings, and Anchors: Provide brackets, fittings, and anchors to connect canopies to structure and other work, unless otherwise indicated. Coordinate anchorage devices with supporting structure.

J. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Cope or miter corner joints. Fabricate connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.

K. Comply with AWS for recommended practices in shop welding and brazing. Weld and braze behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed joints of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

1. Where welding and brazing cannot be concealed behind finished surfaces, finish joints to comply with NOMMA's "Voluntary Joint Finish Standards" for Type 1 Welds: no evidence of a welded joint.

L. Provide castings that are sound and free of warp, cracks, blowholes, or other defects that impair strength or appearance. Grind, wire brush, sandblast, and buff castings to remove seams, gate marks, casting flash, and other casting marks.

M. Fold back exposed edges of unsupported sheet metal to form a 1/2-inch- wide hem on the concealed side, or ease edges to a radius of approximately 1/32 inch and support with concealed stiffeners.




N. Increase metal thickness or reinforce with concealed stiffeners, backing materials, or both, as needed to provide surface flatness and sufficient strength for indicated use and avoid oil canning.

1. Support joints with concealed stiffeners as needed to hold exposed faces of adjoining sheets in flush alignment.

O. Where welding or brazing is indicated, weld or braze joints and seams continuously. Grind, fill, and dress to produce smooth, flush, exposed surfaces in which joints are not visible after finishing is completed.

2.6 EXPOSED STRUCTURAL STEEL ITEMS

A. Items: 1. Steel and glass canopy.

B. Splice members only where indicated on approved shop drawings.

C. Coordinate with Section 08 8000 for glass canopy covers.

D. Support Brackets: Coordinate support rods and attachments of metal roof canopy with structural details and calculations.

E. Inspect field erected assemblies, verify locations of structural steel for plumbness, level and alignment.

F. Provide necessary tensioning rods and turnbuckles finished to match adjacent steel.

2.7 DECORATIVE SCREENS/GATES AND HANDRAILS

A. Fabricate decorative screens/gates and handrails from steel bars, shapes, or cast iron to size and pattern indicated.

2.8 SUNSHADES

A. Fabricate sunshades from aluminum bars and shapes to size and pattern indicated.

2.9 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.




2.10 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize products made from rolled, pressed, and forged steel shapes, castings, plates, bars, and strips indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Hot-dip galvanize steel and iron hardware indicated to be galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Preparing Galvanized Items for Shop Priming: After galvanizing, thoroughly clean decorative metal of grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter, and treat with etching cleaner.

C. Preparing Nongalvanized Items for Shop Priming: Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

D. Primer Application: Apply shop primer to prepared surfaces of items unless otherwise indicated. Primer need not be applied to surfaces to be embedded in concrete or masonry.

1. Shop prime uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces with primers specified in Section 09 9100 Painting.

2. Do not apply primer to galvanized surfaces.

E. Powder-Coat Finish: Prepare, treat, and coat ferrous metal to comply with resin manufacturer's written instructions and as follows:

1. Prepare uncoated ferrous-metal surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Prepare galvanized metal by thoroughly removing grease, dirt, oil, flux, and other foreign matter.

3. Treat prepared metal with metallic-phosphate pretreatment, rinse, and seal surfaces. 4. Apply thermosetting polyester or acrylic urethane powder coating with cured-film

thickness not less than 1.5 mils. 5. Color: Refer to Exterior Finish Schedule.

2.11 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Finish designations prefixed by AA comply with the system established by the Aluminum Association for designating aluminum finishes.

B. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603 except with a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils . Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish.

1. Color and Gloss: Match Architect's sample.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install architectural ornamental metal components in accordance with AISC Code of Standard Practice for Steel Bridges and Buildings, Section 10, and approved shop drawings.

B. Locate and place decorative formed metal items level and plumb and in alignment with adjacent construction. Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required to install decorative formed metal.

C. Use concealed anchorages where possible.

D. Form tight joints with exposed connections accurately fitted together. Provide reveals and openings for sealants and joint fillers as indicated.

E. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations.

1. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended

so no roughness shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

F. Corrosion Protection: Apply bituminous paint or other permanent separation materials on concealed surfaces where metals would otherwise be in direct contact with substrate materials that are incompatible or could result in corrosion or deterioration of either material or finish.

G. Coordinate installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials are installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completed exterior wall and roof assemblies.

H. Restore finishes damaged during installation and construction period so no evidence remains of correction work. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop; make required alterations and refinish entire unit or provide new units.

I. Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where needed to secure decorative metal to in-place construction.

J. Set products accurately in location, alignment, and elevation, measured from established lines and levels.




K. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form tight, hairline joints or, where indicated, uniform reveals and spaces for sealants and joint fillers.

L. Do not cut or abrade finishes that cannot be completely restored in the field. Return items with such finishes to the shop for required alterations, followed by complete refinishing, or provide new units as required.

M. Install concealed gaskets, joint fillers, insulation, and flashings as work progresses.

N. Restore protective coverings that have been damaged during shipment or installation. Remove protective coverings only when there is no possibility of damage from other work.




ROUGH CARPENTRY SECTION 06 1000 - 1

SECTION 06 1000 - ROUGH CARPENTRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Framing with engineered wood products. 3. Shear wall panels. 4. Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs. 5. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 6. Wood furring and grounds. 7. Wood sleepers. 8. Plywood backing panels.


1. Section 06 1653 – Moisture Resistant Sheathing Board. 2. Section 07 4646 – Fiber Cement Panel Siding and Trim.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.

1. Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements

2. Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.


A. Material Certificates: For dimension lumber specified to comply with minimum allowable unit stresses. Indicate species and grade selected for each use and design values approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

B. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Engineered wood products. 2. Shear panels. 3. Power-driven fasteners. 4. Powder-actuated fasteners. 5. Expansion anchors.




6. Metal framing anchors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit grade stamp

and provide certificates of grade compliance issued by grading agency. 3. Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Sawn lumber to conform to “West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau and Dressing Rule”,

latest edition.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent for 2-inch nominal thickness or less, 19 percent for more than 2-inch nominal thickness

C. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance with building code in effect for Project.

1. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED LUMBER

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.

2. No CCA permitted. ACQ (alkaline copper quat) and CBA (copper boron azole) are acceptable. ACQ requires stainless steel nails.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent. Do not use material that is warped or that does not comply with requirements for untreated material.




C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat all items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

1. Refer Structural Drawings for grades and species of all dimensional lumber framing.

2.4 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS

A. Engineered Wood Products, General: Products shall contain no urea formaldehyde.

B. Laminated-Veneer Lumber: Structural composite lumber made from wood veneers with grain primarily parallel to member lengths, evaluated and monitored according to ASTM D 5456 and manufactured with an exterior-type adhesive complying with ASTM D 2559.

1. Extreme Fiber Stress in Bending, Edgewise: 2900 psi]. 2. Modulus of Elasticity, Edgewise: 2,000,000 psi.

C. Wood I-Joists: Prefabricated units, I-shaped in cross section, made with solid or structural composite lumber flanges and wood-based structural panel webs, let into and bonded to flanges. Provide units complying with material requirements of and with structural capacities established and monitored according to ASTM D 5055.

1. Web Material: Either oriented strand board or plywood, complying with DOC PS 1 or DOC PS 2, Exposure 1.

2. Structural Properties: Provide units with depths and design values not less than those indicated.

3. Provide units complying with APA PRI-400, factory marked with APA trademark indicating nominal joist depth, joist class, span ratings, mill identification, and compliance with APA standard.

D. Rim Boards: Product designed to be used as a load-bearing member and to brace wood I-joists at bearing ends, complying with research/evaluation report for I-joists.




1. Material: product made from any combination solid lumber, wood strands, and veneers.

2. Thickness: 1 3/4inches. 3. Provide performance-rated product complying with APA PRR-401, rim board, rim

board plus grade, factory marked with APA trademark indicating thickness, grade, and compliance with APA standard.

2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Refer Structural Drawings for grades and species of miscellaneous lumber.

2.6 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS

A. Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exterior, C-C Plugged fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated, not less than 1/2-inch.

1. Plywood shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

2.7 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M or of Type 304 stainless steel].

B. Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.

C. Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers.

2.8 METAL FRAMING ANCHORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following:

1. Cleveland Steel Specialty Co. 2. KC Metals Products, Inc.




3. Phoenix Metal Products, Inc. 4. Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc. 5. USP Structural Connectors.

C. Allowable Design Loads: Provide products with allowable design loads, as published by manufacturer, that meet or exceed those of products of manufacturers listed. Manufacturer's published values shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency.

D. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 coating designation.

1. Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.

E. Hot-Dip, Heavy-Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M; structural steel (SS), high-strength low-alloy steel Type A (HSLAS Type A), or high-strength low-alloy steel Type B (HSLAS Type B); G185 coating designation; and not less than 0.036 inch thick.

1. Use for wood-preservative-treated lumber and where indicated.


A. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill sealer; 1-inch nominal thickness, compressible to 1/32 inch; selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

B. Sill-Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated.

C. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. In particular, note the fiber cement panel siding manufacturer’s requirements for locating framing/solid blocking behind vertical trim joints.




B. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.

C. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

E. Shear Wall Panels: Install shear wall panels to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Install fasteners through each fastener hole.

G. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

H. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

I. Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexible flashing separator between wood and metal decking.

J. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners. 2. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code. 3. Table R602.3 (1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3 (2),

"Alternate Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.

B. Protect rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, rough carpentry becomes sufficiently wet that moisture content exceeds that specified] apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.




MOISTURE RESISTANT SHEATHING BOARD SECTION 06 1653 - 1

SECTION 06 1653 - MOISTURE RESISTANT GYPSUM SHEATHING

PART 1 – GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Supply and installation of moisture resistant exterior gypsum sheathing. 2. Supply and installation of roof deck sheathing.

B. Related Sections

1. 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry 2. 07 2505 – Building Wrap Weather Barriers 3. 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 4. 08 4313 – Glazed Aluminum Storefronts 5. 08 5313 – Vinyl and Fiberglass Windows and Doors 6. 09 2216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASTM A 153/A 153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2004.

B. ASTM A 653M-[94J, Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or ZincIron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.

C. ASTM C 954-[93], Specification for Steel Drill Screws for the Application of Gypsum Board.

D. ASTM C 1177/C 1177M - Standard Specification for Glass Mat Gypsum Substrate for Use as Sheathing; 2004.

E. ASTM C 1178-[93], Specification for Glass Mat Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board (in bath and shower areas)

F. ASTM D 3273, Standard Test Method for Resistance to Growth of Mold




G. Gypsum Association (GA): GA-253 Application of Gypsum Sheathing.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 01 3000 – Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. Submit manufacturer's descriptive literature indicating material composition, thickness, sizes and fire resistance.

C. Submit manufacturer's written certificate that product meets specified requirements


A. Deliver materials to the job site in manufacturer's original packaging, containers and bun-dles with manufacturer's brand name and identification intact and legible.

B. Store level and handle materials to protect against contact with damp and wet surfaces, ex-posure to weather, breakage and damage to edges. Provide air circulation under covering and around stacks of materials.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTERIOR GYPSUM SHEATHING

A. Glass Mat Faced exterior gypsum sheathing board meeting the definition of ASTM C1177/C 1177M. Sheathing shall have a moisture-resistant core with glass mats on both sides. Gyp-sum sheathing shall be engineered for exterior. 1. Mold resistance: Minimum score of 10 per ASTM 03273 2. Edges: Square. 3. Thickness 5/8" 4. Core: Type X 5. Board Size: Minimum 4' x 8'

B. Basis of Design: DensGlass Gold Fireguard Type X by Georgia-Pacific

2.2 LOW-SLOPE ROOF COVERBOARD

A. Glass mat, factory-primed exterior gypsum board meeting the definition of ASTM C1177. Gypsum board shall be engineered for use as a low-slope roofing substrate over sloped structure or tapered rigid insulation.




1. Mold resistance: Minimum score of 10 per ASTM 03273 2. Edges: Square. 3. Thickness 5/8" 4. Core: Type X 5. Board Size: Minimum 4' x 8'

B. Basis of Design: DensDeck Prime by Georgia-Pacific

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Install in accordance with ASTM C 1002. 1. Corrosion resistance:

a. Hot-dipped galvanized steel per ASTM A 153/A 153M, G185. b. Climacoat by ITW Buildex.

2. Screws, wood framing:

a. Type S-12, #6 minimum, bugle head drywall screws, corrosion protected. b. Hot-dipped galvanized roofing nails, minimum 1" penetration into framing or per

structural, whichever is more stringent.

3. Screws, metal framing: a. Type S-12, #6 min., bugle head, self-tapping, corrosion protected, fine thread for

heavy steel gauge (12 - 22). b. Type S, bugle head, corrosion protected sharp point, fine thread for light gauge

metal framing or furring.

4. Screws, concrete substrate: a. Self tapping screws complete with washers. b. ITW Buildex Tapcon with Climaseal Coating %" by 1-314" (1-1/2" min.

embedment) c. Approved alternate.

B. Weather Barriers: See Sections 07 2505 - Building Wrap Weather Barriers and 07 2726

Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers.

C. Self-Adhered Sheet Flashing: See Section 07 6526.




PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine subframing; verify that surface of framing and furring members to receive sheathing does not vary more than 1/4 inch from the face of adjacent members. Notify Consultant of any deviations or unacceptable conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Do application and finishing of gypsum board in accordance with ASTM C 840 except where specified otherwise.

B. Install blocking as required to provide continuous support of sheathing.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF WALL SHEATHING

A. Do not apply sheathing board until steel stud framing, anchors and blocking work are ap-proved.

B. Secure with long dimension perpendicular to wall studs, with ends over firm bearing and staggered, using nails or screws.

C. Apply single layer gypsum board to metal furring or framing using screw (metal and wood framing) or nail (wood framing only) fasteners. 1. Fastener spacing: Per Building Code requirements.

D. Perimeter screws shall not be less than 3/8 inch from edges, and ends and shall be opposite

the screws on adjacent boards.

E. Drive fasteners to bear tight against and flush with surface of sheathing. Do not countersink.

F. Use maximum lengths possible to minimize number and placement of joints. Locate edge joints parallel to and with vertical orientations on framing. Stagger intermediate end joints of adjacent lengths of sheathing. Make joints tight, accurately aligned and rigidly secured. Par-ticular care is to be taken at wall corners which are not at 90 degrees to obtain snug joint with maximum gap of 1/8 inch.

G. Typical board joints to be tight to provide continuous support for the weather barrier. Board joints at base of slab to provide for deflection as required, and to be supported by metal supports and blocking as indicated.

H. For sheathing supporting self-adhered membrane, fill all joints greater than 5/16" (8mm) with cementitous filler.




3.4 MINIMUM FASTENING SCHEDULE

A. Screw sheathing to studs and runners or plates with fasteners spaced, sized, and located as required by Building Code. 1. Steel studs: Use bugle-head screws. 2. Wood studs: Use nails or bugle-head screws.

B. Use fasteners of sufficient length to penetrate into framing a minimum dimension to satisfy

requirements of the Building Code. 1. Immediately contact Architect if clarification of fastener length is needed.




BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 1700 - 1

SECTION 07 1700 – BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the furnishing and installing the following materials, per project specifications and drawings, or as directed by waterproofing manufacturer.

1. Bentonite waterproofing membrane with all applicable accessory products. 2. Prefabricated drainage composite.


1. All of the Contract Documents, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 General requirements, apply to the work of this section.

2. Division 00 – Subsurface and Geotechnical Investigations. 3. Division 07 – Joint Treatment/ Sealants, Flashing and sheet metal, and Insulation. 4. Division 31 – Earthwork, Excavation and Fill, Shoring.


A. Provide waterproofing system and prefabricated drainage composite system to prevent the passage of liquid water and install without defects, damage or failure. Waterproofing shall be two high strength geotextiles interlocked encapsulating minimum 1.10-lbs per square foot (5.37 kg/sqm) granular sodium bentonite with an integrated polymeric liner sheet.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit specified submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and Division 1 Submittals Sections.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, with complete general and specific installation instructions, recommendations, and limitations.

C. Product Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval:

1. waterproofing membrane 2. Prefabricated drainage composite

D. Waterproofing Material and Labor Warranty: At time of bid, submit a sample copy of the Manufacturer’s Waterproofing warranty complete with all coverage’s, limitations, and conditions.




E. Material Certificates: Submit certificate(s) signed by manufacturer certifying materials comply with specified performance characteristics and physical requirements. Submit certification that waterproofing system and components, drainage and protection materials are supplied by a single-source manufacturer.

F. Contractor Certificate: At time of bid, submit written certification that installer has current Approved Applicator status with waterproofing material manufacturer.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installing company should have at least three (3) years experience in work of the type required by this section, who can comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements, and who is an Approved Applicator as determined by waterproofing/drainage system manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Waterproofing membranes and all accessory products shall be provided by a single manufacturer with a minimum of 30 years experience in the direct production and sales of waterproofing systems. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving an acceptable installer, and recommending appropriate installation methods.

C. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to commencement of field installation to establish procedures to maintain required working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Verify that final waterproofing and waterstop details comply with waterproofing manufacturer's current installation requirements and recommendations. Pre-con meeting attendees should include representatives for the owner, architect, inspection firm, general contractor, waterproofing contractor, concrete contractor, excavating/backfill contractor, and mechanical and electrical contractors if work penetrates the waterproofing.

D. Materials: Obtain waterproofing membrane with accessory products and prefabricated drainage materials from a single manufacturer to assure material compatibility.

E. Independent Inspection: Owner may engage an independent inspection service to monitor waterproofing material installation compliance with the project contract documents and manufacturer’s published literature and site specific details. Inspection service shall produce reports and digital photographs documenting each inspection. Reports shall be made available in a timely manner to the Contractor, waterproofing installer, waterproofing material manufacturer, and Architect. Inspections should include substrate examination, beginning of waterproofing installation, periodic intervals, and final inspection prior to concrete or backfill placement against the waterproofing.

F. Water Sample Test: Waterproofing contractor shall supply project site water sample to waterproofing membrane manufacturer for analysis. Manufacturer shall conduct test free of charge. Contractor is responsible for collection and shipment 64-fluid ounces (2-liters) of actual site water. Water should be shipped in uncontaminated, sealed plastic container. Provide project name, city and state along with return address to forward test results.




1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver materials in factory sealed and labeled packaging. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, while minimizing on-site storage. Handle and store following manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from construction operation related damage, as well as damage from weather, excessive temperatures and prolonged sunlight. Remove damaged material from site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. Storage: Do not double-stack pallets during shipping or storage. Protect waterproofing materials from moisture, excessive temperatures and sources of ignition. Provide cover, top and all sides, for materials stored on-site, allowing for adequate ventilation.


A. Substrate Condition: Proceed with work only when substrate construction and preparation work is complete and in condition to receive waterproofing system. All plumbing, electrical, mechanical and structural items to be under or passing through the waterproofing shall be positively secured in their proper positions prior to waterproofing system installation. Substrate shall be prepared per waterproofing manufacturer’s guidelines.

B. Weather Conditions: Perform work only when existing and forecasted weather conditions are within the guidelines established by the manufacturer of the waterproofing materials. Do not apply waterproofing materials in areas of standing or active water; or over ice and snow. The General Contractor shall maintain site conditions to remove standing water from precipitation or ground water seepage in a timely manner. Should waterproofing materials be subjected to pre-hydration as a result of prolonged immersion, inspection of the material and written acceptance from the waterproofing manufacturer is required prior to concrete or backfill placement.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Warranty eligibility for the project must be validated by Manufacturer, confirming acceptance of the installation and independent inspection reports are in accordance with the manufacturer’s quality assurance program requirements.

B. Waterproofing Material and Labor Warranty: Upon installation completion and manufacturer acceptance of the work required by this section, the waterproofing materials manufacturer will provide to the project Owner a written five (5) year non-prorated warranty, covering both materials and labor. Issuance of Manufacturer's Waterproofing Warranty requires the following: (1) Waterproofing System products and drainage composite products shall have been provided by a single manufacturer; (2) Installation of waterproofing products and prefabricated drainage composite by Manufacturer's Approved Applicator in full accordance with manufacturer’s quality assurance program requirements; (3) Installation inspected by an approved and trained Independent Inspection Firm; (4) Compatible waterstop must be installed in all applicable concrete cold pour construction joints, including




around applicable penetrations. Manufacturer's warranty shall be independent from any other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents and may run concurrent with the other warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Provide Voltex DS waterproofing membrane and applicable accessories as manufactured by Colloid Environmental Technologies Company (CETCO), 2870 Forbs Ave, Hoffman Estates, IL 60192, USA. Phone: Toll Free (800) 527-9948 or (847) 851-1800; Web-site: http://www.cetco.com/bmg.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. VOLTEX DS BENTONITE GEOTEXTILE WATERPROOFING MEMBRANE

1. VOLTEX DS MEMBRANE: 4’ x 14.5’ (1.2 x 4.4m) roll of interlocked geotextiles encapsulating a minimum 1.10-lbs per square foot (5.37 kg/sqm) of granular sodium bentonite. Composite shall consist of one woven and one nonwoven polypropylene geotextile, interlocked using a needle-punching process that produces several interlocks per square inch (6.5 sq cm) over the entire area of the product with an integrated polymeric sheet liner on one side.

Voltex DS / Voltex DSCR performance properties:

PROPERTY TEST METHOD TYPICAL VALUE

Hydrostatic Pressure Resistance ASTM D 5385 mod.

231 ft. (70 m)

Permeability ASTM D 5084 1 x 10-10 cm/sec.

Grab Tensile Strength ASTM D 4632 95 lbs. (422 N)

Puncture Resistance ASTM D 4833 140 lbs. (620 N)

Low Temperature Flexibility ASTM D 1970 Unaffected at -25°F (-32°C)

Elongation ASTM D 4632 50%

Peel Adhesion to Concrete ASTM D 903 mod. 15 lbs. /in. (2.6 kN/m)

Water Vapor Transmission Rate ASTM E 96 (B) 0.03 grains/hr/ft2

B. ACCESSORY WATERPROOFING PRODUCTS: All accessory waterproofing materials shall be provided by the waterproofing manufacturer or shall have manufacturer’s written approval for substitution.

1. Bentoseal®: Trowel grade detailing mastic. 2. Hydrobar Tubes: 2” (50 mm) diameter x 2’ (60 cm) long, water soluble tube container

filled with active granular sodium bentonite.




3. Waterstoppage®: 50 lbs. (22.7 kg) bag of active granular sodium bentonite. 4. SeamTape®: 2” (50 mm) wide butyl rubber sealant tape. 5. Termination Bar: Min. 1/8” thick by 1” (25 mm) wide stainless steel or aluminum

termination bar with pre-punched holes 6” (150 mm) on center for fastening. 6. Cementitious Wall Board: ½” thick cementitious board for protection of waterproofing

during the removal of metal soldier pile cap and top lagging boards. 7. CETSEAL – single-component polyether general sealant and adhesive. 8. TB-Boots – pre-formed, single piece thermoplastic cover for tie-back heads and soil

nails. Three sizes available: TB-6SN, TB-8, and TB-10. 9. GF-40SA – self-adhering flashing membrane used for grade and thru-wall detailing. 10. Waterstop-RX 101 bentonite waterstop: sodium bentonite and butyl rubber compound

formed into uniform coils.

C. BASE AND SHEET DRAINAGE COMPOSITE

1. Drainage composite by waterproofing manufacturer shall be used where specified to promote positive drainage. Use base drain accessory connectors and outlets as required.

2. Aquadrain® 15XP - 4-ft by 52-ft roll of a three-dimensional polypropylene drainage core with a nonwoven geotextile adhered to one side to allow water passage while restricting soil particles. Composite includes a thin polyethylene sheet on the back of the drainage core.

a. Compressive Strength, 15,000psf (718 kPa); b. Water Flow Rate, 20gpm/ft (251 l/m/m); c. Thickness, 7/16” (11 mm)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

A. Comply with contract documents and manufacturer's product data, including product application and installation instructions.

3.2 SUBSTRATE INSPECTION AND CONDITIONS

A. The installer, with the Owner’s Independent Inspector present, shall examine conditions of substrates and other conditions under which this section work is to be performed and notify the contractor, in writing, of circumstances detrimental to the proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected and are acceptable for compliance with manufacturer's warranty requirements. General substrate conditions acceptable for the waterproofing installation are listed below. For conditions not covered in this Section, contact the waterproofing manufacturer for guidance.

B. WORKING MUD SLAB: Working concrete mud slabs should have a float finish to provide a planar surface; without sharp angular depressions, voids or raised features.




C. COMPACTED SOIL OR GRAVEL SUB-GRADE: Sub-grade shall be compacted to a minimum Modified Proctor density of 85% or greater as specified by civil/geotechnical engineer. The finished sub-grade surface shall be well-leveled, uniform, free of debris and standing water or ice. Aggregate sub-grades shall consist of ¾” (19 mm) stone or smaller and rolled flat, free from any protruding sharp edges. If substrate consists of large aggregate, place a high-strength geotextile layer over the aggregate and then provide several inches of compacted soil or sand for uniform support and containment of waterproofing sheets. Specific sub-grade preparation shall be approved by the project’s civil or geotechnical engineer.

D. MECHANICAL OR OTHER PENETRATIONS: Mechanical, structural, or architectural materials that will pass through the plane of the waterproofing membrane shall be properly installed and secured in their final position prior to installation of the waterproofing system.

E. CONCRETE: Concrete to be waterproofed shall be properly placed and consolidated. Reinforced structural slabs should be a minimum of 6" (150 mm) thick when placed on a working mud slab. Reinforced concrete slab(s) on compacted grade shall be a minimum of 4” (100 mm) thick. When hydrostatic conditions exist, install waterproofing under all footings, elevator pits and grade beams. Cast-in-place concrete to receive waterproofing shall be of sound structural grade with a smooth finish, free of debris, oil, grease, laitance, dirt, dust, or other foreign matter which will impair the performance of the waterproofing and drainage system and which do not comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements. Do not apply waterproofing directly over lightweight insulating concrete, wood, or steel decking.

1. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease, cement laitance, or other foreign matter which will impair or negatively affect the performance of the waterproofing and drainage system.

2. Protect adjacent work areas and finished surfaces from damage or contamination from waterproofing products during installation operations.

3. Form fins, ridges, ponding ridges and other protrusions should be level and smooth with concrete surface.

4. Honeycombing, aggregate pockets, tie-rod holes and other voids shall be completely filled with non-shrink cementitious grout and level with monolithic concrete surface.

5. Waterstop shall be installed in all applicable vertical and horizontal concrete construction cold pour joints and around applicable penetrations, structural members, and tie-rod form holes that extend through the wall. Refer to waterproofing manufacturer’s Product Manual for further installation procedures and guidelines.

3.3 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Remove dirt, debris, oil, grease, cement laitance, or other foreign matter which will impair or negatively affect the performance of the waterproofing and drainage system.

B. Protect adjacent work areas and finish surfaces from damage or contamination from waterproofing products during installation operations.




3.4 GENERAL INSTALLATION GUIDELINES

A. Property Line Walls, install waterproofing membrane with the dark gray woven geotextile side in the direction to receive concrete; poly liner side outward against retaining wall. Overlap membrane edges minimum 4” (100mm). Underslab, membrane with the dark gray woven geotextile side up; poly liner side facing down. Overlap membrane edges minimum 4” (100 mm). Backfilled walls and roofs of earth covered structures, install membrane with the poly liner side outward, away from the concrete, facing the installer; dark gray geotextile against concrete. For backfilled walls overlap membrane edges a minimum 4” (100mm) and tape overlaps with manufacturer’s seam tape.

B. Expansion Joints: Bentonite waterproofing is not an expansion joint filler or sealant, but may be used as an expansion joint cover over a properly installed expansion joint material placed during substrate preparation. To use waterproofing as an expansion joint cover, trowel 1/8" (3 mm) thick, 6" (150 mm) wide layer of bentonite mastic centered over expansion joint. Install a 24" (60 cm) wide strip of membrane centered over the expansion joint. Then install the main course of membrane.

3.5 BACKFILLED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALLS

A. Place Hydrobar Tubes along the wall/footing intersection with ends butted tightly together to form a continuous installation.

B. Trowel 3/4" (18 mm) thick, continuous bentonite mastic seal fillet at all inside wall corner transitions. Trowel mastic form-tie pockets/patches and any slightly irregular concrete surface honeycomb areas.

C. Starting at the base of the wall, install waterproofing membrane sheet horizontally (dark gray geotextile side against the wall; poly liner side facing installer) covering the Hydrobar Tubes and extending onto the footing a minimum of 6” (150 mm). For hydrostatic conditions, cover the entire footing and overlap waterproofing membrane from underslab work a minimum of 6” (150 mm). Attach membrane using washer-headed mechanical fasteners maximum 24” (600 mm) on center and tape overlap with seam tape. Overlap all adjacent sheet edges a minimum 4” (100 mm). Stagger all vertical overlap seams a minimum of 12” (300 mm). Tape all membrane overlap seams with seam tape.

D. After the bottom horizontal course, membrane sheets can be installed either vertically or horizontally oriented. Continue membrane installation up wall to finished grade elevation detail, staggering all sheet roll ends of adjacent courses a minimum 12" (300 mm). Do not allow horizontal membrane overlap joints to run at same elevation as the concrete placement lift joints. Overlap all adjacent sheet edges a minimum 4” (100 mm) and secure with washer-head fastener maximum 24” (600 mm) on center. Tape all membrane overlap seams with seam tape.

E. Penetrations: For all pipe, rebar, structural and other penetrations install waterproofing system in accordance with manufacturer’s detail for specific project condition(s).




F. Terminate membrane 12” (300 mm) below finished grade elevation secured with washer-head fasteners maximum 12” (300 mm) on center to exterior surface of concrete wall. Per manufacturer’s detail for specific project condition(s), install flashing to primed concrete substrate with bottom edge overlapping top edge of membrane minimum 4” (100 mm). Overlap all roll ends a minimum 4” (100 mm) to form a continuous flashing. Height of flashing shall be per project details and specifications. Install a rigid termination bar along the top edge of flashing, fastened maximum 12” (300 mm) on center. Complete grade termination detail with tooled bead of manufacturer approved sealant along the top edge, at all penetrations through the flashing, and all exposed overlap seams.

G. Inspect finished waterproofing installation and repair any damaged material prior to backfill placement. Assure that waterproofing is not displaced during backfill placement or soil compaction.

3.6 PREFABRICATED DRAINAGE COMPOSITE INSTALLATION (Non-Hydrostatic Walls)

A. At the base of the wall, place Aquadrain 100BD (100BD) base-drain horizontally oriented with the open core side up and the 2” (50 mm) flap of fabric side tight against the wall over the previously installed waterproofing using washer-head mechanical fasteners or general construction adhesive. The 2” fabric flap along the top edge of 100BD should be tightly secured against the wall. Use 100BD accessory fittings, as required, to form a continuous installation. Install 100BD discharge outlet fittings to connect to discharge pipes as required for the project.

B. Install the bottom course of Aquadrain 15XP sheet drainage (plastic core side against the wall) with the 15XP bottom core edge in contact with open top core edge of 100BD. Secure sheet drain to wall with washer-head fasteners. Secure extra fabric flap of 15XP extending down the top front edge of 100BD to prevent the passage of soil into the core at the connection.

C. Install subsequent courses of Aquadrain 15XP sheet drainage to within 12” (300 mm) of finished grade or as shown on the project drawings. Tightly abut adjoining sheet drain core edges together and secure the extra fabric flaps over the front of adjacent roll edges to prevent soil from entering the sheet drain. Secure sheet drain to wall with washer-head fasteners. Where drainage sheet panels are installed overlapped, bottom edge of higher course shall be installed to the outside of the lower course to shed water.

D. Around penetrations and tie-back heads, cut sheet drainage composite to fit and wrap extra filter fabric around open core edge to prevent soil from entering core.

E. At the top of the sheet drain installation, wrap the filter fabric flap behind the exposed top core edge to prevent intrusion of soil into the core and secure sheet drain to wall with termination bar fastened 12" (300 mm) on center.




3.7 INSULATION

A. Insulation, if used, should be installed to the exterior of the waterproofing. Do not apply waterproofing over lightweight insulating concrete.

3.8 BACKFILL EXCAVATED CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE WALLS

A. Backfill shall be placed and compacted to minimum 85% Modified Proctor density promptly after waterproofing has been installed. Closely coordinate with contractor responsible for Backfill work by informing them each time a waterproofed area is ready for backfill. Backfill shall consist of compactable soil or angular aggregate (3/4” or less) free of debris, sharp objects, and stones larger than ¾” (18 mm). Care should be used during backfill operation to avoid damage to the waterproofing system. If damage occurs, cease backfilling and report damage. Damaged waterproofing must be repaired per manufacturer’s guidelines.

3.9 WATER STOP INSTALLATION

A. Install water stop in all applicable vertical and horizontal cast-in-place concrete construction joints; and around applicable penetrations and structural members. Place water stop to allow for minimum 3” (75 mm) concrete coverage on all sides (2” (50 mm) coverage for RX-102).

B. Apply continuous bead of adhesive (typical bead diameter 3/16” (5 mm)) to dry, smooth concrete surface maintaining a minimum 3” (75 mm) depth within the concrete joint.

C. Remove release paper from coil of water stop. Firmly press the entire length of water stop into the adhesive bead; resulting in the adhesive bead spreading to coat most of the bottom of the water stop. Verify 3” (75 mm) minimum concrete coverage will be maintained over entire placement of water stop. Place in maximum practical lengths to minimize coil end joints.

D. Tightly butt coil ends together to form continuous water stop. Do not overlap coil ends. Where required, cut coils with sharp knife or utility blade to fit coil ends together without overlapping.

E. Following Steps 1-3, install water stop around all applicable through wall pipes and mechanical penetrations; and around all applicable structural elements through the slab.

F. Protect installed water stop from pre-hydration prior to concrete placement and product encapsulation.

G. Replace any water stop material that exhibit significant expansion prior to concrete encapsulation.




3.10 CLEAN UP

A. In areas where adjacent finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their recommendations and instructions. Remove all tools, equipment and remaining product on-site. Dispose of section work debris and damaged product following all applicable regulations.



THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1

SECTION 07 2100 – THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Insulation all roof areas. Tapered insulation for crickets. 2. The installation of this section is included in Modified Bitumen Roofing specifications.

B. Related requirements:

1. Section 07 5216 – SBS-Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing 2. Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 3. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, with complete general and specific installation instructions, recommendations, and limitations.

C. Product Samples: Submit representative samples of the following for approval: 1. Product data: Submit the name of the manufacturer and specification numbers and

product names of all materials proposed for use in the work. Include in submittal installation instructions and general recommendations for each principal product required. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with requirements.

2. Manufacturers: Provide primary products, as specified from one manufacturer. Provide secondary products which are acceptable to, and approved by, the manufacturer of the primary products.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installing company should have at least three (5) years experience in work of the type required by this section, who can comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements, and who is an Approved Applicator as determined by insulation system manufacturer.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Thermal insulation and all accessory products shall be provided by a single manufacturer with a minimum of 30 years experience in the direct production and sales of insulation systems. Manufacturer shall be capable of providing field service representation during construction, approving an acceptable installer, and recommending appropriate installation methods.

C. Independent Inspection: Owner may engage an independent inspection service to monitor waterproofing material installation compliance with the project contract documents and manufacturer’s published literature and site specific details. Inspection service shall produce reports and digital photographs documenting each inspection. Reports shall be made available in a timely manner to the Contractor, waterproofing installer, waterproofing material manufacturer, and Architect. Inspections should include substrate examination, beginning of waterproofing installation, periodic intervals, and final inspection prior to concrete or backfill placement against the waterproofing.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Material shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled containers and in quantities sufficient to allow continuity of application.

B. Storage: Obtain permission of owner for rooftop storage. If rooftop storage of materials is used, do not exceed the allowable load for the structure. Materials shall be stored out of direct exposure to the elements. Goods shall be stored on end, on a clean, flat surface. Material shall be protected against moisture so as not to allow moisture to penetrate the cover or condensation to occur beneath the cover. Manufacturer’s shipping wrap is not an acceptable form of weather protection.

C. Handling: Material shall be handled in such a manner as to preclude damage and contamination with moisture or foreign matter.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Insulation Board: Closed cell polyisocyanurate board, with the following characteristics: 1. Compressive Strength: Minimum 20 pounds/square inch. 2. Board Size: Manufacturers standard sizes. 3. Board Taper: At crickets, utilize manufacturer standard taper to promote positive

water flow toward the drains. Do not install any more slope than will allow for the installation of a minimum 6” vertical baseflashing height at the adjacent roof-to-wall transitions.

4. Board Thickness: Flat stock Polyiso 2.2 inches, tapered thickness varies. 5. Manufacturer: Hunter Panel, Johns Manville E’NRG’Y 2 or comparable as approved

by the roof system manufacturer.



B. Tapered Edge Strip: Rigid perlite insulation board, with the following characteristics: 1. Board Size: Manufacturer’s standard sizes. 2. Board Taper: Field verify to provide smooth transition from edge of tapered polyiso to

slope of 0 inches. 3. Board Thickness: Varies. 4. Manufacturer: Hunter Panel, Johns Manville E’NRG’Y 2 or comparable as approved

by the roof system manufacturer.

C. Gypsum Cover Board: Fiberglass Faced Gypsum Roof Board, with the following characteristics: 1. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 2. Size: 4 feet 8 feet. 3. Weight: 1.2 lb/sq. ft. 4. Surfacing: Factory primed fiberglass mat. 5. Flexural Strength, Parallel (ASTM C473): 40 lbf, minimum. 6. Permeance (ASTM E96): greater than 50 perms. 7. R-Value (ASTM C518): 0.28. 8. Water Absorption (ASTM C1177): Less than 10 percent of weight. 9. Compressive Strength (Applicable Sections of ASTM C472): 900 pounds per square

inch. 10. Surface Water Absorption (ASTM C473): Not more than 2.5 grams.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine roof deck for suitability to receive insulation. Verify that substrate is dry, clean and free of foreign material that will damage insulation or impede installation, and is properly secured to the structure.

B. Verify that roof drains, scuppers, roof curbs, nailers, equipment supports, vents and other roof accessories are secured properly and installed in conformance with Contract Drawings and submittals.

C. Verify that deck is structurally sound to support installers, materials and equipment without damaging or deforming work.

D. 1Start of installation indicates installer accepts conditions of existing deck surfaces.



3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install specified insulation using approved adhesives in accordance with manufacturer´s latest written instructions and as required by governing codes and Owner´s insurance carrier.

B. All installed insulation must be covered in same day with roofing plies. 1. Temporarily seal exposed insulation edges at the end of each day. 2. Remove and replace installed insulation that has become wet or damaged with new

insulation.

C. All insulation joints should be tightly butted and staggered between layers in all directions.

D. Cleaning: Remove trash and construction debris from insulation surface prior to application of roofing membrane.




BUILDING WRAP / WEATHER BARRIER 07 2505 - 1

SECTION 07 2505 – BUILDING WRAP WEATHER BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Building Wrap system, with all applicable accessory products.

1.2 REFERENCES

A. ASTM International 1. ASTM D882; Test Method for Tensile Properties of Thin Plastic Sheeting 2. ASTM D1117; Standard Guide for Evaluating Non-woven Fabrics 3. ASTM E84; Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials 4. ASTM E96; Test Method for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials 5. ASTM E1677; Specification for Air Retarder Material or System for Framed Building

Walls 6. ASTM E2178; Test Method for Air Permeance of Building Materials 7. ASTM E2357; Standard Test Method for Determining Air Leakage of Air Barrier

Assemblies

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data, with complete general and specific installation instructions, recommendations, and limitations, for each component.

C. Samples: Building Wrap Membrane, minimum 8-1/2 inches by 11 inch.

D. Quality Assurance Submittals

E. Manufacturer Instructions: Provide manufacturer’s written installation instructions and details.


A. Qualifications


1. Installer shall have at least five (5) years experience with installation of commercial Building Wrap assemblies under similar conditions.

2. Installation shall be in accordance with Building Wrap manufacturer’s published installation guidelines, details, and recommendations.

3. Source Limitations: Provide commercial Building Wrap and accessory materials produced by single manufacturer.

B. Pre-installation Meeting 1. Pre-Installation Conference: A pre-installation conference shall be held prior to

commencement of field installation to establish procedures to maintain required working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work. Verify that final Building Wrap details comply with manufacturer's current installation requirements and recommendations. Pre-con meeting attendees should include representatives for the owner, architect, inspection firm, general contractor, Building Wrap contractor, manufacturer’s representative, framing contractor, and mechanical and electrical contractors if work penetrates the waterproofing.

2. Review all related project requirements and submittals, status of substrate work and preparation, areas of potential conflict and interface, availability of Building Wrap assembly materials and components, installer’s training requirements, equipment, facilities and scaffolding, and coordinate methods, procedures and sequencing requirements for full and proper installation, integration and protection.

C. Materials: Obtain Building Wrap materials with accessory products from a single manufacturer to assure material compatibility.

D. Independent Inspection: Owner may engage an independent inspection service to monitor Building Wrap installation compliance with the project contract documents and manufacturer’s published literature and site specific details. Inspection service shall produce reports and digital photographs documenting each inspection. Reports shall be made available in a timely manner to the Owner, Contractor, installer, material manufacturer, and Architect. Inspections should include substrate examination, beginning of building wrap installation, periodic intervals, and final inspection.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver Building Wrap materials in factory sealed and labeled packaging. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, while minimizing on-site storage. Handle and store following manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from construction operation related damage, as well as damage from weather, excessive temperatures and prolonged sunlight. Remove damaged material from site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. Store building wrap weather barrier materials as recommended by manufacturer.


1.6 SCHEDULING

A. Review requirements for sequencing of installation of Building Wrap assembly with installation of windows, doors, louvers and flashings to provide a weather-tight barrier assembly.

B. Schedule installation of weather barrier materials and exterior cladding within six months of weather barrier assembly installation.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Provide standard manufacturer’s warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. DuPont; 4417 Lancaster Pike, Chestnut Run Plaza 728, Wilmington, DE 19805; 1-800-44-TYVEK (8-9835); http://www.construction.tyvek.com

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Basis of Design: spunbonded polyolefin, non-woven, non-perforated, weather barrier is based upon DuPont™ Tyvek® CommercialWrap® and related assembly components.

B. Performance Characteristics: 1. Air Penetration: 0.001 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM

E2178. Type I per ASTM E1677. ≤0.04 cfm/ft2 at 75 Pa, when tested in accordance with ASTM E2357

2. Water Vapor Transmission: 28 perms, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96, Method B.

3. Water Penetration Resistance: 280 cm when tested in accordance with AATCC Test Method 127.

4. Basis Weight: 2.7 oz/yd2, when tested in accordance with TAPPI Test Method T-410. 5. Air Resistance: Air infiltration at >1500 seconds, when tested in accordance with

TAPPI Test Method T-460. 6. Tensile Strength: 38/35 lbs/in., when tested in accordance with ASTM D882, Method

A. 7. Tear Resistance: 12/10 lbs., when tested in accordance with ASTM D1117. 8. Surface Burning Characteristics: Class A, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84.

Flame Spread: 10, Smoke Developed: 10.


2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Seam Tape: 3 inch wide, DuPont™ Tyvek® Tape for commercial applications.

B. Fasteners: 1. (Steel Frame Construction) DuPont™ Tyvek® Wrap Cap Screws, as distributed by

DuPont: 1-5/8 inch rust resistant screw with 2-inch diameter plastic cap or manufacturer approved 1-1/4” or 2” metal gasketed washer

2. (Wood Frame Construction) Tyvek® Wrap Caps, as distributed by DuPont: #4 nails with large 1-inch plastic cap fasteners, or 1-inch plastic cap staples with leg length sufficient to achieve a minimum penetration of 5/8-inch into the wood stud.

C. Sealants: Provide sealants that comply with ASTM C920, elastomeric polymer sealant to maintain watertight conditions. 1. DuPont™ Commercial Sealant 2. Sealants recommended and approved by the weather barrier manufacturer

D. Adhesives:

1. Provide adhesive approved/recommended by weather barrier manufacturer.

E. Primers:

1. Provide flashing manufacturer recommended primer to assist in adhesion between substrate and flashing.

F. Flashing (as required by project conditions) 1. DuPont™ FlexWrap™, as distributed by DuPont: flexible membrane flashing materials

for window openings and penetrations. 2. DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF, as distributed by DuPont: flexible membrane flashing

materials for window openings and penetrations. 3. DuPont™ StraightFlash™, as distributed by DuPont: straight flashing membrane

materials for flashing windows and doors and sealing penetrations such as masonry ties, etc.

4. DuPont™ StraightFlash™ VF, as distributed by DuPont: dual-sided straight flashing membrane materials for brick mold and non-flanged windows and doors.

5. DuPont™ Thru-Wall Surface Adhered Membrane with Integrated Drip Edge: Thru-Wall flashing membrane materials for flashing at changes in direction or elevation (shelf angles, foundations, etc.) and at transitions between different assembly materials.

6. Preformed Inside and Outside Corners and End Dams as distributed by DuPont: Preformed three-dimensional shapes to complete the flashing system used in conjunction with DuPont™ Thru-Wall Flashing.


PART 3 - PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify substrate and surface conditions are in accordance with Building Wrap manufacturer recommended tolerances prior to installation of Building Wrap and accessories.

3.2 INSTALLATION – BUILDING WRAP

A. Install Building Wrap over exterior face of exterior wall substrate in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

B. Install Building Wrap prior to installation of windows and doors.

C. Start Building Wrap installation at a building corner, leaving 6-12 inches of Building Wrap extended beyond corner to overlap.

D. Install Building Wrap in a horizontal manner starting at the lower portion of the wall surface with subsequent layers installed in a shingling manner to overlap lower layers. Maintain Building Wrap plumb and level.

E. Sill Plate Interface: Extend lower edge of Building Wrap over sill plate interface 3-6 inches. Secure to foundation with elastomeric sealant as recommended by manufacturer.

F. Window and Door Openings: Extend Building Wrap completely over openings.

G. Overlap Building Wrap 1. Exterior corners: minimum 12 inches. 2. Seams: minimum 6 inches.

H. Building Wrap Attachment:

1. Attach building wrap to studs through exterior sheathing. Secure using manufacturer recommended fasteners, space 12 -18 inches vertically on center along stud line, and 24 inch on center, maximum horizontally.

3.3 SEAMING

A. Seal seams of Building Wrap with seam tape at all vertical and horizontal overlapping seams.

B. Seal any tears or cuts as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types)

A. Flush cut Building Wrap at edge of sheathing around full perimeter of opening.


B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the Building Wrap at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure Building Wrap flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.5 3.5 FLASHING (for use with non-flanged windows – all cladding types)

A. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ or DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening. Apply primer as required by manufacturer.

B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

C. Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. Mechanical fastening is not required for DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF.

D. Apply 9-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs. Align flashing with interior edge of jamb framing. Start DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at head of opening and lap sill flashing down to the sill.

E. Spray-apply primer to top 6 inches of jambs and exposed sheathing.

F. Install DuPont™ FlexWrap™ DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF at opening head using same installation procedures used at sill. Overlap jamb flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

G. Coordinate flashing with window installation.

H. On exterior, install backer-rod in joint between window frame and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant at jambs and head, leaving sill unsealed. Apply sealants in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

I. Position Building Wrap head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ StraightFlash™ over the 45-degree seams.

J. Tape top of window in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

K. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

3.6 3.6 OPENING PREPARATION (for use with flanged windows)

A. Cut Building Wrap in an “ -cut” pattern. A modified -cut is also acceptable. 1. Cut Building Wrap horizontally along the bottom and top of the window opening. 2. From the top center of the window opening, cut Building Wrap vertically down to the

sill. 3. Fold side and bottom Building Wrap flaps into window opening and fasten.


B. Cut a head flap at 45-degree angle in the Building Wrap at window head to expose 8 inches of sheathing. Temporarily secure Building Wrap flap away from sheathing with tape.

3.7 3.7 FLASHING (for use with flanged windows)

A. Cut 9-inch wide DuPont™ FlexWrap™ or DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF a minimum of 12 inches longer than width of sill rough opening.

B. Cover horizontal sill by aligning DuPont™ FlexWrap™ edge with inside edge of sill. Adhere to rough opening across sill and up jambs a minimum of 6 inches. Secure flashing tightly into corners by working in along the sill before adhering up the jambs.

C. Fan DuPont™ FlexWrap™ at bottom corners onto face of wall. Firmly press in place. Mechanically fasten fanned edges. Mechanical fastening is not required for DuPont™ FlexWrap™ NF.

D. On exterior, apply continuous bead of sealant to wall or backside of window mounting flange across jambs and head. Do not apply sealant across sill.

E. Install window according to manufacturer’s instructions.

F. Apply 4-inch wide strips of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ at jambs overlapping entire mounting flange. Extend jamb flashing 1-inch above top of rough opening and below bottom edge of sill flashing.

G. Apply 4-inch wide strip of DuPont™ StraightFlash™ as head flashing overlapping the mounting flange. Head flashing should extend beyond outside edges of both jamb flashings.

H. Position Building Wrap head flap across head flashing. Adhere using 4-inch wide DuPont™ StraightFlash™ over the 45-degree seams.

I. Tape head flap in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

J. On interior, install backer rod in joint between frame of window and flashed rough framing. Apply sealant around entire window to create air seal. Apply sealant in accordance with sealant manufacturer’s instructions and ASTM C 1193.

3.8 3THRU-WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Apply primer per manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Install preformed corners and end dams bedded in sealant in appropriate locations along wall.

C. Starting at a corner, remove release sheet and apply membrane to primed surfaces in lengths of 8 to 10 feet.

D. Extend membrane through wall and leave ¼ inch minimum exposed to form drip edge.


E. Roll flashing into place. Ensure continuous and direct contact with substrate.

F. Lap ends and overlap preformed corners 4 inches minimum. Seal all laps with sealant.

G. Apply sealant bead at each termination.

3.9 3.14 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed weather barrier from damage.




COMPOSITION PANEL SIDING 07 4643 - 1

SECTION 07 4643 – COMPOSITION PANEL SIDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes composition siding.

B. Related Sections

1. Section 06 1000 Rough Carpentry: Furring and wood strapping. 2. Section 07 2100 Insulation for insulation installed behind siding. 3. Section 07 2505 Building Wrap: Weather Resistive Barriers for barriers installed prior

to installation of insulation and siding. 4. Section 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim for flashing installed in conjunction

with siding. 5. Section 07 9200 Joint Sealants

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated Including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods.

B. Shop Drawings: Provide detailed drawings of atypical non-standard applications of cementitious siding materials which are outside the scope of the standard details and specifications provided by the manufacturer.

C. Mock-up: Provide 10’ x 10’ mock-up, include all adjacent materials and accessories, and membranes in mock-up. Mock-up shall be painted to indicate sequence and quality of painting where adjacent panels are of different colors.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified siding Installer.

E. Product certificates.

F. Product test reports.

G. Research/evaluation reports.

H. Maintenance data.

I. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.





A. See Structural Drawings for design wind pressure on exterior wall elevations.


A. Labeling: Provide composition siding that is tested and labeled according to ASTM C 1186 by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain siding, including related accessories, from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site, prior to commencement of wood framing .Additional conference may be needed after framing is complete.

1. Review requirements and coordination with related and adjacent trades including framing, sheathing, building wrap, windows, doors, louvers, and other openings and penetrations.

2. Review detailing to ensure proper drainage and weeping of panel system. 3. Review panel and reveal layout, particularly at soffits. 4. Review sequence of painting. Discuss soffit colors and paint color breaks.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace siding that fail(s) in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 30 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COMPOSITION SIDING

A. Basis of design: Parklex high-density timber faced panel.

1. System: Reveal System with no overlayed trims or battens. 2. Texture: Smooth 3. Thickness: 10 mm

B. Alternate products will be considered for review as an “approved equal” subject to compliance with requirements.




2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

B. Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing complying with Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" at window and door heads, cross wall flashing, downspouts, and other flashings at siding where indicated on the Drawings. Flashing and trim to be prefinished with a custom color as selected by the Architect. See Exterior Materials, Finishes and Colors List.

C. Soffit Attachment: Galvanized ‘Z’ girts held in place with 2” Cascadia fiberglass clips – or approved equal – at 24” o.c., fastened with Type 304 stainless steel fasteners.

D. Fasteners as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of siding and related accessories.

B. Verify weather resistive barrier, cavity drainage if not integral with weather barrier, and rainscreen strapping has been installed.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation.

B. Repair any punctures or tears in the Building Wrap prior to the installation of the siding.

C. Block framing between studs where Parklex siding horizontal joints occur.

D. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install in strict compliance with siding manufacturer's written installation instructions and details on the drawings. Notify the architect of any conflicts between the drawing and the manufacturers printed instructions.





A. Remove damaged, improperly installed, or otherwise defective materials and replace with new materials complying with specified requirements.

B. Clean finished surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions and maintain in a clean condition during construction.




FIBER CEMENT PANEL SIDING AND TRIM 07 4646 - 1

SECTION 07 4646 – FIBER CEMENT PANEL SIDING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Siding panels. 2. Soffit panels. 3. Accessories and trim.


1. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry: Framing and Sheathing, and Rainscreen Battens.

2. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants. 3. Section 09 9100 – Painting.

1.2 REFERENCES

1. ASTM C 920 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 1998. 2. ASTM C 1185 - Standard Test Methods for Sampling and Testing Non Asbestos Fiber-

Cement Flat Sheet, Roofing and Siding Shingles, and Clapboards; 1999. 3. ASTM C 1186 - Standard Specification for Flat Non-Asbestos Fiber Cement Sheets;

1999. 4. ASTM E 72 - Standard Test Methods of Conducting Strength Tests of Panels for

Building Construction; 1998. E. ASTM E 84 -- Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 1999.

5. ASTM E 96 - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 1995.

6. ASTM E 136 - Standard Test Method for Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube Furnace At 750 Degrees C; 1999. H. ASTM E 228 - Standard Test Method for Linear Thermal Expansion of Solid Materials With a Vitreous Silica Dilatometer; 1995.

7. ASTM G 26 - Standard Practice for Operating Light-Exposure Apparatus (Xenon-Arc Type) With and Without

8. Water for Exposure of Nonmetallic Materials; 1996. 9. ASTM E 330-97 – Structural Performance of exterior windows, curtain walls and doors

by uniform static air pressure difference.




1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s data sheets on each product to be used, including:

1. Preparation instructions and recommendations. 2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations. 3. Installation methods, including nailing patterns. 4. Applicable model code authority evaluation report (ICC, CCMC, etc.). 5. For each finish product specified, two complete sets of color chips representing

manufacturer's full range of available colors and patterns. 6. For each finish product specified, two samples, minimum size 4 by 6 inches (100 by

150 mm), representing actual product, color, and patterns.


A. Installer should have at least five (5) years experience in work of the type required by this section, who can comply with manufacturer's warranty requirements, and who is an Approved Applicator as determined by manufacturer.

B. Manufacturer’s Confirmation: As required by the Olympia Design Review Board, provide written documentation from the siding manufacturer to confirm that their product has been installed per manufacturer’s installation standards.

C. Independent Inspection: Owner may engage an independent inspection service to monitor siding installation compliance with the project contract documents and manufacturer’s published literature and site specific details. Inspection service shall produce reports and digital photographs documenting each inspection. Reports shall be made available in a timely manner to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. Inspections should include substrate examination, beginning of siding installation, periodic intervals, and final inspection.


A. Delivery and Handling: Deliver materials in factory sealed and labeled packaging. Sequence deliveries to avoid delays, while minimizing on-site storage. Handle and store following manufacturer's instructions, recommendations and material safety data sheets. Protect from construction operation related damage, as well as damage from weather. Remove damaged material from site and dispose of in accordance with applicable regulations.

B. Storage: Protect siding materials from moisture and excessive temperatures. Provide cover, top and all sides, for materials stored on-site, allowing for adequate ventilation.




1.6 WARRANTY

A. Siding Warranty: Provide 30 year limited siding warranty.

B. Paint Warranty: Provide 15 year limited paint warranty.

C. Special Warranty:

1. Prepare and submit special warranty in accordance with Section 01 7800 Closeout Submittals, Item 1.6.

2. Warrant installed units to be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of 30 years at a value of twice (double) the initial material cost.

3. Include coverage against leakage, splitting, cracking, opening of joints beyond normal expansion and contraction, and failure at fasteners.

4. Special warranty shall be signed by Contractor and Installer.

D. Register manufacturer’s warranty, made out in Owner’s name, with copy to Owner.

PART 2 - PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Basis of design: James Hardie Building Products 26300 La Alameda, Suite 400 Mission Viejo, California 92691 Phone: (888) 542-7343 e-mail: [email protected] web: www.Jameshardiecommercial.com

B. Alternate products will be considered for review as an “approved equal” subject to compliance with requirements.

2.2 PANELS

A. General: Fiber Cement Board Panels consist of cement, recycled content and cellulose fiber formed under high pressure into boards with integral surface texture and factory applied primer/finish; complying with ASTM C 1186 Type A Grade II; machined edges; for nail attachment.

1. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of 0, Class A. Smoke developed index of 5, maximum; when tested in accordance with ASTM E 84 (Class I/A).

2. Flammability: Noncombustible, when tested in accordance with ASTM E 136. 3. Flexural Strength: At least 1450 psi (10 MPa) when in equilibrium condition, and at

least 1015 psi (7 MPa) when in wet condition, tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185. Maximum allowable deflection: L/240.




4. Coefficient of Thermal Expansion: Less than 1 x 10^-5/inch/inch/degree F (0.5 x 10^-5/degree C), when tested in accordance with ASTM E 228.

5. Freeze Thaw Resistance: At least 80 percent flexural strength retained, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185.

6. UV Resistance: No cracking, checking, or erosion, when tested for 2000 hours in accordance with ASTM G 26.

7. Water Tightness: No water droplets on underside, when tested in accordance with ASTM C 1185.

8. Environmental Requirements: Does not promote fungal growth. Not susceptible to attack by insects or rodents.

9. Interface with Adjacent Systems: Integrate design and connections with adjacent construction. Accommodate allowable tolerances and deflections for structural members installation.

B. Vertical Siding: HardiePanel HZ10 siding as manufactured by James Hardie Building Products, Inc.

1. Type: Smooth Vertical siding panel 4 feet by 8 feet, 4 feet by 9 feet, and 4 feet by 10 feet.

2. Thickness: 5/16”.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Siding Accessories, General: Provide starter strips, edge trim, outside and inside corner caps, and other items as recommended by siding manufacturer for building configuration.

1. Provide accessories matching color and texture of adjacent siding unless otherwise indicated.

B. Aluminum Trim: Profiles as detailed on the Drawings and as follows:

1. Inside and outside corner trim. 2. Vertical trim. 3. Horizontal trim. 4. Horizontal termination trim. 5. Depth: As indicated on Drawing Details. 6. Manufacturer: XtremeTrim® Tamlyn. 7. Finish: Primed, paint to match color indicated on Exterior Finishes and Colors

C. Sealant/Primer: Project Specified/Approved Sealant/Primer.

D. Sheet Metal Flashing: Minimum 24 gauge hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet.

E. Nails: Length as required to penetrate minimum 1-1/4 inch (32mm) into solid backing; hot-dipped galvanized or stainless steel. Flat head nails set flush to siding surface.

F. Building Wrap: Per Section 07 2505.




G. Factory Primer: Provide factory applied universal primer.

H. Factory Finish: Refer to Exterior Finish Schedule.

I. Field Finish Paint: 100 percent acrylic latex as specified in Section 09 9100.

PART 3 - PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to commencing installation, verify governing dimensions of building and condition of substrate.

B. If substrate preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.

C. Conduct a pre-installation conference in accordance to Section 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination, Item 1.11.

1. Review requirements and coordination with related and adjacent trades including framing, sheathing, building wrap, windows, doors, louvers, and other openings and penetrations.

2. Review detailing to ensure proper drainage and weeping of panel system.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Examine, clean, and repair as necessary any substrate conditions that would be detrimental to proper installation.

B. Repair any punctures or tears in the Building Wrap prior to the installation of the siding.

C. Block framing between studs where HardiePanel siding horizontal joints occur.

D. Do not begin installation until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions and Drawing details.

1. Review warranty and comply with all terms necessary to maintain warranty coverage. 2. Install in accordance with conditions stated in City of Olympia code evaluation report. 3. Use trim details indicated on drawings. 4. Touch up all field cut edges before installing. 5. Pre-drill nail holes if necessary to prevent breakage.




B. Fasten siding through sheathing into studs. Place fasteners no closer than 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) from panel edges and 2 inches (51 mm) from panel corners.

C. Allow space between both ends of siding panels that butt against trim for thermal movement; seal joint between panel and trim with project approved exterior grade sealant.

D. Joints in Horizontal Siding: Avoid joints in lap siding except at corners; where joints occur, stagger joints between successive courses.

E. Joints in Vertical Siding: Install metal Z flashing and provide a 1/4 inch (6 mm) gap at horizontal panel joints.

F. Furred Installation: Leave space at top and bottom open; top may be behind soffit; at bottom install insect screen over opening by wrapping a strip of screen over bottom ends of vertical furring strips.

G. Install sheet metal flashing above door and window casings and horizontal trim in field of siding.

H. Do not install siding less than 6 inches (150 mm) from surface of ground nor closer than 1 inch (25 mm) to roofs, patios, porches, and other surfaces where water may collect.

I. After installation, seal all joints except lap joints of lap siding. Seal around all penetrations. Paint all exposed cut edges.

J. Finish Painting: Specified in Section 09 9100.

K. Finish Painting: Within 3 months after installation, paint siding and trim with finish paint.

3.4 CLEANING

A. At completion of work, remove debris caused by siding installation from project site.

B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products prior to Substantial Completion.




SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINIOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING 07 5216 - 1

SECTION 07 5216 – SBS-MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Roofing consisting of a 2-ply modified bituminous membrane, Class B roofing system secured to a prepared substrate (rigid coverboard).

2. Minimum slope to drain at 1/4” per 1’-0”. 3. Air/Vapor control layer shall integrate to adjacent systems for continuity of air barrier

per the project documents.

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Division 1 – General Requirements

B. Section 06 1000 – Rough Carpentry

C. Section 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim

D. Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Refer to ASTM D 1079 for definitions of terms related to roofing work not otherwise defined in this Section.


A. General: Install a watertight, modified bituminous membrane roofing and base flashing system with compatible components that will not permit the passage of liquid water and will withstand wind loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure.

B. FM Listing: Provide modified bituminous membrane, base flashings, and component materials that meet requirements of FM 4450 and FM 4470 as part of a roofing system and that are listed in FM's "Approval Guide", as applicable. Identify materials with FM markings.

1. Roofing system shall comply with the following:

a. Windstorm Classification: Class 1-60.




b. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: UL Class A; complying with ASTM E 108, for application and slopes indicated.

c. Meet the requirements of ASTM D41, E84, E96, E108, D615, D3746, D6164, and U790, and SMACNA.

d. Meet the requirements of IBC Chapter 1504.1 Wind Resistance, and IBC 1504.3.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data, Roofing Systems: Submit the name of the manufacturer and specification numbers and product names of all materials proposed for each type of product specified, including evidence of listing or approval. Include in submittal installation instructions and general recommendations for each principal roofing system product required. Include data substantiating that the materials comply with requirements, including certificates and delivery logs for bulk materials.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, sections, details, and attachments to other work, for the following:

1. Base flashings, cants, and membrane terminations. 2. Tapered insulation layout, crickets, saddles, and tapered edge strips, including slopes.

C. Submit emergency phone numbers of personnel capable of responding to a roof related emergency after normal working hours. Answering service phone numbers are not acceptable for this purpose.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by roofing system manufacturer certifying that Installer is approved, authorized, or licensed by manufacturer to install specified roofing system and is eligible to receive the standard roofing manufacturer's warranty. Submit Manufacturer’s certifications with bid proposals.

E. Manufacturers: Provide primary products, including each type of roofing ply, sealant and flashings, as specified from one manufacturer. Provide secondary products which are acceptable to, and approved by, the manufacturer of the primary products.

F. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in the maintenance manuals specified in Section 01 7700 – Closeout Procedures.

G. Warranty: Sample copy of standard roofing manufacturer's warranty stating obligations, remedies, limitations, and exclusions of warranty.


A. Single Installer Responsibility: A single installer (contractor) shall perform the work, including sheet metal work, as required by this specification; and shall be a firm specializing in roofing system work who has been in business under the same name and ownership for at least five




(5) years, capable of showing successful installations similar to the work required for this project, with project names, contact names, addresses and telephone numbers.

B. The roofing contractor shall be certified as an approved applicator contractor in good standing by the manufacturer of the roofing system, prior to start of the project. Provide a letter to this effect on manufacturer’s corporate letterhead with signature of an officer of the corporation.

C. Owner: Notify Owner, Architect, and Consultant 24 hours (one full working day) prior to commencement of work. The owner may provide special inspection of the roofing application. Such inspection will not relieve the contractor of responsibility for proper completion of the work.

D. Manufacturers: Provide and install primary products, including each type of roofing ply, and flashings, as specified from one manufacturer. Provide secondary products, which are acceptable to, and approved by, the manufacturer of the primary products. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

E. Employ a superintendent and foreman that are experienced in the application of specified or approved material and have been trained by the specified or approved manufacturer in the application of the material.

F. Pre-roofing conference: Prior to the installation of the roofing system, meet at the project site with the Owner, Architect, General Contractor, Roofing Contractor, Roofing Consultant, and other entities interested in the performance of the roofing system. Review the requirements (contract documents), submittals, proposed installation schedule, location and storage of materials, requirements for inspections and testing or certifications, forecasted weather conditions, governing regulations, insurance requirements, proposed installation procedures, and any other items that may be required for completion of the project. If meeting ends with substantial disagreement between parties, determine how disagreement will be resolved and set date for reconvened meeting.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Standard Roofing Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit a written warranty, without monetary limitation, signed by roofing system manufacturer agreeing to promptly repair leaks in the roof membrane, base flashings, and flashing resulting from defects in materials or workmanship for the following warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years. 2. Provide information for the Owner regarded the added cost for a 30 year warranty.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, signed by Installer, covering Work of this Section, including membrane roofing, base flashing, coverboard, fasteners, and flashing, if any, for the following warranty period:





1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Delivery: Material shall be delivered in the manufacturer's original sealed and labeled containers and in quantities sufficient to allow continuity of application.

B. Storage:

1. Obtain permission of the Owner for rooftop storage. If rooftop storage of materials is used, do not exceed the allowable load for the structure.

2. Roll goods shall be stored on end, on a clean, flat surface – do not lay flat. 3. Materials shall be stored out of direct exposure to the elements in a dry, weatherproof

area. When storage is outside, provide full protection with breathable canvas tarpaulins. Elevate from horizontal surfaces, away from water.

4. Material shall be protected against moisture so as not to allow moisture to penetrate the cover or condensation to occur beneath the cover. Material must also be protected from freezing, salt spray, UV exposure, and damage.

C. Handling: Material shall be handled in such a manner as to preclude damage and contamination with moisture or foreign matter.

D. Do not leave unused sheet materials on the roof overnight or when roofing work is not in progress unless protected from weather and moisture and unless maintained at a temperature exceeding 50° F (10° C).

E. Deliver and store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and within the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer.

F. Protect insulation, cover board, and roofing materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store materials in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.


A. At ambient temperatures of 40 F or less, including wind chill, precautions must be taken to ensure that cements and adhesives maintain the minimum acceptable temperature at the point of application as recommended by the roofing materials manufacturer.

B. Roof deck shall be clean and dry and accepted by the roofing manufacturer before any roofing work proceeds. Roofing shall not proceed during precipitation, nor when moisture from dew is present, or if precipitation or other moisture source is expected.

C. Protection against staining and mechanical damage shall be provided for adjacent surfaces as required during application of roofing.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Roof Assembly: SBS Modified Multi-ply Roofing to consist of one of the following acceptable system assemblies:

Option #1: Fiberize Option #2: Siplast Option #3: Soprema

Nailed Base Sheet

FiberTite nominal 60 mil Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) reinforced membrane, mechanically attached.

Siplast Parabase over red rosin slip sheet nail fastened at 9” o.c. at the side laps and two rows staggered down the center at 12” o.c.

Soprema Sopra-G over red rosin slip sheet mechanically fastened at 9” o.c. at the side laps and two rows staggered down the center at 12” o.c.

Base Sheet Paradiene 20, SBS ply sheet, glass reinforced, set in roofing adhesive with seams heat welded.

Elastophene Sanded, SBS ply sheet, glass reinforced, set in roofing adhesive with seams heat welded.

Insulation Flat stock & Tapered polyisocyanurate insulation (¼” per foot). Maximum thickness of any layer of 2.5 inches; applied in insulation adhesive with all joints offset between layers.

same

Coverboard ¼” Dens Deck Prime applied in insulation adhesive.

same

Base Sheet Parabase Plus, SBS modified base sheet applied in roofing adhesive.

Modified Sopra-G, SBS modified base sheet applied in roofing adhesive.

Interply Paradiene 20, SBS ply sheet, glass reinforced, set in roofing adhesive.

Elastophene Sanded, 60 lbs/sq. SBS ply sheet, glass reinforced, applied in roofing adhesive.

Surface Sheet Paradiene 30 FR TG, SBS granulated capsheet, glass reinforced, torch applied. Color white or gray.

Elastophene Flam FR GR, 101 lbs/sq. SBS granulated capsheet torch-applied. Color white or gray.

Flashing Ply Sheet

Paradiene 20 TG SBS ply sheet, torch adhered.

Sopralene Flam 180, SBS ply sheet, torch adhered.

Flashing Surface Sheet

Parafor 50 LT, SBS granulated capsheet with polyester reinforcing, torch-applied.

Sopralene Flam 250 FR GR, polyester reinforced granulated capsheet, torch-applied to flashing ply.




2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PRODUCTS

A. Sealant to be a moisture cured product, such as Chem Link M-1, or equivalent.

B. Cant strips to be three (3) inch perlite, ASTM C 728 unless otherwise noted, as manufactured by JM, BMCA (GAF), or other approved manufacturer.

C. Base sheet Fasteners: 1" square head Simplex-type roofing nails, ring shank. Install base sheet using a 9 & 12 nailing pattern on wood sheathing.

D. Provide 4#/sf lead flashing and caps for soil stacks and conduit penetrations. Pre-prime with asphalt primer and set in cold adhesive as detailed in manufacturer's instructions. Where soil stacks exceed height of lead flashing, provide a boot, 2 wraps of self-adhesive uncured EPDM batten seam cover strip, stainless steel clamping ring at the top edge, and sealant.

E. Provide 4 lb/sf lead flashing for drain sumps. Pre-prime with asphalt primer and set in cold adhesive as detailed in manufacturer's instructions.

F. Asphalt primer to be ASTM D-4173, or as approved by the system manufacturer.

G. Cold adhesive shall be a blend of adhesive asphalts and safe, high-flash, quick drying solvents, type as approved by manufacturer.

H. Coverboard Adhesive: Olympic Manufacturing Group, OlyBond 500 dual component polyurethane adhesive applied using the PaceCart Dispenser, or Single component moisture curing urethane foam adhesive; Insta-Foam Products, Inc., INSTA-STIK®. Obtain and provide approval letter from manufacturer.

I. Roof protection pad material to be composed of modified bitumen with polyester reinforcing and granular surfacing. The materials shall be manufactured in roll form with a width of 30 inches and a minimum thickness of 217 mils, type Paratread, as manufactured by Siplast, or equal.

J. Liquid Applied Flashing Membrane:

1. Primer: As recommended by the manufacturer. 2. Membrane: Siplast Parapro 123, or Soprema Alsan RS. 3. Reinforcement Fleece: As required or recommended by the manufacturer. All systems

are to have reinforcing fleece.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. General: All surfaces shall be dry, and swept clean prior to commencement of roofing.




B. Ensure that all surfaces to receive insulation or roofing membrane are free of gravel ballast, dirt, or other foreign substances, and are structurally sound.

C. Do not begin placement of the roofing system until the roofing manufacturer’s representative has examined surfaces to receive the roofing system and has determined that the surfaces are acceptable.

D. Remove water or any other substance that would interfere with bonding of the roofing system.

3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Install SBS modified multi ply roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions and applicable recommendations of NRCA/ARMA's "Quality Control Recommendations for Polymer Modified Bitumen Roofing." 1. Install roofing system according to applicable specification plates of NRCA's "The

NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual".

B. Cant Strips: Install and secure preformed 45-degree cant strips at junctures of modified built-up membrane roofing system with vertical surfaces or angle changes greater than 45 degrees.

C. Coordinate installing roofing system components so coverboard and roofing plies are not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast.

3.3 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Secure the polyisocyanurate insulation in insulation adhesive using ribbon pattern to achieve required uplift resistance value. Increase rate of adhesive at the perimeters and corners as specified by the manufacturer. Install layers of insulation with side and end joints staggered between layers. Stagger end joints and install with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt joints together.

3.4 COVERBOARD INSTALLATION

A. Install cover board with long joints in continuous straight lines, perpendicular to roof slopes with end joints staggered between rows. Tightly butt cover boards together. Secure with adhesive per Manufacturer’s requirements and/or recommendations.




3.5 APPLICATION - ROOFING MEMBRANE

A. General: Application shall be in accordance with roofing system manufacturer's instructions and the following requirements. Should the manufacturer's and these specifications conflict, use the more stringent requirements.

B. Roofing Membrane

1. All layers including base, interply, and surface sheet and shall be laid free of wrinkles, creases, or fishmouths and shall be laid at right angles to the slope of the deck. Sheets shall be laid directly behind the asphalt applicator and broomed, or torch-applied. If required by the manufacturer, apply a steel weighted roller for full adhesion. All side and end laps to be a minimum of 3 inches. Lap seams in the base sheet, ply sheet, and cap sheet shall not coincide with each other. Courses shall be staggered sufficiently to prevent stacked laps.

C. Base flashings

1. The flashing ply sheet reinforcing shall be lapped a minimum of three (3) inches to itself and shall extend a minimum of four (4) inches beyond the toe of the cant and up the parapet wall, under the metal counterflashing, or wrapping the top of the wall to one (1) inch below the nailer on the outside face.

2. The flashing cap sheet shall be lapped a minimum of three (3) inches to itself and shall extend a minimum of six (6) inches onto the heavyweight cap sheet surface and extend up under the sheet metal counterflashing. Lap seams in the reinforcing layer shall not coincide with lap seams in the cap sheet flashing layer. The reinforcing sheet shall be heat welded and mechanically attached to the wall at the leading edge. The flashing cap sheet shall be torched over the reinforcing layer and mechanically attached to the wall at the leading edge. All surfaced flashing sheets shall be cut off the end of the roll and applied vertically, always working to selvedge.

D. Miscellaneous Items

1. Prime metal flanges as required with a uniform coating of asphalt primer. All flanges shall be set in a smooth even bed of asphalt cement.

2. Use 4 lb/sf lead for flashings. Pre-prime with asphalt primer and set in mastic as detailed in the manufacturer’s instructions. Field solder conduit flashings as necessary. Provide a boot at the top of lead flashings on conduit; 2 wraps of self-adhesive uncured EPDM batten seam cover strip, stainless steel clamping ring at the top edge, and sealant at the top.

3. Install 4 lb/sf lead for flashing at cast iron drains. Pre-prime with asphalt primer and set in mastic as detailed in the manufacturer's instructions.

4. Overnight seals: Exercise care that moisture does not enter beneath completed section of the roof. Temporarily seal loose edges of the membrane daily and when weather is threatening. Night seals can be built using plastic cement and roofing felts, and constructed to withstand protracted periods of service. Night seals must be completely removed, all felts employed removed, prior to the resumption of roofing.




5. All exposed cap sheet edges at waste stacks, vent stacks, etc., shall be caulked with sealant, and tooled into the joint.

6. Extend conduit penetrations, insulated pipes, plumbing vent stacks, vents, and curbs as necessary to obtain an 8 inch height above the finished roof surface. Include wiring and duct extension as necessary to raise or extend conduit or ducts.

7. Place conduit lying on the roof on new pressure treated wood blocking placed on protection pad at a maximum of 8 feet on center. Adhere traffic pad to block, and not to roofing.

8. Plumbing, Electrical, and mechanical work to be coordinated with appropriate subcontractors.

9. Verify all drain lines and downspouts are functional prior to the start of roofing work. Contractor to be responsible to assure drains are free draining upon completion of roofing work.

10. Install walkpads / roof protection pads at locations shown on the roof plan(s). Install walkpads per manufacturer’s specifications with adhesive and/or torch adhered to the capsheet. Leave space per the manufacturer between sections of walkpads for drainage.

11. Liquid Applied Flashing Membrane:

a. Apply primer direct in one step utilizing a brush or paint roller. Do not allow ponding.

b. Allow primer to cure for a minimum of twelve (12) hours. Exposure of the primer in excess of five (5) days or premature exposure to moisture may require removal and application of new primer.

c. Mix resin components per manufacturer’s recommendations.

1) Once the mix is ready, apply liberally to the prepared surface with a roller using a broad, even stroke.

d. Install membrane flashing system in accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements / recommendations. Provide system with base flashing, counter flashing, and all other flashings required for a complete watertight system.

e. Flashings shall extend a minimum of eight (8) inches above finished membrane level and a minimum of six (6) inches onto horizontal deck surface.

f. Fleece sections shall overlap each other a minimum of two (2) inches. g. Prime walls, curbs, etc. with 2 component polyurethane primer. Follow

manufacturer’s written instructions for primer cure. h. Work wet membrane to avoid any blisters, openings, or lifting at corners,

junctions, and transitions. Assure full resin saturation of fleece.


A. Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofing installation on completion and submit report to the Engineer. 1. Notify the Architect two (2) working days in advance of the date and time of

inspection.




3.7 PROTECTION

A. The Contractor shall protect system from all other contractors and activities during roof application. Following completion, protection shall be provided by the general Contractor. Any damage to the system shall be repaired by contractor prior to acceptance.

3.8 CLEAN-UP

A. The Contractor shall remove all masking, protection, equipment, materials, and debris from the work and storage areas and leave those areas in an undamaged and acceptable condition.




SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

07 6200 - 1

SECTION 07 6200 – SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured counterflashing. 2. Formed roof drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed steep-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 4. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Recycled Materials: For products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight of post-consumer and pre-consumer recycled content.

B. Shop Drawings: Show installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop and field assembled work.

1. Include details for forming, joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including pattern of seams, termination points, fixed points, expansion joints, expansion joint covers, edge conditions, special conditions, and connections to adjoining work.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.




07 6200 - 2

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; 2D (dull, cold rolled) finish.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Restricted flatness steel sheet, metallic coated by the hot-dip process and pre-painted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. For interior or crawlspace applications only.

2. exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat.

b. Three-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in both color coat and clear topcoat.

3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating.

b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless steel rivets suitable for c. metal being fastened. d. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching

internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 4. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel

according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Solder:

1. For Stainless Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn60, with an acid flux of type recommended by stainless-steel sheet manufacturer.




07 6200 - 3

2. For Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel: ASTM B 32, Grade Sn50, 50 percent tin and 50 percent lead or Grade Sn60, 60 percent tin and 40 percent lead.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, non-sag, nontoxic, non-staining tape ½ inch wide and ⅛ inch thick.

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.


A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Shop fabricate items to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool

marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.

3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

C. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one (1) inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Pre-tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.




07 6200 - 4

2.4 ROOF DRAINAGE SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Hanging Gutters: Fabricate to cross section indicated, complete with end pieces, outlet tubes, and other accessories as required. Fabricate in minimum 96 inch long sections. Furnish flat stock gutter spacers and gutter brackets fabricated from same metal as gutters, of size recommended by SMACNA but not less than twice the gutter thickness. Fabricate expansion joints, expansion-joint covers, and gutter accessories from same metal as gutters.

1. 0.04” for aluminum drip edges, exposed metal trim, and gutters. 2. 0.05” for aluminum continuous attachment cleats. 3. 0.0312” for stainless steel attachment cleats 4. Gutters shall be continuous, 22 gauge formed on site. 5. Fasteners for gutters and downspouts shall be stainless steel.

B. Downspouts: Fabricate rectangular downspouts complete with mitered elbows. Furnish with metal hangers, from same material as downspouts, and anchors.

1. Fabricate from the following materials:

a. Aluminum: 0.024 inch thick.

C. Splash Pans: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.040 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch thick.

2.5 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, and similar flashings to extend

B. Four (4) inches beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with two (2) inch high end dams. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Aluminum: 0.032 inch thick. 2. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch thick. 3. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick. 4. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: 0.022 inch thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners,




07 6200 - 5

solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than twelve (12) inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of stainless steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of ten (10) feet with no joints allowed within twenty-four (24) inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than one (1) inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1¼ inches for nails and not less than ¾ inch for wood screws.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1½ inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work.

1. Do not solder metallic coated steel and aluminum sheet. 2. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into

joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces.

3. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for




07 6200 - 6

4. Stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

3.2 ROOF DRAINAGE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal roof drainage items to produce complete roof drainage system according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of roof perimeter flashing with installation of roof drainage system.

B. Hanging Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered joints or with lapped joints sealed with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. Attach gutters at eave or fascia to firmly anchored gutter brackets spaced not more than thirty-six (36) inches apart. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Slope to downspouts.

1. Install gutter with expansion joints at locations indicated, but not exceeding, fifty (50) feet apart.

2. Install expansion-joint caps.

C. Downspouts: Join sections with 1½ inch telescoping joints. Provide hangers with fasteners designed to hold downspouts securely to walls. Locate hangers at top and bottom and at approximately sixty (60) inches o.c. in between.

D. Splash Pans: Install where downspouts discharge on roofs. Set in adhesive material compatible with the roofing.

3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and as indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing with continuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered three (3) inch centers.

C. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing.

D. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receiver and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of four (4) inches and bed with sealant.

E. Roof Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric or butyl sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.




07 6200 - 7

3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend four (4) inches beyond edge of wall openings.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder and sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.



ROOF ACCESSORIES07 7200 - 1

SECTION 07 7200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Related Requirements:

1. 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim


A. General Performance: Roof Accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally induced movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roof hatches must be air-tight.


A. Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for roof accessories. Show layouts of roof accessories including plans and elevations. Indicate dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, and components. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items. Show the following: 1. Size and location of roof accessories specified in this Section. 2. Method of attaching roof accessories to roof or building structure. 3. Other roof-mounted items including mechanical and electrical equipment, ductwork,

piping, and conduit.

D. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.




A. Coordination Drawings: Roof plans, drawn to scale, and coordinating penetrations and roof-mounted items.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Field Measurements: Verify required openings for each type of roof accessory by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing and interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For roof accessories to include in operation and maintenance manuals.


A. Delivery, storage and handling per manufacture written recommendation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL MATERIALS

A. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation.

1. Powder-Coat Finish: Manufacturer's standard two-coat, baked-on finish consisting of prime coat and thermosetting topcoat, with a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil for topcoat.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet and Shapes: ASTM A 240/A 240M or ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Steel Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 123/A 123M unless otherwise indicated.




A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneous items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.

B. Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPA C2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.

C. Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metals being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

D. Sealants: As recommended by roof accessory manufacturer for installation indicated. See 07 9200 Joint Sealants.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

F. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick, polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

G. Fasteners: Nonmagnetic stainless steel. Provide nonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners.

H. Gasket for Roof Hatch: Manufacturer’s standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, or PVC; or flat design of foam rubber, or sponge neoprene.

I. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant, polyisobutylene plasticized, and heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

J. Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, nonasbestos, fibrated asphalt cement designed for trowel application or other adhesive compatible with roofing system.

2.3 GRAVITY VENTILATIORS

A. Ventilation detailing provided by HVAC design-build Subcontractor.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

C. Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping,

jogs in alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks. 2. Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated

loads. 3. Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to

complete installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates. 4. Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking,

or loosening of fasteners and seals.

B. Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact with each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. 1. Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood

substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

2. Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof accessories for waterproof performance.

C. Seal joints with sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.

D. Equipment Support Installation:

1. Set equipment support so top surface of equipment support is level. These must be installed prior to the roofing installation.

E. Gravity Ventilator Installation: 1. Check relief vents for proper operation and unrestricted airflow. 2. Install security grilles. Weld bar intersections and ends of bars to structural frame or

primary curb walls.

3.3 REPAIR AND CLEANING

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing according to ASTM A 780.



B. Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to Section 09 9113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 09 9123 "Interior Painting."

C. Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.




PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1

SECTION 07 8413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies. 3. Penetrations in smoke barriers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Installer Certificates: From Installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

D. Product test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FM Global according to FM Global 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors," or been evaluated by UL and found to comply with its "Qualified Firestop Contractor Program Requirements."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements:

1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" Article. Provide rated systems bearing marking of qualified testing and inspection agency.




C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Hilti, Inc. 2. Specified Technologies Inc. (STI) 3. 3M Fire Protection Products.

2.2 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg.

1. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

2. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. Penetrations in Smoke Barriers: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per UL 1479.

1. L-Rating: Not exceeding 5.0 cfm/sq. ft. of penetration opening at 0.30-inch wg at both ambient and elevated temperatures.

E. Exposed Penetration Firestopping: Provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

F. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components




specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

C. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

D. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results:

1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items.

3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify penetration firestopping with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches of firestopping edge so labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestopping. Use mechanical fasteners or self-adhering-type labels with adhesives capable of permanently bonding labels to surfaces on which labels are placed. Include the following information on labels:

1. The words "Warning - Penetration Firestopping - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building Management of Any Damage."

2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.





A. Owner may engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.




JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1

SECTION 07 9200 – JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for the furnishing and installing the following materials, per project specifications and drawings, or as directed by sealant manufacturer.

1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Preformed joint sealants. 5. Acoustical joint sealants.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit specified submittals in accordance with "Conditions of the Contract" and Section 01 3300 Submittal Procedures.

B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s product data for each joint sealant product indicated, with complete general and specific installation instructions, recommendations, and limitations.

C. Product test reports.

D. Provide documentation to comply with Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard (ESDS) Credit 6.2 Low/No VOC Adhesives & Sealants

1. All interior adhesives must comply with Rule 1168 of the South Coast Air Quality Management District.

2. All interior caulks and sealants must comply with Regulation 8 Rule 51 of the Bay Area Air Quality Management District (BAAQMD).

3. Adhesives, caulks and sealants that are used outside of the weather resistive barrier or to seal the weather resistive barrier to itself or to building openings are exempt from this mandatory requirement. The weather resistive barrier includes the roof membrane.

4. See full wording of this credit for additional information and documentation required.

1.3 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Sealants and sealant primers used inside the weatherproofing system shall comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

B. Liquid Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

C. Stain Test Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be non-staining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

D. Color of sealant to match color of adjacent surfaces, or as indicated by Architect.

2.2 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Type: Single component (S) 2. Grade: Non-sag (NS). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: Non-traffic (NT).

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920.

1. Type: Single component (S). 2. Grade: Non-sag (NS). 3. Class: 25. 4. Uses Related to Exposure: Non-traffic (NT).

2.4 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.




2.5 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, pre-compressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in pre-compressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

2.6 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard non-sag, paintable, non-staining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

2.7 2.7 JOINT SEALANT BACKING

A. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material) and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.

B. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from joint sealant substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials.

C. Masking Tape: Non-staining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.




2. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint sealant manufacturer or as indicated by preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability.

1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application

and replace them with dry materials.

C. Install bond breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed:

1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow

optimum sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling Non-sag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint.

1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do

not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces.




3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Acoustical Sealant Installation: Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

G. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 CLEAN UP

A. In areas where adjacent finished surfaces are soiled by work of this Section, consult manufacturer of surfaces for cleaning advice and conform to their recommendations and instructions. Remove all tools, equipment and remaining product on-site. Dispose of section work debris and damaged product following all applicable regulations.



HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1

SECTION 08 1113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames. 2. Knock-down interior manufactured slip-on fixed throat steel door frames.


1. Section 08 1416 – Flush Wood Doors. 2. Section 08 3200 – Interior Sliding Glass Doors: Partitions within units. 3. Section 08 7100 – Door Hardware. 4. Section 09 9600 – High Performance Coatings: Field applied finish at exterior doors

and frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door and frame indicated, materials, hardware preparation, core, label compliance and finishes. Include proof that doors and frames are fabricated in accordance with SDI requirements.

B. Shop Drawings – Doors and Frames: Include elevations, dimensions, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Deliver hollow-metal work palletized, packaged, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic.

1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow-metal work vertically under cover at Project site with head up. Place on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.




A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

B. Fire-Rated, Borrowed-Light Frame Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9. Label each individual glazed lite.

C. Smoke-Control Door Assemblies: Comply with NFPA 105 or UL 1784.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers Standard Hollow Metal Doors: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc. 6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Karpen Steel Custom Doors & Frames. 10. Kewanee Corporation (The). 11. Mesker Door Inc. 12. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 13. Security Metal Products Corp. 14. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 15. Windsor Republic Doors.

B. Manufacturers Knock-Down Interior Slip-on Fixed Throat Steel Door Frames: Provide product from the following: 1. RediFrame, a Dunbarton Company, Dothan, GA.



2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, CS, Type B.

C. Metallic-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum A40 metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

G. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

H. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing." Provide code-compliant glazing when vision panel is indicated in fire-rated doors.

I. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene,

polyurethane, polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

b. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Manufacturer’s standard; provide insulated core material, minimum R-Value 5.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch- thick, end closures

or channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and

Frames."



B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

C. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 1 and Physical Performance Level C (Standard Duty), Model 2 (Seamless).

a. Width: 1-3/4 inches.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet.

1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Fabricate knocked-down, drywall slip-on frames for in-place gypsum board partitions. 4. Frames for Level 1 Steel Doors: 0.042-inch- thick steel sheet. 5. Frames for Borrowed Lights: Same as adjacent door frame.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.5 KNOCK DOWN FRAMES

A. Knock-Down Interior Manufactured Slip-on Fixed-Throat Steel Door Frames: Three-piece knock-down frames.

1. Frames for Interior Use: Aluminum extrusion 6063-T5 alloy. 2. Provide fire rated and smoke rated frames where scheduled. 3. Face Sheet Thickness: 18 gage or 0.042 inch. 4. Profile Size: 1-1/2-inch wide by 1/2-inch depth. 5. Material texture: Standard smooth.



6. Casings: Aluminum square edge profile. Same material and finish as adjacent frame, snap-on type with mitered corners. Refer to Materials, Colors and Finish Schedule.

7. Finish: Factory baked enamel finish.

a. Prefinished with factory applied impact-resistant, polyester baked enamel finish in manufacturer's finish colors as specified:

b. Finish Color: Custom as selected. c. Steel: Chemically cleaned, bonderized, primed and painted in coils. d. Touch-up Paint: Provide aerosol touch-up paint for after-installation, onsite

repair as recommended by manufacturer.

8. Basis of Design: Refer to Finish Schedules for Standard Residential Unit Interiors, and Common Areas: Corridors, Stairs, Elevators.

2.6 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick.

2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042 inch thick.

3. Compression Type for Drywall Slip-on Frames: Adjustable compression anchors. 4. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch-

diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips,

allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.7 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as door face sheet.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as frames.



2.8 LOUVERS

A. Provide sightproof louvers for interior doors, where indicated, that comply with SDI 111C, with blades or baffles formed of 0.020-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet set into 0.032-inch- thick steel frame.

2.9 ACCESSORIES

A. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.10 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B. Provide fire-rated doors and assemblies where indicated on drawings and schedules.

C. Thermal Construction: Welded construction with integral welded mounting flanges, 5/8” high with integral 3/8” thick vinyl, positive thermal break with compression type gasket weatherstrip. Use at exterior envelope with insulated doors, threshold, and gasket or sweep at sills.

D. Hollow Metal Doors:

1. Common Area Doors: Provide prehung, insulated 1-3/4”, 18 gage. Filler in tops and edges welded and ground smooth.

2. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration.

3. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 4. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required

by NFPA 80 for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

E. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames at unit entries, typical.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. At common areas: Minimum 16 gage; reinforce at hinge and strike.

2. Frames: Provide closed tubular members with no visible face seams or joints, fabricated from same material as door frame. Fasten members at crossings and to jambs by butt welding.

3. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

4. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted.

5. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor.

6. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:



a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24

inches or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames more than 42 inches wide and

mounted in metal-stud partitions.

c. Compression Type: Not less than two anchors in each jamb. d. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top

and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

7. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted

door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with

Division 26 electrical Sections.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.



3. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 4. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and

type of installation indicated.

2.11 STEEL FINISHES

A. General:

1. Exterior: See Section 09 9600 – High Performance Coatings. 2. Interior: See Section 09 9100 – Painting.

B. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

C. Field-Applied Paint Finish: Refer to Section 09 9100 and Finish Schedules: Amenity Spaces. Common Areas: Corridors, Stairs, and Elevators, Exteriors, and Standard Residential Unit Interiors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling

limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been

properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed.

Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout

containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.



a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space

between frames and masonry with grout. 5. Concrete Walls: Solidly fill space between frames and concrete with grout. Take

precautions, including bracing frames, to ensure that frames are not deformed or damaged by grout forces.

6. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

7. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

8. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

9. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum

3/4 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80. 3. Smoke-Control Doors: Install doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.



1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.



FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1

SECTION 08 1416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer faces. 2. Hollow-core doors with hardboard or MDF faces; swing, pocket , bypass, and bifold. 3. Shop priming and factory finishing flush wood doors. 4. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 08 1113 – Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Knock-down interior

manufactured slip-on fixed throat steel door frames used with wood doors. 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door indicated. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.

C. Samples: For factory-finished doors.


A. Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

B. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.




A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package factory-finished doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors from single manufacturer.

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Eggers Industries. 2. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Lynden Door. 4. Vancouver Door Company.

2.2 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors Performance Grade: 1. Heavy Duty unless otherwise indicated.

B. Particleboard-Core Doors: 1. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 , made with binder containing no urea-

formaldehyde resin. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate

through-bolting hardware.

C. Hollow-Core Doors:



1. Construction: Standard hollow core. 2. Blocking: Provide wood blocking with minimum dimensions as follows:

a. 5-by-18-inch lock blocks.

D. MDF Faces: ANSI A208.2, Grade 150 or Grade 160.

2.3 DOORS FOR OPAQUE FINISH

A. Common Area Office Doors: Half-lite, prefinished birch veneer solid-core wood doors. Reinforce door and frame for hardware.

B. Residential Unit Entry Doors and Interior Utility Doors: Pre-hung solid-core flush wood doors with domestic veneer faces, minimum STC 28. Reinforce door and frame for hardware.

C. Residential Unit Interior Doors – Bathroom and Bedroom: Pre-hung solid-core flush wood doors with domestic veneer faces. Reinforce door and frame for hardware.

D. Residential Unit Interior Doors – Closet: Hollow-core flush, bi-fold wood doors with domestic veneer faces. Provide 180 degree hinges.

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. All unit entry doors to have metal frames per Materials, Finishes and Color schedule.

B. All unit interior doors to have wood frames per Materials, Finishes and Color schedule.

C. Pre-Hung Door Frames: 1. Material: Finished to match doors. 2. Size for wall depth; 4-13/16 inch deep pine for 2x4 wood framing with 5/8” gypsum

each side. 3. Provide door stops for 1-3/8 inch thick door.

D. Hinges: Three 3-1/2 x 3-1/2 inch plain bearing, fully mortised to door and frame.

E. Sliding Door Tracks: Bifold and Pocket Door Hardware, Johnson or similar designed for door thickness and type.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.



B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard for factory finishing. Complete fabrication, including fitting doors for openings and machining for hardware that is not surface applied, before finishing. 1. Finish faces, all four edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises. Stains and fillers may be

omitted on top and bottom edges, edges of cutouts, and mortises.

B. Factory finish wood doors. Match color indicated on Finish Schedules: Amenity Spaces and Standard Residential Unit Interiors.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and the referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.2 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.



ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS 08 3110 - 1

SECTION 08 3110 – ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings to access plumbing, fire protection,

mechanical, and electrical work as necessary for operation and maintenance of concealed equipment, valves, cleanouts, controls, and other similar devices requiring access.

2. Coordinate requirements of Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Section 08 7100 – Door Hardware: Cylinder locks. 2. Section 09 2900 – Gypsum Board. 3. Section 09 9100 – Painting. 4. Division 22 – Plumbing: Coordinate access panel locations. 5. Section 23 0000 "HVAC Narrative" for heating and air-conditioning duct access

doors. 6. Division 26 – Electrical: Coordinate access panel locations.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, wall and ceiling construction details, latching and locking provisions, attachments to other work, and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: For each door face material.

D. Schedule: Types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STEEL MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. 1. ASTM A 123/A 123M, for galvanizing steel and iron products.



2. ASTM A 153/A 153M, for galvanizing steel and iron hardware.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet, Strip, Plate, and Flat Bars: ASTM A 666, Type 304. Remove tool and die marks and stretch lines or blend into finish. 1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard.

D. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS) with A60 zinc-iron-alloy (galvannealed) coating or G60 mill-phosphatized zinc coating; stretcher-leveled standard of flatness; with minimum thickness indicated representing specified thickness according to ASTM A 924/A 924M.

E. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1,

"Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling."

2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

F. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Babcock-Davis; A Cierra Products Co. 2. Dur-Red Products. 3. J. L. Industries, Inc. 4. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 5. Milcor Inc.

B. General: Provide stainless steel material at public restrooms, unit bathrooms, laundry rooms, and other areas of high humidity.

C. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: 1. Locations: Wall surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of

frame.



3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-inch- wide, surface-mounted trim.

4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type or Continuous piano. 5. Lock: Cylinder.

D. Flush Access Doors and Trimless Frames: 1. Locations: Ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish

surfaces. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type or Continuous piano. 5. Lock: Cylinder. 6. Finish: Primed for field finish.

E. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges: 1. Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, uninsulated. Provide self-

latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release. Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.

2. Locations: Wall. 3. Fire-Resistance Rating: Refer to Drawings. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage. 5. Finish: Factory prime. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard. 8. Hardware: Cylinder Lock.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. Exposed Flanges: As indicated. 2. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board securely

attached to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.



D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike. 2. Provide key controlled locking device for each assembly. Key all locks alike, unless

directed otherwise. Furnish (6) keys.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.


A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.



OVERHEAD COILING DOORS 08 3323 - 1

SECTION 08 3323 - OVERHEAD COILING DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Service door: Waste/Recycle (Rm 104).


1. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Section 08 3613 – Sectional Doors.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle of a door begins with the door in the closed position. The door is then moved to the open position and back to the closed position.


A. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Exterior overhead coiling doors shall withstand the wind loads, the effects of gravity loads, and loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated according to SEI/ASCE 7.

1. Wind Loads: Uniform pressure (velocity pressure) of 20 lbf/sq. ft., acting inward and outward.


A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s complete product literature indicating specified items and method of installation for each type and size of overhead coiling door and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data.

1. Indicate details and dimensions of fabrication and installation for each door, including concrete embeds, supports, guides, anchorage points, motor location, orientation, and clearance requirements, adjacent construction including walls and ceilings, chain location, counterbalance adjustment wheel location, closures, weather stripping, locks, and cord reels.



2. Indicate structural reaction at each anchorage point 3. Include schedule of openings, access door requirements, ratings, switch locations, and

electrical requirements. 4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer’s color charts showing the full range of colors available for units with factory-applied finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.


A. Maintenance data.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

B. Support framing design shall be performed by a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Washington.

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms “Listed” and “Labeled”: As defined in NFPA 70, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory” as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

D. Pre-installation Conference: Contractor to coordinate pre-installation conference involving appropriate Subcontractors, Architect, and Owner’s Representative.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Service and Insulated Service Doors: Overhead coiling doors formed with curtain of interlocking metal slats.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Cookson Company.



b. Cornell Iron Works, Inc. c. McKeon Rolling Steel Door Company, Inc. d. Overhead Door Corporation. e. Raynor. f. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 50,000.

C. Curtain R-Value at Thermally Insulated Doors: Per energy code analysis document.

D. Door Curtain Material: Galvanized steel.

E. Door Curtain Slats: Flat profile slats of minimum 7/8-inch deep and between 2-5/8-inch and 3-1/4-inch center-to-center height.

F. Bottom Bar: Two angles, each not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 by 1/8 inch thick; fabricated from steel and finished to match door.

G. Curtain Jamb Guides: Manufacturer’s standard sizes for assembly, steel with exposed finish matching curtain slats.

H. Hood: Galvanized steel.

1. Shape: Round. 2. Mounting: As detailed on Drawings.

I. Locking Devices: Equip door with locking device assembly.

1. Locking Device Assembly: Single-jamb side locking bars, operable from inside and outside with cylinders.

J. Counterbalance Assembly: Coiling insulated service door shall be counterbalanced by means of adjustable steel helical torsion springs attached to shaft enclosed in pipe with required mounting blocks or rings for attachment of curtain. Grease sealed bearings or self-lubricating graphite bearings shall be attached to the spring barrel which shall be fabricated of hot formed structural quality carbon steel seamless pipe.

K. Electric Door Operator:

1. Size and capacity recommended by door manufacturer. 2. Complete with internal prewiring to terminal block, electric motor, controller, gear

reduction unit, solenoid operated brake, adjustable clutch, control devices and 24 volt circuit control stations.

3. Worm gear drive from motor to reduction gear box and chain or worm gear drive from reduction box to gear mounted on counterbalance shaft.



4. Designed for removal of motor without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting emergency auxiliary operator.

L. Motor:

1. Motor: Shall be intermediate duty, thermally protected, ball bearing type with a class A or better insulation. Horsepower as recommended by manufacturer for each condition.

2. Motor location as indicated on Drawings. 3. Starter: Shall be size "0" magnetic reversing starter, across the line type with

mechanical and electrical interlocks, with 10 amp continuous rating and 24 volt control circuit.

4. Reducer: Heliacal gear type, 75% efficiency minimum. 5. Brake: Magnetically activated, integral within the operator's housing. 6. Control Station: Provide surface mount push button control station marked open,

close and stop.

7. Emergency Auxiliary Operation: Chain type.

a. Provide hand operated or automatic mechanism to engage sprocket of auxiliary operator and release brake.

b. Include interlock device to automatically prevent motor from operating when auxiliary sprocket is engaged.

M. Obstruction Sensing Device: Safety edge causing the door to reverse direction and return to the open position, in the event that the safety edge meets an obstruction during the normal closing operation.

N. Door Finish:

1. Powder-Coated Finish: Color to match storefront. 2. Interior Curtain-Slat Facing at Insulated Doors: Finish as selected by Architect from

manufacturer's full range.


A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.3 LOCKING DEVICES

A. Chain Lock Keeper: Suitable for padlock.

B. Safety Interlock Switch: Equip power-operated doors with safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked.



2.4 CURTAIN ACCESSORIES

A. Smoke Seals: Equip each fire-rated door with replaceable smoke-seal perimeter gaskets or brushes for smoke and draft control as required for door listing and labeling by a qualified testing agency.

B. Weatherseals for Exterior Doors: Equip each exterior door with weather-stripping gaskets fitted to entire exterior perimeter of door for a weather-resistant installation unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install overhead coiling doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Fire-Rated Doors: Install according to NFPA 80.

C. Power-Operated Doors: Install according to UL 325.

D. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer. Adjust seals to provide tight fit around entire perimeter.

3.2 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain overhead coiling doors.



SECTIONAL DOORS 08 3613 - 1

SECTION 08 3613 - SECTIONAL DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fully glazed electrically operated sectional doors at amenity lounge level 2.

B. Electrically operated metal and glass sectional doors at kitchen (Rm 126).

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications for miscellaneous steel supports. 2. Section 08 3323 – Overhead Coiling Doors. 3. Section 08 4313 – Aluminum Framed Storefront 4. Section 08 7100 – Door Hardware: Cylinders.


A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional door and accessory. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual

components, profile door sections, and finishes. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and

furnished accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For each installation and for special components not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's product data. 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and mounting details. 2. Include details of equipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions, required clearances,

method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

3. Include points of attachment and their corresponding static and dynamic loads imposed on structure.

4. Include diagrams for power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied finishes. 1. Include Samples of accessories involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish on the following components, in manufacturer's standard sizes: 1. Frame for paneled door sections; of each width of stile and rail required.




A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For sectional doors to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Manufacturer: Sectional doors shall be manufactured by a firm with a minimum of five years experience in the fabrication and installation of sectional doors. Manufacturers proposed use, which are note named in these specifications, shall submit evidence of ability to meet performance and fabrication requirements specified, and include a list of five projects of similar design and complexity competed within the past five years.

B. Installer: Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project.

C. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide doors, tracks, motors, and accessories from one manufacturer for each type of door. Provide secondary components from source acceptable to manufacturer of primary components.

D. Pre-Installation Conference: Schedule and convene a pre-installation conference just prior to commencement of field operations, to establish procedures to maintain optimum working conditions and to coordinate this work with related and adjacent work.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of sectional doors that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Failure of components or operators before reaching required number of

operation cycles. c. Faulty operation of hardware. d. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal

weathering and use; rust through.



e. Delamination of exterior or interior facing materials.

2. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 5 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS, GENERAL

A. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional doors from single source from single manufacturer. 1. Obtain operators and controls from sectional door manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Sectional doors shall comply with performance requirements specified without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

B. Structural Performance, Exterior Doors: Capable of withstanding the design wind loads identified on the Drawings. 1. Testing: According to ASTM E330 or DASMA 108 for garage doors and complying

with the acceptance criteria of DASMA 108. 2. Deflection Limits: Design sectional doors to withstand design wind loads without

evidencing permanent deformation or disengagement of door components. a. Deflection of door sections in horizontal position (open) shall not exceed 1/120

of the door width. b. Deflection of horizontal track assembly shall not exceed 1/240 of the door

height.

C. Seismic Performance: Sectional doors shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7. 1. Component Importance Factor: 1.0.

D. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Provide sectional overhead door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 10,000 cycles.

E. Water Penetration Field Testing: Pass testing accordance to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum of:



1. 6.0 psf for storefront 2. 6.0 psf for windows 3. 6.0 psf for swing doors 4. 4.5 psf for sliding doors 5. 6.0 psf for clerestory

F. Supplier to verify weather tightness of jamb, head and sell of door and notify architect of any concerns prior to framing of openings.

2.3 DOOR ASSEMBLY

A. Full-Vision Aluminum Sectional Door: Sectional door formed with hinged sections and fabricated according to DASMA 102 unless otherwise indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Northwest Door, Series 800 Modern Classic. 2. Other Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements and performance of

Basis of Design product, the following manufacturers will be considered by the Architect and Owner: a. Overhead Door Corporation. b. Clopay Building Products. c. Raynor. d. Wayne-Dalton Corp.

B. Operation Cycles: Door components and operators capable of operating for not less than 100,000. One operation cycle is complete when a door is opened from the closed position to the fully open position and returned to the closed position.

C. Air Infiltration: Maximum rate of 0.08 cfm/sq. ft. at 15 and 25 mph when tested according to DASMA 105.

D. Aluminum Sections: Full vision.

E. Track Configuration: Standard-lift track.

F. Weatherseals: Fitted to bottom and top and around entire perimeter of door. Provide combination bottom weatherseal and sensor edge.

G. Counterbalance Type: Torsion spring.

H. Door Finish: 1. Aluminum Finish: Match adjacent storefront framing.




A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

2.5 ALUMINUM DOOR SECTIONS

A. Sections: Extruded-aluminum stile and rail members with dimensions and profiles as indicated on Drawings; members joined by welding or with concealed, 1/4-inch- minimum diameter, aluminum or nonmagnetic stainless-steel through bolts, full height of door section; and with meeting rails shaped to provide a weather-resistant seal. 1. Aluminum: ASTM B 221 extrusions, alloy and temper standard with manufacturer for

type of use and finish indicated; minimum thickness 0.065 inch for door section 1-3/4 inches deep, and as required to comply with requirements.

2. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement, as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Ensure that reinforcement does not obstruct vision lites.

3. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment.

B. Full-Vision Sections: Manufacturer's standard, tubular, aluminum-framed section fully glazed with ½ inch insulating safety glazing (Cardinal 366 Low E, U-value: 0.29, SHGC: 0.27), clear, set in rigid vinyl molding glazing channel, sealed by closed cell foam tape on exterior side of glass, and with removable extruded-vinyl or aluminum stops.

2.6 TRACKS, SUPPORTS, AND ACCESSORIES

A. Tracks: Manufacturer's standard, galvanized-steel track system of configuration indicated, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances indicated on Drawings, Provide complete system including brackets, bracing, and reinforcement to ensure rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type, size, weight, and loading. 1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A 653/A 653M, minimum G60 zinc coating. 2. Slope tracks at an angle from vertical or design tracks to ensure tight closure at jambs

when door unit is closed. 3. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Galvanized-steel members to support track

without sag, sway, and vibration during opening and closing of doors. Slot vertical sections of track spaced 2 inches apart for door-drop safety device. a. For Horizontal Track: Continuous reinforcing angle from curve in track to end

of track, attached to track and supported at points by laterally braced attachments to overhead structural members.

B. Weatherseals: Replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl, rubber, or neoprene fitted to bottom and top of sectional door unless otherwise indicated.



2.7 HARDWARE

A. General: Heavy-duty, corrosion-resistant hardware, with hot-dip galvanized, stainless-steel, or other corrosion-resistant fasteners, to suit door type.

B. Hinges: Heavy-duty, galvanized-steel hinges of not less than 0.079-inch- nominal coated thickness at each end stile and at each intermediate stile, according to manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is impossible. Provide double-end hinges where required, for doors more than 16 feet wide unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Rollers: Heavy-duty rubber rollers with steel ball-bearings in case-hardened steel races, mounted with varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- diameter roller tires for 3-inch- wide track and 2-inch- diameter roller tires for 2-inch- wide track.

D. Push/Pull Handles: Equip each push-up operated or emergency-operated door with galvanized-steel lifting handles on each side of door, finished to match door.

2.8 COUNTERBALANCE MECHANISM

A. Torsion Spring: Counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension torsion springs fabricated from steel-spring wire complying with ASTM A 229/A 229M, mounted on torsion shaft made of steel tube or solid steel. Provide springs designed for number of operation cycles indicated.

B. Cable Drums and Shaft for Doors: Cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums mounted on torsion shaft and grooved to receive door-lifting cables as door is raised. Mount counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end of torsion shaft. Provide one additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet long and two additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet long unless closer spacing is recommended by door manufacturer.

C. Cables: Galvanized-steel, multistrand, lifting cables.

D. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded steel or spring-loaded bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side and designed to automatically stop door if either lifting cable breaks.

E. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall and to level the shaft and prevent sag.

F. Bumper: Provide spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation.



2.9 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM/NOMMA's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products (AMP 500-06)" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.


A. One of the following matching adjacent aluminum framed storefront: 1. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker. 2. Powder-Coat Finish: AAMA 2603. Comply with coating manufacturer's written

instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, application, and baking.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate construction and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine locations of electrical connections.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install sectional doors and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware, anchors, inserts, hangers, and equipment supports; according to manufacturer's written instructions and as specified.

B. Tracks: 1. Fasten vertical track assembly to opening jambs and framing, spaced not more than

24 inches apart. 2. Hang horizontal track assembly from structural overhead framing with angles or

channel hangers attached to framing by welding or bolting, or both. Provide sway



bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment.

C. Accessibility: Install sectional doors, switches, and controls along accessible routes in compliance with regulatory requirements for accessibility.

3.3 STARTUP SERVICES

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to perform startup service. 1. Complete installation and startup checks according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 2. Test and adjust controls and safety devices. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

controls and equipment.

3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust hardware and moving parts to function smoothly so that doors operate easily, free of warp, twist, or distortion.

B. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts as recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adjust doors and seals to provide weather-resistant fit around entire perimeter.

D. Touch-up Painting: Immediately after welding galvanized materials, clean welds and abraded galvanized surfaces and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain sectional doors.


A. Water-Resistance Field Testing: 1. At least one (1) window of each operational type will be tested to the Specified Field

Test Pressure, that is specified below in accordance with the current version of ASTM E 1105. For residential windows and doors such as aluminum, wood clad aluminum, vinyl, or fiberglass windows and doors, Procedure B (cyclic) test will be used for 4 cycles each 5 minutes in duration, with a pressure reduced to 0 psf for one minute between cycles. For storefront and curtain wall assemblies, Procedure A (Uniform) test will be used for a single cycle not less than 20 minutes in duration. The initial test will be inclusive of both installation interface and window product. In the case of failure (defined in ASTM 1105), the representative sample will be expanded to five (5)



specimens in order to obtain statistical confidence in remedial repairs if needed. In the case of failure, the responsible party will be held financially liable for the cost of retesting, and any related wall assembly or cladding deconstruction needed to obtain passing results. This test specification supersedes AAMA Voluntary Specification for Field Testing. The test reports will be reviewed and approved by a registered Professional Building Envelope Engineer.

2. Regardless of AAMA deductions for field installed product, the minimum Water Resistance Field Test Pressure (during field test), as determined by the consultant, shall be: a. 6.0 psf for storefront b. 6.0 psf for windows c. 6.0 psf for swing doors d. 4.5 psf for sliding doors e. 6.0 psf for clerestory

3. The above referenced test pressures should be placed on the purchase order prior to

ordering the windows or doors. 4. Doors are to be installed and tested in a similar fashion as windows.



ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS08 4313 - 1

SECTION 08 4313 – ALUMINUM FRAMED STOREFRONTS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Exterior storefront framing. 2. Exterior manual-swing entrance doors and door frame units.

B. Related Requirements: 1. 07 2505 – Building Wrap Weather Barriers 2. 07 6526 – Self-adhered Sheet Membrane 3. 07 9200 – Joint Sealants 4. 08 7100 – Door Hardware: Keyed cylinders. 5. 08 8000 – Glazing 6. Div 28 Electronic Safety and Security: Access control system.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. AAMA CW-10 - Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum From Shop to Site; American Architectural Manufacturers Association; 2004.

B. AAMA 2605 - Voluntary Specification, Performance Requirements and Test Procedures for Superior Performing Organic Coatings on Aluminum Extrusions and Panels; 2005.

C. ASCE 7 - Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures; American Society of Civil Engineers; 2010.

D. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2008.

E. ASTM Al23/Al23M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2009.

F. ASTM B221 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes; 2008.



G. ASTM B221M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Profiles, and Tubes [Metric]; 2007.

H. ASTM E283 - Standard Test Method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen; 2004.

I. ASTM E330 - Standard Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Doors. Skylights and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).

J. ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000.

K. ASTM E 413- Classification for Rating Sound Insulation; 2004.

L. ASTM E547 - Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Differential; 2000 (Reapproved 2009).

M. ASTM E1105 - Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000 (Reapproved 2008)

N. National Fenestration Rating Council 1. NFRC 100- Procedures for Determining Fenestration Product U-factors; 2004,

with 2005 addendum. 2. NFRC 200 Procedure for Determining Solar Heat Gain Coefficient

O. SSPC-Paint 20 - Zinc-Rich Primers (Type I, "Inorganic," and Type II, “Organic"); Society for Protective Coatings; 2002 (Ed. 2004).



1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, describe components within assembly, anchorage and fasteners, glazing and infill, internal drainage details and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections, full-size details, field welding required, and attachments to other work. 1. Shop drawings to include seal and signature of professional engineer responsible for

the design. 2. Include details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual

components, profiles, and finishes.



3. Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and clearly show strategy for draining moisture occurring within the assembly to the exterior.

a. Incorporate membrane flashings by others to indicate manufacturer's assumed and required assembly and integration for water tight construction.

4. Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed storefronts, showing the following: a. Joinery, including concealed welds. b. Anchorage. c. Expansion provisions. d. Glazing. e. Flashing and drainage.

5. Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.

C. Design Data: Provide framing member structural and physical characteristics and engineering calculations, and identify dimensional limitations.

1. Include structural analysis data signed and sealed by qualified Professional Engineer licensed in the State in which the Project is located.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

E. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, in manufacturer's standard sizes.

F. Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch (300-mm) lengths of full-size components and showing details of the following: 1. Joinery, including concealed welds. 2. Anchorage. 3. Expansion provisions. 4. Glazing. 5. Flashing and drainage.

G. Entrance Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of entrance door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate final entrance door hardware schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of entrance door hardware




A. Test Reports: Submit results of full-size mock-up testing. Reports of tests previously performed on the same design are acceptable.

1. Furnish test reports from accredited independent testing laboratory certifying that identical or larger window units meet requirements specified. a. Air Infiltration: ASTM E 283 b. Water Penetration: ASTM E331/E547 c. Structural Performance: ASTM E 330 d. Thermal performance: NFRC 100 and NFRC 200. e. Insulated Glass Seal Integrity: IGCC certified.

B. Qualification Data: For Installer, laboratory mockup testing agency and field testing agency.

C. Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed storefronts, accessories, and components, from manufacturer.

1. Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed storefront.

D. Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed storefronts, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

E. Warranty: 1. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in

Owner's name and registered with manufacturer. 2. Sample Warranties: For special warranties.


A. Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.


A. Designer Qualifications: Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Professional Structural Engineer experienced in design of this Work and licensed at the State in which the Project is located.

B. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing aluminum glazing systems with minimum three years of documented experience.



D. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM E 699 for testing indicated.

E. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aesthetic effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to one another, and to adjoining construction.

1. Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect/Consultant, except with Architect's/Consultant’s approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect/Consultant for review.

F. Mockups

1. Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

a. Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article in Part 3.

2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect/Consultant specifically approves such deviations in writing.

3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site at least two weeks prior to the start of work of this section.

1. Attendees to include: a. Architect/Consultant b. Contractor c. Applicator d. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative

2. Agenda: a. Review Project Specifications and Drawings. b. Establish installation schedules and sequence. c. Coordinate work with in-place and subsequent construction. d. Review weather and working conditions. e. Review installation procedures, including:

1) Substrate requirements for Project acceptance (cleaning of existing

surfaces, temperature). 2) Material installation. 3) Phasing and sequencing requirements.



f. Review installer qualifications. g. Conduct tour of areas to receive aluminum framed storefronts and report on

surface acceptance, possible problem areas, and recommended remedies. h. Provide and distribute meeting minutes per Section 01 30 00 – Administrative

Requirements.


A. Deliver, store and handle materials so as to avoid damage, following the recommendations contained in AAMA publication CW-10, “Care and Handling of Architectural Aluminum from Shop to Site”.

B. Keep handling to a minimum. Do not move the materials except as needed to install the storefront.

C. Store materials inside when possible, in a clean, well-drained area free of dust and corrosive fumes. Keep water away from stored assemblies.

D. Contractor to provide designated interior storage in a clean dry area free of dust and corrosive fumes. If interior storage cannot be provided, cover materials with tarpaulins or plastic hung on frames so as to provide air circulation and prevent contaminants from contacting aluminum or glass.

E. Protect finished aluminum surfaces with wrapping. Do not use adhesive papers or sprayed coatings that bond to aluminum when exposed to sunlight or weather.

1.9 PROTECTION

A. Contractor to take all precautions necessary to project materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners, and other items that could damage the glass surfaces and aluminum finishes. Do not rely on use of protective plastic films to protect materials.

1.10 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Do not install any aluminum work or glazing until all nearby welding, grinding, sandblasting, waterproofing, mortar work and acid etching are complete.

B. Report to the Architect/Consultant in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory. Starting work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

C. Glaze with compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at room temperatures recommended by the manufacturer, and when the substrates are free of moisture.



D. When temperature of glazing surfaces is below that recommended by sealant manufacturer, obtain Consultant’s approval for glazing methods and protective measures, which are to be used under these conditions.

1. Do not install sealants when ambient temperature is less than 40 degrees F. Maintain this minimum temperature during and 48 hours after installation.

1.11 SCHEDULING/COORDINATION

A. Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting and grinding of steel or concrete, mortar work, acid etching and any other work harmful to aluminum finishes or glass, to be completed before start of metal and glass installation.

1. When such activities must be carried out in the vicinity of stored or installed aluminum work or glass, provide hoarding or other suitable protection recommended by storefront installer.

B. Coordinate the installation of anchors and structural connections with the appropriate Sections.

C. Coordinate the installation of air barriers with Section 01 4010.

D. Coordinate work with related trades to ensure rough openings, structural supports, curbing and flashing are installed correctly to complement the work of this section

E. Coordinate wiring access and power supply requirements for electrically operated hardware with Division (15) (16).

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum- framed storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. d. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Correct defective Work within a Five year period after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.



1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to

ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to

ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Aluminum-Framed Storefront: Factory fabricated, factory finished aluminum framing members with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Kawneer TriFab 451T or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Arcadia, Inc.: www.arcadiainc.com. 2. Commdoor Aluminum: www.commdooraluminum.com 3. Vistawall Architectural Products: www.vistawall.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 6000 - Product Requirements.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of aluminum-framed entrance and storefront system, including framing, spandrel panels, entrances and accessories, from single manufacturer.


A. General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing of aluminum-framed storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

1. Aluminum-framed storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflection from uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.

2. Failure also includes the following: a. Thermal stresses transferring to building structure. b. Glass breakage. c. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. d. Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.



e. Failure of operating units.

B. Structural Loads: Design and size components to withstand the following load requirements without damage or permanent set. 1. Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows: 1. Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to 1/175 of clear span for spans up to

13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) and to 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) for spans greater than 13 feet 6 inches (4.1 m) or an amount that restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch (19.1 mm), whichever is less.

2. Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch (3.2 mm), whichever is smaller.

a. Operable Units: Provide a minimum 1/16-inch (1.6-mm) clearance between framing members and operable units.

D. Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows: 1. When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not

evidence deflection exceeding specified limits. 2. When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures,

assemblies, including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanent deformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.

3. Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.

E. Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:

1. Fixed Framing and Glass Area:

a. Limit air infiltration through assembly to 0.3 cu ft/min/sq ft of wall area or less,

2. Entrance Doors: a. Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. (5.08 L/s per sq. m) at a

static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa). b. Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. (2.54 L/s per sq. m) at a

static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft. (75 Pa).

F. Water Penetration Field Testing: Pass testing accordance to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum of: 1. 6.0 psf for storefront 2. 6.0 psf for windows 3. 6.0 psf for swing doors 4. 4.5 psf for sliding doors



5. 6.0 psf for clerestory

G. Interstory Drift: Accommodate design displacement of adjacent stories indicated.

H. Seismic Performance: Aluminum-framed storefronts shall withstand the effects of earthquake motions determined according to ASCE/SEI 7.

I. Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows: 1. Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-

factor of not more than 0.36 as determined according to NFRC 100. 2. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar

heat gain coefficient of no greater than 0.24 as determined accord ing to NFRC 200.

J. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperature changes: 1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C),

material surfaces. 2. Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on

framing, anchors, and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5. a. High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior

metal-surface temperature of 180 deg F (82 deg C). b. Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F (minus 18 deg C). c. Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F (24 deg C).

K. Other Movements: 1. Movement of storefront relative to perimeter framing. 2. Deflection of structural support framing, under permanent and dynamic loads.

2.3 FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness required and reinforced as required to support imposed loads with infill, and related flashings, anchorage and attachment devices. 1. Structurally Reinforced Members: Extruded aluminum with internal reinforcement of

structural steel member. 2. Construction: Thermally broken



a. Eliminate noises caused by wind and thermal movement, prevent vibration harmonics, and prevent "stack effect" in internal spaces.

3. Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides. 4. Glazing Plane: Center. 5. Finish: Black Anodic Finish.

a. Factory finish all surfaces that will be exposed in completed assemblies. b. Coat concealed metal surfaces that will be in contact with cementitious

materials or dissimilar metals with bituminous paint.

6. Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.

a. Joints and corners flush, hairline, and weatherproof, accurately fitted and secured; prepared to receive anchors; fasteners and attachments concealed from view; reinforced as required for imposed loads.

7. System Internal Drainage: Drain to the exterior by means of a weep drainage network any water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channel, and migrating moisture occurring within system.

8. Air and Vapor Seal: Maintain continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout assembly, primarily in line with inside pane of glazing and inner sheet of infill panel and heel bead of glazing compound.

9. Perimeter Clearance: Minimize space between framing members and adjacent construction while allowing expected movement.

B. Backer Plates: Manufacturer’s standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral, where framing abuts adjacent construction.

C. Sill flashing to be set between (2) layers of shims to allow for drainage of the sill pan without the need for weeps in the sealant joints.

D. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with non-staining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

E. Materials:

1. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated. a. Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209 (ASTM B 209M). b. Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M). c. Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M. d. Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.

2. Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Select surface preparation methods according to



recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and prepare surfaces according to applicable SSPC standard. a. Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M. b. Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M. c. Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B221 (ASTM B221M).

B. Structural Steel Sections: ASTM A36/A36M; galvanized in accordance with requirements of ASTM Al23/Al23M.

C. Structural Supporting Anchors Attached to Structural Steel: Design for bolted attachment.

D. Fasteners: Stainless steel.

E. Exposed Flashings: 0.032 inch thick aluminum sheet; finish to match framing members.

F. Firestopping: As specified in Section 07 8400.

G. Perimeter Sealant: Type as specified in Section 07 9200.

H. Glazing: As specified in Section 08 8000.

I. Glazing Gaskets: Compressible extruded gaskets. Do not use mohair-style or butyl tape gaskets.

J. Glazing Accessories: As specified in Section 08 8000.

K. Touch-Up Primer for Galvanized Steel Surfaces: SSPC-Paint 20, zinc rich.

2.5 ENTRANCES

A. Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation. 1. Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch (44.5-mm) overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-

inch- (3.2-mm-) thick, extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcing brackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.

2. Door Design: As indicated. 3. Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and

preformed gaskets.



2.6 ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: Reference Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware. To be provided by Aluminum Storefront Manufacturer.

2.7 GLAZING

A. Glazing: Comply with Section 08 8000 – Glazing.

B. Glazing Gaskets: Comply with Section 08 8000 – Glazing.

C. Glazing Sealants: Comply with Section 08 8000 – Glazing.

2.8 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials. 1. Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out

from thermal and structural movements, wind loads, or vibration. 2. Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads. 3. Retain subparagraph below for exposed fasteners if any. 4. Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads fabricated from 300

series stainless steel.

B. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

C. Concealed Flashing: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding flashing compatible with adjacent materials.

D. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements except containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-mil (0.762-mm) thickness per coat.

2.9 FABRICATION

A. Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.

B. Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics: 1. Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations. 2. Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered. 3. Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.



4. Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain required glazing edge clearances.

5. Provisions for field replacement of glazing from exterior. 6. Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to

greatest extent possible.

C. Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.

D. Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary support device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.

E. Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using manufacturer’s standard assembly method.

F. Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and for installing entrance door hardware.

1. At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.

G. Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware. 1. At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in

adjustable strip and mortised into door edge. 2. At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.

H. Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extent possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.

I. After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.


A. Color Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.

1. Color and Gloss: To match Kawneer Light Satin aluminum finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.



B. Verify that openings and support structure are dimensionally within allowable tolerances, in accordance with reviewed shop drawings, plumb, level, clean, and provide a solid anchoring surface.

C. Take site dimensions before fabrication. Ensure fabricated work will fit openings and that allowance is made for structural movements and that required clearances to other work will be maintained.

D. Verify that wall openings and adjoining air, water and vapor seal materials are ready to receive work of this section.

E. Ensure all flashings built in or provided by others will integrate with the work of this section to divert all moisture to the exterior.

F. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: 1. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Do not install damaged components. 3. Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion. 4. Rigidly secure nonmovement joints. 5. Attach to structure to permit sufficient adjustment to accommodate construction

tolerances and other irregularities. 6. Provide alignment attachments and shims to permanently fasten system to

building structure. 7. Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and

electrolytic deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints. 8. Where welding is required, weld components in concealed locations to minimize

distortion or discoloration of finish. Protect glazing surfaces from welding. 9. Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated. 10. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier materials. 11. Provide thermal isolation where components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.

a. Pack fibrous insulation in shim spaces at perimeter of assembly to maintain

continuity of thermal barrier.

12. Install sill and head flashings. Turn up ends and edges; seal to adjacent work to form water tight dam.

13. Install firestopping at each floor slab edge. 14. Pressure Plate Framing: Install glazing in accordance with Section 08 80 00,

using glazing method required to achieve performance criteria. 15. Structural Adhesive Glazing: Install glazing adhesive and weatherseal sealant in

accordance with adhesive manufacturer's instructions. 16. Install perimeter sealant in accordance with Section 07 92 00.



17. Touch-up minor damage to factory applied finish; replace.

B. Metal Protection: 1. Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic

action by painting contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installing nonconductive spacers.

2. Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

C. Install components plumb and level, free of warp or twist. Maintain assembly dimensional tolerances, aligning with adjacent work.

D. Install glazing as specified in Section 08 8000 – Glazing.

E. Install weatherseal sealant according to Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants and according to sealant manufacturer's written instructions to produce weatherproof joints.

F. Install joint filler behind sealant as recommended by sealant manufacturer Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.

1. Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.

2. Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fasteners to greatest extent possible.

3.3 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed storefronts to comply with the following maximum tolerances: 1. Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3.2 mm in 3 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in

12.2 m). 2. Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet (3.2 mm in 6 m); 1/4 inch in 40 feet (6.35 mm in

12.2 m).

3. Alignment: a. Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element

up to 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

b. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch (12.7 to 25.4 mm) wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch (3.2 mm).



c. Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch (25.4 mm) wide or more, limit offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch (6 mm).

4. Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m); 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) over total length.

B. Sealant Space between Storefront Mullions and Adjacent Construction: Maximum of 3/4 inch and minimum of 1/4 inch.


A. Testing Agency: Owner to engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform testing indicated.

B. Notify Manufacturer, Architect and Owner, in writing, minimum 14 days prior to conducting field-testing.

C. Number of Tests: Minimum three (3) of each sections of storefront and doors or as required to achieve compliance with manufacturer's published performance ratings. 1. First Test: Take at initial installation. 2. Second Test: Take at 50% completion. 3. Third Test: Take at 80% completion.

D. Provide set-up, test chamber and items needed for testing. 1. Remove interior finishes to allow for observation during testing. 2. Replace interior finishes after conclusion of testing. 3. If any window fails, test additional windows at Contractor's expense.

E. Test Chamber Requirements:

1. Chamber location to be selected to encompass as many typical details as possible, such as swing and sliding doors, operable vent, in-slab / fire vent hoods, fixed light, and tie-ins to adjacent systems.

2. Constructed of steel studs and plywood or drywall (interior grade acceptable). a. Steel studs, top and bottom track, stud spacing and fastening to be

constructed as typical exterior walls. b. Sheathing installed on exterior side of chamber. c. Access hatch (approx. 2 x 3 feet) to allow entrance and exit into chamber to

be operable and sealed for air leakage.

3. Fire caulk or fire tape board joints to adjacent concrete slabs and columns and/or exterior walls.



a. Chamber to be sealed to exterior beyond edge of test section.

4. Water supply requirement to test chamber location: a. 21 gallons per minute at 15 psi. b. Below 10 stories, two separate 3/4 inch hoses attached individually to city

supply from a 100 psi 1" branch is sufficient. c. Connecting larger hose (greater than 1-1/2 inch) and splitting to (2) two 3/4

inch hoses at test may also be sufficient. d. Length of hose exceeding 250 feet: Plastic piping to be used to minimize

pressure loss due to higher friction of rubber hose.

5. Electricity: 110V, 20 amp breaker, 1 dedicated circuit per floor.

F. Water-Resistance Field Testing: 1. At least one (1) window of each operational type will be tested to the Specified Field

Test Pressure that is specified below in accordance with the current version of ASTM E 1105. For residential windows and doors such as aluminum, wood clad aluminum, vinyl, or fiberglass windows and doors, Procedure B (cyclic) test will be used for 4 cycles each 5 minutes in duration, with a pressure reduced to 0 psf for one minute between cycles. For storefront and curtain wall assemblies, Procedure A (Uniform) test will be used for a single cycle not less than 20 minutes in duration. The initial test will be inclusive of both installation interface and window product. In the case of failure (defined in ASTM 1105), the representative sample will be expanded to five (5) specimens in order to obtain statistical confidence in remedial repairs if needed. In the case of failure, the responsible party will be held financially liable for the cost of retesting, and any related wall assembly or cladding deconstruction needed to obtain passing results. This test specification supersedes AAMA Voluntary Specification for Field Testing. The test reports will be reviewed and approved by a registered Professional Building Envelope Engineer.

2. Regardless of AAMA deductions for field installed product, the minimum Water Resistance Field Test Pressure (during field test), as determined by the consultant, shall be: a. 6.0 psf for storefront b. 6.0 psf for windows c. 6.0 psf for swing doors d. 4.5 psf for sliding doors e. 6.0 psf for clerestory

3. The above referenced test pressures should be placed on the purchase order prior to

ordering the windows or doors. 4. Doors are to be installed and tested in a similar fashion as windows.

G. Locations: Where approved by Architect. Each test to include most typical details including interface with cladding types and typical penetration types.



3.5 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Entrance Door Hardware: 1. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and

maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of entrance door hardware.

2. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speed and capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage during subsequent construction.

B. Contractor to protect installed work from damage caused by grinding and polishing compounds, plaster, cement, lime, acid or other contaminants, and the work or activities of other trades.

C. Install protective cover to aluminum work and glazing where there is a high risk of damage. Use non-staining, non-hardening plastic films or other measures to protect work.

D. Consult with storefront contractor to determine appropriate protective measures.

3.7 ADJUSTMENT

A. Adjust operating hardware to operate smoothly and fit tightly when closed and locked, and be properly aligned with frames.

3.8 CLEANING

A. Remove all protective materials from metalwork and glazing. Remove all labels, and deposits which affect appearance or operation

B. Wash down surfaces with a solution of mild detergent in warm water, applied with soft, clean wiping cloths. Take care to remove did from corners. Wipe surfaces clean.

C. Aluminum work 1. Clean anodized finishes according to AAMA 609. 2. Clean painted finishes according to AAMA 610.1.



D. Glass

1. Clean glass surfaces according to instructions provided by glass fabricator or window/door manufacturer.

E. Remove excess sealant by method acceptable to sealant manufacturer.

F. Do not use vigorous cleaning methods. Avoid scratching glass or aluminum finish. Contractor to be responsible for damages resulting from the use of other cleaning methods.



VINYL & FIBERGLASS WINDOWS AND DOORS08 5313 - 1

SECTION 08 5313 – VINYL AND FIBERGLASS WINDOWS AND DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes vinyl-framed windows and doors. Window configurations required include: 1. Fixed Windows. 2. Casement Windows. 3. Awning Windows. 4. Swing Doors.

B. Related Requirements: 1. 06 1653 – Moisture Resistant Sheathing 2. 07 2505 – Building Wrap Weather Barriers 3. 07 6200 – Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim 4. 07 9200 – Joint Sealants 5. 08 8000 – Glazing 6. 09 8000 – Acoustical Treatment

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI Z97.1 - Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test for Safety glazing Material used in Buildings.

B. ASTM E 283 – Standard Test method for Determining the Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.

C. ASTM E 330 – Standard Test Method for Structural performance of Exterior Windows, Doors, Skylights and Curtin Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

D. ASTM E331 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference; 2000.

E. ASTM E 413 – Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.



F. ASTM E 547-00 – Standard Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors and Curtain Walls by Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

G. ASTM E 1105 – Standard Test Method for Field Determination of Water Penetration of Installed Exterior Windows, Skylights, Doors, and Curtain Walls, by Uniform or Cyclic Static Air Pressure Difference.

H. ASTM E 1425 – Standard Practice for Determining the Acoustical Performance of Windows, Doors, Skylight and Glazed Wall Systems.

I. ASTM E 2190 – Specification for Sealed Insulated Glass Units.

J. ASTM F 588 – Standard Test Methods for Measuring the Forced Entry Resistance of Window Assemblies, Excluding Glazing Impact.

K. AAMA/NWWDA 101/I.S.2/A440 – Voluntary Specifications for Aluminum, vinyl (PVC) and Wood Windows and glass Doors; American Architectural Manufacturers Association.

L. National Fenestration Rating Council 1. NFRC 100-91 – Procedure for Determining Fenestration product Thermal Properties. 2. NFRC 200 – Procedure for Determining Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC).


A. Where performance requirements conflict below, the more stringent requirement shall rule.

B. Assembly: To accommodate, without damage to components or deterioration of seals, movement between window and perimeter framing and deflection of lintel.

C. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 Performance Requirements: Provide windows of performance class and grade indicated that comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440, and additional performance requirements as indicated: 1. Fixed-lite Windows: CW-PG50 2. Casement Windows: CW-PG50 3. Awning Windows: CW-PG35 4. Exterior Swinging Doors: CW-PG60

D. Water Penetration Field Testing: Pass testing accordance to ASTM E 1105 at a minimum of: 1. 6.0 psf for storefront 2. 6.0 psf for windows 3. 6.0 psf for swing doors 4. 6.0 psf for clerestory

E. Thermal Conductance of Assembly: See Article 2.2.



F. Durability: air and water leakage performance of windows to be not less than that specified for lab-testing.

G. System Internal Drainage: Drain water entering joints, condensation occurring in glazing channels, or migrating moisture occurring within system, to exterior by weep drainage network.

H. Thermal Movement: Design sections to permit movement caused by thermal expansion and contraction of frame material to suit glass, infill, and perimeter opening construction.

I. Acoustical Requirements: Provide windows on North, East and South facades with minimum Sound Transmission Class (STC) of 35:

1. 1/4” glass 2. 1” air space 3. 3-16” glass

J. Whole House Ventilation: Provide individual room outdoor air inlets (trickle vents) in habitable rooms (minimum 4 sq. in. for each habitable room) integrated into window and sliding glass door frames, as required by WAC 51-51-1508, Section M1508, and as shown on Drawings. Offset the air inlet vents to provide maximum acoustical dampening of outdoor sounds entering the building interior spaces.

K. ADA/Accessibility: Provide hardware as required to meet ADA/Accessibility requirements for windows and sliding glass door in Type A ADA units.


A. Submit documentation and samples for review by Architect/Consultant at one time, prior to ordering windows.

B. Product Data: For each type of product. 1. Include construction details, material descriptions, glazing and fabrication methods,

dimensions of individual components and profiles, hardware, and finishes for vinyl windows.

2. Include recommendations for maintenance and cleaning of exterior surfaces.

C. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, hardware, accessories, insect screens, fresh air vents, operational clearances, and project-specific interface detailing, including location of anchorage, air and water barrier flashings, interior air sealant for air barrier continuity, and relationship of flashings and cladding to window / door extrusion. 1. Contractor is responsible for taking into account all flashings, membranes, etc.

occurring at framed openings when sizing windows. 2. Provide full-size section details of typical composite members including reinforcement.



3. Show dimensions and quantity of units. Indicate rough opening requirements and maximum tolerances of adjacent construction. Note that windows shall be factory-sized to fit in each framed opening so that the windows are 1/2” smaller than the framed opening to allow for 1/4” minimum clearance on all sides with allowance for the sill pan.

4. Provide full-scale details of all perimeter and interface conditions that integrate design intent on Contract Documents.

5. Show relationship to other work, including attachment of flashings, air and water barriers, and location of sealants. Show extrusions profiles and engagement of glass and infill materials.

6. Show methods of structural reinforcement and attachment to building, including provisions for thermal movement and building movements. Identify all structural fasteners.

7. Schedule glass types and sealed unit makeup. Identify finishes, sealants, location of isolation coatings, and any other information required to indicate compliance with Contract Documents.

8. Submit shop drawings under seal of Washington State Registered Professional Engineer.

9. Hardware including operators. 10. Accessories.

D. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

1. Include similar Samples of hardware and accessories involving color selection.

E. Samples for Verification: For vinyl windows and components required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below: 1. Exposed Finishes: 2 by 4 inches minimum. 2. Exposed Hardware: Full-size units.

F. Product Schedule: For vinyl windows. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For manufacturer and Installer.

1. Provide documentation of 5 years of window installation of similar projects.

B. Product Test Reports: For each type of vinyl window, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

1. Submit documentation specified to show that products meet or exceed specified requirements.

C. Field quality-control reports.



D. Quality Control Documents 1. Submit copies of test reports to establish that the products assembled by this

manufacturer comply with the air leakage and water penetration performance requirements.

2. Submit test reports to establish that the products assembled by this manufacturer comply with the condensation resistance criteria.

3. Submit letter from glazing contractor and product manufacturer confirming that all products will be supplied and installed according to the descriptive and performance requirements of this specification. Identify any specified requirements that are in error or cannot legitimately be met, and provide alternatives which meet the intent of the specification for the Architect/Consultant’s approval.

E. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's warranties.


A. Submit all documentation specified to show that all products meet or exceed the documentation requirements of this specification.

B. Glass and glazing work under this section to conform to US Branch of the IGMA, “Glazing Recommendations for Sealed Insulating Glass Units”.

C. Sealed insulating unit manufacturer to be a member in good standing of IGMA, and be prepared to submit evidence of current membership to the Architect/Consultant upon request.

D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A manufacturer capable of fabricating vinyl windows that meet or exceed performance requirements indicated and of documenting this performance by test reports and calculations.

1. Window/door manufacturer and installation contractor to have a minimum of five years uninterrupted experience in successfully carrying out projects of similar size. Documentation of past experience to be provided on demand.

E. Installer Qualifications: An installer acceptable to vinyl window manufacturer for installation of units required for this Project.

F. Laboratory test reports to be prepared by qualified independent testing laboratories.

G. Design structural support framing components under direct supervision of a Washington State Registered Professional Engineer experience in design of this Work and licensed in the state in which the project is located. 1. Design window/door system, including glass and glazing, to meet specified structural

performance criteria or, at a minimum, requirements of the Building Code. 2. Supervise preparation of shop and erection drawings.



3. Field review fabrication and installation of products to ensure they comply with those drawings and specified structural performance criteria.

4. Cost of engineering and field review to be included as part of cost for work under this section.

H. Regulatory Requirements: Emergency Egress or Rescue: Comply with requirements for sleeping units of International Building Code, including Section 1029 for minimum dimensions and areas of the required opening. Where window limiters are used at egress windows, the window limiters must be able to be defeated without the use of keys or tools.

I. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings. 2. Window / Door flashing sequence mock up shall be performed at an in-situ location

or contractor-constructed mock-up wall. Attendees shall include the following:

a. Building Envelope Consultant b. Architect c. General Contractor d. Window Installation Contractor e. Window Manufacturer's Technical Representative

3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

J. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1. Attendees to include: a. Building Envelope Consultant b. Architect c. General Contractor d. Window Installation Contractor e. Window Manufacturer’s Technical Representative

2. Agenda: a. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

b. Review, discuss, and coordinate the interrelationship of vinyl windows with other exterior wall components. Include provisions for anchoring, flashing, weeping, sealants, and protecting finishes.

c. Review and discuss the sequence of work required to construct a watertight and weather-tight exterior building envelope.



d. Inspect and discuss the condition of substrate and other preparatory work performed by other trades.

K. Field Demonstration Of Installation Procedures 1. The Architect and/or Building Envelope Consultant will identify a location for a Field

Demonstration of the window/door installation procedure. 2. The window/door manufacturer is to be present during the Field Demonstration. 3. The window/door installation will be tested by the Owner for water penetration. 4. The window/door manufacturer will review the field demonstration and confirm in

writing within 3 days that the warranty remains intact and has not been voided by improper installation methods or procedures.


A. Store window in an upright position in a clean and dry storage area above ground and protect from weather.

B. Keep handling to a minimum. Do not move materials except as needed for installation.

C. Windows delivered to the job site with broken flanges or damaged during handling/storage at the job site will be rejected by the Architect/Consultant and must be replaced by Contractor at Contractor’s expense.

D. Store materials inside when possible, in a clean well-drained area free of dust and corrosive fumes. Keep water away from stored assemblies.

E. Stack frames vertically on edge so that water cannot accumulate on or within materials. Use wood, cork, or plastic shims between components to provide for water drainage and air circulation.

F. If interior storage cannot be provided, cover materials with tarpaulins or plastic hung on frames so as to provide air circulation and prevent contaminants from contacting window and glazing materials.

1.9 PROTECTION

A. Trades to take precautions necessary to protect materials, before and after installation, from lime, mortar, water run-off from concrete or copper, careless handling of tools, weld spatter, acids, roofing tar, solvents, abrasive cleaners and other items that could damage glass surfaces and finishes.

B. Trades are not to rely on factory applied protective plastic films to protect materials.



1.10 SITE CONDITIONS

A. Report in writing any defects in existing work, or unsatisfactory site conditions.

B. Start no work until conditions are satisfactory.

C. Start of work shall imply acceptance of existing conditions and surfaces.

D. Glaze without compounds, sealants, or tapes only when glazing surfaces are at temperatures recommended by tape or sealant manufacturer.

1.11 SCHEDULING/COORDINATION

A. Schedule activities such as welding, sandblasting, grinding of steel or concrete, mortal work, acid etching and any other work harmful to finishes or glass, to be completed before start of window installation.

B. When such activities must be carried out in vicinity of stored or installed windows provide hoarding or protection recommended by glazing manufacturer.

C. Coordinate installation of anchors and structural connections with appropriate Sections.

D. Coordinate work with related trades to ensure rough openings, structural supports, curbing and flashing are installed correctly to complement work of this section.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace vinyl windows that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure to meet performance requirements. b. Structural failures including excessive deflection, water leakage, and air

infiltration. c. Faulty operation of movable sash and hardware. d. Deterioration of materials and finishes beyond normal weathering. e. Failure of insulating glass.

2. Warranty Period:

a. Window: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Glazing Units: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

1. Vinyl Windows: VPI Quality Windows

a. Windows: Endurance Series Steel-Reinforced Vinyl

2. Fiberglass Doors: Cascadia Windows and Doors

a. Out-Swing Doors: 302 Series Outswing Door

B. Source Limitations: Obtain vinyl windows from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Substitutions: As approved by Architect. See spec Section 01 2500 Substitution Procedures.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Vinyl Extrusions: High impact modified, unplasticized polyvinyl chloride, multi-chamber profiles fastened to galvanized steel reinforcement inserts. Outer wall extrusion thickness to be 1/8 inch (3mm) minimum. All main frame and sash corners mitered and heat welded.

B. Fiberglass Extrusions: Equal Cascadia Windows and Doors standard fiberglass extrusion.

C. All materials used internally or externally to be corrosion resistant, non-staining, non-bleeding, and compatible with adjoining materials.

1. All internal reinforcing steel shall be galvanized or shall have other corrosion resistance suitable to the Building Envelope Consultant.

D. Hardware: All components of corrosion resistant material compatible with adjacent materials.

E. Anchors and fasteners 1. Exposed fasteners and anchors: stainless steel, or nickel-plated brass. 2. Concealed fasteners or anchors where a portion of the fastener or anchor is exposed

to the exterior wall cavity or an internal drainage cavity within the window that is designed to drain to the exterior: stainless steel, or nickel-plated brass.

3. Concealed anchors interior of the moisture barrier may also be of carbon steel, painted after fabrication with zinc chromate or other primers not containing lead.

F. Sealants 1. Sealants within vinyl framing: as recommended by framing manufacturer



2. Sealants between vinyl framing and adjacent construction: provide joint sealants, primers and packing materials that comply with the requirements of Section 07 9200.

G. Glazing materials

1. See 08 8000 – Glazing.

2.3 WINDOW AND DOOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Window framing shall incorporate a drained and vented system with complete air and vapor seal, allowing any water entering the framing to drain to the exterior and also allow air into the pressuring chamber. Vents and drain holes (orifices) shall be inconspicuously located and in such positions as not to contribute to staining, streaking or marking of the glass, or mullions.

B. Window and door frames to be supplied with integral nailing flange at sill and jambs only. Confirm flange configuration at concrete wall with Architect.

C. Provide continuity of building enclosure vapor and air barrier using glass and glazing materials utilizing the inner lite of multiple lite sealed units for continuity of air and vapor seal.

D. Product Standard: Comply with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 for definitions and minimum standards of performance, materials, components, accessories, and fabrication unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

1. Window Certification: WDMA certified with label attached to each window.

E. Performance Class and Grade: AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 as follows: 1. Fixed-lite Windows: CW-PG50 2. Casement Windows: CW-PG50 3. Awning Windows: CW-PG35 4. Exterior Swing Doors: CW-PG60

F. Thermal Transmittance: NFRC 100 maximum whole-window U-factor of: 1. Fixed-lite Windows: 0.26 2. Casement Windows: 0.27 3. Awning Windows: 0.27 4. Exterior Swing Doors: 0.28

G. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient (SHGC): NFRC 200 maximum whole-window SHGC of: 1. Fixed-lite Windows: 0.22 2. Casement Windows: 0.18 3. Awning Windows: 0.18



4. Exterior Swing Doors: 0.17

H. Sound Transmission Class (STC):

1. Manufacturer’s standard rating. 2. Additive Alternate: Provide trickle vents and glass for windows required to achieve an

STC rating of 35 in locations per acoustical section 09 8000.

2.4 VINYL WINDOWS

A. Operating Types: Provide the following operating types in locations indicated on Drawings: 1. Fixed. 2. Casement: Open out. 3. Awning: Open out.

B. Frames and Sashes: Impact-resistant, UV-stabilized PVC complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Finish: See exterior finish schedule 2. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame where shown on Drawings.

C. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

1. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings and where required by code.

D. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC. CBA rated when tested according to ASTM E 773/E 774.

1. Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

a. Tint: Clear. b. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings.

2. Lites: As indicated on drawings. 3. Filling: Fill space between glass lites with argon/air (90%/10%) 4. Low-E Coating: Pyrolytic on second surface.

E. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weather tight seal.

F. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions. 1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full

range.



2. Hinges: Manufacturer's standard type for sash weight and size indicated 3. Single-Handle Locking System: Operates positive-acting arms that pull sash into

locked position. Provide one arm on sashes up to 29 inches (735 mm) tall and two arms on taller sashes.

4. Limit Devices: Concealed support arms with adjustable, limited, hold-open limit devices designed to restrict sash opening.

a. Limit clear opening to 4 inches (100 mm) for ventilation; with custodial key release. See Item 1.7.H. for code provisions.

G. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

H. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.5 SWING DOORS

A. General: Maximum U-value to comply with Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard , Credit 5.1b, white, with weepholes to allow interior to drain, and vent ports for whole house ventilation air inlets. Provide field testing for 5% of windows at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Operator Type: Open out.

C. Frames: Impact-resistant fiberglass complying with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440. 1. Finish: See exterior finish schedule. 2. Gypsum Board Returns: Provide at interior face of frame where shown on Drawings.

D. Glass: Clear annealed glass, ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, q3.

1. Kind: Fully tempered where indicated on Drawings and where required by code.

E. Insulating-Glass Units: ASTM E 2190, certified through IGCC as complying with requirements of IGCC. CBA rated when tested according to ASTM E 773/E 774.

F. Glazing System: Manufacturer's standard factory-glazing system that produces weather tight seal.

G. Hardware, General: Provide manufacturer's standard hardware fabricated from aluminum, stainless steel, carbon steel complying with AAMA 907, or other corrosion-resistant material compatible with adjacent materials; designed to smoothly operate, tightly close, and securely lock windows, and sized to accommodate sash weight and dimensions.



1. Exposed Hardware Color and Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

H. Weather Stripping: Provide full-perimeter weather stripping for each operable sash unless otherwise indicated.

I. Fasteners: Noncorrosive and compatible with window members, trim, hardware, anchors, and other components.

1. Exposed Fasteners: Do not use exposed fasteners to the greatest extent possible. For application of hardware, use fasteners that match finish hardware being fastened.

2.6 INSECT SCREENS

A. Note: The Owner does not want window screens in units for the recently homeless. Confirm which units are affected with Architect.

B. General: Fabricate insect screens to fully integrate with window frame. Provide screen for each operable exterior sash. Screen wickets are not permitted.

1. Type and Location: Full, inside for open-out sashes.

C. Aluminum Frames: Manufacturer's standard aluminum alloy complying with SMA 1004 or SMA 1201. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped joints or corner extrusions, concealed fasteners, and removable PVC spline/anchor concealing edge of frame. 1. Tubular Framing Sections and Cross Braces: Roll formed from aluminum sheet. 2. Finish for Exterior Screens: Baked-on organic coating in color selected by Architect

from manufacturer's full range.

D. Glass-Fiber Mesh Fabric: 18-by-16 (1.0-by-1.1-mm) mesh of PVC-coated, glass-fiber threads; woven and fused to form a fabric mesh resistant to corrosion, shrinkage, stretch, impact damage, and weather deterioration. Comply with ASTM D 3656.

1. Mesh Color: Manufacturer's standard.

2.7 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate vinyl windows in sizes indicated. Include a complete system for assembling components and anchoring windows.

B. Glaze vinyl windows in the factory.

C. Weather strip each operable sash to provide weather tight installation.

D. Hardware: Mount hardware through double walls of vinyl extrusions or provide corrosion-resistant reinforcement.



E. Complete fabrication, assembly, finishing, hardware application, and other work in the factory to greatest extent possible. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation. Allow for scribing, trimming, and fitting at Project site.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify rough opening dimensions, levelness of sill plate, and operational clearances.

C. Examine wall flashings, vapor retarders, water and weather barriers, and other built-in components to ensure weather tight window installation.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing windows, hardware, accessories, and other components. For installation procedures and requirements not addressed in manufacturer's written instructions, comply with installation requirements in ASTM E 2112.

B. Install windows level, plumb, square, true to line, without distortion, anchored securely in place to structural support, and in proper relation to wall flashing and other adjacent construction to produce weather tight construction.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

1. Testing and inspecting agency will interpret tests and state in each report whether tested work complies with or deviates from requirements.

B. Testing Services: Testing and inspecting of installed windows shall take place as follows:

1. Testing Methodology: Testing of windows for air infiltration and water resistance shall be performed according to AAMA 502.

2. Air-Infiltration Testing:



a. Test Pressure: That required to determine compliance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 performance class indicated.

b. Allowable Air-Leakage Rate: 1.5 times the applicable AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 rate for product type and performance class rounded down to one decimal place.

3. Water-Resistance Field Testing:

a. At least one (1) window of each operational type will be tested to the Specified Field Test Pressure that is specified below in accordance with the current version of ASTM E 1105. For residential windows and doors such as aluminum, wood clad aluminum, vinyl, or fiberglass windows and doors, Procedure B (cyclic) test will be used for 4 cycles each 5 minutes in duration, with a pressure reduced to 0 psf for one minute between cycles. For storefront and curtain wall assemblies, Procedure A (Uniform) test will be used for a single cycle not less than 20 minutes in duration. The initial test will be inclusive of both installation interface and window product. In the case of failure (defined in ASTM 1105), the representative sample will be expanded to five (5) specimens in order to obtain statistical confidence in remedial repairs if needed. In the case of failure, the responsible party will be held financially liable for the cost of retesting, and any related wall assembly or cladding deconstruction needed to obtain passing results. This test specification supersedes AAMA Voluntary Specification for Field Testing. The test reports will be reviewed and approved by a registered Professional Building Envelope Engineer.

b. Regardless of AAMA deductions for field installed product, the minimum Water Resistance Field Test Pressure (during field test), as determined by the consultant, shall be: 1) 6.0 psf for storefront 2) 6.0 psf for windows 3) 6.0 psf for swing doors 4) 6.0 psf for clerestory

c. The above referenced test pressures should be placed on the purchase order

prior to ordering the windows or doors. d. Doors are to be installed and tested in a similar fashion as windows.

4. Testing Extent: As selected by Architect/Consultant and a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency, test the following quantities: a. Two operable windows per floor, total of 6 b. One swing door per floor, total of 1

5. Windows shall be tested after perimeter sealants have cured. 6. Test Reports: Prepared according to AAMA 502.

C. Remove and replace noncomplying windows and retest as specified above.



D. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.4 ADJUSTING, CLEANING, AND PROTECTION

A. Adjust operating sashes and hardware for a tight fit at contact points and weather stripping for smooth operation and weather tight closure.

B. Clean exposed surfaces immediately after installing windows. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and other substances.

1. Keep protective films and coverings in place until final cleaning.

C. Remove and replace sashes if glass has been broken, chipped, cracked, abraded, or damaged during construction period.

D. Protect window surfaces from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If contaminating substances do contact window surfaces, remove contaminants immediately according to manufacturer's written instructions.



DOOR HARDWARE 08 7100 - 1

SECTION 08 7100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Contractor to give construction plan set to hardware consultant (e.g. Allegion), who will prepare a hardware schedule for the Owner’s review.

B. Refer to requirements of acoustical report for unit entry doors including:

1. The apartment unit entry door should consist of a 1 ¾” solid-core wood door, and should have the following soundseals:

a. Pemko Soundseal S88 b. PEmko 171 Threshold, and

1) Pemko 211 door shoe, or 2) Pemko 2113 door shoe

C. Refer to door schedules in drawings.





GLAZING

08 8000 - 1

SECTION 08 8000 – GLAZING PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those

specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Windows. 2. Doors. 3. Glazed curtain walls. 4. Storefront framing. 5. Glazed entrances.


1. 08 4313 – Aluminum-Framed Storefronts 2. 08 5313 – Vinyl and Fiberglass Windows and Doors

1.3 REFERENCES

A. 16 CFR 1201 – Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials; current edition. B. ASTM C864 – Standard Specification for Dense Elastomeric Compression Seal Gaskets,

Setting Blocks, and Spacers; 2005. C. ASTM C920 – Standard Specification for Elastomeric Joint Sealants; 2011.

D. ASTM C1036 – Standard Specification for Flat Glass; 2006.

E. ASTM 01048 – Standard Specification for Heat-Treated Flat Glass – Kind HS Kind FT Coated and Uncoated Glass; 2004.0

F. ASTM 01172 – Standard Specification for Laminated Architectural Flat Glass; 2009e1.

G. ASTM C1193 – Standard Guide for Use of Joint Sealants; 2009.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 2

H. ASTM E1300 – Standard Practice for Determining Load Resistance of Glass in Buildings; 2009a.

I. ASTM E2190 – Standard Specification for Insulating Glass Unit Performance and Evaluation; 2010.

J. GANA (GM) – GANA Glazing Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2009.

K. GANA (SM) – FGMA Sealant Manual; Glass Association of North America; 2008.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as

defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. ASTM C 1036 also includes traditional thickness designations in IP units, but all thicknesses in this Section are expressed in millimeters.

C. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to

ASTM C 1036.

D. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit. 1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind

and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Provide glass and glazing materials for continuity of building enclosure vapor retarder

and air barrier:

1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.

2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

C. Select type and thickness of exterior glass to withstand dead loads and wind loads

acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures of 21 Ib. /sq. ft. positive and negative. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E 1300 to determine glass type and thickness.

1. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full

recovery of glazing materials.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 3

2. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

D. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg. F (67 deg. C), ambient; 180 deg. F (100 deg.

C), material surfaces. 1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

1. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, and

special handling or installation requirements.

B. Product Data on Glazing Compounds: For each glazing compound indicated.

1. Provide chemical, functional, and environmental characteristics, limitations, special application requirements. Identify available colors.

C. Glass Samples: For each type of glass product, 12 inches (300 mm) square samples of

assemblies insulating glass units.

D. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets and sealants in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths.

E. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.


A. Qualification Data: For installers, manufacturers of insulating-glass units and low-e

coatings.

B. Product Certificates:

1. For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer, certify that products meet or exceed specified requirements including glass manufacturer’s approval certificate.

2. Certify that sealed insulated glass meets or exceeds specified requirements

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant

formulations within previous 36-month period.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 4

D. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

E. Warranties:

1. Two copies of each warranty specified, upon completion of Work of this Section. 2. Sample of special warranties.


A. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product

manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing

Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

B. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

1. Insulating Glass: Obtain components for each type of unit from same source as

used in other applications for same components. 2. Obtain glazing accessories from single source from single manufacturer for each

product and installation method.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the work of this section shall be certified and approved by glass manufacturer.

1. Production line and equipment used shall be certified by glass manufacturer

D. Fabrication Tolerances

1. Wave Distortion Tolerance: Not to exceed 0.003 inches (0.076mm) from peak to

valley in the center of lites, and a maximum of 0.008 inches (0.20mm) within 10.5 inch (267mm) of the leading or trailing edge.

2. Warp Tolerance: Rectangular glass to be 1/32 inch (0.8mm) over any 12 inches (305mm) but limited to 5/16 inches.

E. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who

are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

1. Minimum 5 years of documented experience.

F. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 5

G. Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

H. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site at least one week

before starting work of this section.

1. Attendees to include:

a. Architect/Consultant b. Contractor c. Applicator d. Manufacturer’s Technical Representative

2. Agenda:

a. Review Project Specifications and Drawings. b. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials,

Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.

c. Establish installation schedules and sequence. d. Coordinate work with in-place and subsequent construction. e. Review weather and working conditions. f. Review installation procedures g. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after

installation. 1.9 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type,

tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of

current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint

preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates.

3. Test no fewer than eight samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.

4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.

5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.



GLAZING

08 8000 - 6

A. Deliver with original labels showing Manufacturer, each piece of glass. Maintain labels on glass until cleaning for Substantial Completion.

B. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent

damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

C. Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written recommendations for venting and

sealing units to avoid hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change. 1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate

temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions

are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 50 deg F (4.4 deg C) or when dust could impair glazing compound adhesion.

2. Do not glaze when glazing channels are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

3. Maintain minimum ambient temperature before, during and 24 hours after installation of glazing compounds.

1.12 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Provide written warranty against failure of glazing products due to

defective materials or installation, including water leakage or air infiltration in excess of specified standard, for a period of 2 years after date of Substantial Completion.

B. Sealed Insulating Glass Units: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for

seal failure, interpane dusting or misting, including replacement of failed units. C. Laminated Glass: Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include coverage for delamination,

including replacement of failed units.

D. Provide a ten (10) year warranty to include labor and materials for coated glass to replace unit deterioration including peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in metallic coating.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL


GLAZING

08 8000 - 7

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in

thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated. Alternate: Refer to drawings for pricing alternate for upgrade to STC rating at North and part of East elevations.

B. Between-lite spaces filled with argon/air (90/10 minimum).

C. Strength:

1. Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

2. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat-treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article.

3. Where fully tempered glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass.

D. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's

WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K).

2. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.

3. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

E. Structural Design Criteria: Select type and thickness to withstand dead loads and wind loads acting normal to plane of glass at design pressures calculated in accordance with ASCE 7.

1. Use the procedure specified in ASTM E1300 to determine glass type and thickness. 2. Limit glass deflection to 1/200 or flexure limit of glass, whichever is less, with full

recovery of glazing materials. 3. Thicknesses listed are minimum.

F. Air and Vapor Seals: Provide completed assemblies that maintain continuity of building

enclosure vapor retarder and air barrier:

1. In conjunction with vapor retarder and joint sealer materials described in other sections.

2. To maintain a continuous air barrier and vapor retarder throughout the glazed assembly from glass pane to heel bead of glazing sealant.

G. Low-Emissivity Coating (low-e): Cardinal 366 Low-e 0.022 on surface number two (#2).


GLAZING

08 8000 - 8

2.2 GLASS MATERIALS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

1. Products: Float Glass Manufacturers

a. AGO Flat Glass North America, Inc: www.afgglass.com. b. Pilkington North America Inc: www.pilkington.com. c. PPG Industries, Inc: www.ppg.com. d. Visteon Glass Systems: www.visteon.com/floatglass. e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2. All glazing is to be float glass unless otherwise indicated.

a. Annealed Type: ASTM 01036, Type I, transparent flat, Class clear, Quality Q3 (glazing select).

b. Heat-Strengthened and Fully Tempered Types: ASTM 01048. c. Tinted Types: Color and performance characteristics as indicated. d. Thicknesses: As indicated: for exterior glazing comply with specified

requirements for wind load design regardless of specified thickness.

B. Processed Float Glass: Provide processed glass complying with requirements indicated in Glass Product Schedule, and following:

1. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) processed float glass where needed to resist

thermal stresses produced by differential shading of lites. 2. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) processed float glass where safety glass required by

Building Code. 3. Pyrolytic Coated (Low E) Float Glass: Glass with solar reflective metallic oxide

coating applied by pyrolytic deposition process

C. Laminated Glass: Float glass laminated in accordance with ASTM C1172.

1. Laminated Safety Glass: Comply with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category 2. Plastic Interlayer: 0.060 inch thick, minimum. 3. Where fully tempered is specified or required, provide glass that has been tempered

by the tong-less horizontal method.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Composite Glazing: Multi-layer glazing UL- or WH-listed as fire- resistance-rated glazing and complying with 16 CFR 1201 test requirements for Category without the use of a surface-applied film.

1. Thickness: 5/16 inch [8 mm] overall. 2. Weight: 4 lbs./sq. ft. 3. Approximate Visible Transmission: 85 percent. 4. Approximate Visible Reflection: 9 percent. 5. Fire-rating: 60 minutes 6. Impact Safety Resistance: No less than CPSC 16CFR1201 Category II.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 9

7. SIC Rating: 35 dB. 8. Surface Finish: Fully polished. 9. Moh's Hardness (both surfaces): 7.0 10. Positive Pressure Test: UL 100 11. Labeling: Permanently label each piece of FireLite Plus® with the FireLite Plus®

logo, UL® logo and fire rating. 12. Manufacturers:

a. FireLite Plus® as manufactured by Nippon Electric Glass Company, Ltd., and distributed by Technical Glass Products, 600 6th Street South, Kirkland, Washington, 98033. Voice 1-800-426-0279, fax 1-800-451-9857,

E. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless

otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 2. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated

glass). 2.3 SEALED INSULATING GLASS UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1. Any of the manufacturers specified for float glass. 2. Cardinal Glass Industries: www.cardinalcorp.corn. 3. Guardian Industries Corp: www.guardian.com. 4. Viracon, Apogee Enterprises, Inc: www.viracon.com. 5. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements.

B. Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass

separated by a dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190, and complying with other requirements specified.

1. Sealing System: Dual seal, with polyisobutylene and silicone primary and secondary. 2. Spacer: Stainless steel 3. Purge interpane space with dry hermetic air. 4. Provide Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where needed to resist thermal

stresses produced by differential shading of lites. 5. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass where safety glass is indicated, or

required by Building Code

C. Glass: Comply with applicable requirements in "Glass Products" Article. 2.4 GLAZED CANOPIES

A. Delegated design: Provide glazing and associated framing clips/trims at glazed canopies.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 10

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of

the following:

1. Crystalite Skylights.

2.5 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. Color: Black.

B. Soft Compression Gaskets: Extruded or molded, closed-cell, integral-skinned neoprene gaskets complying with ASTM C 509, Type II, black; of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal.

1. Application: Use where soft compression gaskets will be compressed by inserting

dense compression gaskets on opposite side of glazing or pressure applied by means of pressure-glazing stops on opposite side of glazing.

2.6 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: 1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and

with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect/Consultant from manufacturer's full range.

B. Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type

S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT, S & A.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; 995. b. Tremco Incorporated, Spectrem 1. c. Approved Equal.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 11

2.7 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous

pressure. 2. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to

continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary

sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination

with a full bead of liquid sealant.

C. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tape

1. Preformed, butyl based elastomeric tape complying with ASTM C 1241 and AAMA 800

D. Manufacturers:

1. Norton Sealants. 2. Tremco 3. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

2.8 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced

glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Neoprene, 80 to 90 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option

I. Length of 0.1 inch for each square foot of glazing or minimum 4 inch x width of glazing rabbet space minus 1/16 inch x height to suit glazing method and pane weight and area.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 12

D. Spacer Shims: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Neoprene, 50 to 60 Shore A durometer hardness, ASTM C 864 Option I.

Minimum 3 inch long x one half the height of the glazing stop x thickness to suit application, self-adhesive on one face.

F. Glazing U-Channels:

1. Material: Aluminum. 2. Glass Size: 3/8 inch. 3. Top Channel: 1 x 1-1/2 inch U-Channel. 4. Bottom Channel: 1 x 1 inch U-Channel. 5. Manufacturers:

a. C.R. Laurence Co., Inc.; Product: CRL Shallow and Deep Wet/Dry Glaze U-Channels; www.crlaurence.com.

b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 6000 – Product Requirements.

6. Finish: Black.

G. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

H. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing

agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire-protection rating indicated.

2.9 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge

and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance

with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 13

a. Verify dimensions prior to fabrication; if vary significantly from Contract Documents, obtain Architect's/Consultant’s approval before proceeding.

2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as

needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

C. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses with substrate compatible primer or sealer.

D. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant.

E. Install sealants in accordance with ASTM 01193 and FGMA Sealant Manual.

F. Install sealant in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets,

and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation

to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged

glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined

by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course


GLAZING

08 8000 - 14

of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270

mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements.

2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving

sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are

flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops. B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch

tapes to make them fit opening. C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to

jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not

lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer. E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 15

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape. 3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings

exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting

blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting

blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between

glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting

or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass. 3.7 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES

A. Glass and Glazing product manufacturers to provide field surveillance of the installation

of their products.

B. Monitor and report installation procedures and unacceptable conditions.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 16


A. See Section 01 4000 – Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Owner will employ independent testing agency to test two fabricated units prior to installation for wave distortion and warp tolerance in accordance with requirement specified.

3.9 CLEANING

A. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry

surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

B. Remove glazing materials from finish surfaces.

C. Remove labels after Work is complete.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Clean glass and adjacent surfaces.

3.10 PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed

streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction

operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. After installation, mark pane with an 'X' by using removable plastic tape or paste; do

not mark heat absorbing or reflective glass units.

D. Do not store materials close enough to glass to create a heat trap and cause breakage.

E. Protect glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and masonry surfaces from buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.


GLAZING

08 8000 - 17

3.11 INSULATING-GLASS TYPE LOCATIONS

A. See Window Schedule in the Drawings. END OF SECTION 08 8000


GLAZING

08 8000 - 18



NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1

SECTION 09 2216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: Where metal stud framing is indicated on the Drawings, provide non-structural metal framing.

1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board and shaft wall assemblies.

2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings and soffits.


A. Design in accordance with performance requirements and Steel Stud Manufacturer’s Association Product Technical Guide to determine stud size, spacing, and minimum base steel thickness.

1. Interior Suspended Gypsum Board Ceilings, Soffits, and Bulkheads: Design and install to provide deflection of not more than L/360 of distance between supports.

2. Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies: Design and install to withstand lateral loading (air pressure) of 5 PSF with deflection limit not more than L/240 of partition height.

3. Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Lobbies, Exits, and Elevator Lobbies: Design and install to withstand lateral loading (air pressure) of 10 PSF with deflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height.

4. Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Locations with Ceramic Tile or Other Hard Surface Finishes: Design and install to withstand lateral loading (air pressure) with deflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height.

5. Where documents indicate a stud size, size shall be considered minimum. Increase gage to meet minimum performance requirements.

6. Accommodate building structure deflections in connections to structure.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested according to ASTM E 119.

C. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413.







A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. Sound Transmission Characteristics: For STC-rated assemblies that incorporate non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 20 gauge. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- deep flanges, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Double-Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runners, inside runner with 2-inch- deep flanges and fastened to studs, and outer runner sized to friction fit inside runner.

3. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes due to deflection of structure above.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).

C. Firestop Tracks: Manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.




E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.

1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum

uncoated-steel thickness of 0.033 inch. 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch-

diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.

B. STC Rating: As indicated.

C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by design to meet loading requirements.

D. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with manufacturer's standard long-leg length, but at least 2 inches long and matching studs in depth.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As required by design to meet loading requirements.

E. Firestop Tracks: Provide firestop track at head of shaft wall on each floor level.

F. Elevator Hoistway Entrances: Manufacturer's standard J-profile jamb strut with long-leg length of 3 inches, matching studs in depth.




2.3 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Hanger Attachments to Concrete:

1. Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to five (5) times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

a. Cast-in-place anchor, designed for attachment to concrete forms. b. Anchor penetration depth: Maximum 3/4 inch penetration into post-tensioned

concrete slabs.

2. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

C. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.162-inch diameter.

D. Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, or in size indicated on Drawings.

E. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.053 inch and minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.

1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches.

F. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges, 3/4 inch deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners of equivalent minimum base-metal thickness.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 16 gauge. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: As indicated on Drawings.

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.




2.4 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated.

2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.

1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings, except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.




2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-

inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.

c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure.

a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated. 6. Curved Partitions:

a. Bend track to uniform curve and locate straight lengths so they are tangent to arcs.

b. Begin and end each arc with a stud, and space intermediate studs equally along arcs. On straight lengths of no fewer than two studs at ends of arcs, place studs 6 inches o.c.

E. Direct Furring:

1. Screw to wood framing. 2. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry

attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Z-Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation vertically and hold in place with Z-furring members spaced 24 inches o.c.

2. Except at exterior corners, securely attach narrow flanges of furring members to wall with concrete stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

3. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches from corner and cut insulation to fit.




G. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

3. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 4. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts

that extend through forms. 5. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 6. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.

E. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

F. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

G. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.




GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1

SECTION 09 2900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board, including shaft wall assemblies. 2. Exterior gypsum board for ceilings and soffits. 3. Tile backing panels. 4. Texture finishes. 5. Acoustical batt insulation. 6. Acoustical sealant.


1. Section 09 2216 – Non-Structural Metal Framing. 2. Section 09 8000 – Acoustical Treatment 3. Section 09 9100 – Painting: Priming prior to applying texture materials.


A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape.

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.



B. Samples:




1. Textured Finishes: 24 by 24 inch for each textured finish indicated and on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency. Conform to practices described in ASTM C 919-02 ‘Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications’ and project acoustical report “Architectural Review” by SSA Acoustics.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 2. National Gypsum Company. 3. Temple-Inland 4. USG Corporation.

B. Include all accessories and blocking and backing required for complete installation with all surfaces taped, spackled and sanded.

C. Gypsum Wallboard, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8” unless noted otherwise in drawings or specifications. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8” unless noted otherwise in drawings or specifications. 2. Long Edges: tapered.

E. Gypsum Ceiling Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8” unless noted otherwise in drawings or specifications.




2. Long Edges: Tapered.

F. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces.

1. Thickness: 5/8” unless noted otherwise in drawings or specifications. 2. Long Edges: Tapered. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 4. Location: Kitchens. 5. Acceptable Product and Manufacturer:

a. Gold Bond BRAND XP Gypsum Board, National Gypsum Company. b. Proroc® Moisture And Mold Resistant With M2tech, Certainteed c. Sheetrock Brand Mold Tough, USG.

G. Provide vandal-resistant moisture-resistant gypsum board in residential unit bathrooms for “pre-rock” and second layer. USG Aqua-Tough.

1. Thickness: 5/8” unless noted otherwise in drawings or specifications.

H. Gypsum Wallboard, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.

1. Thickness: 5/8” unless noted otherwise in drawings or specifications. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

I. Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides. Specifically designed for interior use.

1. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus.

J. Gypsum Shaftliner Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M; manufacturer's proprietary fire-resistive liner panels with paper faces.

1. Thickness: 3/4- inch or 1 inch as indicated on Wall Types on Drawings. 2. Long Edges: Double bevel.

3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC, Subsidiary of Georgia Pacific; ToughRock Fireguard Shaftliner.

b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Brand Fire-Shield Shaftliner. c. Temple-Inland Inc.; Fire-Rated SilentGuard Gypsum Shaftliner System. d. USG Corporation; Sheetrock Brand Gypsum Liner Panel.

K. Resilient Channel: Provide resilient channels at typical floor/ceiling and roof assemblies as indicated on the drawings and as noted in Section 09 8000 Acoustical Treatment.




2.3 EXTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD FOR CEILINGS AND SOFFITS

A. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, with fiberglass mat laminated to both sides and with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Dens-Glass Gold. b. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond, e(2)XP. c. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Sheathing.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.

2.4 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Contractor’s Option to provide one of the following products as backing material in toilets, restrooms, and other locations where water resistant wall treatment is required.

B. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following:

a. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.

2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

C. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 and ASTM C 1288 or 1325, with manufacturer's standard edges.


a. Custom Building Products; Wonderboard . b. USG Corporation; DUROCK Cement Board.

2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.

2.5 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.

B. Exterior Trim: ASTM C 1047.




1. Material: Hot-dip galvanized steel sheet or rolled zinc.

2.6 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: Paper. 3. Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh. 4. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.


A. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing).

D. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings as demonstrated by testing according to ASTM E 90, and meet the following requirements: 1. Sealant shall be a non-hardening, non-bleeding, non-drying, resilient caulk. 2. Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 3. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Accumetric LLC; BOSS 824 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Grabber Construction Products; Acoustical Sound Sealant. c. Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant. d. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

E. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 "Thermal Insulation."

2.8 TEXTURE FINISHES

A. Primer: As recommended by textured finish manufacturer. Refer to Section 09 9100 Painting for primer material. Apply primer prior to texture.




B. Aggregate Finish: Water-based, job-mixed, aggregated, drying-type texture finish for spray application.

C. Non-Aggregate Finish: Pre-mixed, vinyl texture finish for spray application.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products from one of the following:

a. CertainTeed Corp.; ProRoc Easi-Tex Spray Texture. b. National Gypsum Company; Perfect Spray EM Texture. c. USG Corporation; BEADEX FasTex Wall and Ceiling Spray Texture.

2. Texture: Level 3 finish per NWCB, with: a. Ultra-fine “fog” texture at residential unit walls and ceilings. b. Level 4 smooth wall at common amenity areas.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels, unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

D. Install panels with a maximum 1/4” gap between gypsum board and adjacent materials.

E. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

F. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

G. Unless noted otherwise, where one wall type joins another requiring more or less thickness or layers of GWB or plywood, the greater thickness or layers of GWB or plywood shall continue to the next corner.

H. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

I. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.




J. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.), except in chases braced internally.

1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.

2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits. 3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof

slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

K. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

L. Install trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Aluminum Trim: . 2. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations

approved by Architect for visual effect.

M. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

N. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

O. Single-Layer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.

2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels.

b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

3. On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints. Locate edge joints over furring members.

4. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.




P. Multilayer Application:

1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

2. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.

Q. Light Fixture And Fire Extinguisher Cabinet Recess Fire Protection:

1. Fire Extinguisher Cabinet and Apartment Unit Electrical Panel Recesses: Provide a framed, GWB covered recess for all cabinets recessed into fire and acoustically rated walls. One layer 5/8” Type X GWB for one hour rated walls and two layers for two hour rated walls. One layer 5/8” GWB for all walls with acoustical rating.

R. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

S. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

T. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 3: Storage and other utilitarian spaces.

a. All gypsum board finished as Level 3 with light orange peel texture.

4. Level 4: Panels to receive texture before painting and at smooth wall panel surfaces.

U. Texture Finish Application: Prepare and apply primer to gypsum panels and other surfaces prior to receiving texture finishes. Mix and apply finish using powered spray equipment, to produce a uniform texture matching approved mockup and free of starved spots or other evidence of thin application or of application patterns.

V. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and texture finishes and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

W. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


SSA Acoustics LLP Olympia Commons – 318 StateProject 1845.00


ACOUSTICAL TREATMENT 09 8000 - 1

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes a. Acoustical Insulation Materials b. Resilient Channel c. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips d. Resilient Acoustical Sealant Material e. Acoustical Floor Underlayment f. Acoustical Door Seals a. Acoustical Requirement for Windows b. Plumbing Isolation for water supply, waste and rain drain lines c. Sound Rated Partition

B. Related Sections include the following: a. Division 7 Section “Building Insulation.” b. Division 7 Section “Though Penetration Firestop System.” c. Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware.” d. Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies.”

1.2 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM). a. C665-91 Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Light

Frame Construction and Manufactured Housing b. C919-98 Standard Practice for Use of Sealants in Acoustical Applications. c. E84-00 Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials d. E497-99 Standard Practice for Installing Sound-Isolating Lightweight Partitions

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Include fabrication and installation details, and attachments to other Work.

C. Product certificates and test reports.




1.4 COORDINATION

A. Contractor shall coordinate fabrication and installation schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL INSULATION MATERIALS

A. Acoustical Insulation: As specified in Division 7 Section “Building Insulation, and as indicated below: a. Fiberglass batt insulation

a. R-11 fiberglass batts shall meet the following requirements: (1) Low density unfaced fiberglass. (2) 3-1/2" thick.

b. R-19 fiberglass batts shall meet the following requirements: (1) Low density unfaced fiberglass. (2) 5-1/2" thick.

b. Mineral Fiber

a. 2" or 3" thick mineral fiber insulation batts. Acceptable Products: "Thermafiber" by U.S. Gypsum Company, or equal.

b. Fire Safing Insulation. Acceptable Products: "Thermafiber" by U.S. Gypsum Company, or equal.

B. Resilient Channel: hole pattern: slots that are 3/8”, 3” long, spaced 4” on center a. Dietrich RCSD Deluxe

C. Resilient Sound Isolation Clips: (ceilings of Class/Meeting 122, Waiting 123, Commons #125, Kitchen 126, Kids 127, Lobby 135, and Mail 136) a. RSIC-1 by Pac International Inc.

D. Resilient Acoustical Sealant: Non-hardening, non-bleeding, non-drying, resilient caulk. Acceptable Products: a. Acoustical Sealant by U.S. Gypsum Company b. Acoustical Sealant BA-98 by Pecora Corporation c. Phenoseal Surpass (Clear color only) by Gloucester Company, Inc. d. SpecSeal ES105 Sealant by STI - fire rated e. “Fire Stop 2000" by 3M Vibration Control Systems - fire rated f. Non Sag Firestop Caulk (Part # AA-529) by Nelson - fire rated




E. Acoustical Floor Underlayment: a. Floor Underlayment below Gyp-crete (at hard surface areas only)

a. Studios and Club Room; 1) Quiet Qurl 55/025 MC MT; Keene Building Products 2) Enkasonic by Maxxon

b. 1-2 Bedrooms; 1) Quiet Qurl 55/025 MC; Keene Building Products, or 2) Acousti-Mat II; Maxxon

F. Acoustical Door Seals: a. Apartment Entry Doors: As specified in Division 8 Section “Finish Hardware” and

as follow: a. Soundseal: Pemko S88 b. Threshold: Pemko 171 c. Door Shoe Pemko Pemko 211_V, or 2113_V

b. Class/Meeting 122: As specified in Division 8 Section “Door Hardware” and as follow: a. SiliconSeal: Pemko S88 b. Threshold: Pemko 2005

G. Acoustical requirements for windows (North, South, and East Façades): a. STC 35: ¼” glass – 1” air space – 3/16” glass. b. Provide trickle offset vent.

H. Acoustical Insulation for plumbing pipes: a. Piping attachment:

a. Plumbing isolation material: 1) Closed cell sponge neoprene tape. 2) Holdrite Silencer System; Mechanical Solutions Northwest Company

(206) 575-9001. (Pexpipe does not require isolation material).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Prior to starting work, carefully inspect installed work of other trades and verify that such work is complete to the point where work of this section may properly commence.

B. Notify the Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to the proper and timely completion of the work.




C. Do not begin work until all unsatisfactory conditions are resolved. Beginning work constitutes acceptance of the site conditions and responsibility for defective installation caused by prior observable conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Verify that adjacent materials are secured, properly spaced, dry, and ready to receive installation.

B. Verify that mechanical and electrical services within spaces to be insulated have been installed and tested.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Acoustical Batt Insulations: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. See Section 09260 for installation.

B. Acoustical Resilient Channel a. Resilient channel shall be installed perpendicular to framing members. b. Spacing for resilient channels mounted on walls shall be 24” on center. c. Install the channel so that the bottom part of the channel is attached to the

studs. The gypsum wallboard should be attached to the top side, so the weight of the gypsum board pulls the channel away from the studs.

d. Position channels 6” maximum distance from the wall-ceiling angle. e. Cantilever channel ends no more than 6”. f. Where two horizontal channels meet at a framing member, create a butt joint

with at least an 1/8" gap between channels. g. Mount electrical boxes and other junction boxes to the framing. h. Install gypsum board with 1/8” to ¼” gap around perimeter of each ceiling

(room) for acoustical sealant application. Seal the gap using resilient caulk. i. Use 1” screw on the first layer of 5/8” gypsum board and 1-5/8” screw of the 2nd

layer of 5/8” gypsum board. Do not allow gypsum wallboard fasteners to touch the wall studs, or TJIs.

j. Use 1.5” laminating screws to attach the soffit’s framing to the gypsum board ceiling. Do not attach soffit’s framing to TJI.

C. RSIC-1, RSIC-DC04 Clips: a. Space resilient sound isolation clips at maximum of 24”x48” on center b. Do not exceed design load of 36 pounds per isolation clip. c. Splicing drywall furring channels: Do not allow drywall furring channels or gyp-




sum board to contact ceiling or wall framing members. d. Gypsum board: Install gypsum with 1/8” to ¼” gap around perimeter for acousti-

cal sealant application. Seal the gap using resilient caulk. e. Install drywall furring channels perpendicular to framing members; spaced 24” on

center. f. Locate resilient sound isolation clips maximum of 8” from ends of drywall furring

channels. g. Locate drywall furring channels maximum of 3” from parallel wall assemblies.

D. Acoustical Isolation for Plumbing pipes: Install in accordance with manufacturer’s

instructions.

E. Acoustical Sealant Materials: See Section 09520 for installation.

F. Acoustical Floor Underlayment: Install in accordance with manufacturers directions and the following: a. Quiet Qurl 55/025, or Acousti-Mat II underlayment:

a. Subfloor shall be structurally sound, level and clean b. Install perimeter isolation strip (2” wide, ¼” thick foam) at the perimeter of

the entire subfloor (including door frames), and at transitions between hard surface flooring and carpet. The perimeter isolation strip could be taped temporary with duct tape.

c. Place the Acousti-Mat II, or Quiet Qurl 55/025 over subfloor and tape joints. Acousti-Mat II, or Quiet Qurl 55/025 should be free floating. Do not attach it to the subfloor with nails, screws, or staples.

d. Pour the overlay (gyp-crete) on top of the Acousti-Mat II, or Quiet Qurl 55/025

G. Sound Rated Partition a. Coordinate with Division 9 Section “Gypsum Board Assemblies.” Most stringent

requirements govern. b. Sound-rated partition shall extend to structure and be sealed to it, unless noted

otherwise. c. Acoustical rated partitions on concrete slab: The first layer of gypsum board on

each side of the stud shall be sealed, top, and bottom with acoustic sealant. Where partitions seal to a rough, textured or corrugated surface, special closure strips may be required in addition to sealing.




d. Where sealing is indicated, use silicone-base, non-hardening compounds. e. Electrical and other outlets on a party wall between units: For back to back

installation, outlets should be spaced at least 24 inches from each other. Back side of both outlets should be fitted with putty pad if the distance is within 24 inches of each other. In any case, the backside of the junction boxes on one side of the wall should have putty pad.

f. Penetration of sound rated partitions (i.e. ductwork, conduit, or plumbing) must be sealed with resilient calk.

g. Pipe conduit or ductwork runs within, or penetration through a double-studded partition, must not rigidly tie to the two sets together. Any interconnecting elements must be vibration isolated, either, by means of a flexible connection, or by packing around the penetration on one side with sponge neoprene or glass fiber so no contact is made with the wall surface before caulking.

h. Where two or more layers of gypsum board are used, do not cement gypsum board layers to bottom layer. Use nails or screws. Stagger board joints.

i. Batt insulation shall be full height of studs. Secure insulation to prevent sagging. j. Conform to reference ASTM E497 and C919.

H. Plumbing Piping: a. Supply Pipes:

a. Use flow velocities of 5ft/second inside units. b. Use Wirsbo PEX pipe and manifold system inside the units for domestic

supply water pipes. No need for additional acoustical isolation when using PEX pipe.

b. Waste Pipes & Rain Drain Lines

a. Use cast-iron or wrap completely all plastic waste pipes and plastic rain drain lines running in the ceiling or in the wall adjacent to a noise sensitive space such as bedroom, living room, or a den. The wrap should consist of carpet pad covered with Dexdamp 432 over the carpet pad.

b. Use cast-iron, or wrap completely plastic waste pipes running over common spaces such as Lobby, Commons, Class/Meeting, and Office.

c. Isolate waste pipes and rain drain lines from the structure by an insert of neoprene sleeve between the framing and the pipe. Do not allow the piping, pipe connectors, pipe hangers, or valves to directly touch the structure, studs, or gypsum board.

d. Floor penetrations should be packed with rock wool or fiberglass insulation




and sealed with fire resilient caulk. Do not allow piping to make direct contact with the framing elements.

e. Fill plumbing wall cavity & ceiling cavity (where plumbing occurs) with fiberglass batt insulation.

f. Use plastic piping for waste vents. g. Use plastic piping for waste from bathroom and kitchen sinks running

inside the bathroom or kitchen cabinet.

END OF SECTION


SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 1

SECTION 10 1400 – SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. All work in this section, including all code graphics, will be under a separate contract. This section is for reference only.

B. This Section includes the following:

1. Exterior building identification sign. 2. Exterior post and panel signs. 3. Panel signs. 4. Decals.

C. Related Sections: 1. Section 142100 – Electric Traction Elevators 2. Division 25 – Illuminated exit signs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs.

1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories.

2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

C. Samples: For each sign type and for each color and texture required.

1. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual sections of material including the full range of colors available for each material required.

D. Samples for verification of color, pattern, and texture selected and compliance with requirements indicated:

1. Cast Acrylic Sheet and Plastic Laminate: Provide a sample panel not less than 8-1/2 inches by 11 inches for each material, color, texture, and pattern required. On each panel include a representative sample of the graphic image process required, showing graphic style, and colors and finishes of letters, numbers, and other graphic devices.


SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 2


A. Sole Source: Provide each type of sign by a single manufacturer.

B. Sign Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in producing or supplying signs similar to those indicated for this Project, with a record of successful in-service performance, and sufficient production capacity to produce sign units required without causing delay in the Work.

C. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with provisions of the State of Washington WAC 51-20 requirements and the City of Olympia Code Requirements in all applicable locations.

2. Comply with provisions of ICC/ANSI A117.1-2012, Chapter 7 Communication Elements and Features in all applicable locations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

B. Cast Acrylic Sheet: Provide cast (not extruded or continuous cast) methyl methacrylate monomer plastic sheet, in sizes and thicknesses indicated, with a minimum flexural strength of 16,000 psi when tested according to ASTM D 790, with a minimum allowable continuous service temperature of 176 deg. F (80 deg. C), and of the following general types:

1. Transparent Sheet: Colorless sheet in matte finish, with light transmittance of 92 percent, when tested according to the requirements of ASTM D 1003.

2. White Translucent Sheet: White translucent sheet of density required to produce uniform brightness and minimum halation effects.

3. Opaque Sheet: Colored opaque acrylic sheet in colors and finishes as selected from the manufacturer's standards.

C. Applied Vinyl: Opaque non-reflective film Die-cut characters from vinyl film of nominal thickness of 3 mils with pressure-sensitive adhesive backing, suitable for interior and exterior applications.

D. ABS Plastic: Provide high-impact thermoplastic composed of copolymers of acrylonitrile, butadiene, and styrene.

E. Fasteners: Use concealed fasteners fabricated from metals that are not corrosive to the sign material and mounting surface.

F. Anchors and Inserts: Use nonferrous metal or hot-dipped galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or


SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 3

lead expansion bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

G. Colored Coatings for Acrylic Plastic Sheet: Use colored coatings, including inks and paints for copy and background colors that are recommended by acrylic manufacturers for optimum adherence to acrylic surface and are nonfading for the application intended.

2.2 EXTERIOR BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SIGN

A. Building name in non-illuminated metal letters, mounted on canopy above building entry. Confirm building name and sign materials with Owner.

2.3 PANEL SIGNS

A. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

1. Edge Condition: Square cut. 2. Corner Condition: Square. 3. Mounting: Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 4. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 5. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch above surface

with contrasting colors.

B. Exterior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements:

C. Graphic Content: Provide sign copy that complies with the schedule.

D. Raised Copy: Machine-cut copy characters from matte-finished opaque acrylic sheet and chemically weld onto the acrylic sheet forming sign panel face. Produce precisely formed characters with square cut edges free from burrs and cut marks. Raised copy thickness to be per WAC 51-20 standards for vision impaired persons.

E. Engraved Copy: Machine-engrave letters, numbers, symbols, and other graphic devices into sign panel on the face to product precisely formed copy, incised to uniform depth. Use high-speed cutters mechanically linked to master template in a pantographic system or equivalent process capable of producing characters of the style indicated with sharply formed edges.

2.4 CODE SIGNAGE

A. General: Signage shall conform to IBC Sections as referenced below.


SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 4

B. Braille: Use Contracted Grade 2 Braille whenever Braille symbols are specifically required. Dots shall be 1/10 inch on center within each cell with 2/10 inch space between cells. Dots shall be raised 1/40 inch above background. Refer to CBC Section 1117B.5.2.

C. Sign Schedule: Provide signage as required by codes and accessibility regulations and requirements. These include, but are not limited to: 1. Illuminated Exit Signs: Refer to Division 26. 2. Fire Doors: Per IBC Section 1008. 3. Room Capacity: Per IBC Section 1004.3. 4. Elevator Signs: Per IBC Section 3002.3. 5. Accessibility Signs: Per IBC Section 1110 and local Accessibility Code, including

accessible parking space signs, toilet facilities, and doors to exitways. 6. Signage Types: Tactile signs. 7. Evacuation Maps: As required by local codes.

2.5 DECALS

A. General: Decals shall be pressure sensitive, adhesive backed, custom or stock copy and symbols.

2.6 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Inserts: Provide nonferrous-metal or hot-dip galvanized anchors and inserts for exterior installations and elsewhere as required for corrosion resistance. Use toothed steel or lead expansion-bolt devices for drilled-in-place anchors. Furnish inserts, as required, to be set into concrete or masonry work.

2.7 FINISHES

A. Colors and Surface Textures: For exposed sign material that requires selection of materials with integral or applied colors, surface textures or other characteristics related to appearance, provide color matches indicated, or if not indicated, as selected by the Architect from the manufacturer's standards.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.


SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 5

2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply.

1. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Use liquid silicone adhesive recommended by the sign manufacturer to attach sign units to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use double-sided vinyl tape where recommended by the sign manufacturer to hold the sign in place until the adhesive has fully cured.

2. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.

3.2 SCHEDULE OF SIGNS

A. All signs other than “In Case of Fire” signs at elevator are to be OFOI. This schedule is included for example only. Signage for retail to be provided by future tenants. 182

B. See following Schedule.

Bumgardner Architects Olympia Commons - 318 State Project 1845.00


Section 10 1400 - SIGNAGE SCHEDULE

Item Description Location Sign Text Wall Door Remarks

1Building Identification

On canopy above main building entrance.

See remarks. - -Confirm name of building and sign type with Owner.

2Stairway Identification

Stairs 1 & 2: all levels. See remarks. X -Provide per SBC 1020.1.6 - Stairway Signs; 1011.6 - Not-an-exit Warnings; 1022.8 -

3Stairway Identification - Accessible

Stairs 1 & 2: all levels. See remarks. X - Provide per SBC 1011.3 - Tactile Exit Signs.

4 Elevator Elevator See remarks. - -Signage as required by Code: See Section 14 2100 - Electric Traction Elevators.

5Elevator Machine Room

Roof Elevator Machine X -

6 Fire Extinguishers All levels - see plans. See remarks. X -Signage as required by Code: See Sections 10 4400 - Fire Protection Specialties.

7 Bike Room 103 (2 locations) Bike Room X -8 Waste/Recycle Room 104 Rubbish / Recycling X -9 Laundry Rooms 214, 414 Laundry X -

10Electrical/ Communications

Rooms 215, 315, 415 Electrical / Telecom X -

11 StorageRooms 120, 128 (2 locations, 314

Storage X -

12 Office Rooms 121, 124 Office X -

13 Office Rooms 124 Rent X -Next to relight on east wall at building lobby.

14 Class/Meeting Room 122 Conference X -15 Common Room 125 Commons X -16 Sprinkler Room 129 Sprinkler Riser X -17 WC Restroom - Room 132 Restroom X - Unisex symbol.18 Electrical Room 133 Electrical X -

19 Mail Room 136To be confirmed by Owner.

- - Vinyl mailbox labels.

20 Unit Entries Units 101, 102, 105, 106Show unit number at each entry.

X - Include Braille notation.

21 Unit Entries Units 201 - 213 (13 unitts)Show unit number at each entry.






24 Corridors Levels 1, 2, 3 and 4.To be confirmed by Owner.

X -Allow for (2) signs per floor, with (4) lines of text each sign.


Sign Mounting

SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 6


FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 10 4400 - 1

SECTION 10 4400 - FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Fire protection cabinets 2. Portable fire extinguishers and mounting brackets.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Fire Extinguishers: Include rating and classification. 2. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Include rough in dimension, door hardware, cabinet type,

trim style, panel style, and details of installation.

B. Samples: For each exposed cabinet finish.

C. Maintenance data.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Conform to fire department requirements.

B. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

C. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

D. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of portable fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Fire Extinguisher and Cabinet Manufacturers:

1. JL Industries, Inc. 2. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 3. Potter Roemer; Div. of Smith Industries, Inc.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated, and as follows:

1. Sheet: ASTM B 209. 2. Extruded Shapes: ASTM B 221.

C. Break Glass: Clear float glass, ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1, Quality q3, 1.5 mm thick, single strength.

2.3 PORTABLE FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. General: Provide fire extinguishers of type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

1. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B and bar coding for documenting fire extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.



B. Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type in Steel Container: Size and classification required for application, with monoammonium phosphate-based dry chemical in enameled-steel container.

1. Capacity: 10.0 pounds. 2. UL Rating: 4A-60B:C. 3. Color: Red.

2.4 FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

A. Basis of Design Cabinet: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

1. Model: Alta Series by Potter Roemer LLC. 2. Or approved substitute from:

a. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group

B. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.

C. Cabinet Construction: Match rating of wall in which cabinet is mounted.

D. Cabinet Tub Material: Constructed of cold rolled steel.

E. Cabinet Mounting: Fully Recessed at stud walls; no lettering. Provide where walls are of sufficient depth to accommodate recessed cabinet installation and allow for continuous acoustical insulation behind cabinet.

F. Cabinet Mounting: Surface-Mounted at Parking Garage Levels on Concrete or CMU; no lettering. Cabinet box fully exposed and mounted directly on wall with no trim.

G. Door and Trim Material: Steel.

H. Door Style: Duo vertical glass panel.

I. Door Glazing: Tempered glass, 1/8-inch thick.

J. Non-Locking Door Handle: Provide manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated. Provide either lever handle with cam-action latch, or exposed or concealed door pull and friction latch. Provide concealed or continuous-type hinge, permitting door to open 180 degrees.

K. Finishes:

1. Box: Electrostatically applied, thermally-fused polyester coating. 2. Door and Frame: Recoatable white polyester finish.



L. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

1. Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.0428-inch- thick, cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick, fire-barrier material. Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.

B. Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated and coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles selected.

1. Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.

2. Miter and weld perimeter door frames.

C. Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.

1845EXECUTION

2.6 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where recessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged units.

C. Install fire protection cabinets in locations indicated on the Drawings. Verify locations with Architect.

D. Install at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

E. Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten fire-protection cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

1. Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is not adequate for recessed cabinets, provide semi-recessed fire-protection cabinets.



2. Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.

F. Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.

G. Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that latching devices operate properly.

H. Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair.




SITE FURNISHINGS 12 9300 - 1

SECTION 12 9300 – SITE FURNISHINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SITE FURNISHINGS

A. Benches 1. DuMor Bench #270-601 (6 each) 6’ bench with back and armrests 2. DuMor bench 271-601 (3 each) 6’ bench without back but with armrests

B. Bicycle Racks 1. Sportworks Northwest, Inc, Circular Rack 3014 Series, 4 each: (Alt: DuMor Bollard

401, 36” high Bike Bollard-2 loops, Black 4 each)

Sportworks 15540 Wood Red Rd NE Building A-200 Woodinville, WA 98072-4508 888-661-0555, 425-483-7000 [email protected]

C. Play Structure 1. Playworld Power Junction FUN-1486 ages 2-12, Blue and yellow 2. Northwest Playground Equipment, Issaquah, WA

D. Exercise Equipment 1. Greenfields Outdoor Fitness

E. Barbeque DuMor Grill 24-00, double, family size

F. Ash Urn 1. DuMor Ash Urn 80




ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS 14 2100 - 1

SECTION 14 2100 - ELECTRIC TRACTION ELEVATORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes electric traction passenger elevators.

B. Related Sections: 1. Section 03 3000 – Cast-in-Place Concrete 2. Section 05 5000 – Metal Fabrications 3. Division 23 – Heating, Ventilating, and Air Conditioning 4. Division 26 – Electrical and Electric Power Generating and Storing Equipment 5. Division 27 – Voice Communications 6. Division 28 – Fire Detection and Alarm 7. Division 31 – Earthwork

1.2 DESCRIPTION OF ELEVATOR

A. Elevator Equipment: Otis Gen2 Machine-Roomless, Gearless, 3500 lb, 200 fpm.

B. Equipment Control: Elevonic Control System.

C. Drive: Regenerative

D. Quantity of Elevators: 1

E. Landings: 4 Stops

F. Openings: Front.

G. Travel: Refer to Drawings.

H. Rated Capacity: 3500 lb.

I. Rated Speed: 200 fpm

J. Car Inside Dimensions (W x D): 6’-5 9/16 ” W x 5’-5 9/16 ” D, verify

K. Cab Height: 9’-0”

L. Entrance Width & Type: Single slide door.

M. Entrance Width: 3'-6”




N. Main Power Supply: 480 Volts + 5% of normal, three-Phase, with a separate equipment grounding conductor. Transformer (by others) required for voltages other than 208, 220-240, 440-480 volts.

O. Operation: Simplex

P. Machine Location: Inside the hoistway mounted on car guide rail

Q. Control Room Space Location: Remote room at roof.

R. Elevator Equipment shall conform to the requirements of Seismic Zone D.

S. Maintenance Service Period: 12 Months

1.3 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

A. Auxiliary Operations: 1. Standby power operation. 2. Battery-powered lowering. 3. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. 4. Nuisance call cancel.

B. Security Feature: Card Reader Operation. Hardware by others.

C. Car Enclosures: Refer to Finish Schedule for Elevator Interior Finishes.

D. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish.

E. Additional Requirements: 1. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame

made from satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 2. Provide hooks for protective pads in all cars and two complete set(s) of full-height

protective pads. 3. Confirm with Owner whether security cameras are to be installed in the cab. 4. Confirm whether emergency responder jack is required for Fire Department handset.


A. Car Performance 1. Car Speed ± 5% of contract speed under any loading condition or direction of

travel. 2. Car Capacity: Safely lower, stop and hold (per code) up to 125% of rated load.

B. System Performance




1. Vertical Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 2. Horizontal Vibration (maximum): 25 mg 3. Jerk Rate (maximum): 1.3 ft/sec3 4. Acceleration (maximum) 1.3 ft/sec2 5. In Car Noise: = 55 dB(A) 6. Leveling Accuracy: ±0.2 inches 7. Starts per hour (maximum): 120


A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Show equipment arrangement in the machine room, pit and hoistway. Provide

plans, elevations, sections and details of assembly, erection, anchorage, and equipment location.

2. Indicate elevator system capacities, sizes, performances, safety features, finished and other pertinent information.

3. Show floors served, travel distances, maximum loads imposed on the building structure at points of support and all similar considerations of the elevator work.

4. Indicate electrical power requirements and branch circuit protection device recommendations.

C. Samples: For exposed finishes.

D. Closeout Submittals: 1. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency,

operation, and maintenance manuals. 2. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by

authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

E. Diagnostic Tools 1. Prior to seeking final acceptance for the completed project as specified by the

Contract Documents, the Elevator Contractor shall deliver to the Owner any specialized tool(s) that may be required to perform diagnostic evaluations, adjustments, and/or parametric software changes and/or test and inspections on any piece of control or monitoring equipment installed. This shall include any specialized tool(s) required for monitoring, inspection and/or maintenance where the means of suspension other than conventional wire ropes are furnished and installed by the Elevator Contractor. Any and all such tool(s) shall become property of the Owner. Any diagnostic tool provided to the Owner by the Elevator Contractor shall be configured to perform all levels of diagnostics, systems adjustment and parametric software changes which are available to the Elevator Contractor. In




those cases where diagnostic tools provided to the Owner require periodic recalibration/or re-initiation, the Elevator Contractor shall perform such tasks at no additional cost to the Owner for a period equal to the term of the maintenance agreement from the date of final acceptance of the competed project During those intervals in which the Owner might find it necessary to surrender a diagnostic tool for re-calibration, re-initiation, or repair, the Elevator Contractor shall provide a temporary replacement for the tool at no additional cost to the Owner. The Elevator Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, printed instructions for the proper use of any tool that may be necessary to perform diagnostic evaluations, system adjustment, and/or parametric software changes on any unit of microprocessor-based elevator control equipment and means of suspension other than standard elevator steel cables furnished and install by the Elevator Contractor. Accompanying the printed instructions shall be any and all access codes, password, or other proprietary information that is necessary to interface with the microprocessor-control equipment.


A. Manufacturer: Minimum of fifteen years experience in the fabrication, installation and service of elevators of the type and performance of the specified. The manufacturer shall have a documented quality assurance program.

B. Installer: The equipment manufacturer shall install the elevator.

C. Inspection and Testing: In accordance with requirements of local jurisdiction, obtain required permits, inspections and tests.


A. If the construction site is not prepared to receive the elevator equipment at the agreed ship date, the General Contractor shall be responsible to provide a safe, dry, and easily accessible storage area on or off the premises. Additional labor costs for double handling will be the responsibility of the general contractor.

B. Delivered elevator materials shall be stored in a protected environment in accordance with manufacturer recommendations. A minimum storage area of 10 feet by 20 feet is required adjacent to the hoistway.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer warranty for a period of one year. The warranty period is to begin upon Final Acceptance of the elevators by the Owner or Owner’s agent. Warranty covers defects in materials and workmanship. Damage due to ordinary use, vandalism, improper or insufficient maintenance, misuse, or neglect do not constitute defective material or workmanship.




1.9 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. The elevator manufacturer shall provide maintenance service consisting of regular examinations and adjustments of the elevator equipment for a period of 12 Months after date of substantial completion. Replacement parts shall be produced by the original equipment manufacturer.

B. Maintenance service be performed during regular working hours of regular working days and shall include regular time call back service.

C. Maintenance service shall not include adjustments, repairs or replacement of parts due to negligence, misuse, abuse or accidents.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Design for elevator systems is based upon products of the first listed manufacturer. Subject to compliance with design and performance requirements, additional elevator manufacturers may include but are not limited to Subject to compliance with requirements. 1. Otis Elevator Company 2. Other manufacturers:

a. ThyssenKrupp b. KONE

2.2 TRACTION SYSTEMS

A. Elevator Machines: Variable-voltage, variable-frequency, ac-type hoisting machines and solid-state power converters.

1. Limit total harmonic distortion of regenerated power to 5 percent per IEEE 519. 2. Provide means for absorbing regenerated power when elevator system is operating

on standby power.

B. Machine Beams: Provide framing to support elevator hoisting machine and deflector sheaves from the building structure. Comply with Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for materials and fabrication.

C. Guides: Roller guides or polymer-coated, non-lubricated sliding guides. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.




2.3 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation systems as required to provide type of operation indicated.

B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevators where indicated: 1. Group Standby Power Operation: On activation of standby power, cars are

returned, one at a time, to a designated floor and parked with doors open. If a car cannot be returned, it is removed from the system. When all cars have been returned or removed from the system, one car can be put in service on standby power by a selector switch in control panel located at main lobby.

2. Group Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails, cars that are at a floor remain at that floor, open their doors, and shut down. Cars that are between floors are lowered one at a time to the next floor below, open their doors, and shut down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system. (Price this function as an alternate)

3. Independent Service: Key-switch in car-control station removes car from group operation and allows it to respond only to car calls.

C. Security Feature: Security feature shall not affect emergency firefighters' service.

1. Card-Reader Operation: System uses card readers at car-control stations to authorize calls. Security system determines which landings and at what times calls require authorization by card reader. Allow space as indicated for card reader in car.

2. Elevators to tie in with building entry door security system so a person who is buzzed into the building has a period of time when they can access the elevator.

3. Elevators to have key fob functionality for access to floors. 4. Key-fob Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security key-fobs

at car-control stations.

2.4 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.




2.5 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide steel-framed car enclosures with non-removable wall panels, with car roof, access doors, power door operators, and ventilation.

1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Materials and Finishes: Refer to Finish Schedules: Amenity Spaces and Elevator Interior Finishes. Provide manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s textured stainless steel wall panels. 2. Stainless-Steel Doors and Door Frames. 3. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 4. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 5. Ceiling: Flat stainless steel ceiling panels with LED recessed down lights. 6. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated. 7. Flooring: See Elevator Interior Finish Schedule. Flooring provided and installed by

others. 8. Protective pad hooks and quilted fire retardant protective pads.

2.6 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to UL 10B.

1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Enameled-Steel Frames: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2. Star of Life Symbol: Identify emergency elevators with star of life symbol, not less than 3 inches high, on both inside surfaces of hoistway door frames.

3. Enameled-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. Provide with factory-applied enamel finish; colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.




4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 5. Sills: Extruded aluminum, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch thick. 6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, non-staining, noncorrosive,

nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.7 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard applied car-control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

D. Firefighters' Two-Way Telephone Communication Service: Provide flush-mounted cabinet in each car and required conductors in traveling cable for firefighters' two-way telephone communication service

E. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station.

F. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide hall push-button stations at each landing as indicated.

G. Car Riding Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide the following:

1. Units mounted in both jambs of entrance frame for each elevator.

H. Hall Annunciator: With each car lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down.

I. Standby Power Elevator Selector Switches: Provide switches, as required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44, where indicated. Adjacent to switches, provide illuminated signal that indicates when normal power supply has failed. For each elevator, provide illuminated signals that indicate when they are operational and when they are at the designated emergency return level with doors open.




J. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.

K. Provide elevator access to floors to be controlled by card readers inside the cab. Elevator access to floors to also be tied to lobby entry door king system to allow residents to buzz guests in and allow them to use the elevator for a brief period of time following entry into the building.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Field measure and examine substrates, supports, and other conditions under which elevator work is to be performed.

B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

C. Prior to start of Work, verify hoistway is in accordance with shop drawings. Dimensional tolerance of hoistway from shop drawings: -0 inches +2 inches. Do not begin work of this section until dimensions are within tolerances.

D. Prior to start of Work, verify projections greater then 2 inches (4 inches if ASME A17.1/CSA B44 2000 applies) must be beveled not less then 75 degrees from horizontal.

E. Prior to start of Work, verify landings have been prepared for entrance sill installation. Traditional sill angle or concrete sill support shall not be required.

F. Prior to start of Work, verify elevator pit has been constructed in accordance with requirements, is dry and reinforced to sustain vertical forces, as indicated in approved submittal. Verify that sumps or sump pumps located within pit will not interfere with installed elevator equipment.

G. Prior to start of Work, verify control space has been constructed in accordance with requirements, with access coordinated with elevator shop drawings, including Sleeves and penetrations.

H. Verify installation of GFCI protected 20-amp in pit and adjacent to each signal control cabinet in control space.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchors, bearing plates, brackets and other related accessories




3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install equipment, guides, controls, car and accessories in accordance with manufacturer installation methods and recommended practices.

B. Properly locate guide rails and related supports at locations in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations and approved shop drawings. Anchor to building structure using isolation system to minimize transmission of vibration to structure.

C. All hoistway frames shall be securely fastened to fixing angles mounted in the hoistway. Coordinate installation of sills and frames with other trades.

D. Lubricate operating system components in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

E. Perform final adjustments, and necessary service prior to substantial completion.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

B. Lubricate operating parts of systems, including ropes, as recommended by manufacturers.

C. Leveling Tolerance: 1/8 inch, up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

D. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

E. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. For groups of elevators, locate hall push-button stations between two elevators at center of group or at location most convenient for approaching passengers.


A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for each elevator used for construction purposes:




1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage.

2. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment.

3. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. 4. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains

of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Prior to substantial completion, engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate, adjust, and maintain elevator(s).

3.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Uniform Final Acceptance, maintenance service shall include twelve (12) months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity.


LIHI OLYMPIA COMMONS OLYMPIA, WASHINGTON

SECTION 210000 FIRE SPRINKLER NARRATIVE

10/2/15 - MEP Bid Set Section 220000- Page 1

SECTION 210000

FIRE SPRINKLER NARRATIVE PART 1• GENERAL

1.1 INTRODUCTION

A. Section includes: 1. The purpose of this section is to define the design approach upon which the

mechanical contractor is to base his bid and establish the design criteria, and design submittals, which will be required in the preparation and execution of the design.

2. All work under this section shall comply with the requirements of general conditions, supplemental conditions, special conditions, and division 1 - general requirements, and shall include all mechanical sections specified herein.

1.2 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS:

A. Design shall comply with rules and regulations of the following: 1. NFPA 13 (2010) - Standard for the Installation of Fire Sprinkler Systems 2. NFPA 14 (2010) - Standard for the Installation of Standpipes and Hose Systems 3. 2012 International Fire Code (IFC) 4. 2012 International Building Code (IBC) 5. All other applicable local jurisdiction amendments

1.3 PROJECT DELIVERY

A. This project is to be delivered design build. The design build contractors will be the engineers of record and create and stamp fully coordinated design documents for the project. Project shall be designed and stamped by a NICET certified designer who has attained level Ill or higher.

B. The Sprinkler Contractor will provide pricing that covers the complete scope of work required to deliver a fully functional and code compliant project.

C. Request for proposal (RFP): If there is a conflict between design documents and the RFP, the contractor will identify the discrepancy and request a clarification prior to RFP response.

D. Bidders are encouraged to provide voluntary alternates beyond the specific scope outlined in this narrative and the accompanying drawings.

E. Bidders are encouraged to contact the design team (through the channels identified by the issuer of the RFP) with clarification requests during the proposal process.

F. The architectural floor plans provided are not final. Pricing shall allow for equipment relocations due to minor interior layout modifications.

G. The bid proposals will identify scope gaps the contractor perceives and provide breakout pricing to cover these gaps.

H. The sprinkler contractor shall submit final CAD as-built drawings to the General Contractor for submittal to owner within two weeks of project completion or unless alternative timing is agreed to.




I. Operations and Maintenance manuals: Provide hard copy and electronic copies of O&Ms for ALL systems within TWO weeks of substantial completion.

J. Sprinkler contractor to provide owner training on all systems within the building. K. Definitions:

1. Complete system: the contract documents do not attempt to address all materials, devices, equipment, and work that shall be required for completion of the mechanical systems. All materials, devices, equipment, and work not addressed in the contract.

2. The sprinkler contractor is responsible for providing the finished plumbing work, tested, and ready for normal operation.

3. Sprinkler contractor shall properly store all materials and equipment in order to protect materials from physical damage or damage due to the elements or corrosion.

4. The sprinkler contractor shall make every effort to provide materials from a single manufacturer for any given material type, unless otherwise noted.

5. Materials shall be provided, installed, and/or used in conformance with the manufacturer's recommendations. If manufacturer's recommendations are not in conformance with the intent of the contract documents, obtain clarification from the architect and engineer prior to proceeding.

6. Coordination: check drawings of other trades to verify spaces in which work shall be installed. Establish exact locations of piping and ducts in such a manner as to conform to structure, avoid obstructions, and keep openings and passageways clear. Lines that must pitch or that must have a constant elevation, shall have the right-of-way over lines not so restricted. Maintain maximum headroom. If space conditions appear inadequate, notify the architect before proceeding with the work. Make reasonable modifications in the work without extra cost as needed to prevent conflict with work of other trades and for proper execution of the work.

7. Drawings and narratives shall be considered as a single entity, identified as the contract documents. Consider work indicated in one as required by both.

L. Codes, Permits, Inspections, and Fees: 1. The sprinkler contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections and pay all fees

required by state and local authorities, except as noted. 2. All work and materials shall be in accordance with requirements of all applicable

local and state codes, statues, standards and other regulations. Date of regulations shall be as adopted by local authorities at the time of permit intake, unless indicated otherwise.

3. The codes shall be construed as establishing a minimum or base level of requirements.

4. Where the contract documents call for material or construction of a better quality or higher capacity than required by the codes, statues, standards, and other regulations, the provisions of the contract documents shall take precedence over the requirements of the codes and standards.

5. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL testing laboratory service shall be listed by the underwriters laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. FM shall be allowed if acceptable to the authorities having jurisdiction.




6. Sprinkler contractor shall call for all inspections by the local code authorities when they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by these authorities.

M. Construction Coordination Drawings 1. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to work out and coordinate all conflicts

and to provide all transitions and offsets required to facilitate installation of work. Provide construction coordination drawings for congested areas requiring close coordination with other trades and the general construction. Grooved joint couplings and fitting shall be referred to on drawings and

product submittals, and be identified by the manufacturer's listed model or series designation.

Sprinklers shall be referred to on drawings and product submittals, and be specifically identified by the manufacturer's listed model or series designation.

2. The construction coordination drawings shall be submitted to the architect/owner/engineer for review prior to commencement of any related work. The construction coordination drawings shall be updated as needed during the execution of the work.

3. The construction coordination drawings shall show all related trades, structure, and ceiling, walls, and partitions. Provide cross sections of all congested areas.

4. The final as-built drawings shall be submitted at the completion of the project for record purposes in hard copy, pdf, as well as autocad electronic files.

N. Design, Submittals, Trade Coordination 1. The contractor shall coordinate their shop drawings with other trades prior

to shop drawing approval and construction. 2. No cutting or drilling of joists or beams will occur without structural engineer

approval. 3. Architectural drawings shall be checked for ceiling heights, walls, and cabinets

that are intended to conceal work of this section. Where conflicts occur, the architect shall be notified prior to rough-in or installation of the work. Location of exposed work such as diffusers, grilles, and piping outlets shall take precedence over concealed work.

4. Submittals: provide marked up submittal literature and show drawings clearly. Electronic submittals with original pdfs (avoid scanning) are preferred for mechanical consultant review. Additionally, conformance with division 1 specifications including hard copy requirements apply.

5. Submittal inclusions. Index Manufacturer's name and address, and supplier's name, address and phone number. Catalog designation or model number. Rough-in data and dimensions and cut sheets clearly identifying the specific model

and options. Performance curves and rated capacities. Motor characteristics and wiring diagrams. Operation characteristics for this application.




Installation as well as operation and maintenance manuals with specific model and features applicable to this installation identified.

Warranties. Spare parts lists as recommended by manufacturer for equipment. Factory certifications. Troubleshooting guides. Complete customized listing of characteristics, equipment, accessories, etc., specified. Indicate whether item is "As Specified" or "Proposed Substitution". Indicate any

deviations on submittal. Mark out all non-applicable items and/or clearly identify applicable items. The terminology "As Specified" used without clearly identifying applicable items is not acceptable. Show exactly what will be provided and include options or deletions.

6. Working construction shop drawings: complete equipment and materials submittals shall be provided in both printed and electronic format submitted per the time schedule issued by the owner/GC. Submittals shall be complete with all components included, installation manuals, and customized to this project's requirements. All submittals require owner and design team approval prior to purchase.

7. Contractor agrees that shop drawings submittals processed by the architect are not change orders, that the purpose of shop drawing submittals by the contractor is to demonstrate to the architect that the contractor understands the design concept and demonstrate its understanding by indicating which equipment and material it intends to furnish and install and by detailing the fabrication and installation methods it intends to use.

8. Contractor further agrees that if deviations, discrepancies, or conflicts between shop drawings and specifications are discovered either prior to or after shop drawing submittals are processed by the architect, the design drawings and specifications shall control and shall be followed.

9. Construction administration: the selected contractor will perform construction administration, including RFI responses, attendance at periodic meetings, formal review and approval of shop drawings and submittals, coordination with other trades, preparation of final punchlist.

10. Warranty period to extend for one year from date the project is occupied by the owner, not from the date of completion of the work. Warranty not applicable to defective items due to faulty work of subsequent trades.

11. As-builts: contractor shall maintain up to date as-built drawings showing all construction installation with any/all design changes. Drawings shall be maintained in the project office for inspection by the architect/owner at any time. Provide owner with reproducible and electronic (autocad and pdf files) as-built drawings within 4 weeks of project substantial completion. Drawings shall include final as-installed locations of all piping, valves, and sprinkler heads.

12. All work contracted for must be accepted by all applicable inspectors including site superintendent, GC quality control personnel, AHJ's, owner's representative (Rushing) or their assignees.

13. Provide manufacturers product, installation and warranty information for all products supplied with signed contract documents per an agreed upon schedule at




the time of contract award. This is of particular importance for GC to forward appropriate information to subcontractors to facilitate coordinated installation of his products.

14. During the construction phase of the project the contractor shall maintain a master punch list for items showing all problems discovered during field inspection, owner inspections, startup testing, functional testing and balancing. This list shall track each item to completion and require engineer signoff after completion is verified. Owner inspection items must be signed off by the owner's representative after completion is verified.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FIRE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS: A. Sprinkler system components shall be UL listed or factory mutual approved for all such

components that have a listing in the respective agency. B. A new 4" water supply service and meter in vault shall be supplied for the fire sprinkler

system. C. The sizing of the feed main sprinkler piping inside of the building shall be hydraulically

calculated based on the static pressure, residual pressure, and flow available. Anticipated size is 4".

D. Provide a double check type backflow preventer approved by the local authority having jurisdiction. Backflow preventer to be located in fire sprinkler pump room on Level 1 (see architectural plans for location).

E. All sprinkler piping upstream of the backflow preventer assembly shall be potable pipe acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction.

F. The site water as provided by Olympia F ire Department indicates that the site static pressure is 90 PSI at same elevation of first floor. Bidding contractor shall verify available water pressure available at the project site.

G. Provide 3-way fire department connection on exterior of the building with swing check valve and ball drip. Coordinate location of FDC with architect and local authorities having jurisdiction

H. Provide electric alarm bell on the exterior of the building in a constantly attended location. Coordinate the bell location with the architect and local authorities having jurisdiction.

I. Design a wet-pipe fire sprinkler system for all residential, public spaces, and all other heated areas of the building. Wet pipe fire sprinkler system shall be designed for light hazard occupancy in residential and public/office areas. System shall be designed for ordinary hazard in mechanical, electrical, and storage rooms in accordance with NFPA 13and City of Olympia requirements.

J. Provide dry- barrel type freezeless sprinklers or separate dry system to protect unheated areas such as the level 1 trash room.

K. All exterior overhangs deeper than 4'-0" shall be sprinkled per NFPA 13. Provide dry- barrel type freezeless sprinklers or separate dry system to protect these areas.

0. Provide automatic wet standpipes with 2-1/2" threaded hose valves in each heated interior stair in accordance with NFPA 14 requirements. Coordinate standpipe routing and hose valve locations with architect and local AHJ.




P. Provide manual dry standpipes with 2-1/2" threaded hose valves in each exterior stair in

accordance with NFPA 14 requirements. Coordinate standpipe routing and hose valve locations with architect and local AHJ.

Q. Standpipes shall be interconnected with isolation valves to allow maintenance on each individual standpipe without shutdown of the entire system.

R. Provide construction standpipes as required per 2012 SFC section 3313. Standpipe shall be installed when the progress of building construction reaches 40 feet in height above the lowest level of fire department access. Such standpipes shall be extended as construction progresses to have 2-1/2" threaded hose valve outlets within one floor of the highest point of construction.

S. Provide tamper switches at all shut-off valves and coordinate wiring with fire alarm contractor.

T. Provide a paddle type water flow switch at the sprinkler riser assembly and coordinate wiring with fire alarm contractor. Water flow switch shall be located upstream of the main drain and inspector test valves (or combined test and drain valve) as required by code and manufacturer installation requirements.

U. Floor controls are not required for wet systems on this project. Provide alternate pricing to include floor controls consisting of shut-off valves with integral tamper switches, paddle-type water flow devices, and test and drain valves.

V. All wet system drains shall be routed back to a hub drain in the fire sprinkler riser room or to a safe location outside of the building by the fire sprinkler contractor. Drain sizing and termination shall meet the requirements of NFPA 13 and the local AHJ. If drains are routed to the exterior of the building, coordinate routing and termination with architect.

W. Pipe routing to be coordinated by fire sprinkler contractor. Provide heat trace and insulation as required for wet sprinkler main running through unheated areas. Coordinate power requirements with electrical contractor.

X. Provide sprinkler coverage of all elevator shafts, pits, and machine rooms in accordance with NFPA13 and local AHJ requirements.

Y. Sprinkler body shall be die-cast, with a wrench boss integrally cast into the sprinkler body to reduce the risk of damage during installation. Wrenches shall be provided by the sprinkler manufacturer that directly engage the wrench boss.

Y. Sprinkler heads in residential finished ceilings shall be white semi-recessed style pendent or sidewall type heads. Provide glass bulb standard temperature quick response heads throughout.

Z. Sprinkler heads in non-residential finished ceilings shall be chrome plated semi-recessed pendent or sidewall type heads. Provide glass bulb standard temperature quick response heads throughout.

AA. Provide alternate pricing to install flat plate concealed sprinklers throughout levels 2, 3, & 4. Concealed sprinklers to have white cover plates with quick response, standard temperature sprinklers throughout.

BB. Sprinkler heads in occupied spaces without finished ceilings shall be brass upright, pendent, or sidewall type heads as appropriate. Provide head guards where required by code or where there is a risk of mechanical damage to the sprinklers. Provide glass bulb standard temperature quick response heads throughout.

CC. Sprinkler heads in mechanical rooms and other back of house spaces shall be brass upright, pendent, or sidewall type heads as appropriate. Provide head guards where required by code or where there is a risk of mechanical damage to the sprinklers. Provide glass bulb standard




temperature quick response heads throughout. DD. Provide a durable metallic box in the riser room with an acceptable stock of spare sprinkler heads

and installation wrenches as required by code. The box shall contain at least one (1) of each type of sprinkler installed within the building.

FF. Exposed piping 2 1/2" and larger shall be schedule 10 or schedule 40 black steel, joints shall be welded or roll-grooved. NFPA 13 compliant thin wall pipe (Allied brand Dyna-Flow or approved equal) is an acceptable alternate.

1. Mechanical Grooved Couplings shall be cast iron and comply with ASTM F1476 - Standard Specification for Performance of Gasketed Mechanical Couplings for Use in Piping Applications. Gaskets shall be pressure-responsive synthetic rubber with grade to suit the intended service.

GG. Exposed piping 2" and smaller shall be schedule 40 black steel. Joints shall be threaded or roll grooved. NFPA 13 compliant light weight threadable pipe (Allied brand Dyna-Thread or approved equal) is an acceptable alternate.

HH. UL listed CPVC piping may be utilized on residential floors where it is concealed and installed in accordance with applicable code and manufacturer listings.

II. Mechanical branch tees are not appropriate for new construction and are not allowed on this project. Contractor shall use groove-a-let and thread-a-let welded outlets or standard reducing tees.

JJ. Piping shall be run concealed in all areas with finished ceilings and locations must be coordinated with architect and interiors drawings.

KK. Design build sprinkler contractor to coordinate pipe routing and head locations with the architect, interiors architect, design team, and construction team with special attention to interior reflected ceiling and acoustical plans. Shop drawings shall be submitted with the above information for review and coordination prior to construction.

LL. In areas open to structure, sprinkler piping shall be routed tight to structure. Piping shall not be run in front of windows or beneath skylights. Contractor to pay special attention to routing in lobby areas.

MM. Provide pipe escutcheons at all public areas where sprinkler pipe penetrates walls. 1. Escutcheons and guards shall be listed, supplied, and approved for use with the

sprinkler by the sprinkler manufacturer. NN. The fire sprinkler contractor shall fire stop all locations where the sprinkler piping penetrates a

fire rated wall. Fill all voids with mineral wool and caulk with lntumescent fire caulking.




00. Provide heat trace and insulation of wet sprinkler main running through unheated areas of the

building at minimum 5 watts/ foot. Heat trace is to be listed for use with fire protection equipment. Coordinate with electrical contractor for wiring of heat trace.

PP. Provide sprinkler connection to built-in trash chute fire sprinklers as required. If the trash chute system does not contain built-in fire sprinklers, provide coverage per NFPA 13 and local AHJ requirements in each chute.

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION AND INSTALLATION

A. Install all materials in accordance with code and manufacturer requirements and best industry practices.

B. Receive and store all materials on site in such a way as to protect uninstalled items from damage.

C. Grooved joints shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's latest published installation instructions. Grooved ends shall be clean and free from indentations, projections, and roll marks. Gaskets shall be molded and produced by the coupling manufacturer and shall be verified as suitable for the intended service. A factory-trai ned field representative (direct employee) of the mechanical joint manufacturer shall provide on-site training for contractor's field personnel in the proper use of grooving tools and installation of grooved piping products. The factory-trained representative shall periodically review the product installation and ensure best practices are being followed. Contractor shall remove and replace and improperly installed products. A distributor's representative is not considered qualified to conduct the training.

D. Do not install any sprinklers that have been dropped, damaged, or show a visible loss of fluid. Never install any sprinkler with a cracked bulb.

3.2 TEST AND INSPECTION

A. System shall be tested and inspected. Sprinkler contractor is responsible for all required startup and testing. Coordinate with local authority having jurisdiction and all other authorities having jurisdiction for inspection and acceptance.

B. Provide copies of all sprinkler system test certificates, including all signatures, to owner for building records.

END OF SECTION

SECTION 220000 PLUMBING NARRATIVE

1.1. INTRODUCTION

1.1.1. Section Includes 1.1.1.1. The purpose of this section is to define the design approach upon which the

mechanical design/build is to base his bid and establish the design criteria, and design submittals, which will be required in the preparation and execution of the design.

1.1.1.2. All work under this section shall comply with the requirements of general conditions, supplemental conditions, special conditions, and Division 1 - general requirements, and shall include all mechanical sections specified herein.

1.2. APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARD 1.2.1. Design and installation shall comply with rules and regulations of the following:

1.2.1.1. Current Local Energy Code 1.2.1.2. Current Local Mechanical code 1.2.1.3. Current Local Fuel gas code 1.2.1.4. Current Local Fire code 1.2.1.5. Current Local Building Code 1.2.1.6. 2012 Uniform Plumbing Code (UPC) with Washington State 1.2.1.7. ASHRAE 90.1-2007 Mandatory Provisions 1.2.1.8. Evergreen Standard Version 2.2 1.2.1.9. Local and State Fire Marshal Requirements 1.2.1.10. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 1.2.1.11. 2008 WAC 296-46B Electrical Safety Standards, Administration, and Installation 1.2.1.12. 2008 National Electrical Code 1.2.1.13. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) 1.2.1.14. 2006 RCW Chapter 19.28 Electricians and Electrical Installations 1.2.1.15. State & Local Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 1.2.1.16. All other applicable jurisdictional amendments 1.2.1.17. WA State Underground Damage Prevention Act ('Call Before you Dig') - RCW

19.122 1.2.1.18. Federal Americans With Disabilities Act (ADA) 1.2.1.19. All applicable local jurisdiction amendments.

1.3. PROJECT DELIVERY

1.3.1. This project is to be delivered design build. The design build contractor responsible for all Plumbing systems shall be the plumbing contractor (PC) and will be the engineer of record and create and stamp fully coordinated design documents for the project.

1.3.2. The PC is encouraged to provide voluntary alternates beyond the specific scope outlined in this narrative and the accompanying drawings.

1.3.3. The PC will provide bid response that covers the complete scope of work required to deliver a fully functional and code compliant project.

1.3.4. Contractor shall attend design coordination meetings as needed. 1.3.5. The architectural floor plans provided are not final. Pricing shall allow for equipment

relocations due to minor interior layout modifications. 1.3.6. The design build bid package will be utilized as a basis of design through the completion of

design and construction. As the design proceeds deviations from this package are to be clearly noted for the architect, owner, and peer review team for acceptance prior to design completion.

1.3.7. Owner’s representative will continue in a peer review / owner advocacy role after the design build contractor takes over drawing production (post 100% DD). The Permit Set or 90% CD Set will be reviewed by Owner’s representative and a comment resolution process will followed through to completion.

GuyP

Text Box

PLUMBING NARRATIVE 22 0000

1.3.8. The PC will provide budget/estimate response that covers the complete scope of work required to deliver a fully functional and code compliant project. Request for proposal (RFP). If there is a conflict between design documents and the RFP, the contractor will identify the discrepancy and request a clarification prior to RFP response.

1.3.9. Design drawings, submittals, and shop drawings will be reviewed for conformance with the bid package as well as conformance with codes and accepted practice. Discrepancies will be noted for team review prior to acceptance.

1.3.10. Complete equipment and materials submittals shall be provided in both printed and electronic format submitted per the time schedule issued by the Owner/GC. Submittals shall be complete with all components included, installation manuals, and customized to this project's requirements. All submittals require Owner and design team approval prior to purchase. The project specific equipment model numbers, options, and features are to be clearly marked within the literature. Electronic submittals with original PDF's (avoid scanning) are requested for consultant review. Additionally, conformance with Division 1- specifications including hard copy requirements apply.

1.3.11. Shop drawings will be submitted for design team review prior to construction. The PC shall coordinate their shop drawings with other trades prior to shop drawing approval and construction.

1.3.12. Construction Administration: The selected Contractor will perform construction administration, including RFI responses, attendance at periodic meetings, formal review and approval of shop drawings and submittals, coordination with other trades, preparation of final punchlist.

1.3.13. All work contracted for must be accepted by all applicable inspectors including Site Superintendent, GC Quality Control Personnel, AHJ's, Owner's Representative or their assignees.

1.3.14. Warranty period to extend for one year from date the project is occupied by the Owner, not from the date of completion of the work. Warranty not applicable to defective items due to faulty work of subsequent trades.

1.3.14.1. The PC shall submit final CAD as-built drawings to the General Contractor for submittal to Owner within two weeks of project completion or unless alternative timing is agreed to. Drawings shall be submitted in PDF and original AutoCAD formats.

1.3.14.2. O&Ms: Provide hard copy and electronic copies (PDF) of O&Ms for ALL systems within TWO weeks of substantial completion.

2. Codes, Permits, Inspections, and Fees: 2.1. The PC shall obtain all permits and inspections and pay all fees required by State and Local

authorities, except as noted. 2.2. All work and materials shall be in accordance with requirements of all applicable local and

state codes, statues, standards and other regulations. Date of regulations shall be as adopted by local authorities at the time of permit intake, unless indicated otherwise.

2.3. The codes shall be construed as establishing a minimum or base level of requirements. Contract Documents shall not be construed to permit or direct work not in conformance with codes, statues, standards and other regulations. Where provisions of the various regulations conflict with each other, or with the Contract Documents, the more stringent provisions shall be included in contract pricing. Conflict shall be resolved with the Architect and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ) prior to completing the design.

2.4. Where the Contract Documents call for material or construction of a better quality or higher capacity than required by the codes, statues, standards, and other regulations, the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence over the requirements of the codes and standards.

2.5. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used and shall bear their listing mark. ETL or CSA shall be allowed if acceptable to the Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs).

2.6. PC shall call for all inspections by the local code authorities when they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by these authorities.

3. MISCELLANEOUS SCOPE ITEMS:

3.1. The PC is to review the Div 23 narrative for scope impacts including all split system condensate piping, condenser section drain pans. Piping in retail and amenities will all be plenum rated.

3.2. Property line acoustic calculations, for the domestic hot water plant will be by the architectural design team's acoustician prior to permit submittal.

3.3. It is the responsibility of the project acoustical engineer to provide the requisite analysis to assure the team of acceptable acoustical performance of each system.

3.4. The structural engineer is responsible for all structural calculations required for the supporting structure for permit intake.

3.5. PC shall include structural tie-down calculations for all equipment as required by the ASCE 7-05. This will be a deferred permit submittal.

3.6. PC is to provide and install fire stopping of all through and membrane penetrations as required by the applicable codes. Floor penetrations to include watertight seal where noted on plans and/or details.

3.7. All ductwork, piping, plumbing, and equipment are to be seismically restrained as required per local codes.

3.8. All code required access panels in walls and/or ceilings are provided and installed by the plumbing contractor. PC to coordinate required locations and sizes with the architect and GC.

3.9. The contractors will provide and install phenolic tags identifying each specific piece of equipment.

3.10. All exposed piping in mechanical rooms will be labeled in compliance with accepted industry standards and building standards.

4. COORDINATION 4.1. All pipe routing and equipment locations shall be coordinated with full design team including but

not limited to architect, interior designer, and acoustical engineer. 4.2. No cutting or drilling of joists or beams will occur without Structural Engineer approval. 4.3. PC shall coordinate with the architect a minimum 36" clearance or more in front of equipment

access panels for servicing as required by applicable code, NEC, and the AHJ. 4.4. Cutting, framing, patching and painting of wall, ceiling and floor openings shall be by others. 4.5. Sump Pump control panels are provided by the PC and are installed (mounted) and wired by the

electrical contractor. 4.6. Electrical contractor shall furnish and install magnetic motor starters for all equipment % hp and

greater unless a VFD is provided. Provide service and disconnect per code, and do all power wiring, including connecting to equipment. Holding coil circuit shall be powered by electrical contractor (120/1 unless indicated otherwise). All starters shall be provided with H-O-A switch.

4.7. VFD's (where required) are provided by the PC and are installed (mounted) and wired by the electrical contractor. Disconnects will be provided integral with the VFD's. VFD's will not be provided with manual or automatic bypass.

5. EVERGREEN STANDARD 5.1. The Evergreen Standard certification shall be achieved for the project as outlined below. The

following table provides the Design Build scope of work associated with each point. These are the only points expected to impact the contractor scope of work.

5.2. Water-conserving fixtures are mandatory 5.2.1. In new construction and when fixtures are replaced in rehabilitation, install WaterSense

labeled water-conserving fixtures with the following specifications: 5.2.1.1. Toilets - 1.28 gpf (gallons per flush) or less, WaterSense labeled with MaP test

performance at minimum 500g. 5.2.1.2. Showerheads - 2.0 gpm (gallons per minute) or less, WaterSense labeled 5.2.1.3. Kitchen faucets - 2.0 gpm or less

5.2.1.4. Bathroom faucets - 1.5 gpm or less, WaterSense labeled 5.3. Water heaters, condensing boilers, furnaces, and air conditioning - mold prevention Mandatory for

new construction and must include Drain pans will be included for all water heaters as required by UPC section 508.3.

5.4. Piping will be insulated per the WSEC and UPC. 5.4.1. Insulate all hot water pipes from the hot water heater to point of use. Insulate exposed

cold water pipes in climates and building conditions susceptible to moisture condensation. Insulate all cold water pipes in locations where freezing is a possibility including exterior walls and unheated attics or crawl spaces.

5.4.2. Insulate domestic hot water pipes between the water heater and fixtures per the code tables.

5.4.3. Insulate copper (if used) domestic cold water mains. 5.4.4. Insulate all domestic cold water exposed to ambient conditions including within wall cavities

and within roof joist space to minimum R-3 (minimize occurrences). 5.5. CURRENT LOCAL ENERGY CODE C409.1 ENERGY METERING AND ENERGY

CONSUMPTION MANAGEMENT 5.6. SEC C409.1 General. Buildings with a gross conditioned floor area over 20,000 square feet shall

comply with Section C409. Buildings shall be equipped to measure, monitor, record and display energy consumption data for each energy source and end use category per the provisions of this section, to enable effective energy management. For Group R-2 multi-family buildings, the floor area of dwelling units shall be excluded from the total conditioned floor area. Alterations and additions to existing buildings shall conform to Section C409.5.

6. PRODUCTS 6.1. 2.1 PLUMBING SYSTEMS GENERAL 6.1.1. All plumbing products in contact with potable water shall be certified Lead Free and NSF 61/

NSF 6.1.2. 372 compliant 6.1.3. All plumbing in areas that contain plenums are to be plenum compatible. No plastic material

will be utilized unless noted otherwise. 6.1.4. Plumbing materials are per the materials matrix. 6.1.5. Where PVC materials are provided, PC shall provide solid wall piping. Cellular (foam) core

piping is not allowed. 6.1.6. All plastic piping installed underground shall be installed in accordance with ASTM D 2321

and ASTM F 1668 as well as all manufacturer guidelines. 6.1.7. PVC & CPVC piping is not allowed in plenum spaces unless it is specifically listed for such

use. 6.1.8. Plastic piping is not acceptable where water discharge temperatures exceedl402 F. 6.1.9. Provide cleanouts on sanitary sewer system as required by code. 6.1.10. Plumbing is to be insulated per 2012 WSEC & SEC requirements. 6.1.11. Trap primers shall be installed to serve all floor drains. Trap seal protection devices such as

"Sure- 6.1.12. Seal" or other approved alternates may be utilized to serve floor drains in normally

unoccupied rooms (boiler rooms, mechanical rooms, etc.). Mechanical trap seal devices shall not be utilized at drains conveying food particulates or other debris (i.e. trash rooms). Electronic or flow activated trap primers (PPP Prime Pro) shall be used in lieu of the pressure drop activated type due to inadequate pressure fluctuations within the domestic water distribution piping. Tailpiece trap primers may be used from other than coffee kitchen sinks.

6.1.13. All plumbing is to be pressure tested in accordance with code and accepted standards. 6.1.14. All isolation valves are to be installed in accessible locations. Plumbing contractor is to

provide access panels and coordinate installation by others as required for access to valves. 6.1.15. All fixtures shall be provided and installed to comply with Washington state accessibility

codes or per other architectural directions.

6.1.16. All fixtures to be provided and installed to comply at a minimum with Washington state water conservation performance standards and UPC maximum flow rate standards.

6.1.17. The plumbing contractor shall route plumbing vents so as to maintain minimum 20 feet of clearance from outside air intakes.

6.1.18. All water supply and waste and vent piping shall be secured in place with 3/16" neoprene strips wrapped around the pipe at stud penetrations or point of support to prevent direct contact with framing and resultant rattling and vibration.

6.1.19. Piping and fittings at all water outlets shall be rigidly fastened to structure to prevent movement.

6.1.20. All piping systems shall be installed with provisions for expansion and contraction as required.

6.1.21. The PC is to provide expansion loops, offsets, or other compensation devices in combination with guides and anchors as required to accommodate expected expansion and movement for operating temperatures between 40 and 145 F for the domestic hot water system. Provide professionally stamped expansion compensation design based on final shop drawings.

6.1.22. All piping systems shall be installed with provisions to accommodate wood structure settling. Floor movement parameters will be identified by the structural engineer and GC. Design for a minimum of 1" settling. Include in shop drawings.

6.1.23. All piping systems shall be installed with provisions for expansion and contraction as required by applicable codes. Include in shop drawings.

6.1.24. The air gap between party walls is to mitigate sound transference. Pipes placed within this air space air are to be isolated from the studs they pass through. Pipes serving any specific unit must be placed within the stud depth of the wall serving that unit only.

6.1.25. Run all water lines in warm areas where possible, avoiding exterior walls and blind corners. 6.1.26. The plumbing subcontractor is responsible to review plans to determine which walls, if any,

should be increased in depth from that shown on the plans to accommodate the subcontractor's piping. The plumbing subcontractor shall meet with the superintendent and framer to coordinate this sizing with the requirements of other trades.

6.1.27. The plumbing subcontractor will supply lead boot roof flashings for pipe penetrations prior to roofing as scheduled by the superintendent. Roof flashings mopped in by roofing contractor.

6.1.28. P.C. shall provide adequate expansion compensation in accordance with UPC Section 313.2.

6.1.29. All HVAC condensate is provided by the PC. Review HVAC deliverables for fan coils with condensate.

7. LEVEL I LOBBY AND COMMON ROOM: 7.1. PC to provide cold water, hot water, waste, vent, and fixtures for areas that are completely built

out (include all common areas and all fixtures shown on Architectural drawings). 7.2. Refer to plumbing fixture schedule for public lavatories, water closets, and other plumbing fixture

types and flow rates. 7.3. DHW for public fixtures will be served from a central water heater or local instantaneous point of

use electric heater (see Drawings). Provide ASSE 1070 mixing valve at public lavatories. 7.4. Provide appropriately sized condensate trap and condensate lines as required by code for all

HVAC units. 7.5. HVAC Condensate systems will be installed complete to an approved indirect drain connection

by the plumbing contractor. Condensate trap depth will be per manufacturer requirements and sized per plumbing code criteria. Horizontal condensate piping shall be insulated copper or plenum rated CPVC (Charlotte Pipe plenum rated Flowguard CPVC or equivalent). Vertical copper condensate requires insulation. Vertical CPVC condensate does not require insulation.

7.6. Elevator control room will be provided with a ductless heat pump by the MC. The PC will provide condensate piping. Provide hot water connection and reduced pressure backflow assembly for trash chute wash down at highest floor. Contractor shall provide an indirect drain for RPBA discharge.

8. WASTE AND VENT 8.1. Per 2012 UPC section 709.0 Plumbing fixtures shall be drained to the public sewer by gravity

Sanitary sewer inverts provided by the Civil Engineer indicate all sanitary drainage will be able to exit the building by gravity. No sump pumps will be required

8.2. Per 2012 UPC section 708.0 "Horizontal drainage piping shall be run in practical alignment and a uniform slope of not less than %" per foot or 2% toward the point of disposal provided that, where it is impractical due to the depth of the street sewer, to the structural features, or to the arrangement of a building or structure to obtain a slope of %" per foot or 2%, such pipe or piping 4" or larger in diameter shall be permitted to have a slope of not less than 1/8" per foot or 1%, where first approved by the Authority Having Jurisdiction." Final approval for any piping to be sloped at 1% shall be the responsibility of the plumbing contractor.

8.3. 2012 UPC section 710.1: "Fixtures installed on a floor level that is lower than the next upstream manhole cover of the public or private sewer shall be protected from backflow of sewage by installing an approved type of backwater valve. Fixtures on such floor level that are not below the next upstream manhole cover shall not be required to be protected by a backwater valve. Fixtures on floor levels above such elevation shall not discharge through the backwater valve." Contractor to provide backwater valve(s) downstream of any fixture draining to the public sewer by gravity and installed on a floor that is lower than the next upstream manhole. Preliminary evaluation is that fixtures on level 1 will be required to route through a backwater valve. Final determination TBD.

8.4. 2012 UPC Section 711:" Suds Relief. Drainage connections shall not be made into a drainage piping system within 8' of a vertical to horizontal change of direction of a stack containing suds-producing fixtures" unless the "Stacks are receiving the discharge from less than three stories of plumbing fixtures".

8.5. Materials: Refer to materials matrix. 8.6. Waste piping shall be PVC for all waste piping in residences, retail, and amenity spaces. Wrap

piping in acoustically sensitive areas with lagging material per acoustical report and specification section 098000. Vent piping shall be cast iron in all plenum space (above retail and amenity spaces) and ABS or PVC otherwise.

8.7. PVC and ABS may not be utilized in ceiling return air plenums (amenities or lobby). 8.7.1. PVC, where utilized, will be Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe and PVC DWV Fitting System. PVC

Cellular Core product is not allowed. PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. Injection molded PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Fabricated PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1866. Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two step process with primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564. Systems shall be hydrostatically tested after installation and before burial if below grade. Pipe and fittings shall conform to National Sanitation Foundation Standard 14.

8.7.2. All below grade PVC will be installed in strict adherence to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668 protocol. The plumbing contractor will be responsible for any and all below grade PVC failures within 5 years of burial.

8.8. PVC will not be utilized in any location where transport of 140*F water or greater can be expected now or in the future.

8.9. Expansion compensation for PVC is required per UPC 314. 8.10. All PVC piping will be supported with an approved hanger at intervals sufficiently close to

maintain correct pipe alignment and to prevent sagging or grade reversal. Pipe will also be supported at all branch ends and at all changes of direction. Support trap arms as close as possible to the trap.

8.11. The PC is to wrap all waste lines adjacent to bedrooms and living spaces and all horizontal overhead waste lines in residences for acoustic purposes with soundseal B10 QFA-3 or equivalent. Cast iron is an acceptable alternative to wrapped PVC.

8.12. All waste pipes shall be isolated from the structure using 1/4" thick neoprene sleeve or strips. Resilient fire caulking may also be used at opening to meet this requirement per acoustical report. Openings shall be oversized for the full depth of the opening so that the pipe can be supported on both sides of the opening without contact.

8.12.1.1. Center all vertical waste lines in the interior walls. Route waste and vent lines in party walls where possible. Vertical waste and vent lines should share the same stud framing bay where possible to minimize cutting of framing studs.

8.13. Nail plates shall be installed wherever needed and when piping is within 1-1/2 inches of the edge of a framing member and as required by code. Leaks due to drywall nails/screws penetrating pipes due to omission of or incorrectly installed nail plates will be repaired at subcontractors' expense.

8.14. Waste clean outs shall be installed in unfinished space whenever possible. Otherwise locate within wall and cover by an approved metal access cap. PC is responsible for verifying wall thickness prior to installing pipe.

8.15. All plumbing shall be plugged and capped during installation and kept free of contamination and debris.

8.16. Sewer connections shall be coordinated with the civil engineer per superintendents' direction. The utility contractor is to make all side sewer connections. A new 6" sanitary sewer connection has been coordinated, see drawings for location. Final location and elevations to be verified and coordinated by PC.

8.17. Provide hub drains for sprinkler system blow down, standpipe drains, and trapped low points of sprinkler system as needed.

8.18. Provide floor drains in the common area bathrooms, mechanical rooms, and trash rooms. Drains to be installed with trap primers.

8.19. Trap primers shall be installed to serve all floor drains. Trap seal protection devices such as "Sure- Seal" or other approved alternates may be utilized to serve floor drains in normally unoccupied rooms (boiler rooms, mechanical rooms, etc.). Mechanical trap seal devices shall not be utilized at drains conveying food particulates or other debris (i.e. trash rooms). Electronic or flow activated trap primers (PPP Prime Pro) shall be used in lieu of the pressure drop activated type due to inadequate pressure fluctuations within the domestic water distribution piping. Tailpiece trap primers may be used from other than coffee kitchen sinks.

9. STORM DRAINAGE 9.1. A code compliant rain leader and overflow rain leader system will be provided from all drains

to the exterior of the building by PC. 9.2. Materials: Refer to materials matrix. 9.3. All horizontal rain leaders and overflow leaders will be insulated. 9.4. PVC, where utilized, will be Schedule 40 Solid Wall Pipe and PVC DWV Fitting System. PVC

Cellular Core product is not allowed. PVC Schedule 40 pipe shall be Iron Pipe Size (IPS) conforming to ASTM D 1785 and ASTM D 2665. Injection molded PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM D 2665. Fabricated PVC DWV fittings shall conform to ASTM F 1866. Solvent cement joints shall be made in a two step process with primer manufactured for thermoplastic piping systems and solvent cement conforming to ASTM D 2564. Systems shall be hydrostatically tested after installation and before burial if below grade. Pipe and fittings shall conform to National Sanitation Foundation Standard 14.

9.5. All below grade PVC will be installed in strict adherence to ASTM D 2321 and ASTM F 1668 protocol. The plumbing contractor will be responsible for any and all below grade PVC failures within 5 years of burial.

9.6. Expansion compensation for PVC is required per UPC 314. 9.7. All PVC piping will be supported with an approved hanger at intervals sufficiently close to

maintain correct pipe alignment and to prevent sagging or grade reversal. Pipe will also be supported at all branch ends and at all changes of direction.

9.8. Slopes and cleanouts to be provided as code requires. 9.9. Roof drains and overflow roof drains will be provided and installed by the plumbing contractor.

Coordinate with roofing contractor for proper installation details. 9.10. All roof drain bodies, deck drain bodies, horizontal rain leaders and overflow rain leaders

through conditioned spaces will be insulated. 9.11. Overflow roof drains will be piped separately from horizontal rain leaders and will connect to

vertical rain leader risers. Route all rain leaders to connections as indicated in the plumbing plans and coordinated with civil plans.

9.12. Provide drains and drainage system for courtyard areas and canopies and in planters. 9.13. Provide drains at each entry at grade in low spots created by sidewalk adjacencies. 9.14. P.C shall provide adequate expansion compensation in accordance with UPC section 313.2 9.15. Storm utility connections shall be coordinated with civil engineer and utility plans per

superintendents' direction. The utility contractor is to make storm connections. Storm service line sizes and locations on the drawings are provided for initial coordination.

10. DOMESTIC WATER METERING 10.1. This project will not have a central domestic hot water plant. Hot water meters are not

required. 10.2. Per owner direction, domestic cold water meters are not required for this project. Install a

standard manufacturer spool piece and couplings for a future domestic cold water meter in each residence downstream of unit isolation valve.

11. DOMESTIC WATER 11.1. All valves, piping, and equipment used in the domestic water system will be certified Lead

Free and ANSI/NSF 61 & 372 approved per the 2012 UPC. 11.2. Materials: Refer to materials matrix. 11.3. Individual residential unit DCW isolation valves shall be located with the water meters, and

be easily accessible after installation and provided with a pre-printed label "unit water shut off".

11.4. UPC-listed AA arresters shall be installed at the dishwasher and washing machine boxes in all residences.

11.5. CPVC supply mains and risers through studs or supported from studs within units will utilize 3/16" neoprene strips to isolate the pipe from direct contact with studs.

11.6. Brass fittings for PEX piping shall be certified lead free and resistant to dezincification. Provide Wirsbo or approved equal.

11.7. Plumbing insulation shall comply with current Energy Code. Per ESDS standard, DHW insulation shall be provided complete from hot water source to the plumbing fixture. Insulation shall be per WSEC and UPC code tables.

11.8. Insulate all metallic domestic cold water mains with minimum 12" glass fiber insulation to prevent condensation.

11.8.1. Provide sectional DCW isolation valves at risers serving multiple units. Units to be located per plumbing plans. Provide 18x18 access panel for each riser shutoff or group of shutoffs where located above GWB ceilings in corridor.

11.9. Balance valves used in the system will be pressure independent with P/T ports and stainless components. The balance valve locations will be coordinated with access panels by PC as required.

11.10. Provide plenum rated materials for all plumbing systems exposed in areas that contain plenums.

11.11. The water lines are to be connected to and coordinated with the service/supply lines at the meter location, trenching is by others. PC to include all piping from the building to the exterior meter box.

11.12. A water availability certificate dated 4/8/2011 indicates that static pressure for this site is 66 psi at an elevation of 278. A domestic water booster pump will be required for this project.

11.13. A duplex booster pump system is to be provided. Provide appropriately sized booster pump on factory skid with listed VFD's, alternator, and control panel. Provide and install a pressure switch at an approved location which will provide adequate control without short cycling the pumps.

11.14. Provide an appropriately sized hydro-pneumatic tank for system. 11.15. Provide dual reduced pressure backflow assemblies (piped in parallel configuration) in water

service entry room on level 1 and install in compliance with applicable local and state codes. Provide hub drain for backflow assembly relief discharge.

11.16. Non freeze hose bibs with isolation valve and removable keys are required in building exterior locations at street levels as well as all public courtyards/ terraces and at roof level

where noted on the drawings. Provide Woodford Model B65 or equivalent. Provide stand alone roof hydrants where noted at the roof. Provide Woodford Model RHYS-1 or equivalent.

11.17. Provide hot and cold water hose bibb at trash room and north rooftop penthouse. 11.18. Provide capped 1" DCW connection with isolation valve in water entry room for future

installation of backflow and connection to serve future liquid composting system. 11.19. Provide hot water connection and reduced pressure backflow assembly for trash chute wash

down at highest floor. Contractor shall provide an indirect drain for RPBA discharge. Backflow assembly shall be rated for continuous use at 140*F.

12. DOMESTIC HOT WATER 12.1. Domestic hot water with the units is to be supplied by electric water heaters located in each

individual residential unit. Provide 30 gallon, 4.0 KW lowboy electric tank water heaters as scheduled in the drawings. Basis of design is Bradford White. Final quantity and locations yet to be determined by architect and owner.

12.2. Domestic hot water for the laundry washing is to be 80 gallon electric tank water heater at each laundry area. Provide all accessories included in the plumbing details.

12.3. Domestic hot water for the lavatory in the common restrooms, and the Common area is to be provided by point of use instantaneous hot water heaters. Heaters are to be sized to provide 100*F water at the full flow rate of the fixtures served.

12.4. All tank-type water heaters located in unconditioned spaces or on concrete floors shall be placed on an incompressible, insulated surface with thermal resistance of R-10 per SMC Section C404.5. Install seismic tie-down straps per UPC 507.2 on each heater.

12.5. Tank heaters to include glass lining and be NSF 372 certified. Provide appropriately sized drain pan for each tank heater.

12.6. Water heaters shall be piped per all manufacturer recommendations. Contractor to include isolation valves, unions, and pete's plugs on inlet and outlet of heater. Pipe ASME temperature and pressure relief valve to indirect drain. Install temperature gauge on outlet of each heater.

13. IRRIGATION SYSTEM 13.1. The PC will provide a double check backflow preventer (DCVA) in the bike room to serve the

irrigation system. Irrigation piping and valves inside the building is by the PC. Irrigation piping system is to be routed to level 1 POC, rooftop POC, and all other planned planting areas. See Landscape plans for additional scope notes. Piping is to be plenum rated in all commons / amenities areas. Insulate metallic piping installed within conditioned areas. Irrigation water is to be metered separately from the domestic water in the street. Meter to be located and installed per civil drawings

13.2. Size irrigation piping to provide required flow and pressure at the point of connection. PC to verify required pressure and flow rate at each connection with landscape architect.

13.3. Route all irrigation piping in Type L copper sized for no more than 5 ft/ sec flow rate. Other materials may be used if pipe sizing is calculated to meet the flow and pressure requirements for the irrigation system.

14. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND APPLIANCES

14.1. Garbage disposals will be provided and installed by the PC (1/2 hp). 14.2. Dishwasher rough in and hook-up is to be provided including UPC-listed AA arrester. 14.3. Provide laundry boxes including UPC-listed AA arresters and isolation valves. Laundry

boxes will be appropriately rated for the wall in which they are installed. Coordinate accessible location in laundry closet.

14.4. All water closets to be low flow single flush fixtures in both residential and public/ amenity spaces.

14.5. All plumbing fixtures are to be low-flow. Final required flow rates to be determined. See the plumbing fixture schedule in the plumbing drawings for preliminary fixtures and flow rates.

14.6. Low flow fixtures shall be Water Sense certified. 14.7. Plumbing fixtures and trim are to be provided and installed by PC.

14.8. Provide a wall box above counter with isolation valve for coffee maker connection in common kitchens and staff break areas.

14.9. Provide under-counter DCW connection for refrigerators at all accessible (ADA) residential units. Connection is not required at standard residential units.

14.10. Check tub/shower rough openings to make sure they are plumb, square, are the proper size to allow for true and proper installation according to manufacturer's recommended installation instructions and provide adequate support and backing prior to installation of product.

14.11. Fasten all tub/shower valves etc. securely to backing. Loose valves, gooseneck or tub spouts will be deemed unacceptable and shall be subcontractor's responsibility to repair.

14.12. Plumber is responsible for verifying finish floor elevations and setting all floor drains to the appropriate correct elevation.

14.13. Exposed water supply and toilet handles shall be matched in finish to the faucet selection in that room unless specifically agreed to in writing.

14.14. Spigot, gooseneck and valve escutcheon rings shall be caulked to the tubs/showers/countertop/wall as applicable. Sinks and deck mount tubs shall be caulked to the decks using white silicone caulk. Showerhead goosenecks shall be set at 80 inches off the finished floor unless otherwise specified.

14.15. Contractors are to provide rough in and final connections to all appliances and fixtures.

15. PREPARATION & INSTALLATION 15.1. All work contracted for must be accepted by all applicable inspectors including site

superintendent, GC quality control personnel, owner's representative or their assignees. 15.2. Piping shall be run concealed in all areas with finished ceilings and locations must be

coordinated with architect and interiors drawings. 15.3. Design build plumbing contractor is to coordinate pipe routing with the architect, interiors

architect, design team, and construction team with special attention to interior reflected ceiling and acoustical plans. Shop drawings shall be submitted with the above information for review and coordination prior to construction.

15.4. In areas open to structure, piping shall be routed tight to structure. Piping shall not be run in front of windows or beneath skylights. Contractor to pay special attention to routing in lobby areas.

15.5. As-builts: provide owner with electronic as-built drawings within two weeks of substantial completion. As-builts will reflect all changes from the construction drawing set and will comply with 2012 Washington State Energy Code project completion requirements. As-builts will also comply with architectural specification sections.

15.6. O&Ms: provide hard copy and electronic copies of O&Ms for all systems within two weeks of substantial completion. O&M's will also comply with architectural specification sections.

16. 3.2 TESTING & INSPECTION 16.1. The Plumbing Contractor is responsible for all Div 22 test, balance, commissioning and

startup of plumbing systems. 16.2. All plumbing systems are to be tested by the PC as required by the AHJ and UPC. 16.3. All commissioning will be in compliance with the methodologies of current industry standard. 16.4. The PC will execute all pre and final functional testing of plumbing systems to identify and

resolve deficiencies prior the final testing. 16.5. The PC will document deficiencies and provide equipment, materials, and labor necessary to

correct deficiencies found during the commissioning process to fulfill contract and warranty requirements.

16.6. Owner training will be provided by the installing contractor. 16.6.1. Water heaters 16.6.2. Circulation Pumps and hot water recirculation system. 16.6.3. Domestic hot water mixing valves

17. Alternates

17.1. Install water-conserving fixtures with the following specifications:

17.1.1. Toilets (2 points) - 1.1 gpf (maximum gallons per flush) or less, or a toilet with dual flush, one of the options being less than 1 gpf, WaterSense labeled.

17.1.2. Showerheads (2 points) - 1.75 gpm (gallons per minute) or less, WaterSense labeled. 17.1.3. Kitchen faucets (1 point) - 1.5 gpm or less 17.1.4. Bathroom faucets (1 point) - 0.5 gpm or less, WaterSense labeled 17.1.5. Electric (12 KW or less): Tank water heaters less than 70 gal must have an energy

factor of 0.93 or greater. Tank water heaters more than 70 gal must have an energy factor of 0.92 or greater.

17.2. Supply and install individual water meter system for each resident: 17.2.1. Install one domestic cold water meter in each residence by PC. Meter will be furnished by

PC. Meter to be Master Meter FAM or equivalent. The meters and meter bases are to be provided and installed by PC. Meters are to utilize wireless technology. Installation of wireless routers, central data logger, and phone line to central monitoring is by the EC.

17.2.1.1. The PC will install a meter spool piece and couplings for each meter prior to final installation of the meter. After pressure testing and initial system startup to eliminate debris, the meters and meterbases will be installed by the PC to replace the spool pieces.

17.2.1.2. The meters and spool pieces shall be located accessibly within the residential units. Meters and isolation valves shall be installed in the ceiling above an access panel. Final location to be coordinated with the architect.

17.2.1.3. Meter data procurement hardware and software is to be provided by the owner. EC is to provide receptacles for routers and central data logger.

17.2.1.4. The owner is to provide an Automated Meter Reading system (AMR) to collect the data from the meters. The AMR will be an Innovonics Tapwatch System or equivalent.

IT IS SPECIFICALLY UNDERSTOOD THAT SHOULD COST OF PROJECT CHANGE MORE THAN 5% FROM THE INTIAL BUDGET TO FINAL BID, CONTRACTOR RESERVES THE RIGHT TO BID OUT AND AWARD INSTALLATION TO ANOTHER PLUMBING CONTRACTOR USING STAMPED DRAWINGS PREPARED UNDER THIS AGREEMENT.

END OF SECTION

SCS Certified, King County SBE Certified, City of Tacoma

Radiant Plumbing & Heating, Inc 1423 E 29th, Ste 336, Tacoma, WA 98404

253-548-6723 [email protected] License# RADIAPH874OF

OLYMPIA COMMONS PLUMBING FIXTURES

EVERGREEN SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT STANDARD APARTMENT UNIT PLUMBING FIXTURES

Fixture Points Requirements Toilets Mandatory 1.28GPF or less, WaterSense labeled Lavatories 1 point 0.5GPF or less, WaterSense labeled Kitchen Faucets 1 point 1.5GPM or less Showerheads 2 points 1.75GPM or less, WaterSense

labeled Water Heaters Mandatory Electric water heaters 70-gallons or

less shall be 12KW or less and have an energy factor of 0.93 or greater

Water Heater Mandatory Electric water heaters 70-gallons or greater shall be 12KW or less and have an energy factor of 0.92 or greater

GuyP

Text Box

PLUMBING FIXTURES 22 0000

Emerald Aire, Inc Olympia Commons – 318 State

Project 2015-xxx

Permit Review – October 1, 2015

23 0000 - 1

SECTION 23 0000 - HVAC NARRATIVE

PART 1 - GENERAL INTRODUCTION

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The purpose of this section is to establish the design criteria, and design submittals, which

will be required in the preparation and execution of the design by Emerald Aire, Inc (“The

MC”). All work under this section shall comply with the requirements of general

conditions, supplemental conditions, special conditions, and division 1 - general

requirements, and shall include all mechanical sections specified herein.

1.2 APPLICABLE CODES & STANDARD

A. Design and installation shall comply with rules and regulations of the following:

1. 2012 Washington State Energy Code

2. 2012 International Mechanical Code w/ WAC 51-52 amendments

3. 2012 International Fuel Gas Code

4. 2012 International Fire Code w/ WAC 51-54A amendments

5. 2012 International Building Code w/ WAC 51-50 amendments

6. 2012 Uniform Plumbing Code w/ WAC 51-56,51-57 amendments

7. Evergreen Standard Version 2.2

8. City of Olympia Local Fire Marshal Requirements

9. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)

10. 2008 WAC 296-46B Electrical Safety Standards, Administration, and Installation

11. 2008 National Electrical Code with Local Amendments

12. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

13. 2006 RCW Chapter 19.28 Electricians and Electrical Installations

14. 2005 Washington Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code

15. Washington Cities Electrical Code

1.3 PROJECT DELIVERY

A. This project is to be delivered design build. The design build Subcontractor is responsi-

ble for all HVAC systems, referred to as the mechanical contractor (MC) will be the en-

gineer of record and create and stamp fully coordinated design documents for the pro-

ject.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 2

B. The MC is encouraged to provide voluntary alternates beyond the specific scope out-

lined in this narrative and the accompanying drawings.

C. The MC will provide bid response that covers the complete scope of work required to

deliver a fully functional and code compliant project. The proposals will identify scope

gaps the contractor perceives and provide breakout pricing to cover these gaps.

D. Preconstruction services include pricing of system options, estimating, and attendance

at design coordination meetings as required.

E. The MC will not be responsible for energy code envelope compliance calculations.

F. Contractor shall attend design coordination meetings as needed.

G. The architectural floor plans provided are not final. Pricing shall allow for equipment re-

locations due to minor interior layout modifications.

H. The design build bid package will be utilized as a basis of design through the comple-

tion of design and construction. As the design proceeds deviations from this package

are to be clearly noted for the Architect, owner, and peer review team for acceptance

prior to design completion.

I. Bids are to assume Owner’s Consultant will continue in a peer review I owner advocacy

role after the design build contractor takes over drawing production (post 50% DD).

The Permit Set or 90% CD Set will be reviewed by Owner’s Consultant and a comment

resolution process will be followed through to completion.

J. Design drawings, submittals, and shop drawings will be reviewed for conformance with

the design build bid package as well as conformance with codes and accepted practice.

Discrepancies will be noted for team review prior to acceptance.

K. Complete equipment and materials submittals shall be provided in both printed and

electronic format submitted per the time schedule issued by the Owner/GC. Submittals

shall be complete with all components included, installation manuals, and customized

to this project's requirements. All submittals require Owner and design team approval

prior to purchase. The project specific equipment model numbers, options, and fea-

tures are to be clearly marked within the literature. Electronic submittals with original

PDF's (avoid scanning) are requested for consultant review. Additionally, conformance

with Division - 1 specifications including hard copy requirements apply.

L. Shop drawings will be submitted for design team review prior to construction. The me-

chanical contractor shall coordinate their shop drawings with other trades prior to shop

drawing approval and construction.

M. Construction Administration: The selected Contractor will perform construction admin-

istration, including RFI responses, attendance at periodic meetings, formal review and

approval of shop drawings and submittals, coordination with other trades, preparation

of final punchlist.

N. All work contracted for must be accepted by all applicable inspectors including Site Su-

perintendent, GC Quality Control Personnel, AHJ's, Owner's Representative or their as-

signees.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 3

O. Warranty period to extend for one year from date the project is occupied by the

Owner, not from the date of completion of the work. Warranty not applicable to defec-

tive items due to faulty work of subsequent trades.

P. The MC shall submit final as-built drawings to the General Contractor for submittal to

Owner within two weeks of project completion or unless alternative timing is agreed to.

Drawings shall be submitted in PDF and original Auto-Cad formats.

Q. O&Ms: Provide hard copy and electronic copies (PDF) of O&Ms for ALL systems within

TWO weeks of substantial completion.

R. Codes, Permits, Inspections, and Fees:

1. The Mechanical Contractor shall obtain all permits and inspections and pay all fees

required by State and Local authorities, except as noted.

2. All work and materials shall be in accordance with requirements of all applicable local

and state codes, statues, standards and other regulations. Date of regulations shall

be as adopted by local authorities at the time of permit intake, unless indicated

otherwise.

3. The codes shall be construed as establishing a minimum or base level of

requirements. Contract Documents shall not be construed to permit or direct work

not in conformance with codes, statues, standards and other regulations. Where

provisions of the various regulations conflict with each other, or with the Contract

Documents, the more stringent provisions shall be included in contract pricing.

Conflict shall be resolved with the Architect and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ)

prior to completing the design.

4. Where the Contract Documents call for material or construction of a better quality or

higher capacity than required by the codes, statues, standards, and other regulations,

the provisions of the Contract Documents shall take precedence over the

requirements of the codes and standards.

5. Material and equipment within the scope of the UL Testing Laboratory Service shall

be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories for the purpose for which they are used

and shall bear their listing mark. ETL or CSA shall be allowed if acceptable to the

Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJs).

6. Mechanical Contractor shall call for all inspections by the local code authorities when

they become due and shall not cover any work until approved by these authorities.

1.4 MISCELLANEOUS SCOPE ITEMS:

S. Mechanical contractor is responsible for supplying equipment noise ratings, property

line noise calculations, a building site plan, and elevations on the mechanical drawing

set.

T. The structural engineer is responsible for all structural calculations required for the sup-

porting structure for permit intake.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 4

U. MC shall include structural tie-down calculations for all equipment as required by local

codes and the ASCE 7-05. This will be a deferred permit submittal.

V. Fire stopping of all through and membrane penetrations as required by the applicable

codes not in MC scope of work. Floor penetrations, by others, to include watertight seal

where noted on plans and/or details.

W. All ductwork, piping, plumbing, and equipment are to be seismically restrained as re-

quired per local codes.

X. All access panels in walls and/or ceilings are provided and installed by others. Mechani-

cal contractor to coordinate required locations and sizes with the architect and GC.

Y. The contractors will provide and install phenolic tags identifying each specific piece of

equipment.

Z. All MC exposed piping will be labeled in compliance w/ accepted industry standards

and building standards.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. All duct routing and equipment locations shall be coordinated with full design team in-

cluding but not limited to architect, interior designer, structural engineer, and acoustical

engineer.

B. No cutting or drilling of joists or beams will occur without Structural Engineer approval.

C. MC shall coordinate a minimum 42" clearance or more in front of mechanical equip-

ment access panels for servicing as required by applicable code, NEC, and the AHJ.

D. Cutting, framing, patching and painting of wall, ceiling and floor openings shall be by

others.

E. Roof curbs, sleepers, and cant strips to be built and attached to the roof by others.

F. Final painting of grilles, registers, and diffusers, as may be required by architect, shall be

done in the field by others.

G. Electrical contractor shall furnish and install magnetic motor starters for all equipment

% hp and greater unless a VFD is provided. Provide service and disconnect per code,

and do all power wiring, including connecting to equipment. Holding coil circuit shall

be powered by electrical contractor (120/1 unless indicated otherwise). All starters shall

be provided with H-O-A switch.

H. VFD's (where required) are provided by the mechanical contractor and are installed

(mounted) and wired by the electrical contractor. Disconnects will be provided integral

with the VFD's. VFD's will not be provided with manual or automatic bypass.

I. All smoke detectors and wiring are to be provided by the electrical contractor.

J. A fire and/or smoke detection and alarm system, as may be required by the owner, ar-

chitect, or code authority, is the responsibility of the electrical contractor.

K. All conduit, line voltage, and low voltage smoke and fire alarm wiring for interlocks on

all make up air units, fire smoke dampers, exhaust systems, etc. are by the electrical

contractor.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 5

1.6 EVERGREEN SUSTAINABLE DEVELOPMENT STANDARD

A. Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard v2.2 (ESDS) certification will be achieved

for the project. Table 1 provides the points expected to be achieved on the project.

Evergreen Sustainable Development Standard: Mechanical Contractor Scope

Credit 5-1a, Ventilation Optimization

Mandatory:

2. Mechanical ventilation systems shall not exceed 1.8 times the minimum code ventilation rates included

in Washington State Mechanical Code, Table 403.3 (common area) or Table 403.8.1 (dwelling unit), ex-

cept,

a. Systems utilizing heat recovery

b. Local exhaust systems (bath, kitchen, utility) with controls that are readily accessible by the dwelling

unit occupant.

c. Demand controlled variable air volume exhaust and make up air systems.

d. Economizer cooling

3. Fan power meeting code

a. Table R403.5.1 -- Mechanical ventilation system fan efficacy.

b. C403.2.10.1 Allowable fan floor horsepower.

4. Test and verification of mechanical ventilation system performance is to be included in the commis-

sioning plan.

Strategy:

Meet goals through fan selection, carrying out WSEC C408 required commissioning. Commissioning

above WSEC C408 standards req’d not carried by MC.

Cost add:

None


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 6

Credit 5-3, Heating and Sizing of Cooling Equipment

Mandatory:

Size heating and cooling equipment as required by the most recent edition of the mechanical code. Size

heating and cooling ducts as required by the most recent edition of the mechanical code, as applicable.

Strategy:

Equipment load calculations are required by code for mechanical permit. MC to provide load calcs to

project team to meet credit.

Cost add:

None

Credit 6-2, Exhaust Fans - Bathroom

Mandatory:

All interior adhesives must comply with the most recent version of Rule 1168 of the South Coast Air Qual-

ity Management District.

All interior caulks and sealants must comply with Regulation 8 Rule 51 of the Bay Area Air Quality Man-

agement District (BAAQMD).

Adhesives, caulks and sealants that are used outside of the weather resistive barrier or to seal the

weather resistive barrier to itself or to building openings are exempt from this mandatory requirement.

The weather resistive barrier includes the roof membrane.

Strategy:

MC assists in attaining this credit by using adhesives, caulks, sealants meeting requirement.

Cost add:

None


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 7

Credit 7-3a, Exhaust Fans - Bathroom

Mandatory:

Install Energy Star-labeled bathroom fans that exhaust to the outdoors and are equipped with a timer,

humidistat sensor, or that operate continuously.

Strategy:

MC assists in attaining this credit by specifying bathroom exhaust fans to satisfy credit demands. MC nei-

ther supplies, nor installs actual fans.

Cost add:

None

Credit 7-4a, Exhaust Fans - Kitchen

Mandatory:

Install Energy Star labeled power vented fans or range hoods that exhaust to the exterior.

Exemption: Microwaves with integrated range hoods do not need to be Energy Star certified. However,

they exhaust fan must still vent to the exterior

Strategy:

MC assists in attaining this credit by designing vent ducting from kitchen hood to exterior. MC neither

supplies, nor installs actual fans nor ducts.

Cost add:

None

Credit 7-5, Ventilation

Mandatory:

Install a ventilation system for the dwelling unit that provides a minimum of 15 cfm (cubic feet per mi-

nute) of fresh air per occupant. Use the 2009 International Residential Code, or as an alternative, use 2010

ASHRAE standard 62.2.

Strategy:

MC assists in attaining this credit by designing a ventilation system to meet requirements. MC neither

supplies, nor installs actual dwelling unit ventilation system.

Cost add:

None


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 8

Credit 7-6, Clothes Dryer Exhaust

Mandatory:

Clothes dryers must be exhausted directly to the outdoors using metal duct work.

Strategy:

MC assists in attaining this credit by designing, supplying, installing vent ducting from dryer room direct

to outdoor. Duct connection from duct run to dryer not by MC

Cost add:

None

Credit 7-9a, Mold Prevention: Water Heaters, Condensing Boilers, Furnaces, & Air Conditioning

Mandatory:

HVAC equipment: Provide auxiliary drain pans when required by code. Insure that any catch pans or drip

pans minimize standing water.

Strategy:

MC assists in attaining this credit by providing drain pans under HVAC equipment where req’d by code.

Plumbing connection from pan to drain by PC.

Cost add:

None

Table 1: MC responsibility for ESDS.

B. MC scope of work will be expected to achieve the following credits:

1. 5.1a – Ventilation Optimization method – requirements 2,3

2. 5.3

3. 7.3a

4. 7.4a

5. 7.5

6. 7.6

7. 7.9a – HVAC drain pans

C. Commissioning work in pursuit of ESDS, beyond the scope of that required by WSEC

C408, not by MC.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 9

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HVAC SYSTEMS GENERAL

A. HVAC systems are to be provided at the common areas.

B. All ductwork is to be constructed and installed to appropriate SMACNA standards. All

duct sealant shall be water based, low VOC content.

C. All ductwork is to be insulated per current code requirements.

D. A complete engineered seismic restraint and hangars package will be provided by the

MC. Fully stamped and engineered packages provided by a single vendor are encour-

aged.

E. All air intakes and exhaust outlets are to be located with no less than code minimum

required separations from openings, intakes, grade, property lines, etc. Some project

specific minimum distance requirements may be greater than code minimum if identi-

fied within this document or drawings. Final locations are subject to approval through

the shop drawing submittal review process prior to construction.

F. All HVAC fan motors are to be selected so that the design selection BHP is no greater

than 95% of the selected nameplate motor HP and not in the motor service factor. De-

viations from this criteria will be noted during owner advocacy reviews and will require

correction.

G. VFD driven motors to be provided rated for inverter duty (NEMA Standard MG-1, Part

31) and equipped with a shaft grounding device or as an insulated bearing motor.

H. HVAC motors shall meet the NEMA premium efficiency standard.

2.2 CONTROLS

A. Code compliant standalone controls (local thermostats, time clocks, switches) are to be

provided.

B. Controls in public spaces shall be provided with a lockable security cover.

C. HVAC equipment and smoke dampers will have available contacts for interlock with the

fire alarm system to allow for shut down of equipment and closure of dampers when the

fire alarm trips.

2.3 LOBBY, OFFICES AND COMMON ROOMS

A. See drawings for baseline split system details in common, office, meeting areas.

B. As the heat pumps service areas exclusively for the use of building tenants, the project

utilizes no economizers per 2012 WSEC C403.4.1, exception 4.

C. Each indoor ducted or cassette type fan coil will be hung with spring hangers and seis-

mic slack cabling.

D. A condensate pan overflow moisture detector will be provided and wired to disable the

fan coil on condensate overflow to satisfy Mechanical Code requirements.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 10

E. Provide MERV-8 filtration for ducted fan coil units.

F. Diffusers will be modular 4 core type with square neck and diffuser can with internal

baffle plate for diffuser face airflow equalization.

G. The DB contractor and its vendors will assume refrigerant piping design responsibility.

Provide refrigerant piping complete as needed between the horizontal fan coil and out-

door condensing unit. Refrigerant piping length assumptions for pricing shall allow for

changes within the unit floor plan as the architectural plan develops.

H. The refrigerant system design sizing and component inclusions are to be submitted

with approval by the equipment manufacturer or local equipment vendor as part of the

submittal process. Factory charged line sets will be utilized where possible. Exterior line

sets will be provided with integral or field installed weather proof jacketing.

I. Condensate systems will be installed complete to an approved indirect drain connec-

tion by the plumbing contractor. Condensate trap depth will be per manufacturer re-

quirements and sized per plumbing code criteria. Horizontal condensate piping shall be

insulated copper or plenum rated CPVC (Flowguard CPVC or equivalent). Vertical CPVC

condensate does not require insulation.

J. Cable operated dampers (COD) will be utilized for all runouts above a hard ceiling. Ceil-

ing access panels and OBD's are not to be utilized for balancing.

K. Electrical contractor supplied and installed smoke detectors will be provided in the split

system fan coils over 2000 cfm or a combination of split system fan coils in the shared

return plenums with supply cfm over 2000 cfm.

L. Outside air to be supplied through louvers in the exterior wall. Louvers installed in the

storefront will be provided with the storefront systems and will be provided by and in-

stalled by the general contractor as will any required blank off panels and insulation be-

hind the panels. Other louvers and insulated blank offs behind unused portions of lou-

vers will be provided by the HVAC contractor.

M. Louvers (other than storefront louvers) will be provided by and installed by the MC. In-

sulated blank offs behind unused portions of louvers will be provided by the MC.

N. Motorized dampers and counter balanced back draft dampers at the relief louvers will

be provided by the MC. Damper control is to be hard wire interlocked with the heat

pump operation.

O. Each ACU, heat pump fan coil unit, and condensing unit will be started and tested, bal-

anced, and commissioned by the MC contractor per WSEC C408 requirements.

P. Toilet exhaust fans for each restroom are to be provided.

Q. Per WSEC C403.2.10.3, all fractional hp fan motors for fans that are 1/12 hp or greater

shall be electronically commutated (ECMs) or shall have motor efficiency of at least 70%

when rated in accordance with DOE 10 C.F.R 431. These motors shall also have the

means to adjust the motor speed for either balancing or remote control Belt-driven

fans may use sheave adjustments for airflow balancing in lieu of varying motor speed.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 11

2.4 TRANSFORMER VAULT/ROOM

A. Transformer vault ventilation is not required.

2.5 ELEVATOR SHAFTS

A. In lieu of elevator lobby enclosures, hoistway pressurization is to be the compliance

path for IBC 713.14.1. Each elevator shaft will be provided a pressurization fan system. A

motorized control damper will be controlled by smoke detection as required by local

codes. Wiring and smoke detection is by EC. The damper is to be powered closed and

fail open on an alarm event.

B. Smoke detectors per 2012 IBC, IMC are by the EC.

C. Control and alarm activation is by FLS contractor. The MC will coordinate the opera-

tional requirements with the FLS contractor during design or as soon as the contractor

is on board.

2.6 GARAGE SUPPLY AND EXHAUST

A. There is no parking garage planned for the project.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS SYSTEMS

A. The electrical contractor will provide and install electric unit heaters in the water entry

and fire sprinkler pump rooms, stairwells, and other rooms requiring space heat. EC

shall provide electric cabinet heaters in each stairwell. Integral T-stats will be provided.

MC will size the heaters. Coordinate requirements with electrical.

B. Storage rooms ventilation per 2012 IMC. Where required, provide a transfer or exhaust

fan. MC to denote transfer inlet path on M series drawings.

2.8 TRASH AND RECYCLE ROOM EXHAUST SYSTEMS

A. Level 1 trash and recycling room is exhausted via the trash room fan. MC to denote

transfer inlet path on M series drawings.

2.9 MPOE ROOM

A. MPOE room ventilation/conditioning is not currently in the MC scope of work.

2.10 ELEVATOR MACHINE ROOM

A. Provide a ductless split system sized to meet elevator manufacturers requirements.

B. AC controls with programmable thermostat per WSEC requirements.

C. Condensate piping, connections to be provided by the PC.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 12

2.11 APARTMENT HVAC SYSTEMS

A. Heating and Cooling

1. No mechanical cooling is provided to residences.

2. The electrical contractor will provide and install the heaters and thermostats.

3. The MC shall size and specify the residential electric heaters and coordinate layouts

with the Architect.

4. All units shall be heated via electric heating units. Baseline product approach for living

areas and bedrooms are to use Comfort Cove radiant cove heaters.

5. Bathrooms located on exterior walls (where applicable) shall be heated via electric

wall heater, Cadet or King Model "W" Series with built in thermostat or Comfort Cove

radiant cove heaters.

6. Thermostats - Remote mounted 7 day programmable thermostats shall be

provided in the primary living space of each residence (King Model ESP230 for

208V). Remote mounted manual digital display thermostats shall be provided in the

bedrooms (King Model ES230 for 208V). Thermostats shall be line voltage (208V)

and rated for 22 amps.

B. Residence Ventilation

1. Ventilation to each residence will be provided by operable openings within the

window assembly (trickle vents) and whole house exhaust fans.

2. Inlets shall provide not less than 4 square inches of net free area of opening for each

10 cfm of outdoor air required.

3. Any combination of inlets which provide 10 cfm at 10 pascals as determined by the

home ventilation institute air flow test standard (HVI 901 [November 1996]) are

deemed equivalent to 4 square inches of net free area.

4. Air inlets installed in walls or windows shall have controllable, secure openings and

shall be designed to not compromise the thermal properties of the building envelope.

5. Sizing for the whole house fans and trickle vent quantity shall be by MC.

C. Exhaust Systems

1. The Electrical Contractor will provide and install all residential fans. Ductwork shall be

provided and installed by the mechanical contractor.

2. The MC will do the requisite calculations and select and schedule the fans

3. Exhaust ductwork pricing assumptions shall accommodate location changes within

the unit floor plan as the architectural plans are not finalized.

4. All ductwork is to be constructed and installed to IMC and SMACNA standards.

5. Ductwork is to be routed through soffits.

6. Ductwork shall be a minimum of 26 gage.

7. Duct sizing:

a. Duct lengths and sizing to comply with IMC.

b. Bath fan only duct size = 4" minimum

c. Bath + one other fan (laundry fan or second bath fan) duct size = 6" minimum


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 13

8. Bathroom Exhaust - Whole House Fan:

a. The fan shall have a noise rating of ≤1.0 sone.

b. The fan shall operate continuously at low speed.

c. The fan will not be a combination fan / light. Fan and lights are separately

switched.

d. A whole house fan "off' switch shall be provided within the laundry nook

(residences) or other coordinated location clearly separated from light

switches. Provide signage adjacent to the fan switch notifying the occupants of

24/7 ventilation operation.

e. Fan Model: Panasonic FV-05-11VKSL1 WhisperGreen Select TM Ceiling

Mounted Ventilation Fan / Light with DC Motor with built in variable speed

control, motion detector module, and time delay module.

f. The motion detector module "SmartAction@ Motion Sensor (FV-MSVK1)" will

switch the fan to a higher speed.

g. The time delay module "Multi-Speed with Time Delay (FV-VS15VK1)" returns

the fan to low speed operation after 20 minutes (set in the field by EC).

9. Bathroom Fan - 2nd Bathroom:

a. For residences with a second bathroom a ceiling exhaust fan will be provided

by EC.

10. Kitchen Range Hood:

a. The kitchen range hood is provided by others. The architect will specify the

hood as part of the appliance package.

b. Ductwork to the perimeter and connection to the range hood is by the MC.

11. Dryer Exhaust:

a. Central laundry is provided on floors 2 and 4. Residential units do not include

in-unit laundry.

b. Dryer exhaust ducts shall have no internal protrusions.

c. The MC (design build engineer of record) shall evaluate dryer vent lengths and

the quantity of long radius elbows and booster fan requirements. MC is to

verify all dryer exhaust lengths with final laundry room layout. Provide a table

in the drawings showing overall equivalent length, lineal distance, standard

radius elbows count, and long radius elbow qty.

d. Per IMC the equivalent length of the exhaust duct shall be identified on a

permanent label or tag within 6' of the exhaust duct connection. Signage will

be provided by MC.

e. Provider of dryers to select long vent length dryers where doing so would

eliminate need for booster fan.

12. Residential exhaust vent shrouds will be provided by others. Backdraft dampers,

screens (for other than dryer exhaust), and termination details within the shroud are

by MC. Backdraft dampers will be metal and provided with gasketed edge seal for

quiet performance.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 14

2.12 CORRIDOR MAKEUP AIR

A. The corridor supply air systems shall have the capability to turn down supply air cfm.

B. Ventilation, either natural or mechanical, shall be provided in accordance with Chapter

4 of the International Mechanical Code. Where mechanical ventilation is provided, the

system shall provide the capability to reduce the outdoor air supply to the minimum

required by Chapter 4 of the International Mechanical Code.

C. Rooftop package make up air unit with heat pump heating and cooling with supple-

mentary electric resistance heat will deliver outside air for make-up air to each corridor.

The HVAC contractor is responsible for installation to allow for proper operational

clearances.

D. Heat pump will be installed on a 2" spring isolation curb provided by the MC. Unit to be

located over the corridor as opposed to above residences.

E. Typical minimum entering air temperature for heat pump operation is 50°F-55°F. Con-

trols for supplementary heaters are required to utilize compression heating as the first

stage of heat and prevent operation of the supplemental heater above 40°F per 2012

SEC Section C403.2.4.1.1. Return air is provided to maintain minimum entering air tem-

perature when the outside air temperature is between 40°F and 50°F. Auxiliary electric

heater shall be provided for operation down to 23°F. Provide SCR control for auxiliary

electric heaters.

F. All ductwork is to be constructed and installed to appropriate SMACNA standards. Out-

door air intake ductwork to include external wrap with code minimum installed R-value

upstream of the duct heater. Provide 10' lined ductwork downstream of the heater.

G. Protect openings into the corridor with fire and smoke dampers which close upon

smoke detection. The makeup air unit is also shutdown upon any smoke detection.

Smoke detection and control is by EC and shall be per IMC section 601.2 exception 6.4

at a minimum which requires smoke detectors spaced at 30' on center along the corri-

dor. Tie to fire alarm system.

H. The corridor supply grilles will include a means for balancing other than OBD's. Include

American Aides Model CAR-Il airflow regulators for each supply locations.

I. Supply grilles will be Titus 272 RL or equivalent manufacturer's model with airfoil blades.

J. Cabinet heaters will be provided by EC at all corridor locations with exterior glazing for

local heating control.

K. No corridor exhaust system is required.

L. It is assumed that 3' acoustical silencers will be required by the acoustician in the supply

and ductwork above the roof. Weather proof jacketing will be required for each si-

lencer.

M. Corridors shall be heated to a minimum 70°F when 20°F outdoors and cooled to 74°F

when 90°F outdoors. Each unit will be started and tested, balanced, and commissioned

by the design build contractor.


Project 2015-xxx


23 0000 - 15

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION & INSTALLATION

A. All work contracted for must be accepted by all applicable inspectors including site su-

perintendent, GC quality control personnel, owner's representative or their assigns.

B. As-builts: provide owner with electronic as-built drawings within two weeks of substan-

tial completion. As-builts will reflect all changes from the construction drawing set and

will comply with project completion requirements.

C. O&Ms: provide hard copy and electronic copies of O&Ms for all systems within two

weeks of substantial completion.

3.2 TESTING & INSPECTION

A. All Div 23 testing, balancing, commissioning, and startup is by the MC as required by

code. Additional work required for Evergreen Sustainability Standard, beyond scope of

WSEC C408, not included by MC.

B. Additionally all commissioning will be in compliance with the methodologies and prac-

tices outlined by local codes. Commission all Div 23 systems as well as in residence fans

and heaters.

C. The contractor will be expected to lead the Cx process as part of their base contract. No

Change orders will be accepted for contractor participation.

D. The MC will execute all pre functional testing of HVAC systems to identify and resolve

deficiencies prior the final testing.

E. The MC will document deficiencies and provide equipment, materials, and labor neces-

sary to correct deficiencies found during the commissioning process to fulfill contract

and warranty requirements.

F. Owner training will be provided by the installing contractor.

END OF SECTION

SSA Acoustics LLP Olympia Commons – 318 State Project 1845.00


VIBRATION CONTROL OF HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0548 - 1

SECTION 23 0548 – VIBRATION CONTROL OF HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Neoprene isolation pads, mounts, and tape. 2. Freestanding and restrained spring isolators. 3. Spring hangers. 4. Elastomeric hangers. 5. Restrained vibration isolation roof-curb rails. 6. Steel and inertia vibration isolation equipment bases. 7. Flexible connectors. 8. Miscellaneous support products.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. IBC: International Building Code.

B. ICC-ES: ICC-Evaluation Service.

C. OSHPD: Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development for the State of California.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Include rated load, rated deflection, and overload capacity for each vibration

isolation device.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VIBRATION ISOLATORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Amber/Booth Company, Inc. 2. Kinetics Noise Control. 3. Mason Industries. 4. Approved equivalent.

B. Neoprene Pads, Type N-1: Single or multiple layers of 3/4-inch thick ribbed or waffled neoprene pad bonded to a galvanized-steel load distribution plate. Thickness of load distribution plate shall be sufficient to evenly distribute (+/- 10 percent) the load over the entire pad. Pad shall be furnished with sufficient area to achieve the static deflection shown in the schedule. If anchoring is mandatory, provide neoprene grommets and washers to prevent anchor bolt from short circuiting isolation. 1. Mason Industries type Super W 2. Or approved equivalent.

C. Closed-Cell Neoprene Tape, Type N-4: 1/4-inch thick neoprene sponge with adhesive on one side. 1. Kwik-Stik Gasket Tape 2. Or approved equivalent




D. Double Deflection Neoprene Mount, Type N-5: Neoprene mounting with a minimum static deflection of 0.35 inches. All metal surfaces are neoprene-covered to prevent corrosion and have friction pads, both top and bottom. Provide bolt holes on the bottom and a tapped hole with cap screw and washer on top.

1. Mason Industries type ND. 2. Or approved equivalent.

E. Restrained Spring Isolators, Type S-2: Freestanding, steel, open-spring isolators with seismic or limit-stop restraint. Steel housing with resilient vertical-limit stops to prevent spring extension due to weight being removed; factory-drilled baseplate bonded to 1/4-inch thick neoprene isolator pad attached to baseplate underside; and adjustable equipment mounting and leveling bolt that acts as blocking during installation. Mounts designed with fail safe feature to protect against wind loads and overturning of mounts in earthquakes. Mounts capable of withstanding lateral accelerations of 1g. Allow 1/2 inch clearance around vertical restraining bolts, with neoprene grommets and washer to prevent restraining bolts from short-circuiting isolation. Limit stops must be out of contact during normal operation. 1. Mason Industries type SLR. 2. Kinetics type FLS-BW. 3. Or approved equivalent.




F. Double-Deflection Spring Hangers, Type SH-1: Vibration hangers shall contain a steel spring and 0.3-inch deflection neoprene element in series. The neoprene element shall be molded with a rod isolation bushing that passes through the hanger box. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30-degree arc before contacting the hole and short circuiting the spring. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50 percent of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include a scale drawing of the hanger showing misalignment capability. 1. Mason Industries type 30N 2. Or approved equivalent.

G. Neoprene or Fiberglass Hangers, Type SH-3: Cone-shaped elastomeric mounting made from neoprene with a steel box frame, open on two sides, containing a double deflection neoprene element with a projecting bushing to prevent steel to steel contact. Hanger rod shall penetrate neoprene element and steel frame with sufficient clearance to allow it to swing through a 30-degree arc before contacting neoprene bushing at the perimeter of the lower hole in the frame. Hole in top of box frame for bolting to structure. 1. Mason Industries type HD 2. Or approved equivalent.

2.2 RESTRAINED VIBRATION ISOLATION ROOF-CURB RAILS, TYPE RC-1

A. Vibration Isolation Roof-Curb Rails: Factory-assembled, fully enclosed, insulated, air- and watertight curb rail designed to resiliently support equipment and to withstand seismic and wind forces.

B. Lower Support Assembly: Formed sheet-metal section containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support upper floating section. Upper frame shall provide continuous support for equipment and shall be captive to resiliently resist seismic and wind forces. Lower support assembly shall have a means for attaching to building




structure and a wood nailer for attaching roof materials, and shall be insulated with a minimum of 2 inches of rigid, glass-fiber insulation on inside of assembly.

C. Spring Isolators: Steel springs shall be laterally stable and rest on 1/4-inch- thick neoprene vibration isolation pads. Hardware must be plated, and the springs provided with a rust-resistant finish. All spring locations shall have access ports with removable waterproof covers.

D. Snubber Bushings: All-directional, neoprene snubber bushings at least 1/4 inch thick.

E. Water Seal: Continuous galvanized sheet metal with EPDM seals at corners, attached to upper support frame, extending down past wood nailer of lower support assembly, and counterflashed over roof materials. 1. Mason Industries type RSC 2. Or approved equivalent

2.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Mason Industries. 2. Or approved equivalent.

B. Integral Structural Steel Frame Base, Type B-1: Structural steel rectangular base with cross members as required per engineered drawings. Use height saving brackets for side mounting of isolators. 1. Mason Industries type WF. 2. Or approved equivalent.




C. Inertia Base, Type B-2: Factory-fabricated, welded, structural-steel bases and rails ready for placement of cast-in-place concrete. Concrete shall be supplied by General Contractor and shall be 3, psi concrete to ASTM C94 standard. Bases shall have size and shape to accommodate supported equipment without overhanging structural members that form perimeter framing. Bases shall be large enough to support suction elbow of end suction pumps and suction and discharge elbow of horizontal split case pumps, unless flexible neoprene elbows are used. Total mass shall not be less than 2 times the total weight of all equipment mounted on base, except that depth of base shall not exceed 10-inches unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Furnish with preset embedded equipment anchor bolts and auxiliary motor slide bases or rails. Factory-welded steel brackets on frame for outrigger isolation mountings and to provide for anchor bolts and equipment support. Include supports for suction and discharge elbows for pumps. Forms shall be furnished with steel members to hold equipment anchor-bolt sleeves and anchors in place during placement of concrete. Lowest possible mounting height with not less than 1-inch clearance above the floor. Use T-shape where necessary to conserve weight and size. 1. Mason Industries type BMK 2. Or approved equivalent

D. Vertical Steel Rods, Type B-3: Base to consist of four vertical steel hanger rods attached to structure above. Rods are to be capable of carrying an equivalent of five time overload without failure or yielding. Unless otherwise specified, use hanger SH-1 on all four hanger rods in series with the supported load.

2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS

A. Flexible Duct Connector, Type FC-1: Flexible glass fabric double coated with neoprene. Air-tight, water-tight and fire-retardant. 1. Ventfabrics type Ventglas 2. Duro-Dyne type MFN or MF6N 3. Or approved equivalent

B. Neoprene Connector, Type FC-2: Spherical rubber expansion joint. Peroxide cured EPDM throughout with Kevlar tire cord reinforcement. The raised face rubber flanges must encase solid steel rings to prevent pull out. The connector shall be terminated at both ends with either a flange or threaded fitting. Connectors shall have a minimum




burst pressure of 500 psi and a recommended maximum operating pressure that is greater than the design operation pressure at the temperature of the fluid. Control rods or cables should not be used unless specifically required by the manufacturer in writing.

Pipe Size Axial Compression Axial Extension Less than 12 inches 3-1/2 inches 1-3/4 inches Over 12 inches 4-3/8 inches 2-1/8 inches 1. Mason Industries type Safeflex SFDEJ 2. Or approved equivalent.

C. Braided Stainless Steel Hose, Type FC-3: Braided stainless steel hose with carbon steel nipples. 1. Mason Industries type MN 2. Or approved equivalent 3.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Cushion Sleeve: Neoprene pad 1/4-inch minimum thickness for use as a noise and vibration isolator between piping and its supporting or suspension system. Sleeve shall be split or hinged and shall have an exterior metal shell to prevent crushing during installation. 1. Mason Industries Type SWS. 2. Or approved equivalent.

B. Acoustical Insulation: 1/2 to 6 inch thick low density unfaced fiberglass batts. 1. Owens Corning Standard. 2. Or approved equivalent.

C. Mineral Fiber Insulation: 2 to 3 inch thick fire rated mineral fiber insulation batts. 1. USG Thermafiber.




2. Or approved equivalent.

D. Resilient Caulk: Paintable and non-hardening. 1. USG Acoustical Sealant. 2. Pecora Corporation Acoustical Sealant BA098. 3. 3M Vibration Control Systems Fire Stop 2000.

E. Clay Packing: Moldable, non-curing, one component fire-rated putty pads for protection of electrical outlet boxes and reduction of sound transmission. 1. Johns Manville Firetemp Intumescent Putty Pads

F. Resilient Isolation Washer Bushings: To be used such that direct contact between bolt and equipment is eliminated. One-piece, molded, oil- and water-resistant neoprene, with a flat washer face. Manufactured of bridge-bearing neoprene. Maximum loading not to exceed 1000 psi.

2.6 FACTORY FINISHES

A. Where exposed to the atmosphere all steel to be finished with dry powder coating for corrosion protection.

B. All hardware shall be zinc electroplated.

C. Springs and housings shall be powder coated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and equipment to receive vibration isolation and seismic-control devices for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in of reinforcement and cast-in-place anchors to verify actual locations before installation.





3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install all vibration isolators in strict accordance with this Specification, the Manufacturer’s instructions and all certified submittal data.

B. Install vibration isolators so as not to cause any change in position of equipment, piping or ducting which would result in stresses or misalignment.

C. Make no rigid connections between piping and building structure that degrades the noise and vibration systems specified herein.

D. Coordinate work with other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building structure.

E. Bring to the attention of the Architect/Engineer any conflict with other trades which will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions prior to installation.

F. Bring to the attention of the Architect/Engineer any discrepancies between this Specification and the field conditions prior to installation.

G. Bring to the attention of the Architect/Engineer any conflicts due to specific equipment selection prior to installation.




3.3 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

A. Schedule:

Equipment IsolatorDeflection in Inches Base

Flexible Connector Notes

Makeup Air Units - 2 RC-

1 FC-1 1,2,3

Fans Rooftop Exhaust - Utility Set Fan S-2 2 - FC-1 1,2,3

Rooftop Exhaust - Centrifugal Upblast Fan - 2

RC-1 FC-1 1,2,3

Garage Exhaust / Transfer Fan SH-1 2 B-3 FC-1 1,2,3 Inline Exhaust Fan SH-1 1 B-3 FC-1 1,2,3

Bathroom Fans / Whole House Fans - - - - 5

Split System Interior Units Ceiling Mounted SH-3 0.3 B-3 FC-1 1,2,3

Floor Mounted N-1 0.2 - FC-1 1,2,3 Split System Exterior Units

Rooftop Condensers S-2 1 - - 1,2,4 Parking Area Condensers N-5 0.3 - - 1,2

Boiler N-5 0.3 - FC-2 1,2,4 Garage-Level Booster Pump Skid S-2 2 - FC-2 1,2,4 Pumps < 5hp N-4 - - - 1,2 Pumps 5<hp<25 S-2 2 B-1 FC-2 1,2,4 Pumps 25< hp S-2 2 B-2 FC-2 1,2,4

B. Notes: 1. See Section: Seismic Anchorage and Restraints. 2. See Mechanical and Structural Drawings. 3. Install flexible duct connectors at the intake and discharge of all fans and air

handling equipment. 4. All piping attached to unit shall utilize a flexible connector to limit vibration

transfer. 5. Fans shall be less than 1.5 sones.


Olympia Commons Electrical Design Narrative September 2015 Page 1 of 2

Olympia Commons Electrical Design Narrative

Applicable Codes and Standards All systems are designed in accordance with the applicable codes, local municipal bylaws and standards for similar facilities including codes and standards of the following bodies: National Electrical Code, NFPA 70 (NEC) National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) National Electrical Safety Code (NESC) Illuminating Engineering Society of North America (IESNA) Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE) ASHRAE / IES 90.1 ASTM – E580 Standard Practice for Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay‐in Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint (Lighting Fixtures) Washington State Non‐Residential Energy Code (WSNREC) Washington State Sustainability Protocol (WSSP) Washington Administrative Code (WAC) International Fire Code (IFC) Lighting The majority of lighting in the building will be LED type. Color will be 3000K with extended 5 year warranty. Where fluorescent lighting is utilized all fluorescent ballasts where used will be specified with an extended 5 year warranty based on the ballast manufacturer’s published lamp/ballast combinations. Fluorescent ballasts will be electronic type with 10% or less total harmonic distortion, high power factor. All exit signs will be of the LED type and meet the requirements of NFPA 101. Lighting Control A low‐voltage lighting control panel system will be utilized to control hallways, common areas and exterior lights. System shall be capable of performing daylight, time control and photocell functions. Power Main service for the building shall be 208 V, 3 phase, 4 wire. A 1600 amp main switchboard will be provided with two (2) meter stacks for serving units. Meter stack #1 will be located on 1st floor and meter stack #2 will be located on level 3.

Olympia Commons Electrical Design Narrative September 2015 Page 2 of 2

Common Work Results ‐ Electrical Certain combination motor starters/disconnects will be specified by the electrical engineer and provided by the electrical contractor. Variable frequency drives and starters supplied with the mechanical equipment will be specified by the mechanical designer and provided by the mechanical contractor. Transient voltage surge suppressors will be provided on the main electrical switchboard and branch panelboards. Unit panels will have capabilities to accept Arc‐Flash Interuppter circuit breakers to meet requirements of the NEC for branch circuits within dwelling units. Ground wires will be provided in all conduits. All neutrals will be sized at 100 percent of feeder amperage. The minimum general purpose receptacle rating shall be 20 amps. General purpose receptacles will be limited to six(6) per 20 amp circuit to allow for expansion. Receptacles will be allowed to have shared neutrals as long as handle ties are provided for circuit breakers. All exterior receptacle covers will be rated NEMA 3R “In Use”. Labeling of circuit numbers will be provided for lighting and receptacle circuit junction boxes. No circuiting labels are required on light switch and receptacle cover plates. All panels shall be provided with a minimum of 5% spare circuit breaker capacity.


SITE CLEARING 31 1000 - 1

SECTION 31 1000 – SITE CLEARING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. 5. Removing above-grade site improvements. 6. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and abandoning site utilities in place. 7. Disconnecting, capping or sealing, and removing site utilities.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 1 Section 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls for temporary utilities,

temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations.

2. Division 31 Section 31 2000 Earthwork for soil materials, excavating, backfilling, and site grading.

3. Division 32 Section “Landscaping” for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand, silt, and clay particles; friable, pervious, and black or a darker shade of brown, gray, or red than underlying subsoil; reasonably free of subsoil, clay lumps, gravel, and other objects more than two inches in diameter; and free of weeds, roots, and other deleterious materials.

1.3 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP

A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner’s property, cleared materials shall become Contractor’s property and shall be removed from the site.



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Photographs or videotape, sufficiently detailed, of existing conditions of trees and plantings, adjoining construction, and site improvements that might be misconstrued as damage caused by site clearing.

B. Record drawings: Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface

structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions.


A. Traffic: Minimize interference with adjoining roads, streets, walks, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities during site-clearing operations. 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities

without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by

authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Improvements on Adjoining Property: Authority for performing indicated removal and alteration work on property adjoining Owner’s property, if any, will be obtained by Owner before award of Contract.

C. Salvable Improvements: Carefully remove items indicated to be salvaged and store on

Owner’s premises where indicated.

D. Existing Utilities:

1. Utilities exist at the site, both overhead and underground. Take care not to cause damage thereto; keep drains and sewers open for free drainage at all times.

2. The Contract shall be responsible for and shall immediately repair all damage to existing utilities caused by the construction work; repair such damage at no cost to Owner in manner approved by the applicable Utility. Call before you dig: 1-800-424-5555.

E. Reference Bench Marks and Monuments:

1. Maintain bench marks, monuments, property corners, and all other reference points. If

disturbed or destroyed, replace as directed at no additional cost.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Applicable)

PART 3 - EXECUTION



3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction.

B. Provide erosion control measures to prevent soil erosion and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way.

C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated.

D. Protect existing site improvements selected to remain from damage during construction.

Restore damaged improvements to their original condition, as acceptable to Owner.

3.2 TREE PROTECTION

A. Erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups of trees to remain. Remove fence when construction is complete. 1. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within drip line of

remaining trees. 2. Do not permit vehicles, equipment, or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees.

B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow-tine spading forks, comb soil to expose roots, and cleanly cut roots as close to excavation as possible.

1. Cover exposed roots with burlap and water regularly. 2. Temporarily support and protect roots from damage until they are permanently

relocated and covered with soil. 3. Coat cut faces of roots more than 1-1/2 inches in diameter with emulsified asphalt or

other approved coating formulated for use on damaged plant tissues. 4. Cover exposed roots with wet burlap to prevent roots from drying out. Backfill with soil

as soon as possible.

D. Repair or replace trees and vegetation indicated to remain that are damaged by construction operations, in a manner approved by Owner. 1. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, to submit

details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to trees and shrubs. 2. Replace trees that cannot be repaired and restored to full-growth status, as determined

by the qualified arborist.



3.3 UTILITIES

A. Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off utilities indicated to be removed.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated utilities when requested by Contractor.

B. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner no less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

C. Excavate for and remove underground utilities indicated to be removed.

3.4 CLEARING AND GRUBBING

A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be

relocated. 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful

manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. 3. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of 18

inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.

B. Fill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,

unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth, and compact each layer to a density equal to adjacent original ground.

3.5 TOPSOIL STRIPPING

A. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. Revise subparagraph below if other materials are known to be mixed into unsuitable surface soil.

1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other

waste materials.

B. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches.



2. Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. 4. Stockpile surplus topsoil and allow for respreading deeper topsoil.

3.6 SITE IMPROVEMENTS

A. Remove existing above and below grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new construction.

B. Remove slabs, paving, curbs, gutters, and aggregate base as indicated.

C. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition, neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically.

3.7 DISPOSAL Remove surplus soil material, unsuitable topsoil, obstructions, demolished materials, and waste materials, including trash and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner’s property.




EARTHWORK 31 2000 - 1

SECTION 31 2000 – EARTHWORK

PART 1 - GENERAL


A. Conform to Washington State Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest edition thereof. (Standard Specifications)

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Preparing subgrade for slabs-on-grade, walks, pavements, lawns, and plantings. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Base course for walks and pavements. 5. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried utilities.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing” for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and

protecting trees to remain. 2. Division 32 Section “Landscaping” for finish grading, including placing and preparing

topsoil for lawns and plantings.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Layer placed between the sub grade and top course prior to asphalt paving. C. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe. D. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore

water. F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.




1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Owner.

Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for Changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Owner. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Owner, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical

and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

I. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a

fill or backfill immediately below base course, drainage fill, or topsoil materials. J. Utilities: Underground pipes, conduits, ducts, cables and appurtenant structures.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for the following:

1. Each type of plastic warning tape. 2. Drainage fabric. 3. Separation fabric.

B. Samples for the following:

1. 30-lb samples, sealed in airtight containers, of each proposed soil material from on-

site or borrow sources. 2. 12-by-12-inch sample of drainage fabric. 3. 12-by-12-inch sample of separation fabric.

C. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.





A. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548.

B. Construction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site per General and Supplemental

Conditions as well as jurisdictional requirements.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission. 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be

removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM,

or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than four (4) inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH,

OL< OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within require moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil.

E. Base: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel; WSDOT 9-03.9

(1) Ballast; with 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 9 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.




F. Capillary Break: Layer of material under the floor slab and other places specified on the plans. The capillary break shall meet the following gradation; 100 percent passing the ¾-inch sieve, 0-10 percent passing a No. 4 sieve, 0-5 percent passing a No. 100, and 0-3 percent passing the No. 200 sieve.

G. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel; WSDOT

9-03.10 gravel base; with 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, WSDOT 9-

03.12 (3); with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2 inch sieve and not more than 10 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

I. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed

gravel; WSDOT 9-03.12 (5); with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 1 1/2 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid-and alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, minimum 6 inches wide and 4 mils thick, continuously inscribed with a description of utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches deep; colored as follows:

1. Red: Electric. 2. Yellow: Gas, oil, steam, and dangerous materials. 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. 4. Blue: Water systems. 5. Green: Sewer systems.

B. Drainage Fabric: Non-woven geotextile, specifically manufactured as a drainage geotextile;

made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:

1. Grab Tensile Strength: 110 lbf; ASTM D 4632. 2. Tear Strength: 40 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 50 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 150 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 50; ASTM D 4751.

C. Separation Fabric: Woven geotextile, specifically manufactured for use as a separation

geotextile; made from polyolefins, polyesters, or polyamides; and with the following minimum properties determined according to ASTM D 4759 and referenced standard test methods:

1. Grab Tensile Strength: 200 lbf; ASTM D 4632.




2. Tear Strength: 75 lbf; ASTM D 4533. 3. Puncture Resistance: 90 lbf; ASTM D 4833. 4. Water Flow Rate: 4 gpm per sq. ft.; ASTM D 4491. 5. Apparent Opening Size: No. 30; ASTM D 4751.


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide

protective insulating materials as necessary.

C. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and rights-of-way.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water

accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches.

2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

C. The Contractor shall furnish, install and operate all necessary machinery, appliances and equipment to keep excavations free from water during construction, and shall dewater and dispose of the water so as not to cause a nuisance or menace to the public. He shall at all times have on hand sufficient pumping equipment and machinery in good working condition for all ordinary emergencies, including power outage, and shall have available at all times competent workers for the operation of pumping equipment.

D. The control of groundwater shall be such that softening of the bottom of excavations or

formations of “quick” conditions or “boils during excavation shall be prevented. Dewatering systems shall be designed and operated so as to prevent removal of natural




soils. Dewatering of the trench shall be considered as incidental to construction and all costs thereof shall be included in the proposal.

3.3 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.

B. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock

excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to unit prices included in the Contract Documents.

1. Earth excavation includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface;

underground structures, utilities, and other items indicated to be removed; together with soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; blasting, if permitted; ram hammering; or ripping of

material not classified as rock excavation is earth excavation.

2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. a. Do not excavate rock until it has been classified and cross-sectioned by

Architect.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1-inch. Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation.

Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

2. Pile Foundations: Stop excavations from 6 to 12 inches above bottom of pile cap before piles are placed. After piles have been driven, remove loose and displaced material. Excavate to final grade, leaving solid base to receive concrete pile caps.

3. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility

Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch. Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.




3.5 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or

conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches higher than top of pipe or conduit, 12 inches on each side of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow

for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe. Excavate trenches 6 inches deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

D. The length of trench excavated in advance of pipe laying shall be kept to a minimum and in

no case shall it exceed three hundred (300) feet unless otherwise specifically authorized by the Engineer. The maximum permissable trench width from the bottom of the trench to the crown of the pipe shall be as follows:

15 inch diameter and smaller: 40” 18 inch diameter and larger: 1.5 x inside diameter + 18”

In all cases, the trench must be of sufficient width to permit proper jointing of the pipe and

backfilling of material along the sides of the pipe. Trench width at the surface of the ground shall be kept to the minimum necessary to safely install the pipe. Excavation for manholes and other structures shall be sufficient to provide a minimum of (12) inches between their surfaces and the sides of the excavation.

3.7 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE

A. Notify Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present, continue excavation and replace

with compacted backfill or fill material as directed. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for Changes in the Work.

C. Proof roll subgrade with heavy pneumatic-tired equipment to identify soft pockets and areas

of excess yielding. Do not proof roll wet or saturated subgrades. D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or

construction activities, as directed by Owner.




3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Owner. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials, without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, damp-proofing,

waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls.

3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches of bottom of footings; fill

with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. C. Provide 4-inch thick, concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 24 inches

below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway ballast.

D. Place and compact initial backfill, free of particles larger than 1 inch, to a height of 12

inches over the utility pipe or conduit. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.




E. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. F. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is

removed. G. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.

H. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches below finished grade, except 6 inches

below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.12 FILL

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface before placing fills.

B. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so

fill material will bond with existing material. C. Place and compact fill material in layers to required subgrade elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill. 4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.13 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain

frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that

exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified density.

3.14 COMPACTION OF BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill materials in layers not more than 8 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 4 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.




B. Place backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight

according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and re-compact top 12 inches of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material to 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material to 95 percent.

3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and re-compact top 6 inches below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material to 85 percent.

3.15 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface

tolerances.

B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances:

1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch. 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch. 3. Pavements: Plus or minus ½ inch.

3.16 SUBSURFACE DRAINAGE

A. Subsurface Drain: Place a layer of drainage fabric around perimeter of drainage trench as indicated. Place a 6-inch course of filter material on drainage fabric to support drainage pipe. Encase drainage pipe in a minimum of 12 inches of filter material and wrap in drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

B. Drainage Backfill: Place and compact filter material over subsurface drain, in width

indicated, to within 12 inches of final subgrade. Overlay drainage backfill with one layer of drainage fabric, overlapping sides and ends at least 6 inches.

3.17 BASE COURSE

A. Install separation fabric on prepared subgrade according to manufacturer’s written instructions, overlapping sides and ends.




B. Under pavements and walks, place base course on separation fabric according to fabric

manufacturer’s written instructions and as follows:

C. Under pavements and walks, place base course on prepared subgrade as follows:

1. Place base course material over prepared subgrade. 2. Compact base course at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines,

cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

3. Shape base to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 4. When thickness of compacted base course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a

single layer.

D. Pavement Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct shoulders, at least 12 inches wide, of satisfactory soil materials and compact simultaneously with each base layer to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557.

3.18 DRAINAGE COURSE

A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:

1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.

2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches or less, place materials in a single layer.

3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches, place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches thick or less than 3 inches thick when compacted.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed

with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work complies with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be

performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Engineer.




D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill

layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests.

2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests.

3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of

compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; re-compact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.20 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and re-establish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially

completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing,

backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

3.21 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Stockpile or spread soil as directed by Owner. Remove waste material, including satisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner’s property.

3.22 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

A. Accurately record actual locations of existing utilities encountered by horizontal dimensions, elevations or inverts, and slope gradients for submittal to the Engineer at the completion of the project. All information to be recorded on a “Record Set” of the Contract Drawings to be maintained on the project site.




B. Accurately record soil types encountered on a “Record Set” drawing to be maintained on the site.




HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING 32 1200 - 1

SECTION 32 1200 – HOT-MIX ASPHALT PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL


Conform to General Conditions of the Contract and Washington State Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest edition thereof. (Standard Specifications) MUTCD: Except as otherwise specified, the work under this Section shall conform to the provisions and details or the “Manual on Uniform Traffic Conform Devices,” latest edition, hereinafter called “MUTCD”.

1.2 SUMMARY

1. Hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Hot-mix asphalt patching.


A. Provide hot-mix asphalt paving according to materials, workmanship, and other applicable requirements of standard specifications of WSDOT.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include technical data and tested physical and performance properties.

B. Job-Mix Designs: Certification, by authorities having jurisdiction, of approval of each job

mix proposed for the Work.

C. Material Test Reports: For each paving material.

D. Material Certificates: For each paving material, signed by manufacturers.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer shall be a paving-mix manufacturer registered with and approved by WSDOT.




B. Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM D 3666 for testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548.

C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with WSDOT for asphalt paving work. D. Asphalt-Paving Publication: Comply with AI MS-22, “Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements,” unless more stringent requirements are indicated.


A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply asphalt materials if subgrade is wet or excessively damp or if the following conditions are not met:

1. Prime and Tack Coats: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F. 2. Slurry Coat: Comply with weather limitations of ASTM D 3910. 3. Asphalt Base Course: Minimum surface temperature of 40 deg F and rising at time of

placement. 4. Asphalt Surface Course: Minimum surface temperature of 60 deg F at time of

placement.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 AGGREGATES

A. General: Use materials and gradations that have performed satisfactorily in previous installations.

B. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM D 692, sound; angular crushed stone, crushed gravel, or

properly cured, crushed blast-furnace slag. C. Fine Aggregate: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, sharp-edged natural sand or sand

prepared from stone, gravel, properly cured blast-furnace slag, or combinations thereof. For hot-mix asphalt, limit natural sand to a maximum of 20 percent by weight of the total aggregate mass.

D. Mineral Filler: ASTM D 242 or AASHTO M 17, rock or slag dust, hydraulic cement, or

other inert material.

2.2 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Asphalt Binder: AASHTO MP 1.

B. Asphalt Cement: ASTM D 3381 for viscosity-graded material ASTM D 946 for penetration-graded material.




C. Prime Coat: ASTM D 2027, medium-curing cutback asphalt.

D. Prime Coat: Asphalt emulsion prime complying with Washington State DOT requirements.

E. Tack Coat: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397 or

AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.

F. Fog Seal: ASTM D 977 or AASHTO M 140, emulsified asphalt or ASTM D 2397 or

AASHTO M 208, cationic emulsified asphalt, slow setting, factory diluted in water, of suitable grade and consistency for application.


A. Herbicide: Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by the EPA. Provide in granular, liquid, or wettable powder form.

B. Sand: ASTM D 1073 or AASHTO M 29, Grade Nos. 2 or 3.

C. Paving Geotextile: AASHTO M 288, nonwoven polypropylene; resistant to chemical attack,

rot, and mildew; and specifically designed for paving applications.

D. Joint Sealant: ASTM D 3405 or AASHTO M 301, hot-applied, single-component, polymer-modified bituminous sealant.

2.4 MIXES

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt: Dense, hot-laid, hot-mix asphalt plant mixes approved by WSDOT and designed according to procedures in AI MS-2, “Mix Design Methods for Asphalt Concrete and Other Hot-Mix Types.”

1. Provide mixes with a history of satisfactory performance in geographical area where

Project is located. 2. Provide mixes complying with composition, grading, and tolerance requirements in

ASTM D 3515 for the following nominal, maximum aggregate sizes: a. Base Course: 1-inch. b. Surface Course: 1/2-inch.




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that subgrade is dry and in suitable condition to support paving and imposed loads.

B. Proof-roll sub-base using heavy, pneumatic-tired rollers to locate areas that are unstable or that require further compaction.

C. Proceed with paving only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PATCHING

A. Hot-Mix Asphalt Pavement: Saw cut perimeter of patch and excavate existing pavement section to sound base. Excavate rectangular or trapezoidal patches, extending 12 inches into adjacent sound pavement, unless otherwise indicated. Cut excavation faces vertically. Remove excavated material. Re-compact existing unbound-aggregate base course to form new subgrade.

B. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to vertical surfaces abutting or projecting into new, hot-mix

asphalt paving at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal. /sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

C. Patching: Partially fill excavated pavements with hot-mix asphalt base mix and, while still hot, compact. Cover asphalt base course with compacted, hot-mix surface layer finished flush with adjacent surfaces.

3.3 REPAIRS

A. Leveling Course: Install and compact leveling course consisting of hot-mix asphalt surface course to level sags and fill depressions deeper than 1 inch in existing pavements.

B. Crack and Joint Filling: Remove existing joint filler material from cracks or joints to a depth

of 1/4-inch.

1. Clean cracks and joints in existing hot-mix asphalt pavement. 2. Use emulsified-asphalt slurry to seal cracks and joints less than 1/4-inch wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess. 3. Use hot-applied joint sealant to seal cracks and joints more than 1/4-inch wide. Fill

flush with surface of existing pavement and remove excess.




3.4 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. General: Immediately before placing asphalt materials, remove loose and deleterious material from substrate surfaces. Ensure that prepared subgrade is ready to receive paving.

B. Herbicide Treatment: Apply herbicide according to manufacturer’s recommended rates and

written application instructions. Apply to dry, prepared subgrade or surface of compacted-aggregate base before applying paving materials.

C. Prime Coat: Apply uniformly over surface of compacted unbound-aggregate base course at

a rate of 0.15 to 0.50 gal./sq. yd. Apply enough material to penetrate and seal but not flood surface. Allow prime coat to cure for 72 hours minimum.

1. If prime coat is not entirely absorbed within 24 hours after application, spread sand

over surface to blot excess asphalt. Use enough sand to prevent pickup under traffic. Remove loose sand by sweeping before pavement is placed and after volatiles have evaporated.

2. Protect primed substrate from damage until ready to receive paving.

D. Tack Coat: Apply uniformly to surfaces of existing pavement at a rate of 0.05 to 0.15 gal./sq. yd.

1. Allow tack coat to cure undisturbed before applying hot-mix asphalt paving. 2. Avoid smearing or staining adjoining surfaces, appurtenances, and surroundings.

Remove spillages and clean affected surfaces.

3.5 PAVING GEOTEXTILE INSTALLATION

A. Apply tack coat uniformly to existing pavement surfaces at a rate of 0.20 to 0.30 gal. /sq. yd.

B. Place paving geotextile promptly according to manufacturer’s written instructions. Broom or

roll geotextile smooth and free of wrinkles and folds. Overlap longitudinal joints 4 inches and transverse joints 6 inches.

Protect paving geotextile from traffic and other damage and place hot-mix asphalt paving overlay the same day.

3.6 HOT-MIX ASPHALT PLACING

A. Machine place hot-mix asphalt on prepared surface, spread uniformly, and strike off. Place asphalt mix by hand to areas inaccessible to equipment in a manner that prevents segregation of mix. Place each course to required grade, cross section, and thickness when compacted.

1. Place hot-mix asphalt base course in number of lifts and thicknesses indicated. 2. Spread mix at minimum temperature of 250 deg F.




3. Begin applying mix along centerline of crown for crowned sections and on high side of one-way slopes, unless otherwise indicated.

4. Regulate paver machine speed to obtain smooth, continuous surface free of pulls and tears in asphalt-paving mat.

B. Place paving in consecutive strips not less than 10 feet wide unless infill edge strips of a

lesser width are required. After first strip has been placed and rolled, place succeeding strips and extend rolling to overlap previous strips. Complete a section of asphalt base course before lacing asphalt surface course.

C. Promptly correct surface irregularities in paving course behind paver. Use suitable hand

tools to remove excess material forming high spots. Fill depressions with hot-mix asphalt to prevent segregation of mix; use suitable hand tools to smooth surface.

3.7 JOINTS

A. Construct joints to ensure a continuous bond between adjoining paving sections. Construct joints free of depressions with same texture and smoothness as other sections of hot-mix asphalt course.

1. Clean contact surfaces and apply tack coat to joints. 2. Offset longitudinal joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 6 inches. 3. Offset transverse joints, in successive courses, a minimum of 24 inches. 4. Construct transverse joints as described in AI MS-22, “Construction of Hot Mix Asphalt

Pavements.” 5. Compact joints as soon as hot-mix asphalt will bear roller weight without excessive

displacement. 6. Compact asphalt at joints to a density within 2 percent of specified course density.

3.8 COMPACTION

A. General: Begin compaction as soon as placed hot-mix paving will bear roller weight without excessive displacement. Compact hot-mix paving with hot, hand tampers or vibratory-plate compactors in areas inaccessible to rollers. Complete compaction before mix temperature cools to 185 deg F.

B. Breakdown Rolling: Complete breakdown or initial rolling immediately after rolling joints

and outside edge. Examine surface immediately after breakdown rolling for indicated crown, grade, and smoothness. Correct laydown and rolling operations to comply with requirements.

C. Intermediate Rolling: Begin intermediate rolling immediately after breakdown rolling while

hot-mix asphalt is still hot enough to achieve specified density. Continue rolling until hot-mix asphalt course has been uniformly compacted to the following density:




D. Average Density: 92 percent of reference maximum theoretical density according to ASTM D 2041, but not less than 90 percent nor greater than 96 percent.

E. Finish Rolling: Finish roll paved surfaces to remove roller marks while hot-mix asphalt is still

warm. F. Edge Shaping: While surface is being compacted and finished, trim edges of pavement to

proper alignment. Bevel edges while asphalt is still hot; compact thoroughly. G. Repairs: Remove paved areas that are defective or contaminated with foreign materials and

replace with fresh, hot-mix asphalt. Compact by rolling to specified density and surface smoothness.

H. Protection: After final rolling, do not permit vehicular traffic on pavement until it has cooled

and hardened. I. Erect barricades to protect paving from traffic until mixture has cooled enough not to

become marked.

3.9 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Thickness: Compact each course to produce the thickness indicated within the following tolerances:

1. Base Course: Plus or minus 1/2-inch. 2. Surface Course: Plus 1/4-inch, no minus.

B. Surface Smoothness: Compact each course to produce a surface smoothness within the following tolerances as determined by using a 10-foot straightedge applied transversely or longitudinally to paved areas:

1. Base Course: 1/4-inch. 2. Surface Course: 1/8-inch. 3. Crowned Surfaces: Test with crowned template centered and at right angle to crown.

Maximum allowable variance from template is 1/4-inch.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and to prepare test reports.

B. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor’s expense, will be performed to determine

compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.




C. Thickness: In-place compacted thickness of hot-mix asphalt courses will be determined according to ASTM D 3549.

D. Surface Smoothness: Finished surface of each hot-mix asphalt course will be tested for

compliance with smoothness tolerances.

E. In-Place Density: Testing agency will take samples of uncompacted paving mixtures and compacted pavement according to ASTM D 979 or AASHTO T 168.

1. Reference maximum theoretical density will be determined by averaging results from

four samples of hot-mix asphalt-paving mixture delivered daily to site, prepared according to ASTM D 2041, and compacted according to job-mix specifications.

2. In-place density of compacted pavement will be determined by testing core samples according to ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726. a. One core sample will be taken for every 1000 sq. yd. or less of installed

pavement, with no fewer than 3 cores taken. b. Field density of in-place compacted pavement may also be determined by

nuclear method according to ASTM D 2950 and correlated with ASTM D 1188 or ASTM D 2726.

F. Remove and replace or install additional hot-mix asphalt where test results or measurements

indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.

3.11 DISPOSAL

A. Except for material indicated to be recycled, remove excavated materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.




CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND WALKS 32 1600 - 1

SECTION 32 1600 – CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND WALKS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Conform to General Conditions of the Contract and Washington State Department of Transportation, Standard Specifications for Road, Bridge, and Municipal Construction, latest edition thereof. (Standard Specifications)

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT

A. Furnish concrete reinforcement, where shown on drawings. Reinforcing shall be ribbed steel, 60,000 PSI, conforming to ACI.

2.2 CONCRETE

A. Furnish 3,000 PSI 28 day, Portland Cement Concrete of materials including admixtures and

curing compounds as specified in the Standard Specifications.

2.3 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Furnish resilient bituminous type similar to Sternson Ltd. “Flexcell,” Grace Construction Products “Fiber,” Homosote Co. “Homex 300,” Old North Mfg. Co., Inc. “Gray-Flex,” or approved non-extruding type, 3/8” thick, depth as required to bring top flush with surface of slab.

2.4 PRECAST CONCRETE CURB

A. WSDOT Standard Plan F-1, “bumper curbs” shall be placed where indicated. Install in a bed of 1/8” non-shrink grout and anchor with 24-inch long, ½” diameter reinforcing bars driven flush with the curb top. Grout hole flush and finish smooth.

2.5 EXTRUDED CONCRETE CURB

A. WSDOT Standard Plan F-2b, Type 6, Extruded Concrete Curb shall be placed where indicated on the contract plans and shall meet the requirement of Section 8-04.3(1) A of the Standard Specifications.



CONCRETE PAVEMENT, CURBS AND WALKS 32 1600 - 2


3.1 INSPECTION OF PRIOR WORK Prior to all work in this Section, carefully inspect the installed work of all other trades and verify that all such work is complete to the point where this installation may properly commence.

3.2 DISCREPANCIES

A. In the event of discrepancy, immediately notify the Owner.

B. Do not proceed with installation in areas of discrepancy until all such discrepancies have been fully resolved.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS

A. Curbs and walks – general

1. Install cast-in-place concrete walks, ramps and slabs as specified. 2. Provide handicap ramps as detailed, and in locations shown conforming with

applicable provisions of the American’s with Disabilities Act.

B. Installation of expansion joints

1. Install in curbs and walks at spacings as indicated on the Drawings or as required by the governing authority.




IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 1

SECTION 32 8400 – IRRIGATION PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Contractor shall conform to the general conditions, supplementary conditions and to all special conditions.

1.2 RELATED WORK IN OTHER SECTIONS

A. Section 32 9300 – Plants 1.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. Irrigation (sub) contractor must be a state licensed landscape irrigation contractor experienced with similar systems. The irrigation system must be installed by a journeyman irrigation mechanic or journeyman plumber. Valve wiring of 24 volts shall be installed per local code requirements by the Irrigation (sub) contractor or electrical subcontractor.

B. All workmanship shall be of the highest standards of the industry. C. Workmanship that is improper, careless, and or that does not meet specification will be rejected.

The replacement or repair cost shall be at the expense of the Contractor. 1.4 SCOPE OF WORK

A. Furnish all labor, materials, to install the irrigation system complete as shown on the plans and details, and as specified herein.

B. This work includes all phases of completing and making the irrigation system fully operational,

as-built plans and an orientation meeting with the Owner’s Representative. Work consists of valves, heads, pipe, electrical service, automatic controller, and all equipment necessary to provide a fully functional irrigation system

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit each item in this Section according to the General Terms and Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specifications Sections.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 2

B. The Contractor shall provide the Owner’s Representative a complete listing of all irrigation materials required by this Section to be used on the project.

C. The listings shall include the name of the manufacturer, trade names, catalog cut sheets,

specifications, model numbers, brochures and other data giving information about each item specified.

1.6 DAMAGE TO PROPERTY

A. Any structures or facilities or other work in progress damaged due to the work on this project shall be repaired or replaced at the expense of the Contractor.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damage to any part of the premises caused by breaks

or leaks in the system for a period of one (1) year after final acceptance of the contract. C. The Contractor shall be responsible for the clean-up and removal of any building materials,

equipment and trash resulting from his/her work. The Contractor, upon completion, shall leave the property in a clean and orderly condition.

1.7 INTERPRETATION OF DRAWINGS

A. Irrigation plan is diagrammatic and is not intended to show exact location of piping, valves or controllers.

B. Sprinkler heads/tubing are to be evenly spaced and shall be installed as indicated by center of

symbol, location subject to staking by contractor and review by Landscape Architect. C. Locate these items in planting areas as closely as possible to related curbs, header boards,

fences, or edges of paving. Verify with Landscape Architect visible (above ground) locations of such items as controller, valves, and valve boxes.

D. Pipe main and lateral lines and wiring shown parallel on drawing may be placed in a common

trench. E. Trenching potentially disturbing other utilities or root systems of existing trees to be brought to

the attention of the Landscape Architect before proceeding. 1.8 EXTRA STOCK

A. Provide the following extra items to the Owner’s maintenance personnel.

1. Two quick coupler quills and swivels for quick coupler.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 3

1.9 WARRANTY

A. Irrigation is part of the one-year warranty required by the Contract Documents; the irrigation system shall be guaranteed to give complete and satisfactory service as to material and workmanship for a period of one year from day of Final Acceptance of the work by the Owner. Owner furnished equipment is part of the one-year warranty for installation and workmanship only. Should any trouble develop within one year, which in the opinion of the Landscape Architect or Owner, is due to inferior or faulty materials and/or workmanship, the trouble shall be corrected, without delay, to the satisfaction of the Owner and at Contractor expense. Any settling of backfilled trenches shall be repaired by the Contractor at own expense, including restoration of planted or paved areas.

PART 2 - MATERIALS 2.1 CONDITION OF MATERIALS

A. All materials to be installed on this project shall be new and free of defects. 2.2 POINT OF CONNECTION

A. Connect and extend irrigation mainline from Point of Connection (POC) as shown on plans.

Verify existing water pressure and backflow device are in proper working condition. 2.3 MANUAL VALVES

A. 2” and 3” mainline gate valves shall be mechanical joint, cast iron, IBBM, non-rising stem,

resilient seat, AWWA C509, 200 psi minimum, M&H or approved equal. Valve shall include 2” square operating nut. Provide one (1) valve operating wrench, 36” long, ¾” stock with “T” handle, painted with rust resistant paint. Flanged-end gate valves are also acceptable on 3” mainline including ductile iron, flanged coupling adapters, Romac FCA501 or approved equal.

B. Gate valves shall be class 150 bronze construction conforming to ASTM B 62 requirements. C. Gate Valve: Class 150 brass or bronze body with cross handle in 10" diameter valve box with

6” diameter PVC sleeve. Red and white or equal. Valve size to match size of mainline or service line. Provide Owner with one 30" valve-operating key formed to fit the crosshandle gate valves. Stem stock shall be 1/2" minimum. Quality equal to Nibco T-133 or as approved by owner.

D. Ball valves shall be made from heavy bronze body, full port, screwed. Ball valves shall be of

domestic origin. Quality standard to be Watts FBV-3, AE, Apollo, or approved equal.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 4

2.4 QUICK COUPLING VALVES

A. Quick coupling valves shall be one piece body type. The body shall be of heavy duty brass, or of heavy duty bronze. The cap may be of brass, bonze or other noncorrosive metal. Quick coupling valves shall be watertight both before and after the coupler is inserted. The valve mechanism shall be so designed that the valve seat is closed before the coupler is removed. Each valve shall have the manufacturer’s identification cast or stamped on the valve.

B. The valves shall be of a size designated on the Drawings, and shall be of a design compatible

with valve couplers, keys, and hose swivels. C. Quality standard to be Rainbird, Model No. 44-LRC, Buckner, Model No. QB 7LRC-15, or

approved equal. D. Risers for system quick coupling valves shall be 1-inch dia. Lasco swing joint kit G132-100

(MIPT x MIPT outlet) or approved equal, rated for 315 psi (minimum) with Schedule 80 PVC lay length-nipple. Note: Length of lay-length-nipple varies with depth of cover; must accommodate 45 degree (maximum) installation angle.

2.5 PVC PIPE, FITTINGS, NIPPLES

A. Any mainline piping 2-1/2 inch diameter or smaller (serving miscellaneous quick coupling valves) shall be Schedule 40 PVC, solvent weld. All lateral piping shall be Class 200 PVC, solvent weld. Pipe shall be marked with manufacturer’s name, class of pipe, NSF seal and date of manufacturer run. Pipe shall bear no evidence of interior or exterior extrusion marks. Pipe walls shall be uniform, smooth, and glossy. Pipe may be pre-belled or with individual solvent-weld couplings for laterals, or gasketed for mainlines. Pipe shall conform to US Product Standard PS 22-70, ASTM D1785, ASTM D1784, cell class 12454-B.

B. PVC fittings shall be schedule 40 rated and meet ASTM D 2466 standards and specifications. C. PVC nipples shall be schedule 80 rated and meet ASTM D 1785 requirements and

specifications. All nipples will have tapered threads. D. Drain pipe shall be polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be PVC compound Type 1, Grade 1 or 2

meeting ASTM D 3034, SDR 35. E. Fittings for gasketed PVC mainline pipe shall be an Underground Compression Fitting, with

female thread -- Epoxy Coated as manufactured by Gheen Irrigation Works, Eugene, Oregon, specifically designed for PVC mainline piping, or approved equal. Gasketed service tees with tap and tapped plugs shall be provided for connection to automatic valve assemblies and mainline quick coupling valves.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 5

2.6 JOINING MATERIALS

A. All joining materials used will be manufactured by I.P.S. or equal, and will be used in accordance to the manufacturer's written specifications and safety recommendations.

B. All threaded connections (PVC) shall be sealed by using Teflon tape or Teflon paste. C. All galvanized threads shall be sealed with an approved Teflon base pipe compound. D. PVC solvent compounds shall be IPS “Weld-On” P-70 purple primer and “Weld-On” 711

heavy-bodied gray cement or approved equal. 2.7 GALVANIZED PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Galvanized steel pipe shall be schedule 40, hot dipped galvanized, conforming to ASTM-A120-76 specifications.

B. Galvanized fittings shall be of malleable iron, hot dipped galvanized. B. Galvanized pipe, nipples and fittings shall be of domestic origin.

2.8 CONTROL WIRE

A. Control wire shall be 14 ga. solid copper wire, wire to be UF rated and UL listed. Use Red wire for leads, White wire for common, Black wire for spare.

B. Wire connectors shall be 3M DBY, or approved equal.

2.9 TRACE WIRE

A. Trace wire shall be 12 GA. solid bare copper wire. Wire to be UF rated and UL listed. 2.10 VALVE BOXES

A. Valve boxes for auto-control valves and quick coupling valves shall be Carson, gray plastic HDPE box, High Performance Series Model 1419-12 with 1419PR Polymer concrete cover, or approved equal. The cover shall be bolted down with stainless steel bolts. Cover shall be gray in turf grass areas and marked “Irrigation”. Valve box extensions shall be model BREX1419, gray, or approved equal. Include drain per detail.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 6

B. Valve boxes for mainline gate valves shall be Carson, black plastic, model 910-12 with 910-4B bolt down T cover or approved equal, 10 inch diameter circular boxes with 7 inch dia. PVC sleeve below per detail. Cover is to be black and marked “Irrigation”.

C. Valve box for marking ends of pipe tracer wiring shall be Carson, black plastic, Model 910-12

with 910-4B bolt down T cover or approved equal, 10 inch diameter circular box. Cover is to be gray and marked “Electrical”.

2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLER, REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE AND ACCESSORIES

A. Shall be per Irrigation Plan. See irrigation plans for locations. See irrigation valve schedule on

plans for station / valve assignments. 2.12 AUTO-CONTROL VALVES

A. Shall be per plan, or approved equal, with hand operated manual internal bleed and flow control. Valve shall be solenoid-operated, diaphragm, global type, with a 200 psi CWP Rating, having IPS threads.

2.13 DRIP IRRIGATION

A. Drip irrigation lines shall be installed as shown in the irrigation details. All drip irrigation components shall be manufactured by Netafim or accepted equal.

2.14 IDENTIFICATION TAG

A. Polyurethane identification tag shall be as supplied by T. Christy, Model No. ID-STD-Y1 or approved equal.

2.15 NOT LISTED EQUIPMENT

A. Not all materials needed for the completion of this irrigation system have been listed. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to furnish and install any items required to complete this irrigation system as designed, detailed and specified.

PART 3 - EXECUTION



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 7

3.1 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS

A. Location of sprinklers, valves, and other items shall be as shown on the plans and will be of the size and type as specified. No changes in the plans or the equipment will be made without prior approval of the Landscape Architect.

B. Electrical connections shall be made by the Contractor as indicated on the plans and

specifications. These installations shall conform to local codes and utilities. 3.2 LAYOUT

A. The Contractor shall stake the system from the design shown on the plans. Some alterations may be required to accommodate site conditions to insure good application rates. It is known that corrective measures in the system, if any, shall not be made without the written approval from the Owner’s Representative or his agent.

B. The Contractor layout and staking shall be approved by the Landscape Architect prior to trench

excavation or equipment installation. 3.3 ELECTRICAL CONDUIT

A. Be aware of underground utilities and under drains. Install at a depth of 24". B. Electrical service is subject to all State and Local codes, including applicable grounding

requirements. 3.4 EXCAVATION

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to locate all underground utilities before any excavation begins. Any damage caused by Contractor will be repaired at his/her expense.

B. Trenches shall be wide enough to allow ample room for pipe and wire installation. When more

than one pipe occupy the same trench, each pipe must be parallel to each other, not crossing, at a minimum of 3" apart.

C. All pipe under paved areas must be bedded with sand at a minimum depth of 6" under and 6” over pipe (sleeves).

D. Mainline shall be installed at a minimum depth of 24", maximum depth of 30”. Lateral lines

shall be installed at a minimum depth of 16", maximum depth of 18”. E. Where multiple irrigation pipes share a common trench, trench shall be sufficiently wide or

piping shall be arranged to allow 2” minimum horizontal separation and 6” minimum vertical separation between piping, while maintaining specified minimum and maximum cover over piping.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 8

3.5 BACKFILLING

A. All material to be used as backfill over pipes and around valve boxes, and vault must be fully compacted to eliminate future settling.

B. All material used as backfill must be clean of all debris and rocks larger than 1" in diameter.

Such debris and rocks shall be gathered and removed from site. 3.6 PVC PIPE LINES

A. Install pipe as shown on drawings and details. B. PVC pipe shall be installed on flat bottom trenches in a manner as recommended by the

manufacturer to allow pipe to expand and contract. C. All pipe shall be cut with a hand saw/hack saw in a manner to provide square ends. All

shavings and burrs must be removed before welding pipe or fittings. D. Flush main free of all debris and shavings prior to installing ACV’s. Flush all laterals prior to

installing sprinkler heads. E. Contractor shall exercise care when loading, hauling, and handling pipe. Damaged pipe will

not be accepted or used on this project. F. Install sleeves under paved surfaces (all hard surfaces) to allow for irrigation piping and

electrical wiring. Sleeve ends shall be sealed by installing a Fernco adapter coupling or equal at each end of sleeve.

G. Allow minimum 15 minutes set-up time for solvent weld joints before moving or handling. Pipe

shall be partially center loaded to prevent arching or slipping. No water shall be permitted in the pipe for al least 10 hours to permit solvent weld set and cure. Backfilling shall be done when pipe is not in an expanded condition due to heat or pressure. Cooling of the pipe can be accomplished by operating the system for a short period of time before backfilling, or by backfilling the early part of the morning before the heat of the day. Before pressure testing, allow 24 hours cure time for solvent weld joints.

3.7 SOLVENT WELD JOINTS

A. All solvent weld joints must be first primed and then welded per manufacturers recommendations.

B. The pipe and fittings shall be clean of all foreign matter and water before solvent can be

applied.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 9

C. Contractor shall not be allowed to weld mainline pipe with a ‘one step’ glue, such as IPS 721 or

725 or equivalent. 3.8 POINT OF CONNECTION

A. See civil water utility plans and specifications for irrigation meter and backflow device location. 3.9 TRACE WIRE

A. Install a bare copper trace wire over all mainlines and lateral lines on project. B. Trace Wire shall be installed directly on top of pipe. Fasten to pipe with electrical tape or plastic

wire ties at 20' intervals. 3.10 CONTROL WIRE

A. Wire shall be pulled from valve location to controller location in one continuous piece. B. Wire shall be grouped together, taped with electrical tape at 10' intervals. Wire then will be

installed under main line or laterals in a soft snaking manor to prevent copper from being stretched and or damaged.

C. Coil a minimum of 5' of each wire in each valve box. D. No field wire splices shall be allowed between valve boxes. All wiring connections shall be

installed in valve boxes or separate handhole. 3.11 CONTROLLER

A. Controller shall be wall mounted. Coordinate exact location of controller with Mechanical Plans and Landscape Architect.

B. Contractor shall install all electrical components as per the manufacturer's specifications to

properly operate the controller and sprinkler system. 3.12 AUTOMATIC CONTROL VALVES

A. The supply line must be thoroughly flushed before installing any Automatic Control Valves

B. Contractor shall install ACV as detailed on drawings.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 10

C. Contractor shall install one valve per box. D. All valve boxes shall receive a polyurethane identification tag identifying the valve station

number. Valve number shall be marked on exterior of the valve box lid with minimum 1” letters. 3.13 VALVE BOXES

A. Install all valve boxes plumb and flush with finish grade, so that a roller-type mower may pass over without interference. Valve box archway shall not rest on piping; provide a minimum f one-inch clearance around the inlet and outlet pipe.

3.14 ISOLATION VALVES

A. Contractor shall install isolation valves as detailed on the drawings. 3.15 SPRINKLER HEADS / DRIP

A. Contractor shall install irrigation components as detailed on drawings. B. Placement shall be 6" from edge of paving/concrete edge.

3.16 TESTING OF SYSTEM

A. After flushing and valving main line and prior to backfilling a pressure test will be required on the main line.

B. Mainline shall have a one-hour test at a pressure of 150 PSI. A maximum pressure loss of 5 PSI

is allowed. C. Contractor is responsible to set up all equipment necessary to comply with test. D. Contractor shall schedule pressure test 48 hours in advance with Landscape Architect. E. Lateral lines shall be visually tested before heads are installed at line pressure. Schedule

pressure tests on lateral with Landscape Architect 48 hours in advance. F. Before any testing starts all air must be expelled from the pipe. G. Any section of pipe not passing pressure test shall be repaired and re-tested.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 11

3.17 PRODUCTS TO BE PROVIDED TO OWNER

A. The following list of materials shall be provided to the Owner’s Representative at time of project completion:

1. 2- QCV Keys. Manufacturer to match installed Quick Coupler Valve.

2. 2- Hose swivels. Manufacturer to match installed Quick Coupler Valve. 3.18 PERFORMANCE TEST

A. A performance test is part of the final review B. Upon completion of the system installation and after the flushing and pressure tests have been

completed and the system has been adjusted, the Contractor shall operate the system in the presence of the Owner’s Representative.

C. Coverage check: Each automatic valve shall be operated to determine complete sprinkler

coverage. During the coverage check, the remote TRC transmitter/receiver shall be operated to ensure proper functioning.

D. The Landscape Architect may direct that up to five (5) percent of the total nozzles be substituted,

at no additional cost to the owner. 3.19 WINTERIZING IRRIGATION SYSTEM

A. In the presence of the Owner’s grounds maintenance representative, turn off and winterize entire system to prevent freezing damage at the end of the watering season during first year. The system shall be turned on in spring and checked out to insure proper operation for coming season in first year. Blow system free of all water by air injection at Point of Connection (P.O.C.) and Quick Coupler Valve (Q.C.V.) and show Owner’s maintenance personnel locations of all compressed air blow down valves on site for winterizing sprinkler system. Take complete responsibility for any damage resulting from freezing water in lines and improper winterizing of system during first year.

PART 4 - RECORD DRAWINGS AND MAINTENANCE 4.1 ADJUSTING SYSTEM

A. Before final inspection, the Contractor shall adjust and balance all sprinklers to provide adequate and uniform coverage. Spray patterns shall be balanced by adjusting individual sprinkler heads with the adjustment screws or replacing heads to produce a uniform pattern.



IRRIGATION

SECTION 32 8400 - 12

B. Backfill except for valve boxes. Clean sediment from valve boxes so that washed gravel is below bottom of valve, and wiring (including spare conductor) is visible.

C. Sprinkler spray patterns shall not be permitted on pavement, walks, or structures.

4.2 AS-BUILT PLANS AND SYSTEM ORIENTATION

A. Contractor shall maintain a set of drawings on the site specifically for recording changes as they occur during the job per Closeout Procedures. All changes shall be current to within 24 hours of said change. Upon completion of work, the Owner’s representative shall provide the Contractor with a set of reproducible drawings on which to make any changes, diagrams, or other drawing modifications necessary to show the actual location of the installed system. Actual locations for all equipment shall be indicated by field verified dimensions. These drawings shall be neatly drafted and clearly legible. They shall be resubmitted to the Landscape Architect upon their completion. The Contractor shall conduct a training and orientation session covering the operation, adjustment, winterization and maintenance of the irrigation system. The Contractor shall provide the owner with a parts list and service manuals for all equipment. Contractor shall be responsible for one fall winterization and one spring activation of the system and shall conduct these operations as part of the Owner's training and orientation procedures.

B. Contractor shall provide a zone control map encased in plastic and mounted next to the

Controller. The map will show main and zone valves and the area they cover. 4.3 MAINTENANCE

A. Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining system and protecting it from all damage (at no cost to the Owner) for the duration of the maintenance period, including damage caused by vandalism or adverse weather conditions.




PLANTS SECTION 32 9300 - 1

SECTION 32 9300 – PLANTS PART 1 – GENERAL 1.1 DESCRIPTION

A. Provide trees, shrubs and ground cover as indicated. The work includes, but is not limited to, the following:

1. Soil preparation 2. Plants 3. Planting Mixes 4. Planting accessories 5. Maintenance


A. Plant and tree names indicated comply with "Standardized Plant Names" as adopted by the latest edition of the American Joint Committee of Horticultural Nomenclature. Names of varieties not listed conform generally with names accepted by the nursery trade. Provide stock true to botanical name and legibly tagged.

B. Comply with sizing and grading standards of the latest edition of "American Standard for

Nursery Stock." A plant shall be dimensioned as it stands in its natural position. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following certification: 1. Order confirmation. Certify in writing to Landscape Architect, confirmed orders for

plants including quantity, size and condition, location, and phone number and address of the grower to provide plants.

2. Certificates: Provide certificates required by law with all shipments and, upon completion of installation, deliver all certificates to the Landscape Architect.

B. Upon plant material acceptance, submit written maintenance instructions recommending

procedures for maintenance of plant materials. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fertilizer materials in original, unopened, and undamaged containers showing weight, analysis, and name of manufacturer. Store in manner to prevent wetting and deterioration.




B. Take all precautions customary in good trade practice in preparing plants for moving. Dig,

pack, transport, and handle plants with care to ensure protection against injury. Protect all plants from drying out.

C. Cover plants transported on open vehicles with a protective covering to prevent windburn. D. Provide dry, loose topsoil for planting areas. Frozen or muddy topsoil is not acceptable. E. Plants shall be installed within 14 calendar days of delivery to site.


A. Work notification: Notify Landscape Architect at least seven working days prior to installation of plant material.

B. Protect existing utilities, paving, and other facilities from damage caused by landscaping

operations. C. A complete list of plants, including a schedule of sizes, quantities, and other requirements is

shown on the drawings. Installed quantities shall match the quantities indicated on the plant material legend. In the event that quantity discrepancies occur between the plant material legend and the plant materials installed, a credit for plant material not installed shall be provided to the Owner.

D. The irrigation system must be installed in coordination with the planting. Locate, protect, and

maintain the irrigation system during planting operations. Repair irrigation system components damaged during planting operations, at Contactor’s expense.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. General: The special warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents, and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Warrant plant material to remain alive and be in healthy, vigorous condition for a period of one

year after completion and final acceptance of planting. 1. Inspection of plants will be made by the Landscape Architect at completion of planting. C. Replace, in accordance with the drawings and specifications, all plants that are dead or, as

determined by the Landscape Architect, are in an unhealthy or unsightly condition and have lost their natural shape due to dead branches or other causes due to the Contractor's negligence.




The cost of such replacement(s) is at Contractor's expense. Warrant all replacement plants for one year after final acceptance or for one full growing season, whichever is longer.

D. Warranty shall not include damage or loss of plants caused by fires, floods, freezing rains,

lightning storms, winds over 75 miles per hour, winter kill of installed plant materials caused by extreme cold and severe winter conditions not typical of planting area, or acts of vandalism or negligence on the part of the Owner.

E. Remove and immediately replace all plants as determined by the Landscape Architect to be

unsatisfactory during the initial planting installation.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Plants: Provide plants typical of their species or variety, with normal, densely developed branches and vigorous, fibrous root systems. Provide only sound, healthy, vigorous plants free from defects, disfiguring knots, sunscald injuries, frost cracks, abrasions of the bark, plant diseases, insect eggs, borers, and all forms of infestation. All plants shall have a fully developed form without voids and open spaces. Plants held in storage will be rejected if they show signs of growth during storage. Plants shall not be delivered to the project site until conditions for planting have been established, the soil and planting areas have been prepared, the irrigation system is installed and tested and plant installation is imminent. All plants shall be installed within 14 calendar days of their delivery to the project site.

1. Dig balled and burlapped plants with firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter

and depth to encompass the fibrous and feeding root system necessary for full recovery of the plant. Provide ball sizes complying with the latest edition of the "American Standard for Nursery Stock". Cracked, broken or mushroomed balls are not acceptable.

2. Container grown stock: Grown in a container for sufficient length of time for the root system to have developed to hold its soil together, firm and whole. a. No plants shall be loose in the container b. Container stock shall not be pot bound.

3. Plants larger than those specified in the plant list may be used when acceptable to the

Landscape Architect.

a. If the use of larger plants is acceptable, increase the spread of roots or root ball in proportion to the size of the plant.

4. No pruning wounds shall be present with a diameter of more than 1", and such wounds

must show vigorous bark on all edges. 5. Plants planted in rows shall be matched in form.




6. Shrubs and small plants shall meet the requirements for spread and height and indicated in the plant list. a. The measurement for height shall be taken from the ground level to the average

height of the top of the plant, and not the longest branch. b. Single stemmed or thin plants will not be accepted. c. Side branches shall be generous, well twigged, and the plant as a whole well-

bushed to the ground. d. Plants shall be in a moist, vigorous condition, free from dead wood, bruises, or

other root or branch injuries. 2.2 ACCESSORIES AND SOIL AMENDMENTS

A. Topsoil: Pacific Topsoil Supreme Mix or approved equal. B. Structural Soil in Planting Strips: Structural soil shall consist of a mixture of gravel, soil and

admixtures as described below. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to provide the required.

Structural Soil shall consist of the following materials:

Crushed Rock Loam / Organic Topsoil Soil Binder – ‘Stabilizer’ Water Crushed Rock: Gradation of 100% passing 1.25 inch, 26% passing 0.75 inch, 4% passing 0.25 inch, and 0.5% passing No. 40 sieve by weight. Soil: ASTM D2487 Soils Classification SW-SC Well-graded Sand with Silty Clay. Composition of 9% Gravel, 81% Sand, 8% Silt, and 2% Clay. Organic content of 8.3% dry weight. Stabilizer Stabilizer as supplied by Stabile Inc. 2218 E Magnolia Street, Phoenix, Arizona 85034. 1-800-336-2468

Proportions of Materials:

Material Amount for 1 CY of Structural Soil

Amount for 4.6 CY of Structural Soil

Crushed Rock 23.2 Cubic Feet 4 Cubic Yards Topsoil 5.9 Cubic Feet 1 Cubic Yard Soil Binder – Stabilizer 13.7 oz 4 pounds Water 1.6 gallon 46 gallons




The target moisture content is 20% by weight of the topsoil weight. The above water contents assume the topsoil is ‘dry’. The amount of water that will need to be added will be dependent on the moisture content of the raw materials. Actual amounts of water used will be determined during the mixing process. Mixing Procedure: Mix structural soil in batches of an appropriate size for the equipment being used. The end result is to be a material that is uniformly blended together. Do not batch in quantities that will not allow the equipment to completely mix the material. Determine batch size and quantities of each material needed for the batch. 1. Start with half of the crushed rock material. 2. Add all of the topsoil material 3. Add all of the soil binder 4. Add half the estimated water 5. Add the second half of the crushed rock material 6. Mix the materials together 7. Slowly add water to the mixture and continue to mix. The final amount of water will

vary with moisture content of the crushed rock and topsoil. Add water in incremental amounts and mix the material between the additions of water.

8. Stop adding water and mixing when there is a minute amount of free topsoil remaining. The topsoil will coat the crushed rock and not fall out of the material. All of the crushed rock should be uniformly coated with topsoil. There should be no clumps of topsoil or uncovered crushed rock in the mixture.

9. If too much water is added to the mixture water will drain out of the material and the topsoil will wash off of the crushed rock. If this occurs, the batch of material is to be discarded and shall not be incorporated into the completed work.

C. Compost Amendment: Amend existing soils with Cedar Grove Compost, or approved equal. D. Plant Fertilizer: Scotts® Agriform 20-10-5 Fertilizer Tablets, 2 Year Formula or approved equal. E. Water: Free of substances harmful to plant growth. F. Mulch: Cedar Grove Compost - or approved equal. G. Anti-desiccant: A transpiration retarding material such as “Wilt Pruf”, or approved equal. H. Polymer: A polymer providing additional soil water-holding characteristics, consisting of one of

the following named products or approved equal: 1. STA WET 2. Broadleaf P4 3. Aquagro




PART 3 – EXECUTION 3.1 INSPECTION

A. Examine proposed planting areas and conditions of installation. Do not start planting work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

B. Stake proposed locations of all trees prior to excavation of planting pits. Location of trees shall

be approved by Landscape Architect prior to the excavation and/or installation of all plant materials.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Site Preparation: Remove stones, sticks, mortar, concrete rubbish, debris and any materials harmful to plant life. Where there are not conflicts with existing tree root systems (extent of tree canopy), tree planting areas shall be scarified to a depth of 12”, removing all materials 3” diameter or greater from the top 6” of soil. Thoroughly incorporate a minimum of 4” depth topsoil into the top 4” of existing soil. Areas where existing tree root systems to remain are encountered shall be hand tilled to a depth of 4” to minimize root disturbance. Final grade shall be established at a depth not less than 6 inches, and rising at 3:1 slope away from an edge toward the center of the planting area, where it will be as deep as possible. Any areas that are recompacted by equipment or vehicles shall be re-scarified at the direction of the Landscape Architect.

B. Weed Eradication and Control: Achieve complete removal or kill.

C. Placement of Tree Structural Soil:

1. Protect soils and mixes from absorbing excess water and from erosion at all times. Do

not store materials unprotected from rainfall events. Do not allow excess water to enter site prior to compaction. If water is introduced into the material after grading, allow material to drain or aerate to optimum compaction moisture content.

2. All areas to receive Structural Soil mixture shall be inspected by the Engineer before starting placement of mixture. All defects such as incorrect grading, compaction and inadequate drainage, etc., shall be corrected prior to beginning placement of and Structural Soil.

3. Confirm that the subgrade is at the proper elevation and compacted as required. Subgrade elevations shall slope parallel to the finished grade. Clear the excavation with approved fill and compact to the required sub-grade compaction.

4. Install Structural Soil in 6-inch lifts and compact each lift to 85 percent of maximum density. Delay compaction 24 hours if moisture content exceeds maximum allowable and protect Structural Soil with plastic or as directed by the Engineer.

5. Bring Structural Soil to finished grades as shown on the drawings. Immediately protect the Structural Soil material from contamination by water by covering with plastic or plywood as directed by the Engineer.




6. The Engineer may periodically check the material being delivered and installed at the site for mixture proportions and consistency with the material requirements of these specifications. In the event that the installed material varies significantly, in the opinion of the Engineer, from the specified material, the Contractor shall remove the material and replace it with the specified Structural Soil material at no extra cost to the Contracting Agency.

D. Shrub and Tree Planting Pit Preparation:

1. Excavate circular plant pits with roughened and sloped sides. Provide planting pits 1.5x

the diameter of the rootball for trees and shrubs. 2. Backfill planting pit with equal parts native soil and specified topsoil thoroughly mixed

together. Add fertilizer tablets. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Plant Material Layout: Location of plant materials shall be as follows: 1. Contractor shall establish preliminary locations for all trees, shrubs and groundcover

masses based upon locations identified in the Contract Drawings. 2. Exact location of materials shall be field adjusted and approved by the Landscape

Architect prior to plant pit excavation. 3. Contractor shall request inspection of the plant material and locations by the Landscape

Architect a minimum of 24 hours in advance of inspection.

B. Provide planting pits for all shrubs and trees. Set plant material in the planting pit to proper grade and alignment. Set plants upright, plumb, and faced to give the best appearance or relationship to each other or adjacent structure. Set plant material 2" above the finish grade. No filling will be permitted around trunks or stems. Backfill the pit with topsoil amended native soil. Do not use frozen or muddy mixtures for back-filling.

Reasonable care shall be exercised to have pits dug and soil prepared prior to moving plants to

their respective locations for planting to ensure they will not be unnecessarily exposed to drying elements or to physical damage.

C. Plant Pit Fertilizer: per manufacturers recommendations:

1 Gal. 1 packet 2 Gal. 2 packets 5 Gal. 3 packets Up to 1 ½” caliper 8 packets 1 ½” to 2” caliper 12 packets




D. After plants are set, muddle amended soil around bases of root balls and fill all voids by watering and refilling. Create water-retaining ring of soil min 3 inch high and just outside the perimeter of the root ball. Initial water by sprinkler system is not permitted.

1. Remove all burlap, ropes, and wires from the tops of balls. Do not pull burlap from

under balls. If burlap is biodegradable, remove burlap from top 2/3 of rootball and discard. If burlap is not biodegradable, completely remove burlap from rootball prior to placement and discard.

E. Mulching: Install mulch 2” – 3” depth throughout tree, shrub and groundcover planting areas.

Rake smooth. F. Staking / Guying

1. Stake / guy all trees as shown in details immediately after planting operations and prior

to acceptance. 3.4 PROTECTION OF EXISTING VEGETATION

A. Protection of Existing Trees:

1. Contractor shall protect existing trees. Where it is necessary to excavate adjacent to existing trees and shrubs, caution shall be exercised to avoid injury to roots and trunk.

B. Protection of Existing Vegetation:

1. Work shall be confined to designated areas. The Contractor shall not disturb existing

vegetation outside project limits and shall protect all trees within project limits not designated to be removed.

2. The Contractor shall ensure than no foreign or toxic material and/or liquid such as

paint, concrete, cement, oil, gasoline, turpentine, acid, or other deleterious material is deposed or allow to be deposed on any soil with the construction limits. Should any such poisoning of the soil occur, the Contract shall remove such soil and replace it with acceptable soil at no expense to the Owner.

3.5 MAINTENANCE

A. Plant maintenance shall consist of ensuring resumption and continued growth of al planted material for a period of one (1) year. This shall include, but is not limited to labor and materials necessary for removal and replacement of any rejected plant material planted under this contract.

In addition, the Contractor shall coordinate and meet with the Owner’s Representative for the

purpose of joint observation of the project on the closest working day to the first of the month.




The Contractor shall correct all conditions unsatisfactory to the Owner’s Representative within a five (5) day period immediately following the meeting. Corrective work shall include the removal and disposal of all unsatisfactory plant material. Failure to comply with corrective steps outlined by the Owner’s Representative shall constitute justifications for the Owner to take corrective steps and to deduct all costs thereof from any monies due the Contractor. All plants which, at any point during the plant maintenance period, do not show healthy and vigorous growth shall be immediately replaced as directed by the Owner’s Representative.

All cost associated with Plant Maintenance shall be considered incidental to and included in the

unit contract price for the plant material. B. Maintenance shall include pruning, cultivating, fertilizing, pest and diseases control, and

watering. 1. Re-set settled plants to proper grade and position. Restore planting saucer and adjacent

material, and remove dead material. 2. Tighten and repair guy wires and stakes as required.

3. Correct defective work as soon as possible after deficiencies become apparent and weather and season permit.

4. Water trees within the first 24 hours of initial planting, and not less than twice per week until final acceptance.

3.6 ACCEPTANCE A. Planted areas will be inspected at completion of all project work and accepted subject to

compliance with specified materials and installation requirements. B. The one year warranty shall remain in effect.

3.7 CLEANING A. Any soil, organic, mulch or similar material which has been brought on to paved areas by

hauling operations or otherwise shall be removed promptly, keeping these areas clean at all times. Upon completion of planting, all excess soil, stones, and debris which has not previously been cleaned up shall be removed from the site or disposed of as directed by the Owner. Repair all damage resulting from planting operations. All lawns and planting areas shall be prepared for final inspection.




WATER UTILITIES 33 1000 - 1

SECTION 33 1000 – WATER UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-distribution piping and specialties outside the building for the following:

1. Water services. 2. Fire-service mains.

B. Utility furnished products include water meters that will be furnished to the site, ready for

installation.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Fire-Service Main: Exterior fire suppression water piping. B. Water Service: Exterior domestic water piping. C. The following are industry abbreviations for plastic materials:

1. PE: Polyethylene plastic 2. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data for the following:

1. Piping specialties. 2. Valves and accessories. 3. Water meters and accessories. 4. Backflow preventers and assemblies. 5. Protective enclosures. 6. Fire hydrants. 7. Fire department connections.




8. Alarm devices. 9. Post hydrants.


A. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of piping and specialties and are based on the specific system indicated.

B. Regulatory Requirements:

1. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water, including tapping of

water mains and backflow prevention. 2. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water service

piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection. 3. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for fire-suppression water-

service piping, including materials, hose threads, installation, and testing.

C. Piping materials shall bear label, stamp, or other markings of specified testing agency. D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA

70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

E. Comply with ASTM F 645 for selection, design, and installation of thermoplastic water

piping. F. Comply with FM’s “Approval Guide” or UL’s “Fire Protection Equipment Directory” for fire-

service-main products. G. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 24 for materials, installations, tests, flushing, and

valve and hydrant supervision for fire-service-main piping for fire suppression. H. NSF Compliance: Comply with NSF 14 & 61 for plastic potable-water-service piping.


A. Preparation for Transport: Prepare valves, including fire hydrants, according to the following:

1. Ensure that valves are dry and internally protected against rust and corrosion. 2. Protect valves against damage to threaded ends and flange faces. 3. Set valves in best position for handling. Set valves closed to prevent rattling.

B. During Storage: Use precautions for valves, including fire hydrants, according to the

following:




1. Do not remove end protectors unless necessary for inspection; then re-install for storage.

2. Protect from weather. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point temperature. Support off the ground or pavement in watertight enclosures when outdoor storage is necessary.

C. Handling: Use sling to handle valves and fire hydrants if size requires handling by crane or

lift. Rig valves to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use handwheels or stems as lifting or rigging points.

D. Deliver piping with factory-applied end caps. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage,

and handling to prevent pipe-end damage and to prevent entrance of dirt, debris, and moisture.

E. Protect stored piping from moisture and dirt. Elevate above grade. Do not exceed

structural capacity of floor when storing inside. F. Protect flanges, fittings, and specialties from moisture and dirt. G. Store plastic piping protected from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending.


A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner’s written permission.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate connection to water main with utility providing service.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply for product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be

incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the products specified.




2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the manufacturers specified.

2.2 DUCTILE-IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C151, with mechanical-joint, bell-and plain-spigot end unless grooved or flanged ends are indicated.

1. Mechanical-Joint, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile-or gray-iron standard

pattern or AWWA C153, ductile-iron compact pattern.

a. Glands, Gaskets, and Bolts: AWWA C111, ductile-or gray-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

B. Ductile-Iron Flexible Expansion Joints: Compound, ductile-iron fitting with combination of

flanged and mechanical-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include two gasketed ball-joint sections and one or more gasketed sleeve sections. Assemble components for offset and expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

C. Ductile-Iron Deflection Fittings: Compound, ductile-iron coupling fitting with sleeve and

flexing sections for up to 20-degree deflection, gaskets, and restrained-joint ends complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

D. Ductile-Iron Expansion Joints: Three-piece, ductile-iron assembly consisting of telescoping

sleeve with gaskets and restrained-type, ductile-iron, bell-and-spigot end sections complying with AWWA C110 or AWWA C153. Select and assemble components for expansion indicated. Include AWWA C111, ductile-iron glands, rubber gaskets, and steel bolts.

2.3 PE PIPE AND FITTINGS

A. PE, ASTM Pipe: ASTM D2239, SDR Numbers 5.3, 7, or 9; with PE compound number required to give pressure rating not less than 200 psig.

1. Insert Fittings for PE Pipe: ASTM D 2609, made of PA, PP, or PVC with serrated, male

insert ends matching inside of pipe. Include bands or crimp rings. 2. Molded PE Fittings: ASTM D 3350, PE resin, socket or butt-fusion type, made to

match PE pipe dimensions and class.

2.4 GATE VALVES

A. AWWA, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:




1. Manufacturers:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. e. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa) f. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. g. McWane, Inc.; Tyler Pipe; Utilities Div. h. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.

2. Nonrising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509 or C515, gray or

ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or gray or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

a. Minimum Working Pressure: 250 psig. b. End Connections: Mechanical joint. c. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

3. Nonrising-Stem, High-Pressure, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509 or C515,

ductile-iron body and bonnet; with bronze or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, bronze stem, and stem nut.

a. Minimum Working Pressure: 250 psig. b. End Connections: Push-on or mechanical joint. c. Interior Coating: Complying with AWWA C550.

4. OS&Y, Rising-Stem, Resilient-Seated Gate Valves: AWWA C509 or C515, cast-iron

or ductile-iron body and bonnet, outside screw and yoke; with bronze or gray or ductile-iron gate, resilient seats, and bronze stem. a. Minimum Working Pressure: 200 psig. b. End Connections: Flanged.

B. UL/FM, Cast-Iron Gate Valves:

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Crane Co.; Crane Valve Group; Stockham Div. d. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. e. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa) f. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. g. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.




2. UL/FM, Nonrising-Stem Gate Valves: UL 262, FM-approved iron body and bonnet with flange for indicator post, bronze seating material, and inside screw.

a. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig. b. End Connections: Flanged.

3. OS&Y, Rising-Stem Gate Valves: UL 262, FM-approved iron body and bonnet,

bronze seating material, and outside screw and yoke.

a. Minimum Working Pressure: 175 psig. b. End Connections: Flanged.

2.5 GATE VALVE ACCESSORIES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Tapping-Sleeve Assemblies: Comply with MSS SP-60. Include sleeve and valve compatible with drilling machine.

1. Manufacturer:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. b. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. c. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa) d. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. e. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.

2. Tapping Sleeve: Cast or ductile-iron or stainless steel, two-piece bolted sleeve with

flanged outlet for new branch connection. Include sleeve matching size and type of pipe material being tapped and with recessed flange for branch valve.

3. Valve: AWWA, cast-iron, non-rising stem, resilient-seated gate valve with one raised face flange mating tapping-sleeve flange.

B. Valve Boxes: Comply with AWWA M44 for cast-iron valve boxes. Include top section,

adjustable extension of length required for depth of burial of valve, plug with lettering “WATER,” bottom section with base of size to fit over valve, and approximately 5-inch diameter barrel.

1. Operating Wrenches: Steel, tee-handle with one pointed end, stem of length to

operate deepest buried valve, and socket matching valve operating nut.

C. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, vertical-type, cast-iron body with operating wrench, extension rod, and adjustable cast-iron barrel of length required for depth of burial of valve.

D. Indicator Posts: UL 789, FM-approved, horizontal, wall-type, cast-iron body with operating

wrench, extension rod, and cast-iron barrel.




2.6 RELIEF VALVES

A. Air-Release Valves: AWWA C512, hydromechanical device to automatically release accumulated air. Include 300-psig working-pressure design.

B. Air/Vacuum Valves: AWWA C512, direct-acting, float-operated, hydromechanical device

with large orifice to automatically release accumulated air or to admit air during filling of piping. Include 300-psig working-pressure design.

C. Combination Air Valves: AWWA C512, float-operated, hydromechanical device to

automatically release accumulated air or to admit air. Include 300-psig working pressure design.

2.7 WATER METERS

A. Water meters will be furnished by utility company.

2.8 WATER-METER BOXES

A. Polymer-concrete body and cover for disc-type water meter with lettering “WATER’ in cover; and slotted, open-bottom base section of length to fit over service piping. Include vertical and lateral design loadings of 15,000 lb minimum over 10 by 10 inches square.

2.9 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cla-Val Co. 2. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Hersey Meters. 3. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div. 4. Zurn Industries, Inc.; Wilkins Div.

B. General: ASSE standard, backflow preventers.

1. Working Pressure: 150 psig minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze body with threaded ends. 3. NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) and Larger: Bronze, cast-iron, steel, or stainless-steel body with

flanged ends. a. Interior Lining: AWWA C550 or FDA-approved, epoxy coating for backflow

preventers having cast-iron or steel body.

4. Interior Components: Corrosion-resistant materials. 5. Exterior Finish: Polished chrome plate if used in chrome-plated piping system.




6. Strainer: On inlet, if indicated.Units in paragraph below are for moderate to high hazard and are available in NPS 1/4 to NPS 3 (DN 8 to DN 80). They are unsuitable for continuous pressure or protection from backflow.

C. Reduced-Pressure-Principle Backflow Preventers: AWWA C511, suitable for continuous

pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2, air-gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves.

D. Double-Check-Valve Backflow Prevention Assemblies: AWWA C510, suitable for

continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet; test cocks; and two positive-seating check valves.

E. Double-Check-Valve Backflow Prevention Assemblies: UL 312, FM approved; with two UL

312, FM-approved, iron-body, 175-psig working-pressure, flanged-end check valves and two UL 262, FM-approved, iron-body, outside screw and yoke, flanged, 175-psig working-pressure gate valves. Maximum Pressure Loss: [5 psig] through middle 1/3 of flow range.

F. Reduced-Pressure-Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1047, FM approved or UL

listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; pressure-differential relief valve with ASME A112.1.2, air-gap fitting located between two positive-seating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and reduced-pressure backflow preventer. Maximum Pressure Loss: [12 psig] through middle 1/3 of flow range.

G. Double-Check-Detector Assembly Backflow Preventers: ASSE 1048, FM approved or UL

listed, and suitable for continuous pressure application. Include outside screw and yoke gate valves on inlet and outlet, and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks; two positive-seating check valves; and bypass with displacement-type water meter, valves, and double-check backflow preventer. Maximum Pressure Loss: [5 psig] through middle 1/3 of flow range.

2.10 CONCRETE VAULTS

A. Description: Precast, reinforced-concrete vault, designed for H20 load designation and made according to ASTM C 858.

B. Ladder: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel or polyethylene-encased steel steps. C. Manhole: ASTM A 48, Class No. 35 minimum tensile strength, gray-iron traffic frame and

cover. Dimension: Not smaller than 24-inch diameter, unless otherwise indicated. D. Manhole: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile-iron, 24-inch minimum-diameter traffic

frame and cover. E. Drain: ASME A112.21.1M, cast-iron floor drain with outlet of size indicated. Include body

anchor flange, light-duty cast-iron grate, bottom outlet, and integral or field-installed bronze ball or clapper-type backwater valve.




2.11 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURES

A. Manufacturers:

1. G&C Enclosures, Inc. 2. Hot Box, Inc. 3. HydroCowl, Inc. 4. Watts Industries, Inc.; Water Products Div.

B. Protective Enclosures, General: ASSE 1060, outdoor weather-resistant enclosure designed

to protect aboveground water piping equipment or specialties from vandalism. Include size and dimensions indicated but not less than those required for access and service of protected unit.

C. Freeze-Protection Enclosures: Insulated and with heat source to maintain minimum internal

temperature of 40 deg F (4 deg C) when external temperatures reach as low as minus 34 deg F (minus 36 deg C).

1. Class I: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum

breakers. 2. Class I-V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices.

Include drain opening in housing. a. Housing: Reinforced fiberglass construction.

1) Drain opening for units with drain connection. 2) Access doors with locking devices. 3) Insulation inside housing. 4) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

b. Electric heating cable or heater with self-limiting temperature control.

D. Non-freeze-Protection Enclosures: Non-insulated and without heat source.

1. Class III: For equipment or devices other than pressure or atmospheric vacuum

breakers. 2. Class III-V: For pressure or atmospheric vacuum breaker equipment or devices.

Include drain opening in housing.

a. Housing: Reinforced fiberglass construction.

1) Drain opening for units with drain connection. 2) Access doors with locking devices. 3) Anchoring devices for attaching housing to concrete base.

E. Pre-cast concrete base of dimensions required to extend at least 6 inches beyond edges of

enclosure housings. Include openings for piping.




2.12 FREESTANDING FIRE HYDRANTS

A. Dry-Barrel, High-Pressure Fire Hydrants: AWWA C502, one NPS 4-1/2 (DN 115) and two NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) outlets, 5-1/4-inch main valve, drain valve, and NPS 6 (DN 150) mechanical-joint inlet. Include interior coating according to AWWA C550. Hydrant shall have cast-iron body, compression-type valve opening against pressure and closing with pressure, and 250-psig minimum working-pressure design.

1. Manufacturers:

a. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; American Flow Control Div. b. American Cast Iron Pipe Co.; Waterous Co. Subsidiary. c. Grinnell Corporation; Mueller Co.; Water Products Div. d. McWane, Inc.; Clow Valve Co. Div. (Oskaloosa) e. McWane, Inc.; Kennedy Valve Div. f. McWane, Inc.; M & H Valve Company Div.

2. Outlet Threads: NFPA 1963, with external hose thread used by local fire department.

Include cast-iron caps with steel chains. 3. Operating and Cap Nuts: Pentagon, 1-1/2 inches point to flat. 4. Direction of Opening: Open hydrant valve by turning operating nut to left or

counterclockwise. 5. Exterior Finish: Yellow alkyd-gloss enamel paint, unless otherwise indicated.

2.13 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Elkhart Brass Mfg. Co., Inc. 2. Grinnell Corporation. 3. Guardian Fire Equipment, Inc.

B. Exposed, Freestanding, Fire Department Connections: UL 405, cast-bronze body, with

thread inlets according to NFPA 1963 and matching local fire department hose threads, and threaded bottom outlet. Include lugged caps, gaskets, and chains; lugged swivel connection and drop clapper for each hose-connection inlet; 18-inch-high brass sleeve; and round escutcheon plat.

1. Connections: Two NPS 2-1/2 (DN 65) inlets 2. Inlet Alignment: Square. 3. Finish Including Sleeve: Polished bronze. 4. Escutcheon Plat Marking: “AUTO SPKR & STANDPIPE.”




PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Refer to Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for excavating, trenching, and backfilling.

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. General: Use pipe, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following applications.

B. Transition couplings and special fittings with pressure ratings at least equal to piping

pressure rating may be used in applications below, unless otherwise indicated. C. Do not use flanges, unions, or keyed couplings for underground piping. D. Flanges, unions, keyed couplings, and special fittings may be used, instead of joints

indicated, on aboveground piping and piping in vaults.

E. Underground Water-Service Piping: Use any of the following piping materials for each size range:

1. NPS ¾ to NPS 2 (DN 20 to DN 50): PE, ASTM pipe; joints. 2. NPS ¾ to NPS 3 1/2 (DN 20 to DN 50): PVC Schedule 80 socket fittings; and

solvent-cemented joints. 3. NPS 4 (DN 100): Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints. 4. NPS 4 (DN 100): PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe; mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings;

and gasketed joints. 5. NPS 6-10: (DN 150): ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; mechanical-joint fittings;

and mechanical joints. 6. NPS 6-10 (DN 150): Use NPS 6 (DN 150) PVC, AWWA Class 200 pipe;

mechanical-joint, ductile-iron fittings; and gasketed joints. 7. NPS 12 (DN 200): Ductile-iron, Mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint

fittings; and mechanical joints.

F. Underground Fire-Service-Main Piping: Use the following:

1. NPS 4 to NPS 8 (DN 100 to DN 200): Ductile-iron, mechanical-joint pipe; ductile-iron, mechanical-joint fittings; and mechanical joints.

3.3 VALVE APPLICATIONS

A. General Application: Use mechanical joint-end valves for NPS 3 (DN 80) and larger underground installation. Use threaded or flanged-end valves for installation in vaults. Use




UL/FM, non-rising-stem gate valves for installation with indicator posts. Use corporation valves and curb valves with ends compatible with piping, for NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller installation.

B. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the

following requirements apply:

1. Underground Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast- iron, non-rising-stem, resilient seated gate valves with valve box.

2. Underground Valves, NPS 4 (DN 100) and Larger, for Indicator Posts: UL/FM, cast-iron, non-rising-stem gate valves with indicator post.

3. Use the following for valves in vaults and aboveground: a. Gate Valves, NPS 2 (DN 50) and Smaller: Bronze, non-rising stem. b. Gate Valves, NPS 3 (DN 80) and Larger: AWWA, cast iron, OS&Y rising stem,

resilient seated. c. Check Valves: AWWA C508, swing-check valves.

4. Water-Regulating Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground.

a. Pressure-Regulating Valves: To control water pressure. b. Flow-Regulating Valves: To control water flow.

5. Relief Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground.

a. Air-Release Valves: To release accumulated air. b. Air/Vacuum Valves: To release or admit large volume of air during filling of

piping. c. Combination Air Valves: To release or admit air.

6. Detector Check Valves: Use for water-service piping in vaults and aboveground to

detect unauthorized use of water.

3.4 JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Make pipe joints according to the following:

1. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Water-Service Piping: AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

2. Ductile-Iron Piping, Gasketed Joints for Fire-Service-Main Piping: UL 194. 3. Ductile-Iron Piping, Grooved Joints: Cut-groove pipe. Assemble joints with keyed

couplings, gaskets, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling manufacturer’s written instructions.

4. PVC Piping Gasketed Joints: Use joining materials according to AWWA C900. Construct joints with elastomeric seals and lubricant according to ASTM D 2774 or ASTM D 3139 and pipe manufacturer’s written instructions.




5. PE Piping Insert-Fitting Joints: Use plastic insert fittings and fasteners according to fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.

6. Dissimilar Materials Piping Joints: Use adapters compatible with both piping materials, with OD, and with system working pressure.

3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Water-Main Connection: Arrange with utility company for tap of size and in location indicated in water main.

B. Water-Main Connection: Tap water main according to requirements of water utility

company and of size and in location indicated.

C. Make connections larger than NPS 2 (DN 50) with tapping machine according to the following:

1. Install tapping sleeve and tapping valve according to MSS SP-60. 2. Install tapping sleeve on pipe to be tapped. Position flanged outlet for gate valve. 3. Use tapping machine compatible with valve and tapping sleeve; cut hole in main.

Remove tapping machine and connect water-service piping. 4. Install gate valve onto tapping sleeve. Comply with MSS SP-60. Install valve with

stem pointing up and with valve box.

D. Make connections NPS 2 (DN 50) and smaller with drilling machine according to the following:

1. Install service-saddle assemblies and corporation valves in size, quantity, and

arrangement required by utility company standards. 2. Install service-saddle assemblies on water-service pipe to be tapped. Position outlets

for corporation valves. 3. Use drilling machine compatible with service-saddle assemblies and corporation

valves. Drill hole in main. Remove drilling machine and connect water-service piping.

4. Install corporation valves into service-saddle assemblies. 5. Install manifold for multiple taps in water main. 6. Install curb valve in water-service piping with head pointing up and with service box.

E. Comply with NFPA 24 for fire-service-main piping materials and installation.

F. Install ductile-iron, water-service piping according to AWWA C600 and AWWA M41.

G. Install PVC, AWWA pipe according to AWWA M23 and ASTM F 645.

H. Install PE pipe according to ASTM D 2774 and ASTM F 645.

I. Bury piping with depth of cover over top at least 36 inches.




J. Install piping by tunneling, jacking, or combination of both, under streets and other obstructions that cannot be disturbed.

K. Install underground piping with restrained joints at horizontal and vertical changes in

direction. Use restrained-joint piping, thrust blocks, anchors, tie-rods and clamps, and other supports.

3.6 ANCHORAGE INSTALLATION

A. Install anchorages for tees, plugs and caps, bends, crosses, valves, and hydrant branches. Include anchorages for the following piping systems:

1. Gasketed-Joint, Ductile-Iron, Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA C600. 2. Gasketed-Joint, PVC Water-Service Piping: According to AWWA M23. 3. Fire-Service-Main Piping: According to NFPA 24.

B. Apply full coat of asphalt or other acceptable corrosion-resistant material to surfaces of

installed ferrous anchorage devices.

3.7 VALVE INSTALLATION

A. AWWA Gate Valves: Comply with AWWA C600 and AWWA M44. Install each underground valve with stem pointing up and with valve box.

B. UL/FM Gate Valves: Comply with NFPA 24. Install each underground valve and valves in

vaults with stem pointing up and with vertical cast-iron indicator post. C. Corporation Valves and Curb Valves: Install each underground curb valve with head

pointed up and with service box. D. Water-Regulating Valves: Install in vault or aboveground between shutoff valves. E. Relief Valves: Install aboveground with shutoff valve on inlet. F. Detector Check Valves: Install in vault or aboveground.

3.8 DETECTOR CHECK VALVE INSTALLATION

A. Install detector check valves for property direction of flow. Install bypass with water meter, gate valves on each side of meter, and check valve downstream from meter.

B. Support detector check valves, meters, shutoff valves, and piping on brick or concrete piers.




3.9 WATER METER INSTALLATION

A. Install water meters, piping, and specialties according to utility company’s written requirements.

3.10 BACKFLOW-PREVENTER INSTALLATION

A. Install backflow preventers of type, size, and capacity indicated. Include valves and test cocks. Install according to requirements of plumbing and health department and authorities having jurisdiction.

3.11 VAULT INSTALLATION

A. Install precast concrete vaults according to ASTM C 891. B. Connect drain outlet to storm drainage piping. Refer to Division 2 Section “Storm

Drainage.”

3.12 PROTECTIVE ENCLOSURE INSTALLATION

A. Install concrete base level with top approximately [2 inches] above grade.

B. Install protective enclosure over valves and equipment.

C. Anchor protective enclosure to concrete base.

3.13 FIRE HYDRANT INSTALLATION

A. General: Install each fire hydrant with separate gate valve in supply pipe, anchor with restrained joints or thrust blocks, and support in upright position.

B. Wet-Barrel Fire Hydrants: Install with valve below frost line. Provide for drainage. C. AWWA-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with AWWA M17.

D. UL/FM-Type Fire Hydrants: Comply with NFPA 24.

3.14 FIRE DEPARTMENT CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. Install fire department connections of types and features indicated. B. Install ball drip valves at each check valve for fire department connection to mains.




C. Install protective pipe 3 bollards on sides of each freestanding fire department connection.


A. Piping Tests: Conduct piping tests before joints are covered and after thrust blocks have hardened sufficiently. Fill pipeline 24 hours before testing and apply test pressure to stabilize system. Use only potable water.

B. Hydrostatic Tests: Test at not less than 1-1/2 times working pressure for 2 hours. Increase

pressure in 50-psig increments and inspect each joint between increments. Hold at test pressure for 1 hour; decrease to 0 psig. Slowly increase again to test pressure and hold for 1 more hour. Maximum allowable leakage is 2 quarts per hour per 100 joints. Remake leaking joints with new materials and repeat test until leakage is within allowed limits.

3.16 IDENTIFICATION

A. Install continuous underground detectable warning tape during backfilling of trench for underground water-service piping. Locate below finished grade, directly over piping. See Division 2 Section “Earthwork” for underground warning tapes.

3.17 CLEANING

A. Clean and disinfect water-distribution piping as follows:

1. Purge new water-distribution piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired before use.

2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in NFPA 24 for flushing of piping. Flush piping system with clean, potable water until dirty water does not appear at points of outlet.

3. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction or, if method is not prescribed by authorities having jurisdiction, use procedure described in AWWA C651 or as described below:

a. Fill system or part of system with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50

ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 24 hours. b. Drain system or part of system of previous solution and refill with water/chlorine

solution containing at least 200 ppm of chlorine; isolate and allow to stand for 3 hours.

c. After standing time, flush system with clean, potable water until no chlorine remains in water coming from system.

d. Submit water samples in sterile bottles to authorities having jurisdiction. Repeat procedure if biological examination shows evidence of contamination.



SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES 33 3000 - 1

SECTION 33 3000 – SANITARY SEWERAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL




A. Gravity-Flow, Non-pressure Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.


A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight. B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage. C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer’s written

rigging instructions.


A. Site Information: Perform site visit, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.

B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others

unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:



1. PVC Backwater Valves and Cleanouts:

a. IPS Corp. b. NDS, Inc.

2.2 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:

1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints.

a. Gaskets: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seals.

A. Inch riser with 4-inch minimum width flange, and 26-inch- diameter cover. Include indented

top design with lettering “SANITARY SEWER” cast into cover. B. Manhole Cover Inserts: Manufactured, plastic form, of size to fit between manhole frame

and cover and designed to prevent stormwater inflow. Include handle for removal and gasket for gastight sealing.

1. Type: Solid. 2. Type: With drainage and vent holes. 3. Type: With valve.

2.3 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious

materials ratio.

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 400), deformed steel.

2.4 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or



spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications:

1. Light Duty: In earth or grass foot-traffic areas. 2. Medium Duty: In paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Extra-Heavy Duty: In roads. 5. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil

pipe and fittings.

B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground sanitary sewerage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for using lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

C. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of

pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited. D. Install gravity-flow piping and connect to building’s sanitary drains, of sizes and in locations

indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 2 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install piping with 36-inch minimum cover.

3.3 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.



B. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:

1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. 2. Join profile sewer pipe fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321 and

manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Install according to ASTM D 2321.

C. Join piping made of different materials or dimensions with couplings made for this

application. Use couplings that are compatible with and that fit both systems’ materials and dimensions.

D. Install with top surfaces of components, except piping, flush with finished surface.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.

3.5 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12

inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding grade. C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.6 TAP CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.

B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section

of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches (150 mm) of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN100 to

DN500). Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

D. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN525) or larger, or to

underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches



of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

1. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi,

unless otherwise indicated. 2. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and

piping materials.

E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.7 CLOSING ABANDONED SANITARY SEWERAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch-thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other

acceptable methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure

below:

1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12

inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. 3. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”


A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

1. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 2. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if

required, by authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.



1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or

cylinder of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are

within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or

repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours’

advance notice. 4. Submit separate reports for each test. 5. If authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as

follows:

a. Sanitary Sewerage: Perform hydrostatic test.

1) Allowable leakage is maximum of 50 gal. per inch of nominal pipe size per mile of pipe, during 24-hour period.

2) Close openings in system and fill with water. 3) Purge air and refill with water. 4) Disconnect water supply. 5) Test and inspect joints for leaks. 6) Option: Test ductile-iron piping according to AWWA C600, Section

“Hydrostatic Testing.” Use test pressure of at least 10 psig. END OF SECTION 33 3000



STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES 33 4000 - 1

SECTION 33 4000 – STORM DRAINAGE UTILITIES

PART 1 - GENERAL



1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. PE: Polyethylene plastic.

B. PVC: Polyvinyl chloride plastic.


A. Gravity-Flow, Non-pressure Piping Pressure Ratings: At least equal to system test pressure.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following:

1. Polymer-concrete, channel drainage systems. 2. Plastic, channel drainage systems. 3. Backwater valves, cleanouts, and drains. 4. Stormwater disposal systems.


A. Do not store plastic structures, pipe, and fittings in direct sunlight.

B. Protect pipe, pipe fittings, and seals from dirt and damage.

C. Handle precast concrete manholes and other structures according to manufacturer’s written rigging instructions.


A. Site Information: Perform site visit, research public utility records, and verify existing utility locations.




B. Locate existing structures and piping to be closed and abandoned.

C. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Ductile-Iron Sewer Pipe: ASTM A 746, for push-on joints.

1. Standard-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C110, ductile or gray iron, for push-on joints.

2. Compact-Pattern, Ductile-Iron Fittings: AWWA C153, for push-on joints. 3. Gaskets: AWWA C111, rubber.

B. Corrugated PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, matching type and fittings to form

soiltight joints. 2. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket

material that mates with tube and fittings to form silttight joints.

C. Corrugated PE Pipe and Fittings: AASHTO M 294, Type S, with smooth waterway for coupling joints.

1. Soiltight Couplings: AASHTO M 294, corrugated, matching pipe and fittings to form

soiltight joints. 2. Silttight Couplings: PE sleeve with ASTM D 1056, Type 2, Class A, Grade 2 gasket

material that mates with pipe and fittings to form silttight joints.

D. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: According to the following:

1. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 15 (DN375) and Smaller: ASTM D 3034, SDR 35, for solvent-cemented or gasketed joints.


2. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings, NPS 18 (DN450) and Larger: ASTM F 679, T-1 wall

thickness, bell and spigot for gasketed joints.





2.2 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS AND FITTINGS

A. Sleeve-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric sleeve and band assembly fabricated to mate with OD of pipes to be joined, for non-pressure joints.

1. Sleeve Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. Sleeve Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. Sleeve Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 4. Sleeve Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined. 5. Bands: Stainless steel, at least one at each pipe insert.

B. Bushing-Type Pipe Couplings: ASTM C 1173, rubber or elastomeric bushing fabricated to

mate with OD of smaller pipe and ID of adjoining larger pipe, for non-pressure joints.

1. Material for Concrete Pipe: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 2. Material for Cast-Iron Soil Pipe: ASTM C 564, rubber. 3. Material for Plastic Pipe: ASTM F 477, elastomeric seal. 4. Material for Dissimilar Pipe: Compatible with pipe materials being joined.

2.3 CATCH BASINS

A Normal-Traffic, Precast Concrete Catch Basins: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), precast, reinforced concrete, of depth indicated, with provision for rubber gasketed joints. 1. Base Section: 6-inch minimum thickness for floor slab and 4-inch minimum thickness

for walls and base riser section, and having separate base slab or base section with integral floor.

2. Riser Sections: 4-inch minimum thickness, 48-inch diameter, and lengths to provide depth indicated.

3. Top Section: Eccentric-cone type, unless concentric-cone or flat-slab-top type is indicated. Top of cone of size that matches grade rings.

4. Gaskets: ASTM C 443 (ASTM C 443M), rubber. 5. Grade Rings: Include two or three reinforced concrete rings, of 6 to 9-inch total

thickness, that match 24-inch diameter frame and grate. 6. Steps: Fiberglass, individual steps or ladder. Include width that allows worker to place

both feet on one step and is designed to prevent lateral slippage off step. Cast steps or anchor ladder into base, riser, and top section sidewalls at 12 to 16-inch intervals. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches deep.

7. Steps: ASTM C 478 (ASTM C 478M), individual steps or ladder. Omit steps for catch basins less than 60 inches deep.

8. Pipe Connectors: ASTM C 923 (ASTM C 923M), resilient, of size required, for each pipe connecting to base section.




B. Frames and Grates: ASTM A 536, Grade 60-40-18, ductile iron designed for heavy-duty service. Include flat grate with small square or short slotted drainage openings.

1. Size: 24 by 24 inches minimum, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Grate Free Area: Approximately 50 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

2.4 CONCRETE

A. General: Cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318, ACI 350R, and the following:

1. Cement: ASTM C 150, Type II. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C 33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C 33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

B. Portland Cement Design Mix: 4000 psi minimum, with 0.45 maximum water-cementitious ratio.

1. Reinforcement Fabric: ASTM A 185, steel, welded wire fabric, plain. 2. Reinforcement Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed steel.

2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Gray-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, round, gray-iron housing with clamping device and round, secured, scoriated, gray-iron cover. Include gray-iron ferrule with inside calk or spigot connection and countersunk, tapered-thread, brass closure plug. Use units with top-loading classifications according to the following applications:

1. Light Duty: In earth or grass foot-traffic areas. 2. Medium Duty: In paved foot-traffic areas. 3. Heavy Duty: In vehicle-traffic service areas. 4. Extra-Heavy Duty: In roads. 5. Sewer Pipe Fitting and Riser to Cleanout: ASTM A 74, Service class, cast-iron soil pipe

and fittings.

B. PVC Cleanouts: PVC body with PVC threaded plug. Include PVC sewer pipe fitting and riser to cleanout of same material as sewer piping.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork.”




3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Materials and their installation are specified in Division 31 Section “Earthwork.” Arrange for installing green warning tapes directly over piping and at outside edges of underground structures.

1. Use warning tape or detectable warning tape over ferrous piping. 2. Use detectable warning tape over nonferrous piping and over edges of underground

structures.


A. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawing plans and details indicate general location and arrangement of underground storm drainage piping. Location and arrangement of piping layout take design considerations into account. Install piping as indicated, to extent practical.

B. Install piping beginning at low point, true to grades and alignment indicated with unbroken

continuity of invert. Place bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer’s written instructions for use of lubricants, cements, and other installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in line, and pull past each joint as it is completed.

C. Use manholes for changes in direction, unless fittings are indicated. Use fittings for branch

connections, unless direct tap into existing sewer is indicated.

D. Use proper size increasers, reducers, and couplings where different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings are connected. Reducing size of piping in direction of flow is prohibited.

E. Install gravity flow piping and connect to building’s storm drains, of sizes and in locations

indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

1. Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at minimum slope of 1 percent, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install piping with 24-inch minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Extend storm drainage piping and connect to building’s storm drains, of sizes and in locations indicated. Terminate piping as indicated.

G. Tunneling: Install pipe under streets or other obstructions that cannot be disturbed by

tunneling, jacking, or a combination of both.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION AND INSTALLATION

A. General: Join and install pipe and fittings according to installations indicated.




B. PE Pipe and Fittings: As follows:

1. Join pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for Soiltight joints according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

2. Install according to ASTM D 2321 and manufacturer’s written instructions. 3. Install corrugated piping according to the Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association’s

“Recommended Installation Practices for Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe and Fittings.”

C. PVC Sewer Pipe and Fittings: As follows:

1. Join pipe and gasketed fittings with gaskets according to ASTM D 2321. 2. Install according to ASTM D 2321.

3.5 CATCH BASIN INSTALLATION

A. Construct catch basins to sizes and shapes indicated.

B. Set frames and grates to elevations indicated.


A. Place cast-in-place concrete according to ACI 318 and ACI 350R.

3.7 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Install cleanouts and riser extension from sewer pipe to cleanout at grade. Use cast-iron soil pipe fittings in sewer pipes at branches for cleanouts and cast-iron soil pipe for riser extensions to cleanouts. Install piping so cleanouts open in direction of flow in sewer pipe.

B. Set cleanout frames and covers in earth in cast-in-place concrete block, 18 by 18 by 12

inches deep. Set with tops 1 inch above surrounding earth grade.

C. Set cleanout frames and covers in concrete pavement with tops flush with pavement surface.

3.8 TAP CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to existing piping and underground structures so finished Work complies as nearly as practical with requirements specified for new Work.

B. Use commercially manufactured wye fittings for piping branch connections. Remove section

of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase entire wye fitting, plus 6-inch overlap, with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

C. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 4 to NPS 20 (DN100 to

DN500). Remove section of existing pipe; install wye fitting into existing piping; and encase




entire wye with not less than 6 inches of concrete with 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi.

D. Make branch connections from side into existing piping, NPS 21 (DN525) or larger, or to

underground structures by cutting opening into existing unit large enough to allow 3 inches of concrete to be packed around entering connection. Cut end of connection pipe passing through pipe or structure wall to conform to shape of and be flush with inside wall, unless otherwise indicated. On outside of pipe or structure wall, encase entering connection in 6 inches of concrete for minimum length of 12 inches to provide additional support of collar from connection to undisturbed ground.

1. Use concrete that will attain minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi, unless

otherwise indicated. 2. Use epoxy-bonding compound as interface between new and existing concrete and

piping materials.

E. Protect existing piping and structures to prevent concrete or debris from entering while making tap connections. Remove debris or other extraneous material that may accumulate.

3.9 CLOSING ABANDONED STORM DRAINAGE SYSTEMS

A. Abandoned Piping: Close open ends of abandoned underground piping indicated to remain in place. Include closures strong enough to withstand hydrostatic and earth pressures that may result after ends of abandoned piping have been closed. Use either procedure below:

1. Close open ends of piping with at least 8-inch thick, brick masonry bulkheads. 2. Close open ends of piping with threaded metal caps, plastic plugs, or other acceptable

methods suitable for size and type of material being closed. Do not use wood plugs.

B. Abandoned Structures: Excavate around structure as required and use one procedure below:

1. Remove structure and close open ends of remaining piping. 2. Remove top of structure down to at least 36 inches below final grade. Fill to within 12

inches of top with stone, rubble, gravel, or compacted dirt. Fill to top with concrete. 3. Backfill to grade according to Division 2 Section “Earthwork.”


A. Clear interior of piping and structures of dirt and superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping, and pull past each joint as it is completed. 1. In large, accessible piping, brushes and brooms may be used for cleaning. 2. Place plug in end of incomplete piping at end of day and when work stops. 3. Flush piping between manholes and other structures to remove collected debris, if

required by authorities having jurisdiction.




B. Inspect interior of piping to determine whether line displacement or other damage has occurred. Inspect after approximately 24 inches of backfill is in place, and again at completion of Project.

1. Submit separate reports for each system inspection. 2. Defects requiring correction include the following:

a. Alignment: Less than full diameter of inside of pipe is visible between structures. b. Deflection: Flexible piping with deflection that prevents passage of ball or cylinder

of size not less than 92.5 percent of piping diameter. c. Crushed, broken, cracked, or otherwise damaged piping. d. Infiltration: Water leakage into piping. e. Exfiltration: Water leakage from or around piping.

3. Replace defective piping using new materials, and repeat inspections until defects are

within allowances specified. 4. Reinspect and repeat procedure until results are satisfactory.

C. Test new piping systems, and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or

repaired, for leaks and defects.

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into service before inspection and approval. 2. Test completed piping systems according to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Schedule tests and inspections by authorities having jurisdiction with at least 24 hours’

advance notice. 4. Submit separate reports for each test. 5. Where authorities having jurisdiction do not have published procedures, perform tests as

follows:

a. Force Main: Perform hydrostatic test after thrust blocks, supports, and anchors have hardened. Test at pressure not less than 1 and 1/2 times the maximum system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig.

1) Ductile-Iron Piping: Test according to AWWA C600, Section “Hydraulic

Testing.” 2) PVC Piping: Test according to AWWA M23, “Testing and Maintenance”

Chapter.

6. Leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 7. Replace leaking piping using new materials, and repeat testing until leakage is within

allowances specified. END OF SECTION 33 4000